Use of centralized lubrication

Multi line systems

Single line systems

Dual line systems

Progressive systems

Lube-air-mix lubrication

Special systems

Oil re-circulation systems

Micro-fog systems

Lubricating pumps for grease and oil

Special lubricators

Switches and valves

Distributors

Accessories

Special prints, Representations

1
Central Lubrication Systems for grease and oil
System/Diagrammatic view
Multi-line systems
Progressive systems
Single-line systems
Dual-line systems
Basic principle
Each lubrication points has its own line connecting it directly to the pump.
The lubrication pump develops the pressure necessary to pump the lubricant and
overcome the back pressure and it meters the quantity of lubricant required for
each lubrication point.
The lumricant pumped through any particular line can be delivered up between a
number of lubrication points iif required, by incorporating a progressive distributor.
Number of lubrication points ________ up to 36
Length of piping __________________ up to 40 m approx.
Pump pressure ___________________ up to 100 bar approx.
A lubrication pump pumps lubricant through a main feed line to the progressive
distributors connected to the line. These distributors have a number of plungers
which control one another so as to operate in a particular sequence. At each
plunger stroke a quantity of lubricant, depending on the swept volume, is
delivered to the lubrication point connected to it, or, in the case of the plungers in
the main distributor, to a secondary distributor. The lubrication operation is
stopped, either by switching off the pump, or by closing a valve in the line to the
distributotor.
Number of lubrication points ________ up to over 100
Length of piping __________________ up to 150 m approx.
Pump pressure ___________________ up to 400 bar approx.
A lubrication pump pumps lubricant into a main feed line, to which up to more
than 100 distributors can be connected by branch lines. The lubricant pressure
causes each plunger to execute a stroke and deliver to its lubrication point a
quantity of lubricant depending on the swept volume. When each lubrication point
has had one shot of lubricant, the main feed line is connected to the pump tank
either manually or automatically, and the pressure in it is released, whereupon the
spring-loaded plungers return to their position. The next lubrication cycle then
follows, usually after an interval.
Number of lubrication points ________ up to over 100
Length of piping __________________ up to 30 m approx.
Pump pressure ___________________ up to 150 bar approx.
The delivery side of a lubrication pump and the lubricant tank for the pump are
connected alternately, via a change-over device (a 4/2-way valve) to each of the
main feed lines. As many main distributors as required can be connected to the
two main feed lines. The lubricant pressure causes half the lubrication points
conected to the distributors to be supplied with a quantity of lubricant depending
on the volume swept by the plunger. The change-over operation is then initiated
either manually or automatically; this causes the main feed line which had been
under pressure to be connected to the pump tand and the previously unpressuri-
sed main feed line to be connected to the pump delivery, whereupon lubricant is
supplied to the other half of the lubrication points. There then generally follows an
interval in the lubrication process.
Number of lubrication points ________ up to over 1000
Length of piping __________________ up to 150 m approx.
Pump pressure ___________________ up to 400 bar approx.

For further detailed informations about the various methods of central lubrication, please ask for the following
publications:
Single-line systems : X 20 P1e
Dual-line systems : X 30 P1e
Multiline systems : X 10 P1e
Progressive systems : X 35 P1e and X 35 P3e.

X 01 P 3 e / 3 0799HF
Replacement for X 01 P 3e / 2 0797HF
 Use in general, Advantages, Disadvantages Applications
For the central lubrication of individual machine and small groupe of machines and Presses, punching
pieces of equipment. presses, cutters,
Advantages: excavators, cranes, lifts,
In many cases it is possible to drive from the machine to be lubricated, which conveyors, machine
enables a separate control system to be dispensed with. With most types of pumps, tools, packing machinery,
metering of the quantity at the pump separately for each lubrication point. pumps, blowers, turbines,
Continuous operation of the pump with very small quantities of lubricant. building construction
Disadvantages: machinery, rock crushers,
Capable of extension only to a limited extent (by means of progressive distributors). briquetting presses, coke
When the distances of the lubrication points from the pump are great, the large crushers, woodworking
number of lubrication lines may sometimes get in the way. machinery, etc.

For small and medium-sized machine installations: also for large installation under
certain conditions.
Advantages:
Low investment costs, since only one main feed line, a simple pressure and
relatively distributors are required. A number of lubricant groups with progressive
Machine tools, packing
distributors can be connection to a single pump if isolating valves are used, and
machinery, presses,
they can then be connected to the system or isolated individually.
punching presses,
Simple monitoring of operation by means of a movement indicator on the
cutters, woodworking
distributors, or remote monitoring.
machinery, etc.
Distributors of small dimensions.
Disadvantages:
The quantities delivered to the lubrication points and the number of lubrication
points connected to the system are relatively difficult to vary and then only by
making compromises.

For small and medium-size machine installation having a low lubricant

requirement.
Advantages: Presses, punching
presses, cutters, bottle
Low outlay on piping. The system can be extended or modified.
cleaning machines,
The metered quantities can be varied by changing the metering screws in the distri-
calenders, tyre heaters,
butors.
packing machinery,
Disadvantages: machine tools, etc.
Relieving the pressure takes a long time when there is high resistance in the pipes
(e.g. during winter, long feed lines, small cross-sections, stiff grease).

For medium-sized and large machine installation with up to 1000 lubrication points
or more, and often with long lenghts of piping (up to about 150 m) and large
lubricant requirements.
Advantages:
Reliable lubrication even in large installations. UIn contrast to single-line systems,
time for relieving the pressure is required. The quantities deklivered to each
Metallurgical plants,
lubrication point, can be adjusted over the whole range almost as required, by
rolling mills, mining
means of the adjusting screw on the distributor.
power stations, cement
Simple monitoring of operation by means of the movement indicators on the
works, brickworks,
distributors (one for each 2 outlets), or remote monitoring. The system can be
sugar refineries,
extended or modified as required, at any time.
breweries, etc.
No delivery of lubricant during the lubrication intervals. Fully automatic operation
with adjustable lubrication intervals.
Disadvantages:
Because of the two main feed lines and the ZV type distributors which are more
expensive than progressive distributors, the capital cost per lubrication points is
higher.

2
 Lubricant metering
by the pump:
TB-D 0,5 cm³ per delivery stroke of the
plunger, not adjustable.
FZ-A from almost zero up to 0,1 cm³ per
delivery stroke, adjustable be
means of an adjusting screw. The
quantity of lubricant delivered per
cycle can be increased, with simul-
taneous reduction in the number of
outlets, by connecting outlets toget-
her in the pump casing.
ZP 3000 - 6000
from 0 up to 0,2 cm³ and/or 0,6 cm³
per of the control plunger,adjustable
by means of an adjusting screw.
by 1 distributor element for each
2 lubrication points:
ZP-A 0,07, 0,1, 0,2, 0,3 cm³ per cycle and
per lubrication point.
ZP-B 0,5; 1,2 and 2,0 cm³ per cycle and
lubrication point in any combination.
E4 0,4 cm³ per cycle and lubrication
point.
PVB 0,17 cm³ per cycle and lubrication
point.
Not adjustable.
The quantity of lubricant delevered by cycle
can be increased with simultaneous reduc-
tion in the number of outlets, by connecting
outlets together within the distributor.
by one distributor per lubrication point.
Adjustment of the amount delevered by
alternating the stroke of the plunger by
means of interchangeable metering screws.
Sizes available:
0,1; 0,2; 0,4; 0,6; 1,0 cm³ per lubrication
operation. It is not possible to connect out-
lets within the distributors.
by 1 distributor for each 2, 4, 6 or 8 and 10
lubrication points.
ZV-B up to 0,5 and/or 1,5 cm³ per
lubrication operation
ZV-C up to 1,5 cm³ per lubrication
operation
VZ und VM
up to 2,0 cm³
The metered quantity can be adjusted from
almost zero up to the maximum by means
of adjustment screws on the distributors.
The quantity of lubricant delivered per cycle
can be increased, with simultaneous reduc-
tion of the number of outlets, by connecting
outlets together within the distributor.
Modes of operation, Lubricant point monitoring
1. with a handoperated pump, operated as required
2. with a pneumatically or hydraulically operated pump.
3. with a pump driven by an electric motor, switched on and off
jointly with the machine being lubricated, or via a time relay.
4. driven from the machine being lubricated (frequently via an
excentric and connecting rods).
Lubricant point monitoring
with the aid of flow indicators or progressive distributors.
1. with a hand-operated or pneumatically operated pump.
2. with a motor-driven pump. The whole installation is once by
pressing a push-button or by switching on the machine to be
lubricated.
3. with a time relay intervals between lubrication. When the
preset time has elapsed a new lubrication cycle starts.
4. with time relays for setting lubrication periods and intervals.
Lubrication point monitoring
1. with flow indicators immediately before the lubrication points.
2. one movement indicator for all the lubrication points
connected to a distributor.
3. Remote monitoring by means of a movement indicator and
limit switch in conjunction with electrical control.
1. with a hand-operated pump
2. with a motor-driven pump. Pressing a push-butto lubricantes
the whole installation once.
3. with time relays for intervals, in the lubrication. When the
preset time has elapsed a new lubrication cycle starts.
Lubrication point monitoring
1. with flow indicators immediately before the lubrication points.
2. by means of switch-gear in conjunction with electrical control.
1. with a hand-operated pump for less than 100 lubrication
points and distances up to 40 m.
2. with a motor-driven pump. Pressing a push-butto lubricates
the whole installation once.
3. with time relays for intervals in the lubrication. When the preset
time has elapsed, a new lubrication cycle starts.
Lubrication point monitoring
1. with flow indicators immediately before the lubrication points.
2. by means of switch-gear at the end of the line, in conjunction
with electrical control.
3
2
Multi-line systems
for grease (also suitable for oil)

APPLICATION
Using the multi-line system, centralised lubrication sy-
stems can be used for lubricating individual machines and
small groups of machines or appliances. In the multi-line sy-
stem, the lubricant is delivered by the pump in metered
quantities through several outlets. Each lubrication point is
connected to the pump by its own line.

1. Maximum number of lubrication points

The design of the lubrication pumps, limits the maximum
number of lubrication points which can be supplied by direct
line 32.
A further increase in the number of lubrication points is pos-
sible if progressive distributors are used (see page 2).

2. Maximum length of line

The maximum permissible length of line from the pump
to any lubrication point depents on the characteristics and
pumpability of the grease, the size of the feed line, the deli-
very pressure of the pump, the rate of flow and the operating
temperature, and as a rule from 20 to 40 m is acceptable. If
the lines are too long, the line resistance will exceed the
pump pressure.
3. Pumps
For lubrication by the multi-line system, three types of
pump in various sizes are available.
3.1 Pumps type TB - D . . .
are single plunger pumps operated by hand lever or pneu-
matically. In the hand-lever type, pulling the lever raises the
plunger and forces the grease into all lines. Fresh grease is
drawn in by the plunger during the return stroke.
The pneumatically-operated pumps type TD - D have a
compressed air cylinder flange-mounted to the pump. Ac-
tuation is via a push-button or limit switch on the machine to
be lubricated or by timer energizing a solenoid valve in the
compressed air line.
To avoid caving in of the gease the reservoir is equipped
with a floating disc. Similar lubrication pumps for oil are de-
signated type TA - D
Fig. 1 Multi-line system
3.2 Pumps type FZ - A . . .
are driven either by the machine to be lubricated or by an
electric motor. They employ a positively - controlled diffe-
rential piston. The pump has up to 12 outlets. Delivery is va-
riable by adjusting the plunger stroke via an adjusting spind-
le.
The grease reservoir of type FZ - is fitted with agitators to
scrape the grease from the reservoir walls and to avoid ca-
ving-in of the grease.
Pumps type FZ - are also suitable for use as oil pumps.
3.3 Pumps type ZP 3000 - 6000 . . .
in various design versions are used for direct lubrication in
multi-line systems (one delivery element per lubricating
point). The central lubrication pumps can be supplied with 1
pumping unit with a maximum of 8 feed-line connections
and/or 16 feed-line connections.
4. Drive
Pumps type FZ - are available at choice for oscillating
lever drive, for rotary drive with or without reduction gearing
and with flanged motor.
Drive of central lubrication pumps ZP 3000 - 6000 is ef-
fected by means of electromotor with step-down gearing.

X 10 P 1e / 4 0699HF
replacemend for X 10 P1e/ 3nd 0696
5. Progressive distributors
The number of lubrication points which can be supplied
by one pump can be increased by the use of progressive dis-
tributors E 4. The E 4 distributors are available with two, three
or four outlets. By using the distributor, lubricant delivered
from the pump is fed to the lubrication points connected to
the distributor in sequence, so that each lubrication point re-
ceives only a half, aquarter, and so on, of the quantity of the
lubricant delivered by the pump into the corresponding feed
line. Each outlet of the divider receives 0.4 cm3 per stroke.
Outlet branches enable any two of the four connecctions
to be combined into one outlet, so that the lubrication point
connected to this outlet receives double the lubricant to the
remaining lubrication points connected to the distributor.

Fig. 3 Spray system

Fig. 2 Multi-line system with progressive distributors

The compressed air necessary for spraying is purified by
an air filter (1), regulated by an air regulator (2) and passed
to the spray nozzles (4) via a solenoid valve (3).
6. Automatic operation
Multi-line systems are operated for the most part with
small delivery quantities in continuous service. In many cases
this is done by driving the pump through a moving part of the
machine to be lubricated, either by oscillating lever, coup-
ling or chain. This has the advantage that the pump only
works when the machine to be lubricated is in motion.
In the case where a motor-driven pump is required to de-
liver only when the machine to be lubricated is in operation,
the motor contactor of the pump should be wired downstre-
am of the contactor of the lubricated machine.
An electrical timer enables variable operating times up
to 1 hour and intervals up to 6 hours to be preset. This adapts
the lubricating cycle to operating conditions.

Fig. 4 Pump type TB - D in a combined application for

7. Spray lubrication bearing and spray lubrication
Multi-line systems are also suitable, under certain condi-
tions, for spraying gears, slides and similar applications
where larger areas are to be lubricated.
Bearings, as well, with the help of a spray system, as ge-
ars or other exposed areas can be simultaneously lubricated
by one pump. In practice however, it is often decided to use
different lubricants for bearings and gears, so that in these
cases separate lubrication systems are required.
The pneumatically-operated pumps type TB - D are especial-
ly economical for spray systems (Fig. 4).

2
8. Pumps type view
Type Number usable max. max. Drive Power Outlet Adjustment
of reservoir delivery delivery required size delivery
outlets capacity pressure volume volume
per
l bar outlet kW

1 up to 8 0.25 125 for each manual —

0.65 lever thread hole The
actuation LL 6 W delivery volume
TB - D
or pneumatic DIN 3854 is not
max.
1.61 pulse for 6 mm pipe adjustable
1 up to 9 100 pneumatic air pressure
4.01 0.5 cm3
5 bar

FZ - A 1 up to 12 Quantity
adjustable
by oscillating individually
lever or for 1 up to
driveshaft 6 outlets
2.5 0.1 cm3/ G 1/4
(from the and with 7 up
6,5 — per stroke 0.18 female thread
lubricated to 12 outlets
FZ - B 1 or 2 10,5 36 cm3/h cylinder
machine) for each
or electric 2 outlets
motor placed
vertically over
each other

ZP
3000 1 to 8 2, 3, 5 0.12 M 12 x 1.5
4000 1 to 8 5, 10 0.18 M 14 x 1.5 The rate of deli-
0 ...0.2ccm/
160 electromotor very can be set
5000 1 to 16 5, 10, 20 per stroke 0.18 M 14 x 1.5 infinitely.
6000 1 to 16 10, 20, 30 0.25 M 14 x 1.5

TB - D manual pneumatic FZ - A, FZ - B

Details see printlets:

Pump TB - D: 21153 P 1e Pump ZP 4000: 4000/M BA1
Pump FZ - A/B: 21112 P 2e Pump ZP 5000: 21134 BA 3
Pump ZP 3000: 3000/M BA1 Pump ZP 6000: 6000/M BA1

3
Multi - line system for oil
ADVANTAGES
When open circuit oil lubrication is carried out by the
multi - system - in contact to recirculation - system lubri-
cation which employs relatively large quantitties - a com-
paratively small quantly of oil is delivered to each lubrica-
tion point at short intervals. Every lubrication point is
provided with its own feed line.
Up to 40 points can be supplied with oil from one pump,
according to type. This system is recommended for those
applications where either the machine requires a contant
supply of very small quantities of oil, or the environement or
work call for the least possible supply of oil to the lubrication
points.

APPLICATIONS
Steam and internal combustion engines, pumps,
compressors, preparation and processing machines in
the food, textile, rubber and plastic industries, etc.

PUMP TYPE D II
The pump type D II is a multi-plunger pump with up
twenty, or, if necessary, up to forty outlets. The delivery
quantity can be adjusted separately for each outlet bet-
ween 0 and maximum. In the case of pumps with more
than twenty outlets, each pair of 2 outlets is adjusted si-
multaneously.
All pumps are equipped with a reservoir with oil level
indicator which can at choice be replenished either by
hand or via side connection, from a header tank. The
pumps can be driven either by oscillating lever, by coup-
ling to the free shaft end or by flanged motor.
PUMP TYPE TA - D
Pump types TA - D are supplied as single - plunger
pumps actuated by hand lever or pneumatically, with oil
reservoir and up to 9 outlets. The fixed delivery per stroke
amounts to 0.5 cm3 per outlet.
In the manual version the plunger is displaced axially
by pulling the lever, forcing the oil into all lubrication lines
in turn. During the return stroke the plunger draws is fresh
oil. The total quantity of 8 x 0.5 = 4.0 cm3 can be drawn off
through a further outlet, if required. The pump is also suit-
ables for single - line and progressive systems. Pressure
relief of single - line systems can be acieved automatically
using a separate connection.
With the pneumatically operated pump type TA - D,
the plunger is actuated by a compressed air cylinder flan-
ged to the pump and pressure is controlled via a separa-
tely mounted solenoid valve. The lubricating cycle is initia-
ted by depressing a push - button or by a limit switch on
the machine to be lubricated. There is also the possibility
of controlling lubrication by means of a timer.
The total output volume of 9 x 0.5 = 4.5 cm3 can be ta-
ken from another outlet, if required. The pump can also be
used for single-line systems and progressive systems.
The discharge of connected single-line systems can be
effected automatically via a particular connection.
Similar pumps are also available for grease under the
designation TB - D.

X 10 P 2 e / 2 0696HF
replacement for X 10 P 2 e
 TECHNICAL DATA

Type Number usable max. max. Drive Speed Connected Adjust-

Code no. of reservoir delivery delivery threads ment
outlets capacity pressure volume outlets delivery
per outlet volume
l bar

single switch
mechanism 15 min-1
single elements at
elements 100 0,2 cm3 per oscillate
100 bar
1 up to 20 at 15 min-1 delivery stroke gearbox and infinitely
and outlet variable
D II free shaft end 30 min-1 female
50 between
4.0 at thread
at 30 min-1 double nearly zero
23111-.... 30 bar G 1/4
elements and
double 10 maximum
0,15 cm3 per gearbox and 50 min-1
elements at 50 min-1 delivery flanged motor at
2 up to 40
stroke 10 bar
and outlet

0.25 or per lever not

1 up to 8 25
0.65 operated hand- adjustable
hand- hand-
TA - D hand- and/or operated female
operated operated
operated compressed — thread
21153-.... 1 up to 9 1.6 or 4 100 air stroke M 10 x 1
0.5 cm3 pneumatic
pneumatic pneumatic pneumatic
per outlet operated
operated operated operated

Details see printlets

Pump type D II: 23111 P 1e
Pump type TA-D: 21153 P 1e

D II TA - D

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
3
Single - line Central Lubrication System
for grease (or high viscosity oils)

APPLICATION EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION

Single-line central lubrication systems are used mainly General mechanical engineering, bottle cleaning
for the lubrication of machinery with up to 100 lubrication machinery, calanders, plate conveyors, presses, type
points. moulds, packaging machinery, machine tools, brickworks
machinery, e.g.e.

1. Motor driven pump with

1 reservoir and agitator
2. Grease filter
3. Pressure gauge
4. Pressure relief valve
5. 3/2-way change-over valve
6. Control cabinet
7. Lubrication point
8. Line to lubrication point
9. Distributor
10. Main line
11. Pressure switch
12. Pressure release line

Fig. 1
Example of a single-line central lubrication system for grease with motor driven pump

MODE OF OPERATION

The central lubrication pump feeds the lubricant into a
main distribution line which runs alongside the machines.
Branches lead to distributors of type ZE - C mounted sing-
ly or in groups in the vicinity of the lubrication points. Their
function is accurately to meter the lubricant and to deliver it to
the lines leading to the lubrication points, even against high
back-pressures.
During one lubrication cycle the main line is pressurised,
where upon metering of the lubricant to the lubrication points
takes place. The pressure in the main line is then released into
the suction chamber of the pump, causing the lubricant in the
distributors to be supplied to the other side of the plunger, in
readiness for the next cycle.

X 20 P 1 e / 2 0296HF
replacement for X20P1e/1 0975
 OUTSTANDING FEATURES
• The metered quantity can be adapted to the requirement
at the lubrication point by changing the metering screw in
each distributor segment.
• The system can be extended subsequently by con-
necting additional distributors, or may be reduced by
disconnecting distributors.
• During the intervals between lubricating cycles the pres-
sure in the main line is released so that the lubricant led
into the districutors is supplied to the other side of the
plunger for the next lubrication cycle. This also ensures
that no lubricant reaches the lubrication points during the
interval in an uncontrolled manner.
• The quantity of lubricant delivered to the lubrication
points is to a large extent independent of the
back-pressure.
• Systems with motor-driven pumps can be operated fully
automatically with variable intervals between lubrication
cycles.
• In comparison with central lubrication systems using oil,
grease systems have the following advantages:
• Grease adheres better to the sliding surfaces and is
therefore not so easily forced out of the lubrication
gap, event at high bearing pressures.
• Grease forms a reserve in the lubrication connections
and the lubrication pockets.
• Grease stands up better to heavy and intermittent
loads.
• The grease forced out of the bearing forms a collar of
grease which protects the bearing from the ingress of
dirt and dust.
2
PUMPS
VB-B (for grease and VB-A (for oil)
Plunger pumps operated by hand lever with built-in pressure
relief valve and indication of the maximum pressure by a
cylindrical pin projecting from the pump case. The pressu-
re in the main line is released by pivoting the hand lever into
the position R.
TB-D (for grease) and TA-D (for oil)
These pumps are available at choice for hand lever operation
or pneumatic drive. Pressure relief is effected through an
additional 3/2-way valve.
VM-F
Motorised pump with built-on hydraulic reversing valve
(SA-K) or without reversing unit for large single-line systems,
which require a separately-located reversing valve, such as
the following units are available at choice:
SA - K (hydraulic),
SA - E (pneumatic)
SA - V (electrc)
or solenoid valves resp. for electric-magnetically-controlled
single-line oil lubrication systems.
LUBRICANTS
In selecting the grease, it should be borne in mind that
during the interval between two lubrication cycles (pressure
release period), the pressure at the end of the line must drop
to about 20 bar.
As a general guide it can be stated that for systems wor-
king at ambient temperature with a length of line up to 15 m
between the pump and the most distant group of distributors
and with a suitable interval diameter for the main line, soft
greases with NLGI-class 000 to 1 give sufficiently short pres-
sure relief times.
Under more favorable operating conditions, e.g. with
shorter lines, stiffer greases having lower walk penetrations
NLGI-class 2 will also give adequate pressure relief times.
If, for operational reasons, greases having different
characteristics have to be used, or if operating conditions are
difficult and particularly if low temperatures occur, we re-
commend that the suitability of the grease should be deter-
mined by measuring the pressure release time under the
particular operating conditions. Instructions for testing the
pressure release characteristics of lubricant greases vide
DIN 51816 page 2 flow behaviour of lubricant grease.
The system can also be used for very viscous oils, if they
are not able to be pumped by the cheaper single-line system
for oils.
Table 1 Pumps

Type Drive Reser- Permissibly Quantity Pipe Reversing For further

voir back delivered connection system details

Code no. capacity pressure see

l bar printlet

VB - B
(for grease)
21531-4511 manually
VB - A operated 1.00
(for oil) 2 cm3 through
21531-4111 per G 1/4 spec.
120 21531 P1e
VB - B double inled hand-lever
1.60
21531-4521 stroke position
manually
operated
21531-4531 4.00

TB - D 0.25
(for grease) 0.65
21153-4000 manually 1.60 hand hand threaded
or 125 4,0 cm3 bore LL 6W through
21153 P2e
pneu- pneum. pneum. DIN 3854 additional
TA - D matically 100 4,5 cm3 (M 10 x 1) 3/2-way valve
(for oil) operated 4.0o
21153-9000
VM - F Flanged
22223-2100 motor fitted with
free mech. hydr.
22223-2200 shaft 3,6 l/h reverser
stud at G 3/8
10.00 150 22223 P2e
VM - F Flanged n = 1400 inled separate
22223-2100 motor r.p.m. 4/2-way valve
SA-V (electr.)
free or
22223-2200 shaft 3/2-way valve
stud SA-E (pneum.)

3
 EXAMPLES of single-line central lubrication system

... with manually operated pump VB-B

for machines which have to be lubricated at fairly long inter-
vals only and where the operator can be relied upon to initiate
and monitor the lubrication operation. The pressure switch at
the end of the line may be added to operate a pilot light which
indicates that the pressure at the end of the lines reaches 80
bar as an indication that all the lubrication points have re-
ceived lubricant. A second pilot light indicates that the pres-
sure has dropped to 20 bar at the end of the line.

... with pneumatically operated pump TB-D and

pneumatically operated 3/2-way valve SA-E
for machinery having a compressed air supply and for which
the quantity of lubricant required per lubrication cycle ex-
ceeds 3 cm3. While the system is not being actuated, the
pressure in its main line is released via the 3/2-way valve and
the pump filling connection. After the preset time relay has
elapsed, the solenoid valve is operated and the 3/2-way valve
SA-E is turned to the pressure position. The pump drive is
now actuated via an oscillator until the pressure switch at the
end of the line signals that the pressure in the main line has ri-
sen to 80 bar. This signal rises the time relay to zero. The inter-
val starts once the 3/2-way valve SA-E is turned to the
pressure release position.

... with pump VM-F driven by electric motor

with a hydraulic-mechanical change-over valve fitted to the
pump. The system is suitable for a maximum of 100 lubrica-
tion points. It is automatically switched on by a time relay and
is switched off by the elctrical limit switch fitted to the
change-over valve when the pressure at the pump delivery
connection reaches 150 bar approx. At the same time the
pressure in the main line is released. For the electrical control
system only a single time relay is required. If necessary an
extra lubrication cycle can be initiated by hand and moni-
toring of the pressure release is effected by a pressure switch
at the end of the line and by the control cabinet.

... with pump VM-F driven by electric motor,

separate motor driven 4/2-way change-over valve SA-V and
pressure switch at end of the line. The pump ist switched on
by a time relay fitted in the control cabinet. At the same time
the 4/2-way valve connects the pump to the main line. As
soon as the pressure switch at the end of the line signals that
the pressure has risen to 80 bar the 4/2-way valve switches
over and the main line is connected to the pumps suction side
and, at the same time, the pump is switched off. If necessary
the pressure change is monitored by an extra time relay and a
fault signal if the pressure in the main line has not dropped to
20 bar by the time the period set by the relay has elapsed.
The system is suitable for a max. of 100 lubricantion points.

4
 EXAMPLES of single-line central lubrication system (to be continue)

... with pump VM-F driven by electric motor,

separate pneumatically operated 3/2-way change-over val-
ve SA-E and pressure switch at end of the line.
This system is similar to version 4, but a pneumatically opera-
ted change-over valve is used, which has an additional
pressure regulating function and is controlled by a 3/2-way
solenoid valve.
Pneumatic pressure, 1.5 bar approx.

... for machinery or equipment which is fitted a

hydraulic system.
During each pressure rise in the hydraulic system, pressure is
applied to a grease-filled hydraulic cylinder which forces the
grease into the main line and into the distributors connected
to it. When pressure is fully released from the hydraulic
system, it is also released in the main line. If complete release
of pressure is not possible an extra 3/2-way valve must be
provided in the interconnecting line. The system is particularly
favorably priced. If necessary, progressive distributors can
be connected to the outlet of the single-line distributor to
reduce the amount of lubricant to be delivered.
If a lubrication cycle is to be initiated only after a certain
number of hydraulic pulses, a pulse counter and an appro-
priate hydraulic valve must be connected in the input to the
system.

DISTRIBUTORS
(For details see printlet 35630 P 1e)

The funtion of the distributors is to deliver the lubri-

cant in quantities accurately metered regardless of the
back-pressure, into the lines leading to the lubrication points.
In single-line systems for greases, distributors of type
ZE-C are used.
Distributors are available with one, two or three outlets.
The metered quantity is delivered during the pressure stroke
and can be set separately for each outlet by fitting the
corresponding feed screw. Feed screws are available for 0.1;
0.2; 0.4; 0.6 and 1 cm3.

5
 CHANGE - OVER VALVES for grease and oil

The function of change-over valves is to pressurise the
main line and release the pressure alternately. During the
pressure stroke the lubricant is delivered through the distribu-
tors to the lubrication points, whilst during the pressure relea-
se stroke the lubricant in the distributors moves from under-
neath the plungers to above them.
For use in single-line central lubrication system, the op-
tion of 3/2-way valves or 4/2-way valve is available.
4/2-way valve, type SA-V, with two through-flow
positions
Driven by geared motor. The motor generated a high torque
which moves the plunger spool from one setting to the ot-
her in less than 0.5 s even with tacky grease and at low
temperatures.
When used in a single-line system, one outlet is closed by a
plug.

3/2-way-valve, type SA-E

Valve types : for operation by a pneumatic pressure of 2 - 3 bar approx.
(1/100 of the pressure arising in the system).
Hand-operated 4/2-way valve For pilot control, 3/2-way valves of nom. diam 2 or larger,
incorporated in pumps of type VB-B operated electromagnetically or pneumatically are used.
Hydraulic-mechanical change-over valve SA-K
Electromagnetically operated way valves
are suitable only for oil. Supplied to order.

Table 2 Change-over and stop valves for grease and oil

Symbol Designation Drive max. Code no. Printlet
pressure

4/2-way valve SA-K

hydraulic 250 bar 34135 - 1111 34135 PB 2
hydraulic operated

4/2-way valve SA-V electric

400 bar 34133 - 1311 34133 PB 2
electric operated 220 V, 50 - 60 Hz

3/2-way valve SA-E

pneumatic 400 bar 38141 - 1111 38141 PB 1
pneumatically operated

Table 3 Pilot control valve for 3/2-way valve SA-E and pump TB-D
Symbol Designation Size Protection Voltage Code no.
class

3/2-way valve electrically 24 V, DC 38152 - 1423

DN 2.4 IP 65
operated with 220 V, 50 Hz 38152 - 1413
spring return

6
 Equipment for pressure monitoring, control and pressure limitation

Pressure gauges and pressure switches Pressure limitation

In manually operated systems, a pressure gauge should
be provided in the line to monitor the pressure change (Code
no. 75111-5274).
In automatic system two pressure switches should be
provided at the inlets to the last two distributors. The pressure
switches serve to control the automatic system and monitor
the pressure change. A contact in one pressure switch closes
when the pressure in the main line reaches 20 bar. A contact
in the second pressure switch closes when the pressure in
the main line = 80 bar.
Whereas pneumatically operated pumps automatically
stop if no lubricant is taken from them,.electrically driven
pumps must be protected against over pressure by a pressu-
re relief valve. The pump of type VM-F has a built-in pressure
relief valve. With pumps without their own overpressure pro-
tection, a pressure relief valve should be provided between
the pressure line and the pressure release line.
The manually operated pumps of types VB-B and VB-A also
have built-in pressure relief valves.

In manually operated systems, the state of the pressure

switch can be indicated by means of two signal lamps moun-
ted near the pump.

Table 4
Symbol Designation Range of Voltage Code no. Printlet
adjustment

15 to 150 bar 34241 - 1223

Dimensions sheet
Pressure switch max. 250 V
34241-1200 M1.1
25 to 250 bar 34241 - 1233

Pressure relief
0 to 400 bar 38131 - 2111 38131/32 PB 2
valve SA - G

7
4
Dual Line System for grease and oil
USE
Centralised lubrication systems with two main feed lines
are chiefly used for the lubrication of machines and plant with
a large numbers of lubrication points (up to over 1,000).
APPLICATIONS
Smelting plant, rolling mills, mining power stations,
cement works, sugar refineries, breweries, construction
machinery, etc.

Fig. 1 Dual line centralised lubrication system

CONFIGURATION
The lubrication system consists principally of the pump (1), one 4/2-way or two 3/2-way change-over valves (4), the two
main feed lines (5), the distributors (3) arranged close to the lubrication points, the lines leading to the lubrication points (2),
switchgear (6) at the line end, the pressure gauge unit (7) and the controls. A pressure relief valve (8) is required to protect the
pump from over pressure (see also Figs. 8 and 9).

ADVANTAGES
• Metering can be adjusted to meet the requirements of the individual lubrication points
by selection of the appropriate distributor size
by varying the metering setting
by varying the interval
• The metered quantity is independent of back pressure.
• The systems can at any time be extended by connection of additional distributors, or reduced by shutting down distributors
or outlets.
• By using two 3/2-way change-over valves, both main feed lines can be pressure relieved during the interval, even in
multi-line systems; lower pump pressure is therefore required in comparison to systems with lines under pressure during
the interval.
• Special monitoring of critical lubrication points is made possible for each pair of distributor outlets using limit switches.
• The system can be operated fully automatically with variable intervals.
• Up to over 1,000 lubrication points at a distance of 100 metres can be lubricated, depending on the type of pump
and lubricant.
• In all automatic systems, the patented switchgear SG - A, which initiates change-over, that is, the pressure change in the
two main feed lines, as a function of the differential pressure at the line end, is used. Depending on temperature, lubricant
and line dimensions, the optimum working pressure is adjusted automatically and there are, in comparison to systems
where the switchgear is provided on the pump, the following advantages:
• Pump load kept to a minimum.
• Event at low temperature, which causes a slow pressure build-up (pipe friction), delivery of the correct quantity
of lubricant is ensured by the switchgear SG - A being installed at the line end.
• Additional monitoring of the main feed lines by means of the switchgear.

X 30 P 1 e / 2 1194 1000HF
Replacement for X 30 P 1e / 1 06/75
 LUBRICATION PUMPS
Manual pumps
If the lubrication points of a machine require to be lubrica-
ted only after an extended interval, or a low price stand-by
pump is required for medium size systems, then the manual
pump type VB - B is recommended. The hand lever on the
pump is moved backwards and forwards until and indicator
pin is pushed out of the housing, indicating the end of the
present pressure cycle. Simultaneously, an overflow valve is
opened. The connections between the two main feed lines on
the one hand, and the suction and pressure connection of the
pump on the other are changed-over by a manual 4/2-way
valve, that the second pressure cycle can be carried out by
repeated forward and backward movements of the hand
lever.
Electrical-operated pumps
For Dual Line Systems, various motor pumps may be
used within the required pressure and delivery range (see ta-
ble below).
Pneumatically-operated barrel pumps
Pneumatically-operated barrel pump have, by contrast to
other types of pump, the advantage that they can be fitted to
200 litre standard barrels and at the same time protect the
contents from contamination since the lid remains in place.
When the barrel is empty, the barrel pump is, depending
on its size and weight, raised by hand, pulley, hoist or
hydraulically, and the empty barrel replaced by a full one. In
this way, replenishing necessary with other pumps is not
required.
Positioning of pumps
With short lines, large line bores and heavyduty pumps,
positioning of the pumps is of secondary importance. In
all other instances, the pumps should be positioned so that
pressure losses in the lines are to be kept to a minimum. It is
therefore recommended to position the pump in the middle
between the furthest lubrication points.
In large installations, it is recommended to provide a fixed
or portable reserve pump.

Type Code no. Drive Reservoir Feed Delivery Pipe Change- Details
capacity pressure rate connection over see
litre max. at internal device printlet
Manual pump
VB - B
each up integral
21531 - 4531 manual 14 120 bar and down G 3/8 4/2-way 21531 P 1e
stroke valve
2 cm3

Motor pump
BM - B 0.18 kW
or 12 l/h
22113 - 1200 118
0.37 kW SA - K
0.37 kW 14 l/h SA - V
400 bar G 3/8 22113 P 1e
free 115 i = 23 : 1 or
shaft 12 l/h 2 x SA - E
22113 - 1300 or
end i = 23 : 1
dia. 14 130 14 l/h

2
Type Code no. Drive Reservoir Feed Delivery Pipe Change- Details
capacity pressure rate connection over see
litre max. at internal device printlet
Motor pumps
BS - B 0.37 kW
or 17 l/h
22123 - 1200 0.75 kW 130
0.75 kW 14 l/h
1.50 kW 160 22 l/h SA - V
400 bar i = 18 : 1 G 3/8 or 22123 P 1e
free or 17 l/h 2 x SA - E
shaft i = 19 : 1
22123 - 1300
end 100 14 l/h
dia. 14 i = 5.5 : 1
22 l/h
HA - III piston
21514 - 2131 dia. 14
10 l/h
1.1 kW
piston solderless
21514 - 2231 dia. 20 screw joint SA - V
100 400 bar 20 l/h with olive or 21514 P 1e
piston for 2 x SA - E
21514 - 1131 free dia. 14 outside pipe
shaft 10 l/h dia. 20
end piston
21514 - 1231 dia. 20 dia. 20
20 l/h
Pneumatic barrel pumps
BF - G pneumatic
22542 - 1311 3 per double
22542 - 1321 to i = 45 : 1 12,0 cm3
22542 - 1331 9 bar 150 l stroke
or preferred
G 1/2 22542 P 1e
200 l 2 x SA - E
22542 - 1511 3 barrel per double
22542 - 1521 to i = 80 : 1 4.7 cm3
22542 - 1531 5.5 bar stroke
BF - E three-phase
current IMB
14-71- 50 cm3
C 105; ( 3.0 l/h )
0.25 kW x
1500 min-1
22543 - 1100 200/216 l 400 bar G 3/8 SA - E 22543 P 1e
IMB
14-71-
C 105; 100 cm3
0,55 kW x ( 6.0 l/h )
3000 min -1

3
 EXAMPLES for multi - line systems
Working (shown for the beginning of each cycle)

1. Single-line system with 4/2-way valve

1st. lubrication cycle 2nd. lubrication cycle Internal

Switch on pump motor. Switch-gear SG-A detects in line I pressure Switch-gear SG-A detects in line II pressure about
Main feed line I pressurised. about 50 bar higher than in line II and initiates 50 bar higher than in line I, initiates change-over
change-over of the 4/2-way valve. of the 4/2-way valve and shuts down motor. Line II
Line II pressurised. Line I pressure relieved. pressure relieved.

2. Multli-line system with 4/2-way valve

1st. lubrication cycle 2nd. lubrication cycle Internal

Switch on pump motor and change-over Switch-gear SG-A detects in line I pressure Switch-gear SG-A detects in line II pressure about
4/2-way valve. about 50 bar higher than in line II and initiates 50 bar higher than in line I and shuts down motor
Main feed line I pressurised. change-over of the 4/2-way valve. Line I remains pressure relieved.
Line II pressurised. Line I pressure relieved.

3. Single or multi-line system with two 3/2-way valve

1st. lubrication cycle 2nd. lubrication cycle Internal

Switch on oump motor and 3/2-way valve in main
feed line l pressurised.
Switch-gear SG-A detects in line I pressure
about 50 bar higher than in line II, initiates
closing of valve in line I and opening of valve in line
II.
Line II pressurised, line I pressure relieved.
Switch-gear SG-A detects in line II pressure
about 50 bar higher than in line I and shuts down
motor and the valve in line II.
Both lines are pressure relieved during the in-
terval.

4. Half-cycle control (special edition)

On completion of the first lubrication cycle, that is, when half the total lubrication points have been lubricatedd, there follows the first half of the
intervals, then the second lubrication cycle is initiated and so the second half of the lubrication points are lubricated. Finally, there is the second
half of the interval. Application: in systems with long main feed lines and unfavourable pressures.

5. Connection to storage system

Working cycle as with multi-line systems. Signal for switching the pump on or off not required.

4
 DISTRIBUTORS
(For further details see printlet 35712 P 2 e)

Distributors serve to deliver exact quantities of lubricant,

irrespective of back pressure, into the lubricant lines to the
lubrication points.

Distributors type ZV-B and ZV-C are suitable for use with dual
line systems.
• ZV - B for maximum metered quantities of 0.5 or 1.5 cm3,
3.0 per outlet
• ZV - C for maximum metered quantities of 15 cm3 per
outlet

Distributors type ZV-B are available with 1 to 8 outlets

and distributors type ZV-C with 1 to 4 outlets. In distributors
with an uneven number of outlets, two outlets are joined to
from a single outlet. This outlet delivers double the quantity for
the same setting.
Fig. 2
Connection of distributor via branch lines (parallel connection) to the
two main feed lines. Suitable for all distributor types.

Distributor designs
• with metering screw for full, half or quarter of the
maximum quantity, (distributor type ZV - B only).

• with infinitely variable metering adjustment between

almost zero and maximum as well as indicator for piston
movement during lubrication cycle and piston position
(all distributor types).
• with adjuster and limit switch to signal end of stroke
position via pilot lights or pulse monitor systems (type
ZV-B, 1.5 cm3 only).
Fig. 3
Series connection of type ZV-B distributor. Installation costs are
lower than the example in Fig. 2. The layout is restricted to
smaller systems on account of the pressure drop inside the
distributors. A combined parallel - series system is preferred
for larger installations.

CHANGE-OVER AND SHUT-OFF DEVICES for grease and oil

The purpose of the change-over devices is to alternately
pressurise both main feed lines, so that first one half and
then second half of the lubrication points connected to the
distributors is lubricated.
In a dual line centralised lubrication system, either one
4/2-way valve or two 3/2-way valves are used, i.e., one
3/2-way valve for each line. The higher cost of two 3/2-way
valve system as against one 4/2-way valve is offset by the fact
that both main feed lines are fully pressure relieved during the
interval, i.e. connected to the pump suction chamber. In this
way, the pump always delivers against low pressure in the
main feed line.
TYPES AVAILABLE:
Manual 4/2-way valve
mounted on pump type VB-B (extra).
4/2-way valve SA-V with two open positions.
Actuated by 24 V d.c. geared motor. The high torque of
the electric motor ensures that change-over takes place in
under 0.5 seconds, even with stiff grease at low temperatu-
res.
4/2-way valve type SA-H with one closed position
and one open position (4/2-way cock).
Actuated by 24 V d.c. geared motor. Suitable for iso-
lating one in multi-line systems.
3/2-way valve SA-E
Actuated pneumatically at 2 - 3 bar (above 1/100 of
system pressure).
For pre-selection use solenoid or pneumatic 3/2- or
5/2-way valves NW 2 or larger.

Solenoid operated valve

suitable for oil only. Available on request.

5
 Symbol Designation Characteristics max. pressure Code no. Printlet
electrically actuated

4/2 - way valve SA - V 34133 - 1311

220 V 400 bar 34133 PB 2e

4/2 - way valve SA - H 34133 - 1321

pneumatically actuted Compressed

3/2 - way valve SA - E air 400 bar 38141 - 1111 38141 PB 1e
2 to 4 bar

Symbol Designation Characteristics Protection cl. Voltage Code no.

Pre-selection valves for
3/2-way valve SA - E
3/2 - way valve, electrically NW 2.2 IP 65 224 V 73611 - 6213
actuated, with return spring 220 V 73611 - 6223

5/2-way valve, NW 4 IP 65 224 V 73611 - 7313

electrically actuated 220 V 73611 - 7323

5/2-way valve, NW 4 --- 73611 - 7213

pneumatically actuated min. control pressure 1.8 bar

PRESSURE MONITORING, CONTROL AND PRESSURE RELIEF

Pressure gauge unit Pressure relief valve
visual indication of lubricant pressure and/or pressure While pneumatically operated pumps stop automatically
differential between the two main feed lines. It should pre- when excessive back pressure is experienced, electrically
ferably be mounted at the end of the main feed line (upstream driven pumps must be protected against overload by a
of switchgear type SG-A). pressure relief valve. The pumps type BM-B and HA III have
built-in or attached pressure relief valves. Pumps without
pressure safety devices should be provided with a pressure
relief valve between the pressurised and pressure relieved
Switch-gear SG-A lines.
used in dual line centralised lubrication systems with The manual pumps type VB-B also have a built-in
electrically or pneumatically operated pumps and should be pressure relief valve.
mounted upstream of last distributor to receive the pressure
in the main feed lines. As a rule, that is the distributor furthest
away from the change-over device.
When the pressure differential between the two main feed
lines reaches 50 bar, the switchgear transmits an electrical
pulse which causes the change-over device to a
pre-determined position depending on which of the two lines
has the higher pressure. The pulse is also used to monitor the
pressure change in the main feed lines.

6
 Symbol Designation Code no. Printlet
Pressure gauge range Pressure
Pressure gauge unit 0 to 250 bar to 200 bar 65119 - 1221
65119 PB 1
0 to 600 bar to 400 bar 65119 - 1231
change-over
electrical connection
pressure
Switch-gear type SG - A max. 500 V, 15 A 50 bar 34184 - 1111 34184 PB 1

Range of adjustment
Pressure relief valve type SA - G 38131 - 1111 38131/32 PB 2
0 to 400 bar

Progressive distributors in branch lines

By using progressive distributors in branch lines, each
outlet of a distributor type ZV can supply up to about 12
lubrication points. Progressive distributors have a fixed
delivery of 0.2, 0.5, 1.2 or 2.0 cm3 per outlet and stroke. The
operation of the distributor and thus the lubricant delivery to
all lubrication points connected to the distributor, can be
monitored by a limit switch.
(For further details see publication X 30 P 1e and
35500 P 1e).
Fig. 4
Dual line distributor type ZV - with downstream progressive
distributor type ZP -

Grease Spraying
If it is desired to use a dual line centralised grease lu-
brication system at the same time for grease syray lubrica-
tion of gearwheels, conveyors, chains, etc., it should first be
verified whether the relative lubrication points can be greased
with the same lubricant and secondly whether the greasing
frequency is identical.

In the system outlined in Fig. 5, the compressed air re-

quired for spraying the grease is purified by filter and adjusted
to the required pressure by a pressure regulator. The down-
stream 3/2-way solenoid valve is arranged in such a manner
that a space is filled with air during the lubrication interval. A
quantity of grease metered by the ZV- distributor is delivered
to the spray points in the first lubrication cycle. When the
switchgear SG-A transmits a signal, the 3/2-way solenoid
valve is energised and the pre-determined air sprays the
grease through the nozzles. At the start of the interval, the
solenoid valve is de-energised and the air space is reple-
nished.

Fig. 5
Dual line distributor with spray nozzles and metered air

7
 Monitoring
The switchgear at the line end, together with an additional
timer, checks whether, during the monitoring period, a chan-
ge of pressure has taken place twice in the main feed lines.
The points checked are: pump pressure, reservoir contents,
operation of the change-over device, fracture in the main feed
lines.
If the distributor operation is also to be monitored, one
Fig. 6
limit switch is required for every two opposing distributor Monitoring the distributor operation by limit switch on the
outlets distrbutor

Fig. 7
Pressure distribution in the two main feed lines, using pump type BM-B and 4/2-way valve type SA-V

ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

The electrical control systems for DELIMON centralised
lubrication systems employ standard circuitry. Some of the
control systems may be used for installations both with valves
type SA-V and type SA-E.
The lubrication systems may be operated continuously, for
exemple, during start-up or automatically (with intervals).
We have developed special control module for dual line
systems, code no. 66202-3001.
For detailed information, please ask for the relevant des-
cription indicating the code number.
We also supply complete switch cabinets in which is
above mentioned module are integrated.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Examples for Dual - Line Centralized Lubrication Systems

.... with hand-actuated pump VB-B

Application: only for small, but rugged machines, which
are lubricated at rather great intervals only. The 4/2-way valve
for hand actuation is flange-mounted to the pump.

... with electromotor driven pump BM-B provided with a

hydro-pneumatically controlled reverse valve.
The pump is switched on by a timing relay. When a
pressure of approx. 150 bar has been reached at the
pressure connection of the pump, the 4/2-way valve,
which is flange-mounted to the pump, is switched, and main
line II is pressurized. When the pressure reaches 150 bar
once again, the 4/2-way valve is brought into the first switch
position, and the pump is switched off.

.... with electromotor driven pump BM - B (or BS-B or

HA III), separate electromotor actuated 4/2-way reverse
valve SA - V and switching device SG-A at the end of the line.
When the current supply is switched on, the pump is
actuated and main line I and main line II are pressurized one
after the other. As soon as a differential pressure of 50 bar is
reached at the end of the main line, the 4/2-way valve is
brought into the starting position (as shown on the sketch),
and the motor is switched off.

.... with electromotor driven pump BS-B (or BM-B or

HA III), two pneumatically actuated 3/2-way valves
SA-E and switching device SG-A at the end of the line.
At first, main line I is pressurized by the control. When the
differential pressure at the end of the line is 50 bar, main line II
is pressurized and main line I is relieved. As soon as a dif-
ferential pressure of 50 bar is signalized once again at the end
of the line, main line II, too, is relieved. Consequently, both
main lines are relieved during the lubrication pause.

X 30 P 2 e / 1 1194 1000HF
supplement to X 30 P1e
 Examples for Dual - Line Centralized Lubrication Systems

.... with electromotor driven pump HA III (or BM-B or

BS-B) as well as electromotor driven 4/2-way reverse valves
SA-V and two switching devices SG-A at the end of the line of
each strand.

.... with pneumatically driven drum pump BF-G, four

pneumatically actuated 3/2-way reverse valves SA-E and
two switching devices SG-A at the end of the line of each
strand. Each of the two strands is independent from the other
one and/or can only be pressurized when the other one is
depressurized. All lines are relieved during the lubrication
pause.

.... relief of both main lines of a strand by connecting

in series two electromotor actuated 4/2-way reverse
valves SA-V.

2
Dual-line system
Standard pipe and loose screw components
GREASE LUBRICATION PUMP VB - B BARREL PUMP BF - G
with 4/2-way valve (hand-operated) pneumatic

GREASE LUBRICATION PUMP BM - B

BARREL PUMP BF - E
electrical

GREASE LUBRICATION PUMP BS - B

X 30 P 3 e / 01 0697HF
 SA - E REVERSING GEAR (pneumatic) SA - V REVERSING
GEAR (electric motor)

DISTRIBUTOR connection (standard) DISTRIBUTOR connection (line end)

SG-A only at SA-V or SA-E reversing gear

Item. Designation Code no. Item. Designation Code no.

1 Grease lubrication pump VB-B, 4 l 21531 - 4531 28 10 mm 73442 - 2414
2 Grease lubrication pump BM-B 22113 - 1200 29 Straight screw joint 20 mm 73442 - 2914
3 Grease lubrication pump BS-B 22123 - 1200 30 30 mm 73442 - 2934
1 : 45 22542 - 1331 31 dia. 10 73443 - 4424
4 Barrel pump BF-G
1 : 80 22542 - 1531 32 Tee screw joint dia. 20 73443 - 4914
5 Barrel pump BF-E with electric motor 22543 - 1100 33 dia. 30 73443 - 4934
6 4/2-way valve (mounted on item.1) 63632 - 3211 34 20 - 10 - 20 73443 - 5943
Tee joint with reduced branch
7 4/2-way valvel SA-K 34135 - 1111 35 30 - 10 - 30 73442 - 5953
8 3/2-way valve SA-E 38141 - 1111 36 20 - 10 73442 - 5213
9 4/2-way valve SA-V, 220 V 34133 - 1311 37 Reducing connetion 30 - 20 73442 - 5333
Distributor ZV-B 0,5; 1,5 and 3,0 cm3 35712 - . . . . 38 30 - 10 73442 - 5313
*10
Distributor ZV-C 15 cm3 35713 - . . . . G 1/4, dia. 8 73443 - 1314
39 Male stud elbow fitting
11 Switch gear SG-A 34184 - 1311 G 1/4, dia. 10 73443 - 1414
0 - 250 bar 65119 - 1221 40 Double nipple G 1/4 73461 - 5524
12 Pressure gauge unit
0 - 600 bar 65119 - 1231 41 Screw joint for pressure gauge G 1/4, dia. 10 73442 - 4423
0 - 250 bar 75111 - 5274 42 Double nipple N 8, G 1/4 73461 - 5524
13 Pressure gauge, G 1/4, dia. 100
0 - 600 bar 75111 - 5294 43 Reducer nipple N 4, G 3/8 “a” x G 1/4 “i” 73461 - 5134
14 Filter regulator FR-X, G 1/4 16212 - 2421 44 Angle A 4, 90o, G 1/4 (as required) 73461 - 8424
15 Pressure gauge for filter regulator FR-X, 0 - 6 bar 75111 - 1313 45 Transition piece, G 3/8 - G 1/2 73490 - 2353
16 Standard oil-mist lubricator OC-P, G 1/4 11316 - 1121 46 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 50 (for distributor ZV-B) 74102 - 1194
17 Microfog oiler OA-P, G 1/4 11112 - 2221 47 3 m lenght, NW 6 63311 - 1371
24 V 38152 - 1423 48 3 m lenght, NW 10 63311 - 3441
18 3/2-way solenoid valve, G 1/4 Rubber netting hose
220 V 38152 - 1413 49 63311 - 3 . . .
lenght as required
19 30 x 3 73100 - 1464 50 63311 - 1 . . .
20 Seamless precision steel pipe 20 x 2 73100 - 1424 51 High pressure hose 3,2 m lenght, NW 16 63311 - 3234
21 10 x 1,5 73100 - 1354 52 Hoist mechanism 61961 - 1221
22 Welded precision steel pipe 8 x 1 73100 - 1144 53 Electric 66200 - 2000
23 G 1/4, dia. 8 73442 - 1324 * In case of dust-laden ambient air, it is recommended to install the
24 G 3/8, dia. 10 73442 - 1424 distributors with the adjusting facilities pointing downwards.
25 Straight male stud fitting G 1/4, dia. 10 73442 - 1414 The pumps BM-B, BS-B, BF-G and BF-E can be combined with change-
26 G 1/2, dia. 10 73442 - 1433 over unit SA-K, SA-E or SA-V at option.
Choose main line diameters in consideration of the operating conditions
27 G 1/2, dia. 20 73442 - 1983 (item nos. 18, 19, 20).

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
5
Progressive Central Lubrication System
APPLICATION
Centralized lubrication systems with progressive dis-
tributors preferably serve the lubrication of machinery. The
lubrication capacity is up to approx. 100 lubrication points
per system.
The systems are suitable for grease and oil.

MODE OF OPERATION
Progressive distributors distribute the lubricant to the
lubrication points connected to their outlets, in small mete-
red quantities progressively in a given sequence. When
the last lubrication point has been supplied, the process of
lubrication automatically starts again at the first lubrication
point. If lubrication is interrupted at any point, because the
pump is switched off or the delivery line is blocked, it conti-
nues from the same point when the system is re-started.

Fig. 1.
Progressive system with main and secondary distributors

Lubrication Quantity ccm Distributor Cycles

point

per h per 1 cycle per h

11 0,8 0,2
12 1,6 0,4 1,2 A 4
13 1,6 0,4
14 0,8 0,2
15 1,2 0,6
16 1,2 0,6
17 0,4 0,2
18 0,4 0,2 2,4 B 2
19 0,8 0,4
10 0,8 0,4
11 0,8 0,2
12 1,6 0,4
13 1,6 0,4
14 0,8 0,2 2,0 C 4
15 0,8 0,2
16 2,4 0,6
A 4,8 2,4
B 4,8 2,4 8,8 I 2
Fig. 2
C 8,0 4,0
Diagramm of a progressive system 17,6

X 35 P 1 e / 2 0791HF
 PUMPS

A simple feed pump may be used. The delivery pres-
sure and rate must be adequate for the number of lubrica-
tion points used and the back pressure in the piping. If a
pump which does not incorporate a pressure relief valve is
used, a pressure relief valve or a switch unit should be in-
serted in the line to the first distributor to protect the pump
against over pressure.
When a pressure relief valve is used and return of lubri-
cant to the pump is necessary, the pump used should
have a connection for the return line.
The max. delivery pressure for progressive distributor
type ZP-A must not exceed 160 bar, for progressive dis-
tributor ZP-B the upper limit is 300 bar.

Designation Quantity Max. possible Reservoir Drive power for details

and delivery capacity see
Code no. pressure publication
bar l no.

TB -
21153 - ....
0,5 cm3 10,25
per stroke 125 10,65 21153 P 1
TA - and outlet
21153 - ....

VB - B
21531 - ....
2 cm3 11,00
120 21531 P 1e
double stroke 11,60
VB - A 14,00
21531 - ....

FZ-B with 1 1.2 and/or 2,4 cm3

or per outlet with 1 drive by
2 outlets rotation of the alteratively
FZ-A with delivery plunger lubricated
6 and/or max. 6 rotations/max. 200 2,50 machine or by
12 outlets of the delivery for short periods 8,00 flange motor/as 21112 P 2e
21112 - .... plunger with 250 30,00 per choice
ratchet drive 0,18 kW
max. 10 rotations/min
with flange motor

BM-B up to
22113 - .... 400 pressure
2,0 l/h control valve 8,00 0,18 kW
set to alteratively 22113 P 1e
4,0 l/h system 30,00 0,37 kW
pressure

2
 Designation Quantity max. possible Reservoir Drive power for details
and delivery capacity see
Code no. pressure publication no.
bar l

BS-B up to
22123 - .... 400 0,37 kW
07,0 l/h attached 30,00 alternatively
14,0 l/h pressure 60,00 0,75 kW 22123 P 1e
22,0 l/h control valve or or
set to system 100,00 1,5 kW
pressure

Autolub E / G 1-3
21118 - .... delivery 40 W
elements 02,00 at
1,0 cm3/min or 250 12 + 24 V DC 21118- . . . .e
1,6 cm3/min or 04,00 or
2,1 cm3/min 90 W bei
as per choice 220 / 380 V

AG-E 0,06 l/min

re-circulation 0,12 l/min
system with 0,18 l/min 10,00
10 ltr. bowl 0,25 l/min 125 0,18 kW
23831 - .... 0,50 l/min 25,00
with 0,75 l/min P 510e
25 ltr. bowl 1,00 l/min
23831 - ....

2,20 l/min 40,00

23831 - .... 4,50 l/min 116 65,00 0,37 kW

TB-D
21153 - .... 9 outlets with
0,5 cm3/Hub 1,6 compressed air
or 100 21153 P 1e
1 outlet with 4,0 2 to 5 bar
TA-D 4,5 cm3/stroke
21153 - ....

BF-G
22542 - .... delivery
from compressed air
at an air pressure of 4 bar commer- 3 to 10 bar
cially 22542 P 1e
approx. 6,5 l/h approx. 160 available gear ratio
tanks i = 45 : 1
50 / 200

3
 EXAMPLES of progressive central lubrication systems

Progressiv distributor with screwed-in grease nipple

for supplying up to max. of 20 lubricantion points. The grease
gun is operated until the movement indicator has moved in
and out once, as a sign that all the lubrication points have
received their right amount of lubricant. Before applying the
grease gun, clean the grease nipples.
If the machine has more than 20 lubrication points,
distributor strips with grease nipples connected to progressi-
ve distributors are provided.

Progressive system with main and secondary distri-

butors and a hand-operated pump of type VB-B
As compared with the system having a distributor strip,
this system has the advantage, that because of the pipe
connections between the pump and the main distributor and
on to the secondary distributors, no dirt can reach the distri-
butors. The main distributor divides up the grease fed to it by
the pump between the secondary distributors in the right
proportions.
The secondary distributors deliver metered quantities to
the lubrication points. The operator continues to operate the
pump until the signal lamp lights up and goes out again.
Every lubrication point connected to that distributor has then
received one shot of lubricant.
The pump depicted is also suitable for single - line
systems. The pressure relief device is not required on pro-
gressive systems. It can be made ineffective by a non-return
valve in the main supply line.

Progressive system with pneumatically operated

multi-line pump
If>several distributors are required, the outlets 1-9 can
be used, each outlet delivering 0.5 ccm lubricant per oper-
ation.
If only one distributor is to be supplied with lubricant, the
entire quantity of 9 x 0.5 = 4.5 ccm delivered by the pump is
taken from outlet X. In the example shown, the lines from con-
nections 1 and 2 lead directly to the lubrication points and the
lines from the connections 3 and 4 lead to the progressive
distributors, which deliver the lubricant to the lubrication
points in turn. Outlets 5 to 9 are closed.

Progressive system with multi-line pump operated

by electric motor
The pump will give adjustable metered quantities to each
of two outlets, so that it is possible, within limits, to vary the
quantity of lubricant delivered to the progressive distributors
per pump stroke, or the quantity of lubricant delivery to the
lubrication points per unit of time.
With short lenghts of piping and a large pump capacity,
the type ZP - A distributor can be used, otherwise type E 4
distributor should be used.
By using an additional time relay, it is possible to monitor
whether each limit switch has generated at least one signal
during the check period. If one signal is lacking, there is a fault
in the distributor involved and a warning signal is given.

4
 EXAMPLES of progressive central lubrication systems

Progressive system with pump driven by the

machine being lubricated
In this example the pump is driven from the machine
being lubricated, via an oscillating lever, clutch, V-belt or
chain; the expense of any additional control system is thereby
eliminated.
The FZ-B type pump has two outlets and the quantity de-
livered per outlet is adjustable. If ZP- type progressive distri-
butors are used, there is a minimum flow rate which should be
maintained, regardless of the nature of the lubricant.

Single-line and dual-line systems connected to

progessive distributors
Whe reas checking of the operation of a single - line
system is not customary and of a dual - line system is very
expensive, the progressive distributors connected to the lines
offer a relatively inexpensive way of monitoring the operation
of the distributors.

Progressive systems with two or more lines connec-

ted in parallel and able to be isolated, or operated
independently of one another.
Both the progressive systems in this example are con-
nected to the supply line, the first via an SA-V type 4/2-way
valve operated by an electric motor and the second via a
pneumatically operated 3/2-way valve also functioning as a
pressure regulating valve. By this means, the pressure at the
progressive distributor inlets is limited to the permissible level
of approx. 160 bar, even if the pressure in the supply line is
higher. The pump is switched on automatically as soon as the
progressive system is switched on.
If the lubricant requirement at the lubrication points is
large compared with the pump capacity, the separate lubri-
cation groups are interlocked in such a way that only one can
be switched on at a time while the others assume their waiting
position.

Progressive system connected to spray nozzles for

spraying the faces of exposed gearwheels with
grease and for monitoring the grease, compressed
air and nozzle blockage (SP-A)
As soon as the limit switch on the progressive distributor
signals to report that all the spray nozzles have been supplied
with the appropriate amount of lubricant, the solenoid valve in
the compressed air line is opened for a preset lenght of time.
If the pressure switches for min. pressure do not report
the minimum pressure during the monitoring period, a fault si-
gnal is given. A fault signal is also given if one of the nozzles is
blocked; in this case the associated pressure switch for max.
pressure issues a signal and thereby triggers off the alarm
signal.

5
 DISTRIBUTORS

DELIMON progressive distributors of type ZP-A and

ZP-B are available with 3 to 12 segments, corresponding to 6
to 24 lubricant outlets. Distributors of types ZP-C and ZP-D
are available in two different models with 3 to 6 segments,
corresponding to 6 to 22 lubricant outlets (larger number of
segments to order).
Distributors of type E 4 have 4 lubricant outlets.

Type Metered Flow rate

quantity for oil cm3/min. for grease
per plunger viscosity 45 mm2/s cm3/min
stroke at 50 oC penetration
cm3 min. max. class 2
E4 0,4 1,0 200 0,1 200
ZP-A 0,07 0,5 0,5
0,1
and
ZP-C 0,2 1000 1,0 1000
0,3
ZP-B 0,5 1500 1500
and 1,2 0,5 3000 0,5 3000 Fig. 3
ZP-D 2,0 5000 5000 Examples of the division of the quantity delivered between the
different outlets of a type ZP-A distributor
The metered quantity per outlet can be adapted to the
lubricant demand of the lubrication points by connecting out-
lets in parallel in distributors of types ZP - A and ZP - C, or
in parallel and series in distributors of types ZP-B and ZP-D.
This is done when assembling the distributors by simply re-
moving seals or grup screws and plugging unused outlets.
This preparation of the distributor is carried out by DELIMON
and is included in the price of the distributor.
With the lubricant distributor type E 4, the quantities
delivered can be combined externally the distributor by the
use of appropriate fittings. Distributors may be installed in any
orientation.
ZP-distributors can be provided with patented, integra-
ted non-return valves within the outlets.
The quantity metered by one plunger in the distributor
is delivered to the lubrication point from the next segment
(in the entry direction). The plunger of the first segment de-
livers its metered quantity via the outlets in the last seg-
ment (end segment).

Fig. 4
Examples of the division of the quantity delivered between the
different outlets of a type ZP-B distributor

6
 Devices and instruments for monitoring, control and pressure limitation

Movement indicator Over pressure protection

Each ZP-distributor can be supplied with two move-
ment indicators installed within the end segment. All
friction points connected to the distributor have been fed
with lubricant one time when the movement indicators
have made one full stroke movement in both directions.
Distributors are available with and without movement indi-
cator (as per choice).
Electrical monitoring equipment
To check the operation, either one distributor, or each
of the distributors in the system, may be fitted with a limit
switch; an electrical contact is thereby opened and closed
once per complete cycle of the distributor and this can be
indicated by pilot light or electrical pulse counter.
If the number of cycles exceeds 1 cycle per second,
approach switches with electronic monitoring are used.
Pressure relief valves protect pumps and distributors
against excessive pressures in the pipe from pump to dis-
tributor. If the pressure is too high, lubricant is returned to
the reservoir via a return line. Some types of pump have a
pressure relief valve already incorporated.
Pressure switches monitor the operated pressure for
high or low levels; theit output signal operates pilot lights
or warning systems. If necessary the signal will shut down
the pump motor or close a valve.
Over pressure indicators to be screwed into distributors
of type ZP-
When a lubrication point becomes blocked, the
pressure in the system exceeds the permissible level and an
indicator pin projects from the over pressure indicator.
When the fault has been eliminated, the indicator pin auto-
matically returns to its initial position.
The over pressure indicator facilitates location of faults
in a system (for details see 65112-1200 M1.1).

Symbol Designation Remarks Code no. Details in

38132 - 1241 38132 PB 1e

Pressure relief valve set at for small
NU - A 200 bar quantities of lubricant

Pressure relief valve set at for larger

38131 - 2111 38131 PB 1e
SA - G 160 bar quantities of lubricant

Pressure relief valve

ÜK 18 - 20 001 to 020 bar for lubricating oil 38191 - 1113 38191 P 1e
ÜK 18 - 70 005 to 070 bar circulation systems 38191 - 1123

002 to 020 bar 34241 - 1213 Drawing

Pressure switch 005 to 050 bar for grease and oil 34241 - 1223 34241-1200 M1.1
040 to 400 bar 34241 - 1243

Over pressure indicator see drawing 63642 - 1311 M 1

7
 ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

We have developed special control modules for see publication no.:

progressive systems
type ZP - A ___________________________ 35541 P 1e
Progressive __________________________ 66202 - 3501
type ZP - B ____________________________ 35542 P 1e
Progressive / Extension ________________ 66202 - 3521
type ZP - C ____________________________ 35543 P 1e
Progressive spray lubrication systems ___ 66202 - 2421
For detailed information, please ask for the relevant
descriptions indicating the a/m code number.
We also supply complete switch cabinets in which the
above mentioned modules are integrated.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Parallel Arrangement of Progressive Dividers with
Reciprocal Control
APPLICATION
Contrary to conventional progressive centralized
lubrication systems, comprising a master divider and
several slave ditsributors connected in series, the system
after described consitss of progressive dividers connec-
ted in parallel to a supply line, providing reciprocal control
so that the number of strokes performed by all dividers is
either equal or proportional.
Among the advantages of such a system is that pres-
sure drops are not cumulative, as they are in the case
of dividers connected in series. There has to be a pressure
build up from the supply source, which preserves the
pump. Moreover, monitoring for blockages and leaks is
greatly simplified; electrical devices are operated by a sing-
le limit switch installed at the end of the system. Faults can Fig. 1 Schematic arrangement of a system for parallel operation
of progressive dividers with reciprocal control
be easily localized by screw-in pressure indicators, in
conjunction with audible and visual alarms. This minimizes
minding costs. Systems with progressive dividers connec-
ted in parallel can be enlarged or reduced without affecting
the operation of the original system.
NUMBER OF SEGMENTS PER
DIVIDER
Progressive dividers for grease systems can compri-
se blocks of up to 6 segments with a maximum of 12
CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF outlets. Combinations of up to 10 segments are possible
DIVIDERS for oil systems, capable of serving up to 20 feed points.
The basic design of the progressive dividers is the
same as that of the units employed for series systems.
The only difference is that each externally controlled pro-
gressive divider has a slightly modified final segment. Na- NUMBER OF STROKES
mely, its centre bore is sealed against the adjacent middle If all dividers in a system are to perform the same num-
segment and is provided with an external connection. ber of strokes, twice the volume of lubricant has to be fed
The basic principles of the system are shown in fig. 1. through line from the controlling divider to the controlled
A = regular initial segment divider. Normally this is effected by cross porting two out-
M = regular middle segment lets of the controlling divider. In the case of ZP-B dividers a
E = regular final segment longitudinal connection is preferred to even out the pitson
VE = modified final segment rotations.
V = Control line segment
All units can be supplied for:
ZP-A dividers with a discharge of 0.2 cm3/per stroke
ZP-B dividers with a discharge of 0.5 cm3/per stroke
SIZE OF SYSTEM
1.2 cm3/per stroke Whereas a progressive system for grease, compri-
2.0 cm3/per stroke sing master and slave dividers, can serve no more than
For constructional details of the progressive dividers see about 100 lubrication points, systems arranged for paral-
printlets 35541 P1e (ZP-A) and 35542 P1e (ZP-B). lel operation can feed grease to anything from 300 to 400
points or supply the requisite quantity of oil to more than a
1000 lubricantion points. This means that systems with
progressive dividers connected in parallel can also be
employed instead of dual line centralized systems, and if
LUBRICANTS HANDLED equipped with monitoring facilities are cheaper than dual
line systems with equally efficient monitoring arrange-
Progressive dividers connected in parallel are suitable ments.
for handling oils and grease up to penetration class 3. The use of a large-diameter supple line permits pres-
(Progressive dividers arranged for series operation can sure drops to be minimized and lubrication points to be
handle greases up to penetration class 2). served over considerable distances.

X 35 P 3 e / 2 0800HF
 CONTROL LINE
Line L required for parallel control is best connec-
ted to a middle or initial segment of the controlling divider,
to avoid pressure drops, between final segments, for
instance.

CROSS PORTING
Details are as given in printlets 35541 P1e, 35542 P1e,
35543 P1e and 35544 P1e. Only transverse connections
are possible with ZP-A and ZP-C dividers. Ports of ZP-B
and ZP-D dividers can be connected transversely and Fig. 3
longitudinally. Immediately the column of lubricant in the feed line is put
under pressure, through the 2-way valve changing over,
for example, pitson K6 moves to the left. In so doing, the
pitson forces 2.0 cm3 of lubricant out of outlet - 10 -. Then
EXAMPLE pitson K5 moves to the left, causing 1.2 cm3 of lubricant to
A system with progressive controlled dividers arranged discharge from outlet 9. Next pitson K4 moves to the left,
in parallel, designed to feed the following quantities of thereby causing the column of lubricant ahead of the pit-
lubricant per lubrication cycle: son to flow via A8 and line L1 through the annular space of
K1 to pitson K3, which is moved to the left. As a result, 2.0
-1- 2.0 cm3 -5- 1.2 cm3 - 9- 2.4 cm3 cm3 of lubricant is fed to lubrication point - 4 -. At the
-2- 1.2 cm3 -6- 0.5 cm3 - 10 - 4.0 cm3 same time the lubricant contained in the annular space
-3- 0.5 cm3 -7- 4.0 cm3 - 11- 4.0 cm3 around pitson K3 flows into the right-hand space around
-4- 2.0 cm3 -8- Control line - 12 - 2.4 cm3 K2. Pitson K2 also moves to the left and 0.5 cm3 of lubri-
connection cant is discharged at outlet - 3 -. Lubricant from the annu-
lar space around pitson K2 enters the space at the
right-hand end of pitson K1, forcing this pitson to the left
and 1.2 cm3 of lubricant is thereby ejected at outlet - 2 -.
Divider A is for the time being locked in this position.

Fig. 2 Schematic arrangement of system

BASIC PRINCIPLES OF RECIPROCAL
CONTROL
The mode of operation of the above system with two
progressive dividers connected in parallel is depicted in
fig. 3 to 5.
It is assumed that a control signal starts the pump, lu-
bricant is forced through the delivery line, and after divider
A has performed one stroke and divider B two strokes limit
switch E1 on divider A causes 2-way valve V1 to change
over; the system is thus no longer under pressure and the
motor is stopped.
Fig. 3 shows the arrangement during the interval bet-
ween work cycles. Pitson K1, K2 and K3 are in their
right-hand end positions. The pitsons of divider B can be
in any position, but it is assumed that K4, K5 and K6 are li-
kewise in their right-hand end position.
Fig. 4
During the three described movements of divider A, di-
vider B also operated. Pitson K4 moved to the far left,
permitting the lubricant contained in the right-hand annu-
lar space around K4 to flow through the middle duct to
K6, which moved to the right and ejected at outlet - 7 - the
1.2 cm3 of lubricant contained in the annular space
around K4. When pitson K6 took up its extreme right-hand
position, lubricant entered the space at the left.hand end
of piston K5, which was thereby pushed to the right and
1.2 cm3 of lubricant was discharged at outlet - 12 - to the
lubrication point served. K4 was then pushed from left
to right, causing 2.0 cm3 of lubricant to be ejected at outlet
- 11 -.
Piston K6 moved to the left thereby expelling 2.0 cm3 of lu-
bricant at outlet - 10 -. Piston K5 moved to the left, causing
1.2 cm3 of lubricant to be ejected from outlet - 9 -.

2
 EXTERNAL CONTROL
Continuously-operated systems (such as oil
circulating system)
The system depicted in fig. 6 operates continuously,
the quantity of lubricant pumped into the dividers being
delivered to the lubrication points as shown in the sche-
matic arrangement.

Fig. 5
Only when divider A is in the afore described locked
Fig. 6 Progressive system without direct control
position, that is to say when its three pistons have all mo-
ved to the far left, can piston K4 start its leftward move-
ment. In so doing, piston K3 is forced into its extreme
right-hand position thereby ejecting 2.0 cm3 of lubricant
from outlet - 1 -.
EXAMPLE
Divider A delivers 6 x 2 cm3 = 12 cm3/per stroke
Divider B delivers 7 x 2 cm3 = 14 cm3/per stroke
Divider C delivers 9 x 2 cm3 = 18 cm3/per stroke
SUBSEQUENT OPERATIONS As the control quantity delivered by dividers B and C con-
Piston 2 delivers 0.5 cm3 at outlet - 6 - stitutes the volume discharged from a single outlet, the
Piston 1 delivers 1.2 cm3 at outlet - 5 - number of strokes performed by A : B : C will be 1 : 2 : 4
and the quantity delivered per lubrication cycle is:
The movement indicator on piston K1 actuates a limit
switch, which causes the 2-way valve V1 in the supply line Divider A = 12 cm3
to change over or stops the motor of the pumpset. Divider B = 28 cm3
In the meantime divider B has continued to operate, Divider C = 72 cm3
whereby: 112 cm3
Piston 6 delivers 2.0 cm3 at outlet - 7 - A pump with an output of approximately 4500 cm3/min will
Piston 5 delivers 1.2 cm3 at outlet - 12 - thus be capable of performing 40 lubrication cycles a
Piston 4 delivers 2.0 cm3 at outlet - 11 - minute.

DESIGNING A SYSTEM
When designing a system, bear in mind that the quan-
tity of lubricant displacd by a piston is not ejected at the
particular element but is fed into the inlet of an adjacent
element connecting with the discharge port. The quantity
of lubricant fed into the initial element (A segment) is
discharged at the final element (e or Ve segment).
The controlling lubricant is fed to the final element, but
passes through channels in the divider (see fig. 2 and 3)
to the initial element, so that the number of strokes requi-
red is determined by the volume of lubricant fed into the A
segment.

3
 INTERMITTENT CONTROL
For systems required to be operated intermittently, ex-
ternal control is applied to the divider that has to perform
the smallest number of strokes.
Fig. 7 shows the logic diagram for a system of this
kind, which applies to pneumatic as well as electric and
electronic controls.
Fig. 7 Logic diagram of a progressive system
Manual operation.
Selector switch W1 is in the OFF position, as depicted. A
pulse of short duration is generated by pressing button
T1. The signal is conducted via an OR element to a
storage device FF1 where it is converted into a continuous
signal. The signal, amplified by V1, actuates a
two-position 2-way valve.
A signal generator (limit switch) mounted on the progres-
sive divider that performs the smallest number of strokes,
generates a signal when one of the divider’s pistons mo-
ves to the end position. This signal is shortened in pulse
chopper IK1 and fed into storage device FF1 as a result of
which the original output signal is cut out and the
two-position 2-way valve is closed.
4
Automatic operation.
The selector switch W1 should be in position 2. The output
signal is applied to AND element G1. If the lubricated
machine is in operation and signal Ke is thus received and
there is also an output signal at NOT element N1 an output
signal will be produced that brings the timing element, de-
picted by turn-on delay EV1, into the counting position.
After the pre-set period of time, an output signal from the
delay switch is fed via OR1 into storage element 1. The
sequence then proceeds as in the case of manual
operation.
The output signal from the OR element also applies a
signal to NOT element N1, whose output then disappears.
As a result, the conditions required for an output signal at
U1 no longer obtain. Energy is no longer applied to the
timing element and, in consequence, the output signal
from EV1 and OR1 also disappears. There is an output at
N1 again and the timing element starts the next count.
With a control system of the afore-described type an inter-
mediate lubrication cycle can be performed at any time by
pressing button T1. By way of examble, after the machine
has been standing idle for a lengthy period, the timing
element can be automatically zeroed.
If so desired, a pulse counter can be connected in parallel
with the signal input of the 2-way valve to count the
lubrication cycles. The operational state of the system can
also be monitored by means of an indicator light.
 MONITORING
Whereas with progressive dividers connected in
series every slave divider has to be monitored to achieve
complete supervision of the system, only a single divider
needs to be monitored when employing progressive
dividers in parallel arrangement with reciprocal control. In
practice this is the form generally adopted for controlling
the system.
If a divider is blocked or a pipe fractures on the input side,
all the dividers in the system cut out in sequence.
Fig. 8. shows the monitoring arrangement. It supplements
the system depicted in fig. 7.
The signal to operate the 2-way valve is fed to a
second timing element EV2.
The pre-set time should be slightly longer than the interval
between lubrication cycles.
INDICATORS TO LOCALIZE TROUBLE
ZP - B dividers incorporate an excess pressure
indicator - preferably in the segment whose output
controls another divider - to simplify detection of
blockage. If, for example, divider B fig. 9 gets blocked, the
indicator pins of all upstream dividers, in this case C and
D, will project from their housing.
In the case of ZP - A dividers the excess pressure indicator
is installed immediately behind the control outlet, in the
line connecting with the controlled divider, for which pur-
pose a tee is employed.
Instead of the excess pressure indicator a pressure switch
can be installed to provide remote visual indication
through an illuminated alarm in the event of a blockage.

Fig. 9 Arrangement of excess pressure indicators or pressure

switches in systems with ZP - A and ZP - B dividers.

Fig. 8 Monitoring through timing element, indicator light and

audible alarm

Should the shut-off signal for the 2-way valve be received

after the pre-set time, the input signal for EV2 will disappe-
ar and, as a result, EV2 will be zeroed. If no change-over
signal is received, that is to say, if no pulse is generated by
the limit switch on the divider, at the end of the pre-set
time, an output signal from EV2 will cause alarm light ML to
illuminate and, if necessary, the machine to be stopped. If
desired, an audible alarm H1 with cut-out control T2 can
be provided.
From the output of EV2 a direct signal is applied to the
AND element, which receives a further input signal via the
pulse chopper IV2 and storage device FF2. Audible alarm
H1 is cut in via amplifier V2. When push-button T2 is
pressed the second input signal for the AND element
disappears, thereby cutting out the audible alarm. There is
no need for this to be re-set for the alarm system to be
operative again.

5
 CHANGES IN NUMBER OF
LUBRICATION POINTS
Contrary to systems with progressive dividers
connected in series, it is comparatively easy to increase
the number of lubrication points or to blank off outlets in
systems with progressive dividers in parallel arrangement
and reciprocally controlled. However, it must be ensured
that each divider comprises at least three and not more
than six segments when handling grease and not more
than ten segments when handling oil. It must also be
borne in mind that the ports through which the segment
discharges are not in the segment itself but in the adjacent
element.

EXAMPLE (Fig. 10)

Fig. 10 shows an arrangement whereby lubrication
points 13 to 17 are added to the system shown in fig. 2.
The quantities delivered per lubrication cycle are as
follows:
Lubrication point: 13 = 2.0 cm3
14 = 2.0 cm3
15 = 8.0 cm3
16 = 1.0 cm3
17 = 1.0 cm3

Fig. 10 Existing progressive system extended by four lubrication

points

The additional divider segments and lubrication points

are indicated by hatching.
A supply of four times the metered quantity is obtained
at lubrication point 15 by cross porting two outlets and
effecting two strokes of the piston.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
6
Oil-Reclassifying Lubrication of articulated spindles at roll stands

Fig. 2 Lubricator with integrated air-line filter, pressure regulator and

micro-fog lubricator for 720 to 1500 bearing units

Fig. 1 Arrangement of the oil-reclassifying lubrication system Fig. 3 Heavy-duty reclassifier nozzles

APPLICATION
For the lubrication of the sliding pads in drive Fig. 1 shows the uncomplicated design of the oil
spindles at continuum and reversing stands of hot reclassifying lubrication system which does not have
and cold rolling mills. any mobile parts except the transfer rings. Two
Theoretical considerations and practical experience heavy-duty reclassifier nozzles supply the seals of the
have shown, that for the lubrication of the sliding pads ring with oil, which reduces the wear of the seals. The
in articulated spindles oil as lubricant is much more low overpressure – up to max. 200 millibar - involves
suitable than the still frequently used lubricating by far less problems than the high pressures of grease
grease. As the oil, however, tends to creep to the lubrication systems, which again and again lead to
outside as a result of the centrifugal force, it has to be considerable leakages.
supplied continuously in very small metered One oil-reclassifying lubricator WA-L – see fig. 2 – is
quantities. in a position to feed up to 2 spindle heads. 12
For this purpose, there does not exist any better reclassifier nozzles are provided per spindle head
system than the oil-reclassifying lubrication in and 2 reclassifier nozzles per transfer ring. Each of
general. DELIMON-heavy duty reclassifier nozzles the reclassifier nozzles is capable of feeding up to 60
reduce the consumption of oil and air and prevent air bearing units. The adaptation to the size of the sliding
pollution caused by residual mist. pad is obtained by an appropriate adjustment of the
oil-reclassifying lubricator.
The following calculation basis is applicable:
10 cm² of articulated pad surface correspond to one bearing unit. The quantity of oil required per bearing unit is
up to 0.2 cm³/h. The systems are designed individually for each case of requirement. The figures – fig. 4 to fig.
8 – show examples for different spindle heads, sliding pads and transfer rings.

X 40 P 1e / 1 0301HF
 Fig. 6 oil-reclassifier lines
In case of existing spindles, the oil reclassifier feedings can be drilled
later to install pipes.

Fig. 4 Spindle head

Example for the oil-reclassifier feeding in case of new spindle heads

Fig. 7 Transfer ring

The transfer ring, which transfers the oil mist from the rigid
pipeline to the spinning spindle can be designed in different versions.

Fig. 5 Examples for the arrangement of the oil grooves Fig. 8 Oil-reclassifier feeding (three reclassifer nozzles per half of pad)
The oil grooves in the sliding pads ensure a good distribution The arrangement of 3 reclassifier nozzles per half of sliding pad has
of the oil onto the loaded surfaces. proved to be good in practice.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 102052 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Constructional Advice
for oil mist supplying lubrication points
for the arrangement of the reclassifier nozzles
Rolling bearings
Arrangement of nozzles
Arrange reclassifying nozzles – as far as possible –
in the upper bearing half in such a way that the
rolling bearings are directly sprayed with oil mist.
Tapered rollers are to be sprayed on their front face
striking against the rail head.
If it deals with prestressed tapered roller bearings,
place nozzles on both sides of the bearing (in the
upper half of the same) in offset position.
If there is not enough space to install screw-in
nozzles, use solder nozzles or special nozzles. In Fig. 1 and 2
case of need, one can also do with an appropriately Arrangement of nozzle and vent hole in case of ball bearings
directed drill hole in the bearing housing with the
dimensions of the calculated nozzle.
The oil mist can also be supplied to the bearing via a
ring groove in the bearing housing and/or outer ring
of the bearing and cross holes starting in this ring
groove. The distance between nozzle and roll body
shall not exceed 25 mm, if possible.
Deaeration
A perfect lubrication is only guaranteed if the oil mist
can flow through the bearing and the air can escape
from the bearing. For the deaeration, provide a drill
hole in the bearing housing, in the lid of the bearing
housing or at another point. See that the drill hole is Fig. 3 Self-aligning roller bearing Fig. 4 Bearing with Nilos ring
placed opposite the oil mist inlet in the lower part of
the bearing arrangement and that it has at least twice
the cross section of the nozzle bore.
The vent hole simultaneously serves as oil drain. If an
oil sump is desired, place the vent hole in such a way
that the oil in the bearing cannot rise higher than up
to the half of the lower roll body. For bearings with
labyrinth seals, it is generally not necessary to
provide any additional deaeration. Absolutely Fig. 5 Offset arranged nozzles on both sides with prestressed tapered
necessary are overflow bores. roller bearings

Sliding bearings
The oil groove of a sliding bearing has to be placed
in the unloaded area of the bearing at right anlges to
the rotational direction of the shaft. Its length should
be about 90° of the length of the bearing. Between
the ends of the groove and the two ends of the
bearing, there should be a space of 3 to 5 mm.
Fig 6 Arrangement of nozzles in the unloaded area of the sliding
In dependence on the length of the bearing, one or bearing
several nozzles have to be arranged. One nozzle is
sufficient for a bearing length of 150 mm.
Sliding bearings with a smaller bearing clearance
require a little vent hole.

Fig. 7 Upper bearing shell with oil groove

X 40 P 3 e / 1 0401HF
Carriages and guide devices
Make grooves into the sliding surfaces of the
carriage at right angles to the moving direction –
similar to the description in the paragraph relating to
„sliding bearings“ and connect them with the nozzle
by means of bore holes. The intervals between the Fig. 8 Arrangement of grooves and drill holes
grooves shall not exceed 100 mm.
The min. distance of the grooves to the end of the
carriage shall be approx. 25 mm.

Fig. 9 Feeding of oil mist

Toothed gear and worm gear
If it deals with toothed and worm gear, spray the
loaded tooth profiles of the smaller body, if possible.
Each 50 mm of tooth width require – regardless of
the number of toothed wheels combing with each
other – one reclassifier nozzle.
In case of an alternating rotational direction, one
reclassifier nozzle in the calculated size has to be
arranged for each rotational direction. The nozzle Fig. 10 and 11 Spraying of the supporting flanks
distance shall be 25 mm max.
Provide gear cases with an oil drain screw and with
vent holes. Instead of vent holes, one can also
provide an air filter with steel wool filling which does
not provoke a pressure build-up in the bearing.

Fig. 12 Gear case with oil drain screw and vent hole
and/or air filter

Chain drive
If it deals with chain drives, arrange the nozzle in Bild 13 Spraying of the chain links not being under tensile stress
such a way that the chain links not being under
tensile stress will be sprayed. If possible, the spray
nozzles shall point at an acute angle against the
moving direction at the articulated rents of the chain.
The nozzle distance must not exceed 25 mm.

Fig. 14 Spraying of the chain articulation rents

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 102052 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Adjustment of Oil-Reclassifying Lubrication Systems
Oil-reclassifying lubrication system with microfog oilers for 100 bearing units ( R ½“)
200 bearing units (R ¾“)
300 bearing units ( R 1“)
and units WA-L 300 bearing units (R 1“ )
1000 bearing units (R 2“)
300 bearing units (R 1“) with hot-air heating
1000 bearing units (R 2“) with hot-air heating

For the adjustment of an oil-reclassifying lubrication system one has to know the connected load (in bearing units) of
the system. On this load depends the size of the oil-reclassifying appliance to be used. The calculation basis‘ have to
be observed. (Printscript X 40 P2)
When using oil with a viscosity of more than approx. 75 mm²s-1 (cSt) = 10 E at 50°C, it is necessary to use an oil
heater (depending on the local conditions even earlier). The max. oil temperature depends on the oil type and must
generally not exceed 100°C. When the oil temperature has changed, the oil consumption should be checked. It
increases when the oil temperature goes up.
If it deals with oilers with a viscosity of more than 115 mm²s- (CSt) = 15 E and the atomized quantity of oil is too
1

small, or if it is worked with very cold air, one should provide a hot-air heater. The lubricator WA-L can be delivered
with oil heater and hot-air heater.
The following factors can be adjusted at the oil-mist lubricators:
1. working pressure (secondary pressure of the regulator). A change of the working pressure involves a change of
the air volume and thus the oil-reclassifying pressure as well as the quantity of oil delivered.
2. Additional air. With the additional air, the total air consumption changes, the oil-reclassifying pressure and the air
volume being supplied to the lubrication point. The quantity of oil delivered is slightly changed when the additional
air volume changes.
3. Oil and/or air temperature have an influence on the capability of the oil of being atomized and thus on the quantity
of oil delivered.
4. The lubricator WA-L has an additional oil adjusting spindle.
In addition to the number of bearing units, the values to be adjusted also depend on the operating conditions at the
lubrication points, on the type of oil used, on the line system and on the oiler itself so that they can only be
predetermined roughly. Reference values and the resulting air flow rate can be seen from table 1.

Table 1 Recommended values for the adjustment of oil-reclassifying lubrication systems

Appliance Connected bearing Working pressure Adjustment of the screw for Air volume Qn
units before the oiler additional air supply
bar m³/h
20 0.4 1.7
Microfog oiler 40 0.4 to 0.8 1.7 to 2.4
with pipe connection 60 0.6 to 0.9 2.0 to 2.8
R ½“ 80 1.0 to 1.3 2.4 to 3.8
100 1.3 to 1.8 3.3 to 4.0
72 0.4 2.9
Microfog oiler with 100 0.4 to 0.8 closed 2.9 to 4.3
R ¾“ and R 1“ 150 0.6 to 1.1 4.3 to 6.4
and 200 1.1 to 1.6 6.4 to 8.5
WA-L with R 1“ 250 1.6 to 2.2 8.5 to 10.5
300 2.2 to 2.8 10.5 to 12.8
150 0.4 6.9
220 0.6 to 0.7 8.0 to 9.4
WA-L with R 2“ 350 1.1 to 1.4 12.3 to 15.3
500 1.7 to 2.3 16.5 to 20.5
750 1.9 to 2.5 opened by ¼ turn 18 to 31
1000 1.9 to 2.5 opened by ¾ turn 18 to 41

X 40 P 5 e / 1 0401HF
As experience shows that an intensive lubrication is desired during the commissioning, always start with the indicated
max. values. Adjust the actually required delivery rate gradually, which accrues from temperature measurements or
observations at the bearing point.
When reducing the working pressure, take care that it does not fall below the min. values of 0.4 bar stated in table 1
because every microfog oiler needs a minimum air pressure for its perfect functioning. In addition to this one has to
pay attention to the pressure in the oil reclassifier line which must not fall below the min. pressure allowed. At the
remote end of the oil reclassifier line, this min. pressure has to lie over 20 mbar ( 200 mm WS). For technical reasons
it is checked – as shown in figure 3 – before the remotest nozzle by dipping an oil-reclassifier hose into water. When
the water level over the hose end is 200 mm, the oil mist must still escape. By opening the screw for additional air,
one can increase the pressure in the oil-reclassifier line.

Fig. 2 Screw for additional air and oil adjusting screw Fig. 3 Check of the oil-reclassifier pressure

Experience shows that under normal circumstances, the lubricant requirement amounts to 0.1 to 0.2 g per bearing
units and hour of running time, the higher comsumption values being valid for bigger bearings running slowlier and
being exposed to higher loads or even for self-aligning and/or tapered roller bearings. ( 1 cm³ oil about 0.9 g )

Example for the adjustment of an oil-reclassifying lubrication system

The bearings of a machine with totally 200 bearing units have to be fed by a microfog oiler R1“.
The first adjustment of the working pressure is 1.6 bar. The pressure at the line end is 26.5 mbar.
The following oil consumption is measured:
in 24 hours of running time 1350 g
in 1 hour of running time 56 g
that means per bearing units and hour 0,28 g

To obtain a lower delivery rate, reduce the working pressure to 1.1 bar.
The measurement of the oil-reclassifier pressure at the line end is 15.6 mbar.
By unscrewing the additional air screw by approx. ½ turn, the line pressure is set to more than 20 mbar again.
Another check of the oil consumption shows the following result:
in 24 hours 576 g
1 hour 24 g
that means per bearing units and hour 0,12 g

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 102052 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
7
DELIMON Fettschmierung für die Zuckerindustrie
DELIMON Grease Lubrication for the Sugar Industry
Lubrification â la graisse DELIMON pour l’industrie sucrière
Lubrificazione a grasso DELIMON per gli zuccherifici
Engrase DELIMON para la industria azucarera

DELIMON Fettschmieranlagen sind seit Jahrzehnten weltweit in der Zuckerindustrie im Einsatz.

Besonders häufig werden Zweileitungsfettanlagen für die regelmäßige Nachschmierung von ortsfesten Schmier-
stellen und RK - C Fettanlagen für die Schmierung von wandernden Schmierstellen an Rübentransporteuren etc.
eingesetzt.

Die Hauptmerkmale dieser Systeme möchten wir Ihnen hier vorstellen.

DELIMON grease lubrication systems have been in service in the sugar industry worldwide for many decades.
Dual-Iine grease systems are used particularly frequentIy for regular lubrication of fixed lubrication points, as are
RK-C grease systems for the lubrication of moving lubrication points on beet transporters etc.

We wish to present the main features of these systems to you here.

Les installations de graissage à la graisse DELIMON sont utilisées par I’industrie sucrière du monde entier
depuis des dixaines d’années.
Ce sont surtout les installations de graissage à deux conduites qui sont les plus utilisées pour le regraissage régulier
des points de graissage fixes et les installations de graissage RK-C pour le graissage des points de graissage qui
bougent sur les transporteurs de betteraves, etc.

Nous aimerions vous présenter ici ies principales caractéristiques de ces systèmes.

Gli impianti di lubrificazione a grasso DELIMON vengono impiegati da decenni in zuccherifici di tutto il mondo.
Molto frequentemente vengono impiegati gli impianti d’ingrassaggio a due tubazioni per la rilubrificazione periodica
di punti di lubrificazione fissi e gli impianti d’ingrassaggio RK - C per la lubrificazione di punti di lubrificazione
mobili di trasportatori di barbabietole, ecc.

Le caratteristiche principali di tali impianti sono esposte qui di seguito.

Las instalaciones de engrase DELIMON se vienen utilizando en la industria azucarera en el mundo entero desde
hace decenios.
Son particularmente las instalaciones de engrase de dos lineas que se utilizan con mucha frecuencia en
el reengrase periódico de puntos estacionarios, e instalaciones de engrase RK - C que se usan en puntos
móviles ubicados en vehículos transportadores de remolachas etc.

Nos permitimos presentarles las características principales de dichos sistemas.

S 800 d, e, f, i, sp / 1 HF
 RK - C Schmiersystem für wandernde Schmierstellen
RK - C Lubrication System for moving lubrication points
Système de graissage RK - C pour les points dè graissage qui se déplacent
Impianto di lubrificazione RK - C per punti di lubrificazione mobili
Sistema de engrase RK - C previsto para puntos móviles

1. Elektrische Schalteinrichtung
Electrical switchgear
Equipement de distribution électrique
Dispositiva di collegamento elettrico
Equipo de conmutación électrica

2. Druckspeichereinheit bestehend aus :

Druckspeicher, Druckmeßgerät (Manometer),
Druckschalter 180 bar,
Druckbegrenzungsventil 200 bar
Pressure reservoir unit, consisting of :
pressure reservoir, pressure gauge,
180 bar pressure switch,
200 bar pressure limiting valve
Unité d’accumulation de la pression
consistant dans :
un accumulateur de pression, un manomètre,
un manocontacteur 180 bars
un limiteur de pression 200 bars
Unità accumulatore di pressione, costituita da :
accumulatore di pressione, manometro,
interruttore a pressione 180 bar
valvola limitatrice di pressione 200 bar
Unidad acumuladora de presión, integrada par:
Acumulador, Manómetro,
Interruptor pulsador de 180 bar
válvula limitadora de presión de 200 bar

3. Schlauchleitungen zum Schmierkopf

Hoses to the lubricating head
Tuyauteries allant à la tête de graissage
Tubazioni fiessibili per il raccordo di
lubrificazione
Tuberías flexibles a la cabeza de engrase

4. Drehschieber 7. Rücklaufleitung
Rotary slide valve Return line
Distributeur rotatif Conduite de retour
Valvola rotante Tubazione di ritorno
Distribuidor giratorio Tubería de retorno

5. Träger für den Schmierkopf 8. Druckleitung

Mounting for the lubricating head Pressure line
Support de tête de graissage Conduite de refoulement
Supporto dei raccordo di lubrificazione Tubazione di mandata
Elemento portador p/ la cabeza de engrase Tubería de impulsión

6. Schmierkopf 9. Fettschmjerpumpe BS-B

Lubricating head Grease pump BS-B
Tête de graissage Pompe à graisse BS-B
Raccordo di lubrificazione Pompa d’ingrassaggio BS-B
Cabeza de engrase Bomba de engrase BS-B

o sicheres Treffen der Schmierpunkte o verlustfreie Schmierstoffabgabe an die Schmierstelle

accurate supply of grease to lubrication points
les points de graissage sont atteints en toute
sécurité lubrificazione mirata
Escoger correctamente los puntos correspondientes
no loss of grease in supply to lubrication points
graissage sans perte du point à graisser
erogazione senza perdita del lubrificante nei relativi
punti
Engrase sin pérdidas

2
o Abschmierung während des Betriebes
lubrication while equipment is in service
lubrification en cours de service
lubrificazione durante I’esercizio
Engrase durante el servicio
o nur wenig bewegliche Teile, daher wenig Verschleiß
only a small number of moving parts, and thus low
wear
peu de pièces mobiles, d’où un minimum d’usure
solo pochi pezzi mobili, perciò poca usura
Pocas partes móviles, por tanto poco desgaste
o Dosiermenge wählbar
selectable dosage
dosage au choix
quantitativo di dosaggio selezionabile
Dosis a seleccionar
o günstiger Preis, schnelle Armortisation
low cost, fast recovery of outlay
prix intéressant, amortissement rapide
prezzo conveniente, rapida ammortizzazione
Precio económico, por tanto amortización en poco
tiempo
Regelmäßige Nachschmierung senkt den Verschleiß
und Ihre Energiekosten durch leichteren Kettenlauf.
Regular lubrication reduces wear and your energy costs
by improving chain running.
Le regraissage régulier diminue I’usure et réduit vos frais
d’énergie du fait que les chaînes fonctionnent mieux.
La rilubrificazione periódica riduce I’usura e i costi
energetici grazie ad un più agevole funzionamento
delle catene.
EI reengrase periódico reduce el desgaste y sus gastos
energéticos, lo cual se debe a un funcionamiento más
suave de la cadena.

Zweileitungsanlage mit Pumpe BS-B und elektrisch betätigtem 4/2-Wegeventil SA-V

Dual-Iine system with BS-B pump and electrically operated 4/2-way valve type SA-V
Installation à deux conduites avec pompe BS-B et distributeur 4/2 voies à commande électrique SA-V
Impianto â due tubazioni con pompa BS-B e valvola a 4/2 vie SA-V azionata elettricamente
Instalacioñ de dos líneas con bomba BS-B y válvula de 4/2 pasos SA-V accionada eléctricamente

o 400 bar Hochdrucksystem
400 bar high pressure system
système haute pression 400 bars
impianto ad alta pressione di 400 bar
Sistema de alta presión de 400 bar
o Schmierstellen können bis 150 m von der Pumpe
entfernt sein
lubrication points can be up to 150 m away from the
pump
les points de graissage peuvent être a 150 m de la
pompe
i punti di lubrificazione possono trovarsi fino ad una
distanza di 150 m dalla pompa
Los puntos de engrase pueden estar situados hasta
150 m de la bomba

3
o Anschluß bis zu 1000 Schmierstellen möglich o Verteilerdosiermengen stufenlos einstellbar
up to 1000 lubrication points can be connected infinitely variable quantities frorn the metering units
1000 points de graissage peuvent être raccordes dosage réglable progressivernent
attacco realizzabile fino a 1000 punti di lubrificazione quantitativi di dosaggio da distribuire regolabili
Pueden conectarse hasta 1000 puntos de engrase ininterrottarnente
Dosis a distribuir regulables de forma continua
o kleine Rohrabmessungen, da Hochdrucksystem
small pipe dimensions due to high system pressure o gute Systemüberwachung
petits tubes du fait du système haute pression good system monitoring
piccole dimensioni delle tubazioni, in quanto bonne surveillanco du système
impianto ad alta pressione buon sistema di controlle
Dado el sistema de alta presión, pueden utilizarse Buen control del sistema
diametros de tubo pequeños
o robuste Bauteile aus Serienfertigung
o System auch nachträglich erweiterbar robust components from series production
system suitable for subsequent expansion composants robustes fabriqués en série
système extensible ultérieurement componenti robusti della produzione in serie
impianto estensibile anche successivamente Piezas de construcción sólidas provenientes de
EI sistema podrá ampliarse incluso posteriormente fabricación en serie

DELIMON: Beratung, Projektierung, Montage

Wir bieten den vollen Service

Consultancy, project planning and installation with DELIMON

We provide the full service

Discuter, étudier, installer avec DELIMON

Nous offrons un service intégral

DELIMON offre consulenza, progettazione, montaggio

Vi diamo I’assistenza completa

DELIMON les ofrece sus servicios de consulta, proyecto y montaje

Servicio total

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Fett-Zentralschmierung für Container-Hub- und Transportwagen
Central grease lubrication system for container lifting and handling trucks
Installation centrale de graisse pour des chariots élévateurs de conteneurs et de transport
DELIMON Zweileitungs-Hochdruckfett- DELIMON two line high pressure grease L’installation de graissage forcé à ligné
schmieranlage, die optimale Lösung für lubrication systems, the optimum so- double DELIMON, la solution optimale
Container-Hub- und Transportwagen. lution for container lifting and handling pour des chariots élévateurs de conte-
trucks. neurs et de transport.
A Fettschmierpumpe
Grease pump
Pompe de graissage
B Hauptspeiseleitung
Main feed line
Ligne principale d’alimentation
C Verteiler
Distributors
Distributeur
01 Fahrwerk mit Längsträger
Chassis with longitudinal beam
Chariot avec poutre longitudinale
02 Maschinenbühne
Machine platform
Plateforme de machine
03 Hubanlage
Lifting system
Elévateur
04 Bremsanlage
Brake system
Freins
05 Hydraulikanlage
Hydraulic system
Hydraulique
06 Lenkanlage
Steering system
Direction
07 Kraftstoffanlage
Fuel system
Installation pour carburant
08 Endmontage Bausatz
Installation set
Lot pour assemblage définitif
09 Spreadersatz
Spreader set
Jeu de palonnier-agrippeur
I Fahrwerk Drehzapfen
Traversing mechanism pivot
Train de roulement, pivot
II Lenkung Mitte
Steering centre
Conduite centre
III Lenkstange 1 - 4
Steering rod 1 to 4
Arbre de conduite 1 à 4
IV Zwischenlager GWB Stützen
Intermediate shaft bearing, support
Palier d’arbre intermédiaire, support
V Synchronwelle
Synchronization shaft
Arbre synchrône
VI Umlenkbock
Deflection bracket
Chevalet de renvoi
VII Gabelkopf
Fork head
Tête de chape
VIII Rollenbock
Pulley block
Support de poulies
IX Aufhängelaschen Jochbalken
Suspension bracket yoke beam
Patte de suspension
X Aufhängebolzen
Suspension pin
Axe de suspension
XI Spreaderklinken
Spreader pawl
Groupe de poulies
XII Kettenritzel Fig.1 Hauptleitung und Pumpe auf dem Container-Hub- und Transportwagen
Chain pinion Main lines and pump on the container lifting and handling truck
Pignon Lignes principales et pompe sur le chariot élévateur de conteneur et de transport

S 801 d, e, f / 1 HF
Die Zweileitungs-Hochdruckfettzentral-
schmieranlage ist die beste Lösung für
diesen Einsatzfall, da sie besonders für
rauhe Betriebsverhältnisse, weitver-
zweigte Anlagen und tiefe Temperatu-
ren konzipiert ist.
Die Dosiermenge kann dem unter-
schiedlichen Schmierstoffbedarf der
einzelnen Reibstellen in den verschie-
denen Anlagebereichen (Maschinen-
bühne, Spreader, Fahrwerk) auch nach-
träglich angepaßt werden.
The two line high pressure central
grease lubrication system is optimally
suited to this application, as it is
specially designed for rough service
conditions, wide-ranging installations
and low temperatures.
The metered quantity can be adapted to
suit the different grease requirements
of the individual friction points in the
various parts of the system (platform,
spreader, chassis), both before and
after installation,
L’installation centrale de graissage
forcé à ligné double est la meilleure
solution pour cette application, car elle
á été conçue spécialement pour une
situation d’exploitation difficile, des
installations très étendues et des
températures basses.
La quantité de dosage peut aussi être
adaptée ultérieurement aux besoins
différents des frottis individuels dans les
différentes zones de I’installation (plate-
forme de machines, palonnieragrippeur,
chariot)

o durch Auswahl der Verteilergröße
o durch Dosiermengeneinstellung
am Verteiler
o durch Veränderung der Schmier-
pausen
o by selection of the metering unit
size
o by setting the output quantity at
the metering unit
o by altering the lubrication intervals
o par choix de la grandeur du
distributeur
o par régulation de la quantité de
dosage au distributeur
o par modification des interruptions
pour le graissage

Die Schmieranlage läßt sich jederzeit
durch Anschluß weiterer Verteiler erwei-
tern oder durch Stillegen von Verteilern
oder Auslässen verkleinern und kann
dadurch leicht jeder Containerwagen-
ausführung angepaßt werden.
In die Anlage ist eine Systemüber-
wachung integriert.
Systeme dieser Art sind seit Jahrzehn-
ten weltweit im Ensatz und für schwere
Fette bis NLGI-Klasse 2 ausgelegt.
The lubrication system can be exten-
ded at any time by connecting further
metering units, or reduced in size by
blocking off metering units or outlets,
and can thus be adapted to suit any
type of container truck.
A system monitor is integrated into the
lubrication system.
Systems of this type have been in
service worldwide for decades, and are
designed for heavy grease up to NLGI
class 2.
L’installation de graissage peut être
élargie à tout moment par le raccord
d’autres distributeurs ou réduite par la
mise hors service de distributeurs ou de
sorties et comme cela elle peut être
facilement adaptée à tout modéle de
chariot conteneur.
Un monitorage de système à été intégré
dans I’installation.
Depuis des dizaines d’années, des
systèmes de cette sorte sont utilisés
dans le monde entier et conçus pour
des graisses lourdes jusqu’à la classe
NLGI 2.

Nachfolgend möchten wir Ihnen unsere leistungsstarken Hauptbauteile des Systems vorstellen.
We should like to present the main components of the powerful system as follows.
Dans la suite, nous aimerions vous présenter nos éléments pricipaux du système.

Pumpenaggregat BM - B
Pump unti type BM - B
Agrégat de pompe BM - B

Förderdruck einstellbar ______________________ max. 400 bar

Delivery pressure adjustable to ________________ max. 400 bar
Pression de refoulement reglable ______________ max. 400 bar

Motor _________________________________________ 24 V GS
(auf Wunsch auch andere Spannungen möglich)
Motor __________________________________________ 24 V DS
(other voltages also available on request)
Moteur _______________________________________ 24 V C.C.
(autres tensions possibles sur demande)

2
Dosierverteiler ZV - B
Metering unit ZV - B
Distributeur de dosage ZV - B

Fördermenge pro Hub und Auslaß

(einstellbar) ________________________ 0 … 1,5 / 0 … 3,0 cm3
Delivery per stroke and outlet
(adjustable) ________________________ 0 … 1.5 / 0 … 3.0 cm3
Refoulement à chaque élevation et échappement
(reglable) __________________________ 0 … 1,5 / 0 … 3,0 cm3

Betriebsdruck ______________________________ max. 400 bar

Operation pressure __________________________ max. 400 bar
Pression de service _________________________ max. 400 bar

Umsteuereinheit SA - K (4/2-Wegeventil)
Reversing unit SA - K (4/2-way valve)
Unite d’inversion SA - K (souupape à 4/2 voies)

Betriebsdruck ______________________________ max. 350 bar

Operation pressure __________________________ max. 350 bar
Pression de service _________________________ max. 350 bar

Umsteuerdruck einstellbar ___________________ 20 … 350 bar

Reversing pressure adjustable ________________ 20 … 350 bar
Pression d’inversion reglable _________________ 20 … 350 bar

Anschlußspannung des Grenztasters ____________ max. 500 V

Voltage supply to limit sensor ___________________ max. 500 V
Tension de raccord de l’interrupteur-limiteur ______ max. 500 V

Zweileiterelektronik : Die kompakte Steuereinheit aus dem Hause DELIMON

Two line electronic system : The compact control unit from DELIMON
Electronique à ligne double : L’unité compacte de contrôle de DELIMON

3
Funktionsbeschreibung
Nach Ablauf der Pausenzeit beginnt die
Fettschmierpumpe BM - B die Haupt-
leitung I aufzuspannen. Sobald der Um-
schaltdruck (eingestellt am 4/2-Wege-
ventil SA-K) erreicht wird, schaltet das
4/2-Wegeventil um. Die Hauptleitung I
wird entlastet, die Hauptleitung II solan-
ge aufgespannt, bis wieder der Um-
schaltdruck erreicht wird. Der Schmier-
vorgang ist beendet.
Der Impuls, abgegeben vom elektri-
schen Grenztaster des 4/2-Wegeventils
SA-K, bewirkt ein Abschalten der Pum-
pe. Nach Ablauf der eingestellten
Pausenzeit an der Elektrik beginnt der
Zyklus vom neuem.
Die Laufzeit der Anlage wird über-
wacht.
Durch Zentralschmierung verlängern
Sie die Lebensdauer Ihrer Geräte, er-
höhen die Einsatzbereitschaft und ver-
ringern die Ersatzteilkosten!
Bitte übersenden Sie uns einen Plan mit
den Schmierpunkten Ihrer Container-
hubwagen, damit wir Ihnen ein kosten-
loses Angebot erstellen, welches genau
auf den bei Ihnen im Einsatz befind-
lichen Wagentyp zugeschnitten ist.
Die Schmierstellenaufnahme kann auch
durch unseren technischen Außen-
dienst erfolgen.
Fordern Sie unsere Beratung an!
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Functional Description
At the end of the pause period, the
grease pump BM - B starts to apply
pressure to main line I. As soon as the
switchover pressure (set on 4/2-way
valve SA-K) is reached, the 4/2-way
valve changes position. The pressure
on main line I is released, and pressure
applied to main line II until the switch-
over pressure is again reached. The
lubricating sequence is complete.
The pulse emitted by the electric limit
sensor on the 4/2-way valve SA-K
causes the pump to be switched off.
When the pause period set on the
electrical system elapses, the cycles
starts again from the beginning.
The running time of the system is
monitored.
Central lubrication allows you to
prolong the working life of your
equipment, increase their reliability and
reduce spare parts costs.
Please send us a diagram with the
lubrication points on your container lift
trucks, so that we can provide you
free of charge with a quotation pre-
cisely tailored to suit the type of trucks
you have in service.
Our field technicians could also call
on you to note the lubrication points
concerned.
Do not hesitate to request our con-
sultancy service.
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Fonctionnement
Après le découlement du temps de
I’interruption, la pompe de graissage
BM - B commence à ouvrir la ligne
principale I. Quand la pression d’inver-
sion (reglé à la soupape de 4/2 voies
SA-K ) est atteinte, la soupape à 4/2
voies inverse. La ligne principale I est
déchargée, la ligne principale II est
ouverte jusqu’ à ce que la pression pour
I’inversion soit atteinte. Le procéde de
graissage est terminé.
L’impulsion donné par I’interrupteur-
limiteur électronique de la soupape à
4/2 voies SA-K cause I’ interruption de la
pompe. Après le découlement du
temps de I’interruption à I’electronique,
le cycle recommence. Le temps de
fonctionnement de I’installation est
contrôlé.
Par le graissage centrale vous pro-
longez la vie de votre équipement,
augmentez la disponibilité et réduisez
les charges pour les pièces de re-
change.
Veuillez nous envoyer s.v.p. un plan
avec les points de graissage de vos
chariots élévateurs de conteneurs, afin
que nous puissions vous donner un
offre gratuit qui est conçu pour le
modèle de chariot en utilisation chez
vous.
Les notes des points de graissage
peuvent aussi être prises par notre
service technique.
Demandez notre conseil.
8
Lubricating Oil Recirculation Systems
with the progressive distributors ZP-

Lubricating oil recirculation systems with the progressive distributors ZP- forcibly feed up to about one
hundred lubrication points successively with little fixed quantities of oil – even against high pressure.
The lubricating process for all connected lubrication points recurs as long as the pump supplies oil to the
lubricant distributors. The oil running off from the lubrication points is led back into the oil tank and brough
into circulation again.

Preferred fields of application

Gears, paper machines, punching machine, presses, machine tools.

Advantages of the oil recirculation systems with progressive distributors

• Exact metering for each lubrication point.
• Reliable lubrication even of lubrication points with high counterpressures as well as remote lubrication points.
• Low investment costs, little line cross sections
• Short pause times.
• Easy monitoring of functioning
• Compact design of the distributors.

Extent of supply
Oil tank, pump(s) and the most important accessory parts are combined to a space-saving aggregate.
We plan your lubrication system, deliver the whole accessories and effect the assembly on request.

Fig. 1 Lubricating oil recirculation system with progressive distributors ZP-

X 50 P 1 e / 1 0401HF page 1 - 3
Principle of operation
The oil tank takes up the oil running off from the lubrication points. In case of big tanks, parting walls increase the
stability and simultaneously build chambers in which the reflux oil can calm down, deaerate, dehydrate and cool
down. The size of the oil tank depends on the dwell time. This is the time being required to eliminate the impurities as
completely as possible from the oil. The oil tank includes connections for feed and return lines, deaeration, oil level
control and, if required, an additional heater.
An oil pump sucks in the oil and pushes it via the distributors to the lubrication points. The line pressure can be read
off from a pressure gauge, which can be switched on by hand, and adjusted to a desired value with the help of a
pressure relief valve. The dirt particles, which have not deposited in the tank so far, are retained by a filter.
To meter the quantities of oil supplied to the individual lubrication points, progressive distributors are used. These
distributors proportion the lubricant received in little volumes equally and progressively and in a given order via the
individual outlets to the connected lubrication points. If the lubricating process is interrupted by switching off of the
pump or by shutting off the pressure line, the lubricating process restarts at this point with a new switching on.

Distributors (for details, please refer to brochure 35541 P1e; 35542 P1e)
The progressive distributors ZP-A and ZP-B are assembled from individual segments in accordance with the unit
construction system and as per customer’s order. Each distributor segment has a piston for the control of the
lubricant.
During the piston stroke, the cylinder space made free by the piston fills up with lubricant, at the same time, the other
piston end displaces the lubricant to a lubrication point.
The piston of a distributor segment ZP-A displaces 0.2 cm³ of lubricant with one stroke. The piston of a distributor
segment ZP-B displaces (dependent on the piston diameter) 0.5; 1.2 or 2.0 cm³ of lubricant with one stroke. All
distributor segments ZP-B have – regardless of the piston size – the same outside measurements.
The output volume per outlet of the distributors ZP-A can be increased by organizing cross connections of outlets. In
case of the distributors ZP-B, the output volume per outlet can be increased by means of cross connections and
longitudinal connections of outlets. For this purpose, the manufacturer removes appropriate seals from the inside of
the distributor.

Pipework
The feed lines to the ZP-A distributors and the lubricant lines from the ZP-A distributors to the lubrication points are to
be manufactured from 6 mm pipes. Suitable as feed lines to the distributors ZP-B are 10 mm pipes and as lubricant
lines 6, 8 and 10 mm pipes. If it deals with movable lubrication points, one has to provide high-pressure hoses instead
of the pipes.
Steel pipes are dimensioned according to the flow rates and operating conditions. For little flow rates, we use
seamless drawn pipes with appropriate screwed pipe joints. For big flow rates, we use seamless steel pipes with
welding neck flanges. After installation, the pipelines have to be cleaned by pickling and flushing.

I = main distributor
1, 2, 3 = lubrication points
A, B, C = final distributor
V = delivery rate/h
VI = VA + VB + VC
VA = V1 + V2 + V3 + V4 + V5
When for example distributor I delivers 20 %
of volume VI into distributor A, and distribu-
tor A 30% of the volume VA into outlet 2,
the result is the following:
V2 = 0.3 VA
VA = 0.2 VI
V2 = 0.3 x 0.2 VI
= 0.06 VI

Fig. 2 Delivery scheme

X 50 P 1 e / 1 0401HF page 2 - 3
Oil reflux lines
The oil reflux lines have to be dimensioned according to the flow rates and led to the tank with an as constant as
possible slope of 3 to 10 %.

Oil recirculation aggregates AG-E

The oil recirculation aggregates AG-E are delivered in a “ready for installation“ condition. They include:
• 1 oil tank without or with electrical heater
• 1 or 2 feed pumps (the 2nd pump being intended as stand-by pump)
• 1 pressure-reducing valve
• 1 duplex filter

Electrical equipment
For the control of the lubricating oil recirculation system, a switch case is provided for practical reasons near the oil
recirculation aggregate.
Possible versions:
• Switching on and off of the lubrication system by hand.
• Switching on and off of the lubrication system by the machine to be lubricated.
• Appropriate for systems with and without tank heater
• For systems without or with stand-by pump.
• For electrical checks of functioning.

Control facilities
Electrical monitoring of the min. flow rate
Damages at the feed pump, a too low oil level in the tank or a clogged filter result in the fact that the oil delivery does
not take place or that the flow rate falls below the set-point. For the monitoring of the min. flow rate, one can install a
flow indicator with variable switching point behind the filter into the main line. As long as the desired oil volume flows
through the line, a white lamp lights up. When the oil volume falls below the desired value, a red warning lamp lights
up and an acoustic signal is transmitted simultaneously.

Electrical monitoring of the min. pressure

Should a line or a distributor be blocked for some reason, the pressure in the line will increase. Exceeding of the max.
pressure is indicated optionally via a contact making pressure gauge or via a pressure switch. Both appliances are
installed behind the filter in the main line. Damages are indicated by a signal lamp and a horn.

Visual and electrical monitoring of the distributor functioning

Each progressive distributor is furnished with a motion indicator, which makes the motions of a distributor piston
visible from the outside. As all pistons of a distributor system depend on each other in their functioning, it is sufficient
to observe the double stroke of one motion indicator as proof of the functioning of the whole distributor system. When
the distributor functioning is monitored electrically, a signal lamp is caused to flash up and to be extinguished by turns
or a pulse counter is actuated.

Electrical flow control

Some damages, which may occur behind the distributors, are not signalized by the control facilities mentioned so far,
e. g. pipe fractures of the lubricant lines. To ensure that such damages are signalized, too, one can provide flow
control instruments directly before the lubrication points. If the planned quantity of oil is not delivered to the lubrication
point in a given period of time, an acoustic signal sounds. At the same time, the warning lamp indicates which
lubrication point is disturbed.
In view of the great expenditure involved, the use of an electrical flow control instrument will remain limited to
particularly important lubrication points. In this case, however, one can do without the other control facilities.

Visual flow control of the oil reflux volume

If the drain lines from the lubrication points are easy to check, one can provide a visual flow control with falling-drop
indicators.

X 50 P 1 e / 1 0401HF page 3 - 3
Lubricating Oil-Recirculation Systems

For the continuous supply of small up to very important quantities of oil to bearings and gears being
exposed to a great heat influence or producing great friction heat by themselves.

Preferential fields of application

Roll stands, roller tables, gears, steam and gas turbines, large motors and gears, high-capacity compressors,
generators, paper machines, rubber and plastic processing machines, calenders.

Extent of supply
DELIMON lubricating oil-recirculation systems are available for up to the greatest oil flow rates. If it deals with small
systems, oil tank, pump(s), filters and the most important accessories are combined to a
space-saving aggregate; if it deals with major systems, the different assembly groups are placed according to the
local space conditions. In this case, too, pumps and accessories are assembled to aggregates on base frames, if
possible.
DELIMON plans its lubricating oil-recirculation systems, delivers the complete accessories and carries out the
installation on request.

Fig. 1 Lubricating oil-recirculation system

X 50 P 2 e / 1 0701HF Page 1 of 4
Oil tanks
The size of the oil tanks depends on the oil-circulation volume. The oil tank capacity shall correspond to approx. 15 to
50 times the pump delivery rate per minute and depends on the operating conditions. If the oil can absorb big
quantities of dirt, water or air, it is necessary to provide a big oil tank to ensure that the foreign matters can be
eliminated due to a long dwell time of the oil in the oil tank.
Dependent on the operating conditions and the size of the oil tank, the oil tank is subdivided into two or more
chambers.
As basic equipment, each oil tank is provided with deaeration filters, the connections being required for return and
suction line, oil level indicator and heater connections.
All oil tanks are furnished with inclined bottom and drain sleeves so that water and mud can be drained. For cleansing
purposes, smaller oil tanks are provided with removable lids, bigger oil tanks are provided with manholes.
Oil tanks are supplied in rectangular or round weldment. Their interior is sandblasted and treated with slushing oil.
Unless special wishes are expressed, the outside of the oil tank is painted grey.
If it is necessary to install an oil tank heater, one can choose between steam, hot-water or electric operation. For
smaller oil tanks, we basically provide electrical heating. In case of bigger oil tanks, we provide the heating type as per
customer’s request.

Pumps
For smaller lubricating oil-recirculation systems, we mainly use gear pumps. If highly viscous oils are used, we provide
screw pumps.
The lubricating oil-recirculation systems in standard version are equipped with one pump only. If the system shall work
with a greater reliability and the failure of a pump could result in operating troubles, it is necessary to install a stand-by
pump.

Overflow valve
To prevent the pump or the system from being damaged in case of a line blocking, an overflow valve is placed directly
behind the pump. In case of an exceeding of the max. allowed pressure (is adjustable for each lubricating oil-
recirculation system), this valve opens and leads the overflowing oil back to the oil tank.

Filter
The reflux oil carries along dirt particles, which shall deposit in the oil tank. A part of the very fine dirt keeps floating in
the oil tank and is sucked up by the pump. To make sure that the oil reaches the lubrication points as clean as
possible, all aggregates being ready for installation are provided with a twin-sieve filter in order to make possible a
purification during operation.
To enable the user to recognize the degree of soiling in time, before and behind the filters, there are often installed
pressure gauges, differential pressure gauges or soiling indicators with electrical contact and connections before and
behind the filter.

Pressure control valve

With the pressure control valve, which is installed behind the filter, one can adjust the system pressure. When the
adjusted pressure is exceeded, the pressure control valve opens, and the overflowing oil flows back into the oil tank.

Nonreturn valve
On the occasion of the installation of the stand-by pump, the nonreturn valve is installed directly behind the pump and
has the task to prevent the feed lines from draining off.

Pressure gauge
Depending on the size of the system, pressure gauges are installed behind the pump, before and behind the filter,
before the lubrication points or at other distinctive points for reading off the pressure.
If differences in pressure shall be signalized to the control centre, contact making pressure gauges have to be
installed. With the contact making pressure gauges, one can also effect switching functions as for example the
automatic start of the stand-by pump, release of a warning etc.

X 50 P 2 e / 1 0701HF Page 2 of 4
Oil cooler
If the oil carries away heat from the lubrication points, the normal radiating surface of the oil tank is not sufficient. Then
oil coolers are used. In most cases, cooling is made with water. The technical design of the cooler is dependent on
the cooling power required and on the oil and water temperatures involved.
We recommend the use of a vertical cooler; horizontal coolers should only be used when this is required due to the
constructional conditions.
Depending on the nature of the water (fresh water or seawater), cooling pipes of steel, high-strength brass or V2A in
different qualities are used.
Depending on the oil or water pressure, either the water or the oil is led through the cooling pipes. In the standard
version, water is led through the cooling pipes.
For reading off the temperature before and behind the cooler, thermometers are installed.
The regulation of the quantity of water supplied is effected manually by means of sliders or automatically with the help
of a thermoregulator.

Flow meter
Precondition for a reliable lubrication is the precise adjustment and observation of the oil flow rate quite near the
lubrication points. The flow meters used by us are intended for flow rates of 0.01 to 4.0 l/min.
Flow meters can be combined in groups of 1 to 8 lubrication points. The flow meters work according to the flow
principle. The position of the floating piston indicates the flow rate. An adjusting screw in the lower part of the flow
meter has the effect of a throttle and changes the passage cross section and thus the flow rate, too.
The flow meters can also be intended for an electric remote control. If the oil flow discontinues as a result of a fault in
the feed line, the floating piston sinks to the bottom. At the same time, a solenoid switch closes the circuit for the
actuation of the warning system.

Stop plug
If the oil feed shall take place without monitoring and subsequent adjustment of the flow rate, the installation of a stop
plug is the easiest and cheapest possibility of metering oil rates of more than 0.5 l/min and lubrication point. For less
important oil rates we supply stop plugs, which are integrated in screw-in fittings, for more important oil rates, we
deliver orifice plates, which are adapted to the case of requirement.

Contacting thermometers
If a warning should be released in case of an exceeding of the allowed temperatures or a lower deviation from the
same, the installation of a contacting thermometer is necessary, particularly behind the oil cooler.

Flow indicator
To control the oil flow in the feed line, one can provide flow indicators directly behind the aggregate in the feed line or
directly at the lubrication point. When the oil delivery stops, these flow indicators generate an electric pulse, which
actuates a warning system.

Contact making pressure gauges

For the monitoring of the min. and max. pressure, contact making pressure gauges are used in the oil cellar at
distributor stations and possibly before the individual consumers.

Pipework
The steel pipes are dimensioned according to the flow rates and operating conditions. For less important flow rates,
we use seamless drawn pipes with appropriate screwed pipe joints. For important flow rates, we use seamless steel
pipes with welding neck flanges. After installation, the pipelines have to be cleaned by pickling and flushing.

Oil return pump station

If there is not enough slope for the oil return line, one or several automatic oil return pump stations have to be
provided. In this case, the back-flowing oil is led to an intermediate tank and from there back to the main tank.

X 50 P 2 e / 1 0701HF Page 3 of 4
Pressure tank
If in case of a power failure or similar the oil recirculation lubrication has still to be kept in operation for some time to
ensure that the bearings to be lubricated are supplied with oil even during the slowing-down time, it is necessary to
provide a pressure tank. In the pressure tank, there is stored a sufficient amount of oil under pressure for the slowing-
down time, which is delivered to the lubrication point in case of requirement.

Oil purification system

The impurities contained in the reflux oil, particularly dirt and water, have to be eliminated by separation from time to
time. The separation station can either be designed as stationary station for a given system or as mobile station for
several lubricating oil-recirculation systems.
Depending on the operating conditions and degree of soiling of the oil, a permanent separation in the shunt or a
temporary separation from tank to tank takes place.
The separation station consists of the heating, which is operated by hot-water, vapour or electrically, as well as of the
gear pump, oil separator, pipework and sliders.

Electrical equipment
The electrical equipment depends on the size and circumference of the mechanical part of the lubricating oil-
recirculation system.
In the easiest case, a protective motor switch will be sufficient. To avoid operating errors, it is appropriate to
commission the lubricating oil-recirculation system before or at the latest together with the machine to be lubricated.
For particularly stressed bearings, we recommend to activate the lubricating oil-recirculation system prior to the
starting of the machine to be lubricated and to keep it in operation a for a certain time after switching off of the
machine to be lubricated.
If a monitoring of the lubricating oil-recirculation system by a contact making pressure gauge, flow meter or flow
indicator is desired, it is essential to also extend the electrical equipment accordingly.
For smaller systems, we deliver the electrical equipment in standard version. In this case, all appliances are integrated
in a switch case and readily wired.
The following standard switch cases are available:
1. Manual switching on and off of the lubricating oil-recirculation system or automatic switching on and off by the
machine to be lubricated.
2. As above, but with a monitoring station.
3. Manual switching on and off or automatic switching on and off by the machine to be lubricated with adjustable
pretravel and overtravel time of the machine to be lubricated and a montitoring station.
4. Manual switching on and off or switching on and off by the machine to be lubricated with two or more
monitoring stations.

Arrangement of the lubricating oil-recirculation system

To obtain a sufficient slope for the return line, lubricating oil-recirculation systems are preferentially erected in the
cellar under the machines to be lubricated. In the planning phase and during the assembly, one has to care for the
possibility of a relatively easy installation and removal of the individual parts.
When it deals with major systems, take into account that heavier parts will have to be transported to the place of
erection by a crane. Provide sufficiently dimensioned openings in the ceilings.
To ensure a clean and quick filling of the oil tank, one should endeavour to pump the oil directly from the tank lorry to
the tank. Furthermore, one should take precautions to lead the waste oil back to the tank lorry in the easiest possible
way. For the realization of this, we recommend the installation of a central lubricant supply system.

X 50 P 2 e / 1 0701HF Page 4 of 4
9
Lubrication unit WA - L
APPLICATION
The WA-L lubrication unit produces oil-fog for the
lubrication of bearings and gearboxes. With this unit,
one can supply lubrication points with lubricant via
standard or heavy-duty nozzles.
The capacity runs from 100 to 1500 L.U. according to
the type of installation and size of connection. An
environment-friendly operation of oil re-classifying
lubrication systems is only ensured with the use of
heavy-duty nozzles for the reclassification of the oil-fog
produced by the re-classifying unit.

FEATURES
• All appliances and electrical facilities belonging to
the lubrication unit are well arranged in a space-
saving manner in a closable housing.
• When the housing is closed, it is not possible to
change any adjustments. TECHNICAL DATA
• The machine or plant to be lubricated can Operating voltage : ...................................... 220 V; 50 Hz
automatically switch on and off the functional Permissible primary pressure p1 : .................... 4 - 10 bar
procedure. Ambient temperature : ............................................ 50o C
• Operating pressure, oil reclassifying pressure, oil Lubricants which
consumption and oil temperature are sensitively and can be used : ....... lubrication oils without solid additives
steplessly adjustable and easy to check. Oil viscosity . ........... ISO VG 7 to ISO VG 460 DIN 51519
• The adjusted oil and/or air temperature is kept Power consumption :
constant with the help of a thermostat, which is Oil heating : ........................................................... 350 W
integrated in the oil tank. Air heating . ............................................................ 800 W
• Additional visual and acoustic warning signals for the electrical control : .................................................... 50 W
oil reclassifying pressure and oil level can be Weight : ................................................................... 54 kg
connected.
• A connection for a filling facility is provided at the oil
tank.
• Usable for heavy-duty nozzles and standard nozzles.
Owing to their different pressure ranges, they can
however not be used together within one and the
same system.

TECHNICAL DATA (CONTINUED)

L. U. Ratings Pipe connections Heating Reservoir capacity Code no.
High output standard compressed oil-fog for
reclassifier reclassifier air line line absolute usable
LE LE ltr.
oil 15112 - 1511
360 - 1000 100 - 300 R1
oil + air 15112 - 1531
R 1/2 17 7,5
oil 15112 - 1521
720 - 1500 250 - 1100 R2
oil + air 15112 - 1541
Example for ordering : 1 WA-L lubrication unit, Code no. 15112 - 1541

15112 P 1 e / 1 0201HF
1
 DIMENSIONS (mm)

1 Water drain
3 Electric control cabinet
4 Compressed-air filter
5 Electrical control switch
6 Pressure gauge for working
pressure
7 Pressure gauge for oil-fog pressure
8 Compressed-air inlet
9 Red warning light for oil-fog
pressure
10 Red warning light for oil level
12 Yellow warning light for operation
13 Preselection switch for oil
temperature
14 Solenoid valve
15 Pressure regulator
16 Micro-fog lubricator
17 Sight feed dome
19 Oil-fog outlet
20 Filler plug
21 Oil adjustment screw
22 Electrical oil level control
23 Additional-air adjustment screw
24 Oil level indicator
25 Oil heating
26 Oil drain
27 Filling nipple
28 Switch for air-temperature
Fig. 1 Lubrication unit with air heating, view with front panel opened

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The compressed air entering the unit is first freed from
impurities and condensation in the filter unit (4). The
removal of water takes place automatically through the
drain.
After this, the purified compressed air passes the
solenoid valve (14) and gets to the pressure regulator
(15), where the operating pressure of the oiler is
adjusted. The operating pressure is indicated by the
pressure gauge (6).
The cleaned and pressurized air passes through the
venturi section (30) of the micro-fog lubricator (16) and
creates a pressure difference that causes the oil to flow
from the reservoir (32) through the sight feed dome (17)
into the venturi section.

2
 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION (CONTINUED)
Thus the oil is converted into an air-borne suspension. In
the versions with the air heating (22), the compressed
air is heated up before it flows through the micro-fog
lubricator in order to achieve a better quality of oil-mist.
The re-classifying flow passes the hollow screw (29) at
high speed, and approx. 95 - 98 % (depending on the oil
type) of the delivered oil quantity falls back into the
reservoir (32). Only the finest droplets, which can be
carried over great distances, reach the outlet of the oiler.

ELECTRICAL CONTROL SYSTEM

With the help of the integrated electrical control system,
the following operating modes are possible for the
lubrication unit:
Fig. 2 Working diagram of the lubrication unit WA-L
• Switching on and switching off
• Preheating of the oil reserve
• Switching on and switching off in dependence on the
machine or plant to be lubricated (Ke contact)
• Continuous operation
• Indication of the operating condition
• Check and potential-free contact making in case of
fault alarm for oil reclassifying pressure and oil level.

Fig. 3 Cross section of the micro-fog luricator

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 102052 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon
3 Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Maintenance units WA - P
Maintenance units
• filter, regulate and oil the compressed air • spare maintenance costs and the trouble
involved
• prolong the life of pneumatic appliances
• reduce compressed air costs
• reduce standstill times of machines and
appliances and thus increase production • are suitable for all commercial lubricating oils
based on mineral oils/service viscosity 20 -
250 mm2s.

Maintenance units with standard oil-mist lubricator

FC - A DC - X OC - P FA - A DB - X OP -A

Pipe Pore Service Service Usable Dimensions (mm) Individual units double Code no.
connec- diameter pressure pressure bowl nipple
tion primary secondary capacity of
oiler
G µm max. bar bar ltr. a b h h1 l Filter Regulator Oiler 2 pieces
3-parted with standard oil-mist lubricator
FC - A DC - X OC - P
1/8 73491 - 1111 15521 - 1521
12418 - 1111 13331 - 2511 11316 - 1111
FC - A DC - X OC - P
1/4 25 - 50 10 0- 8 0,065 57 26 130 44 195 73491 - 1121 15521 - 1541
12418 - 1121 13331 - 2521 11316 - 1121
FC - A DC - X OC - P
3/8 73491 - 1131 15521 - 1561
12418 - 1131 13331 - 2551 11316 - 1131
FA - A DB - X OP - A
1/4 245 73491 - 1121 15521 - 1411
12411 - 5231 13522 - 0821 11311 - 1221
0,13 71,5 41,5 156 69
FA - A DB - X OP - A
3/8 50 - 75 241 73491 - 1131 15521 - 2631
12411 - 5331 13522 - 0831 11311 - 1231
FA - C DB - X OP - B
1/2 16 0 - 10 0,22 84 48,5 162 86 288 73491 - 1141 15521 - 3851
12415 - 1431 13522 - 0841 11312 - 1241
FT - H DT - X OT - N
3/4 355 73461 - 5554 15521 - 1621
12419 - 1131 13522 - 3421 11321 - 3111
25 - 50 0,2 80 49 260 49
FT - H DT - X OT - N
1 350 73461 - 5564 15521 - 1641
12419 - 1141 13522 - 3521 11321 - 3121

Pressure gauges belong to the extent of supply.

15521/22 P 1e / 01 0295 prov. HF

 Maintenance units with microfog oiler

FA - A DB - X OA -P

Pipe Pore Service Service Usable Dimensions (mm) Individual units double Code no.
connec- diameter pressure pressure bowl nipple
tion primary secondary capacity of
oiler
G µm max. bar bar ltr. a b h h1 l Filter Regulator Oiler 2 pieces
3-parted with microfog oiler
DC - X
0- 8 56 37 210 15521 - 1221
FA - A 13331 - 2521 OA - P
1/4 73491 - 1121
12411 - 5231 DB - X 11112 - 2221
0,09 156 41,5 245 15521 - 1421
13522 - 0821
50 - 75 71,5 41,5
FA - A DB - X OA - P
3/8 241 73491 - 1131 15521 - 2641
12411 - 5331 13522 - 0831 11112 - 2231
16
FA - C DB - X OG - P
1/2 0 - 10 0,13 84 48,5 162 46 288 73491 - 1141 15521 - 3861
12415 - 1431 13522 - 0841 11161 - 1141
FT - H DT - X OT - P
3/4 355 73491 - 1151 15521 - 1821
12419 - 1131 13522 - 3421 11162 - 3111
25 - 50 0,2 80 49 260 49
FT - H DT - X OT - P
1 350 73491 - 1161 15521 - 1841
12419 - 1141 13522 - 3521 11162 - 3121

Pressure gauges belong to the extent of supply.

List of printscripts for individual units

Filter Printscript no. Standard oil-mist lubricator Printscript no.
FC - A 12418 P 2e OC - P 11316 P 1e
FA - A 12411 P 1e OP - A 11311 P 1e
FA - C 12415 P 2e OP - B 11312 P 1e
FT - H 12419 P 1e OT - N 11321 P 1e
Regulator Printscript no. Microfog oiler Printscript no.
DC - X 13331 P 1e OA - P 11112 P 1e
DB - X 13521/22 P 2e OG - P 11161 P 6e
DT - X 13521/22 P 3e OT - P 11162 P 1e
Filter regulator Printscript no.
FR - X 16212/13 P 1e
DF - X 16213 P 1e

2
 Maintenance units with standard oil-mist lubricator Maintenance units with microfog oiler

FR - X OC - P DF - X OA -P

Pipe Pore Service Service Usable Dimensions (mm) Individual units double Code no.
connection diameter pressure pressure bowl nipple
primary secondary capacity of
oiler
G µm max. bar bar ltr. a b h h1 l Filter regulator Oiler 1 piece
2-parted with standard oil-mist lubricator
FR - X OC - P
1/8 73491 - 1111 15522- 1521
16212 - 2411 11316 - 1111
FR - X OC - P
1/4 25 - 50 10 0- 8 0,065 57 20 130 68 115 73491 - 1121 15522 - 1541
16212 - 2421 11316 - 1121
FR - X OC - P
3/8 73491 - 1131 15522 - 1561
16212 - 2461 11316 - 1131
DF - X OP - A
1/4 73491 - 1121 15522 - 1211
16213 - 1051 11311 - 1221
0,13 42 178
DF - X OP - A
3/8 50 - 75 16 0 - 16 122 165 135 73491 - 1131 15522 - 1431
16213 - 1151 11311 - 1231
DF - X OP - B
1/2 0,23 43 187 73491 - 1141 15522 - 2111
16213 - 1251 11312 - 1241
2-parted with microfog oiler
DF - X OA - P
1/4 73491 - 1121 15522 - 1221
16213 - 1051 11112 - 2221
0,13 42 178
DF - X OA - P
3/8 50 - 75 16 0 - 16 122 165 135 73491 - 1131 15522 - 1441
16213 - 1151 11112 - 2231
DF - X OG - P
1/2 0,23 43 187 73491 - 1141 15522 - 2121
16213 - 1251 11161 - 1141

Pressure gauges belong to the extent of supply.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Öl-Verdichterdüsen und Verteilerleisten
für Rückverdichtersysteme
Reclassifier Nozzles and Manifolds
Micro-fog lubrication for bearings, gears, cams and other moving parts
WIRKUNGSWEISE
1. Erzeugung von schmierfähigem (nassen) Ölnebel
aus Mikronebel
Der im Mikronebel-Öler erzeugte und anschließend in
Rohr- bzw. Schlauchleitungen transportierte Ölnebel besteht
vorwiegend aus Ölteilchen in einer Größe unter 2 µm. Dieser
Nebel läßt sich gut transportieren, besitzt jedoch eine schlechte
Benetzungsfähigkeit. Aufgabe der Verdichterdüsen ist deshalb,
die schwebefähigen Tropfen des Ölnebels kurz vor den Reib -
stellen zusammenzuführen und niederzuschlagen, um einen
möglichst geschlossenen Ölfilm zu erzeugen.
2. Zuteilung bestimmter Schmierstoffmengen für die
Schmierstellen
Lager verschiedener Größen oder ungleicher Betriebs- be-
dingungen benötigen unterschiedliche Schmierstoffmengen.
Daher muß eine individuelle Zuteilung der Ölnebel- bzw. Öl-
menge möglich sein. Auch diese Aufgabe übernehmen die Ver-
dichterdüsen. Die durch eine Düse fließende Ölnebelmenge
und damit die im Lager vorhandene Schmierstoffmenge ist ab-
hängig vom Düsenquerschnitt und dem Ölnebeldruck. Je grö-
ßer der Bohrungsdurchmesser der Düse ist, um so größer ist die
durchtretende Luft- und Ölmenge.
3. Einhaltung eines Überdruckes in der Ölnebel-
leitung
Der Druck in den Ölnebelanlagen ergibt sich aus dem Ver-
hältnis der zu- und abströmenden Luftmengen. Diese wiederum
sind abhängig vom Arbeitsdruck und Querschnitt des Ölers und
dem Gesamtquerschnitt aller Düsen und ihrer Ausführung. All
diese Einflußgrößen sind so zu wählen, daß sich in der Ölnebel-
anlage der Druck einstellt, der dem Arbeitsbereich der gewähl-
ten Düsenart (Bild 2) entspricht.
Bild 1. Hochleistungs - Verdichterdüse
Fig. 1 High efficiency reclassifiers
MODE OF OPERATION
1. To create wet oil mist from micro-fog for
lubricating
The oil mist generated inside the micro-fog lubricator which
is conveyed with air over long distances through the pipelines
consists, in essence, of the finer oil particles of 2 micron or less
which remain airborne. This airborne mist can be easily trans-
ported, but its lubrication characteriatics are poor, so that reclas-
sifiers are needed and connected downstrream in order to sepa-
rate air from oil at the very friction point, i.e. condensing the
small particles into larger wet particles which impinge on to the
bearing surface.
2. To measure positively an exact quantity of oil
Because by the nature of the duty of the machine, by the
bearing size, and last but not least according to the operation
conditions the oil consumption is likely to vary, so that the
amount of lubricant is to be proportionally distributed to suit indi-
vidual requirements.
The air/oil flow consumption is consequently directly pro-
portional to the total area of the reclassifier bores and the mani-
fold pressure, viz. the larger the bore diameter, the higher the
air/oil flow passing through it.
3. To keep the over-pressure in the feed line constant
Pressure prevailing in the oil-fog generating system is pro-
portionally to the supply of compressed air, which, in turn, rela-
tes to the operating pressure ratings and the total area of all re-
classifier bores and sizes. For the purpose of designing a system
to suit the lubrication requirements of bearings all these decisive
factors are to be taken into account to be able to assess the pres-
sure ratings adapted to the appropriate value of the reclassifier
size (Fig. 2).
Bild 2. Luftdurchsatz verschiedener Verdichterdüsen in Ab-
hängigkeit von der Bohrung und dem Ölnebeldruck.
Fig. 2 Air flow ratings obtained by the selection of different
reclassifier nozzles dependent on bore dia. and oil fog
pressure.
63 / 73600 P 1 d +e / 4. 0600HF
Ersatz für / Replacement for 3. 0696HF
 AUSFÜHRUNGSFORMEN
Hochleistungsdüsen
Grundsätzlich sollten heute in Neuanlagen nur noch Hochlei-
stungsdüsen eingesetzt werden. Gegenüber herkömmlichen Ver-
dichterdüsen gewährleisten diese eine bessere Nutzung des
Schmierstoffes und vermeiden eine Umweltverschmutzung und Be-
lästigung des Personals.
In einer Hochleistungsdüse findet die Rückverdichtung in einer
Kugelpackung aus losen geschichteten Aluminiumkugeln statt. Vie-
le enge Kanäle sorgen für hohe Strömungsgeschwindigkeit der Par-
tikel innerhalb der Packung. Außerdem dient jede Kugel in der Pa-
ckung gleichzeitig als Prallfläche zur Ablagerung niedergeschlagenen
Öls. Da die lose geschichteten Kugeln ihre Lage verändern können,
besitzt die Düse eine Art Selbstreinigungseffekt. Der Kanal, der durch
niedergeschlagenes Öl von Verstopfung bedroht ist, kann sich vergrö-
ßern, indem die ihne begrenzenden Kugeln durch die veränderten
strömungsmechanischen Kraftwirkungen ihre Lage zueinander verän-
dern. Eine solche Hochleistungsdüse gibt den rückverdichteten Öl-
nebel als schmierfähigen “Makrotropfen” am Düsenausgang ab.
Wirkungsgrade zwischen 95 und 99% sind seid Einführung von
Hochleistungsdüsen üblich. Durch diesen extrem hohen Abschei-
degrad können Öler ca. 40 % mehr Lagerstellen mit Ölnebel ver-
sorgen, als es bei Verwendung normaler Verdichterdüsen möglich
ist. Bei gleicher Ölabgabe verringert sich die Luftdurchflußmenge
um ca. 30%. Mit Hilfe dieser - von uns entwickelten und in vielen
Ländern patentierten - Hochleistungsdüse läßt sich der Streunebel-
anteil um eine Zehnerpotenz senken, so daß in gut eingestellten
Anlagen nur noch 1% des zur Schmierstelle geförderten Öles als
Verlust aus den Lager entweicht. Der zusätzlich abgeschiedene Öl-
nebel stammt aus dem unteren Bereich des Tropfenspektrums, so
daß der dann noch verbleibende Restnebel maximale Tropfen-
durchmesser weit unter 1 µm aufweist. Die Betriebsdrücke für Hochlei-
stungsdüsen betragen 80 bis 140 mbar, gelegendlich auch mehr.
ACHTUNG !
Wegen der unterschiedlichen Arbeitsdrücke dürfen
Normal- und Hochleistungsdüsen niemals in einer
gemeinsamen Anlage eingebaut und betrieben werden.
Die Umstellung bestehender Anlagen von Normal- auf Hoch-
leistungsdüsen bedingt eine Neueinstellung der Betriebsparameter
der Anlage.
Auf Anfrage werden auch Düsen mit unterschiedlichen Kugelgrö-
ßen geliefert, welche sowohl makrofeine Öltröpfchen als auch er-
wünschten Restnebel abgeben.
Normalausführung
Normale Verdichterdüsen werden hauptsächlich nur noch für
den Ersatz in bestehenden Anlagen empfohlen. Sie bestehen aus
einer Düse, die im Vergleich zur Ölnebelleitung einen verengten
Querschnitt besitzt und dadurch eine Erhöhung der Ölnebelge-
schwindigkeit innerhalb der Düse bewirkt. Die in der Düse bereits
vorverdichteten Ölnebeltropfen werden durch ihre hohe Austritts-
geschwindigkeit aus der Düse in die Lage versetzt, innerhalb des
Lagers einen Schmierfilm aufzubauen. Der Wirkungsgrad dieser
Düsen, d.h. der prozentuale Anteil des an die Reibstellen abge-
schiedenen Öles, ist von den Eigenschaften des Öles und von der
Anlage selbst abhängig. Bei sehr hohen Anforderungen an die
Sauberkeit der an die Atmosphäre abgegebenen Luft kann der Wir-
kungsgrad der normalen Verdichterdüsen u.U. zu niedrig sein. Aus
Gründen des Umweltschutzes empfehlen wir nach Möglichkeit die
Verwendung von Hochleistungsdüsen.
Der optimale Betriebsdruck liegt in Anlagen mit Normaldüsen zwi-
schen 20 und 50 m bar.
2
RECLASSIFIER TYPES
High efficiency reclassifiers
reclassifiers having a nozzle - like fitting consist of a packing
of extremely small metal pellets causing the air-borne micro-fog to
pass through the nozzle by constantly changing its flow direction by
creating flow restriction father than passing straight through into one
direction.
Micro-fog particles from an oil coating on the pellets which sub-
sequently impinges upon the bearing surfaces.
The outstanding fearture of high-efficiency reclassifiers is that it
is ensured that 99% of the oil particles contained in the oil mist
is positively directed on to the bearing surface that elimination
stray fog and minimizing environmental contamination into the at-
mosphere.
Thanks to this high degree of separation an increase of 40% in
the number of bearing oints is achieved as compared to the use of
standard reclassifiers.
Despite the fact that the quantity of oil consumed remains al-
most the same as compared to standard reclassifiers, the air con-
sumption will decrease down to less than 30%.
The operating pressure in a system with high efficiency reclassi-
fiers ranges between 80 and 140 mbar.
ATTENTION !
Never use standard- and high efficiency reclassifiers
together on the same system.
The reason is that the pressure ratings are different.
Conclusion: Everywhere high efficiency reclassifiers are fitted
in a system it is ensured both to help safe lubricant and combat pol-
lution, a potential nuisance for your personnel.
Upon request, we supply reclassifier nozzles with differing pellet si-
zes designed to discharge both macrooil particles and a residual oil
fog, wherever practical and desired.
Standard design
Standard reclassifiers consisting of one nozzle, whose total
bore section is proportionally smaller in comparsion to the diameter
of the pipe line, thus creating an increase in the oil-fog velocity insi-
de the nozzle.
The previously pre-classified oil-fog particles discharged per-
mit, thanks to their high velocity, the nozzle to build up a protective
film of clean oil covering the bearing surface throughly and continu-
ously. Its efficiency, i.e. the percentage of oil particles caused by the
reclassifier to “wet out” into the bearing surface, is largely depen-
dent upon both the properties of the oil and the system as a whole.
Meeting this requirement is very important. In some cases, however
the application of standard reclassifiers is likely to be inadequate,
which might give cause for concern, when stress is laid on the impor-
tance of ensuring that the anount of fog which escapes into the open
air will not exceed the permissible “Threshhold Limit Value”.
We thus recommend to have recourse to our high efficiency reclas-
sifiers.
 Größe Hochleistungsdüsen Anschlußwerte in LE bei den Ölertypen bzw. Schmiereinheiten abhängig vom Rohranschluß
Size High efficiency reclassifiers LE ratings and lubro-generating units dependent on pipe connection thread
Bohrung ø ON - L ON - L OG - L OG - L WA - L
Bore dia.
WF - L WF - L WA - L
WF - L
d (mm) 1 ≈ (mm) 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 2
21 0,7 1 3 8 8 10
22 0,9 2 5 12 12 15
23 1,2  3 10 20 20 25
24 1,6 4 15 35 35 40
25 2,4 6 20 40 40 60
Anschlußwerte in LE / LE ratings for oil-fog lubricators

HOCHLEISTUNGSDÜSEN HIGH EFFICIENCY RECLASSIFIERS

Gerade Hochleistungsdüse R 1/4 aus Messing mit Größe Bestell - Nr.
Klemmanschluß für Rohr Ø 6 Size Code no.
Straight male high efficiency reclassifiers 1/4" BSP
of brass with clamp connection for tube Ø 6
21 63650 - 3111
22 63650 - 3121
23 63650 - 3131
24 63650 - 3141
25 63650 - 3151

Winkel - Hochleistungsdüse R 1/4 aus Messing

21 63650 - 3211
mit Klemmanschluß für Rohr Ø 6
Male stud elbow high efficiciency reclassifiers 22 63650 - 3221
1/4" BSP of brass with clamp connection for 23 63650 - 3231
tube Ø 6 24 63650 - 3241
25 63650 - 3251

21 63650 - 3311
Hochleistungsdüse R 3/8 aus Messing zum
Einschrauben 22 63650 - 3321
Screw-in type high efficiency reclassifiers 3/8" BSP 23 63650 - 3331
of brass 24 63650 - 3341
25 63650 - 3351

3
 ARBEITSBEREICHE GRÖSSE DER ENTFLÜFTUNGSBOHRUNG
APPLICATION RANGE SIZE OF VENTING BORE
(Hochleistungs- und Normaldüse) (Hochleistungs- und Normaldüse)
(High efficiency and standard reclassifiers) (High efficiency and standard reclassifiers)
Öler Hochleistungsdüse Normaldüse Baugrößen Düsenbohrung Entlüftungsbohrung
Oiler High efficiency Standard reclassifiers Size Nozzle bore Venting bore
reclassifiers LE Ø mm / dia. mm
LE N-Düsen HL-Düsen Ø mm für N-Düsen für HL-Düsen
Typ Rohr N-nozzles HL-nozzles dia. mm for N-nozzles for HL-nozzles
Type Pipe min - max min - max — 35 0,5 — 1,2
G 2 720 - 1500 250 - 1100 1 21 0,7 1,0 1,8
WA - L
G 1* 360 - 1000 100 - 300 2 22 0,9 1,3 2,2
ON - LG 1/2 40 - 150 20 - 100 3 23 1,2 1,7 3,0
G 1/4 8 - 32 7 - 25 4 24 1,6 2,3 4,0
ON - L 5 — 2,1 3,0 —
G 1/4 15 - 32 14 - 25
6 25 2,4 3,4 6,0
* Gilt auch für WF-L Einheiten und OG-L Öler mit G 1 bzw.
G 3/4 Anschluß.
* Also upplicable for WF-L units and OG-L oilers 1" BSP
and 3/4" BSP resp.

Größe Normal - Düsen Anschlußwerte in LE bei den Ölertypen bzw. Schmiereinheiten abhängig vom Rohranschluß
Size High efficiency reclassifiers LE ratings and lubro-generating units dependent on pipe connection thread
Bohrung ø ON - L ON - L OG - L OG - L WA - L
Bore dia.
WF - L WF - L WA - L
WF - L
d (mm) 1 ≈ (mm) 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 2
1 0,7 7 1
—
2 0,9 9 1 bis / to 2
3 1,2 12 1 2 bis / to 4
4 1,6 16 1 bis / to 2 4 bis / to 8
5 2,1 — 8 bis / to 14
18
6 2,4 2 bis / to 4 14 bis / to 20
8 bis / to 28
9 bis / to 42
2,1
10 25 — bis / to 56
11 bis / to 70
12 2,4 bis / to 80
Anschlußwerte in LE / LE ratings for oil-fog lubricators

VERDICHTERDÜSEN RECLASSIFIER NOZZLES

Lötdüse aus Messing für Rohr 6 x 0,7 oder 6 x 1 aufgebohrt
Solder-in type nozzle of brass suitable for 6 x 0,7 or 6 x 1 pipe
Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no.
1 73650 - 1511
2 73650 - 1521
3 73650 - 1531
4 73650 - 1541
5 73650 - 1551
6 73650 - 1561
Gerade Einschraubdüse R 1/8 k aus Messing mit Klemman-
schluß für Rohr Ø 6
Straight male nozzle 1/8" BSP of brass with clamp
connection for pipe Ø 6
Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no.
1 63650 - 1311
2 63650 - 1321
3 63650 - 1331
4 63650 - 1341
5 63650 - 1351
6 63650 - 1361

4
 VERDICHTERDÜSEN RECLASSIFIER NOZZLES
Gerade Einschraubdüse G 1/4 aus Messing mit Klemman- Verdichterdüse G 3/8 aus Messing zum Einschrauben
schluß für Rohr Ø 6 Screw-in type recalssifier 3/8" BSP of brass
Straight male nozzle 1/4" BSP of brass with clamp
connection for pipe Ø 6 Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no.
Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no. 5 73657 - 5531
1 63650 - 1411 6 73657 - 5541
2 63650 - 1421 8 73657 - 5511
3 63650 - 1431 9 73657 - 5521
4 63650 - 1441
5 63650 - 1451
6 63650 - 1461 Verdichterdüse G 1/2 aus Messing zum Einschrauben
Screw-in type recalssifier 1/2" BSP of brass
Winkeleinschraubdüse R 1/8 k aus Messing mit Klemman-
Größe Bestell - Nr.
schluß für Rohr Ø 6 Size Code no.
Male stud elbow nozzle 1/8" BSP of brass with clamp 5 73657 - 5311
connection for pipe Ø 6
8 73657 - 5321
9 73657 - 5331
Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no. 10 73657 - 5341
1 63650 - 1511 11 73657 - 5351
2 63650 - 1521 12 73657 - 5361
3 63650 - 1531
4 63650 - 1541 Verdichterdüse G 1/4 aus Stahl mit Gewindeanschluß R 1/4
5 63650 - 1551 Thread-type 1/4" BSP steel reclassifier of steel 1/4" BSP
6 63650 - 1561
Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no.
Winkeleinschraubdüse R 1/4 k aus Messing mit Klemman-
schluß für Rohr Ø 6 5 73657 - 5171
Male stud elbow nozzle 1/4" BSP of brass with clamp 6 73657 - 5181
connection for pipe Ø 6 8 73657 - 5131
Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no.
1 63650 - 1611 Verdichterdüse G 1/2 aus Stahl mit Gewindeanschluß R 1/2
2 63650 - 1621 Thread-type 1/2" BSP steel reclassifier of steel 1/2" BSP
3 63650 - 1631
4 63650 - 1641 Größe Bestell - Nr.
Size Code no.
5 63650 - 1651
6 63650 - 1661
9 73657 - 5111
10 73657 - 5121
Verdichterdüse G 1/4 aus Messing zum Einschrauben 11 73657 - 5141
Screw-in type recalssifier 1/4" BSP of brass 12 73657 - 5151

Größe Bestell - Nr.

Size Code no.

4 73650 - 2431
5 73650 - 2411
6 73650 - 2421

5
 VERTEILERLEISTEN MANIFOLDS
aus Zink - Druckguß zur Verzweigung einer Rohrleitung in 3 bis 6 Leitungen
Verteilerleiste zur Verzweigung einer Rohrleitung in bis zu 3 Leitungen _________________________ Bestell-Nr. : 63661 - 2111
of zinc casting for branching off to 3 up to 6 lines
Manifolds for branching off to 3 lines _____________________________________________________ Code no. : 63661 - 2111

Verteilerleiste zur Verzweigung einer Rohrleitung in bis zu 6 Leitungen _________________________ Bestell-Nr. : 63661 - 2121
Manifolds for branching off to 6 lines _____________________________________________________ Code no. : 63661 - 2121

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 · Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
10
Grease Lubricators Types FZ - A and FZ - B
APPLICATION ADVANTAGES
The FZ-A and FZ-B type lubricator is an central plunger q Best adaptationpossibility to different driving speeds
grease (oil) pump, which is operating without valves and and to the machine to be lubricated.
springs.
The FZ-A type grease lubricator is intended mainly for
q Additional control can be omitted.
multiple systems, i.e., in systems with up to a maximum of 12 q Use for anticlockwise and clockwise rotation is possible
lubrication points no additional distributor is required. without modifications.
The numerous ratios available within the range 3 : 1 to q Forced control by valves springs.
2880 : 1 which are between the speed of the drive shaft on
q Rugged, consequently minimal expenditure of main-
machine to be lubricated and the number of strokes of the tenance and repair works.
delivery plunger, ensure universal application of the lubrica-
tor so that it can be adapted to any system having a small to
medium number of lubrication points.

Grease lubricator, type FZ - A Grease lubricator, type FZ - A

with free shaft-end with reduction gear

Grease lubricator, type FZ - A Grease lubricator, type FZ - A

with ratched drive with reduction gear and flange motor

21112 P 2 e / 05 0996HF
 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATING
The alternate integral operating circuit between suction
stroke and compression stroke operates enforced.
The FZ-B type grease lubricator has either a single outlet
with a maximum delivery of 12 x 0.1 = 1.2 ccm, or two out-
lets with a maximum delivery of 6 x 0.1 = 0.6 ccm per rota-
tion of the plunger. The lubricator generates the becessary
lubricant pressure and meters the quantity of grease, which
is adjustable.
For systems with 7 to 12 lubricantion points the quantity
of grease is set for two outlets in each case, one above the
other. If metered quantities of grease have to be delivered to
more lubrication points than the lubricator has outlets, then
progressive distributors must be connected to one or more
of the outlets (distributors, type E 4 or ZP-A/B).
Due to the good adaptability of the pump to different
available driving speeds of the machine to be lubricated,
one can do without an additional control.
Because of the positive mechanical connection or elec-
trical interlocking between the lubricator and the machine
being lubricated, grease is delivered only when the machine
is switched on.
All pumps are suitable for clockwise or anticlockwise ro-
tation as required, without modification and giving the same
delivery. Excepted are pumps being provided with a tank a
particular delivery insert on the right. For these pumps, and if
it deals with free shaft end versions with anticlockwise rota-
tion and with step-down gear with and without flange motor
and with clockwise rotation, it is forbidden to change the di-
rection of rotation.
The drive can be effected in different ways, please refer
to the possibilities illustrated on the front page.
On lubricators with mounted electric motor the coup-
ling is located in the housing flange between the lubricator
and the electric motor, so that it is dust, dirt and splash-proof
and guarded, eliminating the risk of accidents.
The rotating parts of the drive are supported by rol-
ler-bearings.
All lubricators are attached to the machine with which
they are to be used, or to a foundation, by means of two
bolts only.

TECHNICAL DATA

Permissible feed pressure ____________________200 bar, until 250 bar for short period only
Feed volume
per outlet and pump plunger rotation ________max. 0.1 ccm
By internal connection of two outlets located one above the other, the
service outlet delivers double the feed volume (available systems see
list page 4).
Feed volume per outlet and hours ____________max. 60 ccm, ratched drive max. 36 ccm.
Feed volume from all outlets can be reduced by selecting a lower dri-
ving speed or higher gear ration, so that the pump plunger rotatest at
less than 10 min-1 resp. 6 min-1.
Permissible pump plunger speed _____________max. 10 min.-1, with ratched drive max. 6 min.-1
In case higher speed or less then 1 and less then < 1 is requested and
also when distributors ZP - A or E 4 are installed downflow, ask pro-
ducer.
Adjustment of volume rate ___________________The figures 0 - 4 are stamped on the hexagons on the adjusting
spindles. The maximum delivery (0.1 ccm) is obtained in position 4.
The quantity delivered is reduced by turning the adjusting spindles
clockwise. To ensure reliable operation of the lubricator, delivery
should not be less than 1/4 of the maximum rating. In case pumps
with 7 - 12 outlets are installed, the output rate of two outlets, located
one upon another, is adjustable by one adjusting spindle.

2
 TECHNICAL DATA (continued)

Number of outlets ___________________________FZ - A 1 up to 6 or 7 up to 12 outlets

FZ - B 1 or 2 outlets

Outlet bore _________________________________G 1/4 female pipe thread, cylindric

Blanking off undesired outlets ________________Details of outlets not be used be stated at the time of ordering;
they will then be blanked off at the factory. Subsequent blanking off
should be carried out in accordance with the operating instructions.
Never any circumstances simply plug an outlet ( Risk of damage! )
Opening blanked-off outlets _________________To be carried out in accordance with the operating instructions.
Drive types and transmission ratios ___________Ratched : 
 3 : 1, 12 : 1, 25 : 1, 50 : 1
free shaft end : 
Reduction gear: 95 : 1, 215 : 1, 345 : 1, 710 : 1, 1420 : 1, 2880 : 1
Reduction gear and flange motor  215 : 1
3 phase AC motor according to DIN 42677  345 : 1

Speed n = 1500 min.-1 

710 : 1
Design B 14, small flange size 63  1420 : 1

Rated output 0,18 kW 2880 : 1
Voltage and frequency to be specified at time of ordering
Rotational direction of drive shaft ____________optional, with the exception of free shaft end/anticlockwise
rotation. Step-down gear with flange motor/clockwise rotation. In
case of the combination “tank with delivery insert on the right”, the di-
rection of rotation cannot be changed.
Oscillating rate ______________________________max. 300 min.-1
In case of using the ratched drive, the lever rod should be installed
that way, that the amplitude of the oscillating lever is the same in both
directions.
∝ 1 = ∝ 2 = max. 50°
lever amplitude max. 100°
lever amplitude min. 10°
Reservoir volume ____________________________2.5 or 8 or 15 or 30 litre
CAUTION !
If there are heavy vibrations at the erection place, a sufficient support
must be provided for the version with a 30 l tank.
Filler valve __________________________________available as optional extra for filling the grease reservoir by
means of a forced-feed or barrel pump. Neck on base casting with G
1 female pipe thread (normally closed by a screw). Connection on fil-
ler valeve G 1 male thread.
Low level switch ____________________________signalizes the min. or the min. and max. grease level in the 8 l,
15 l and 30 l reservoir and is supplied to special order according to
measurement sheet 65124 - 1000 M 1 for the min. version and ac-
cording to measurement sheet 65124 - 2000 M 1 for min. and max.
version.
Usable lubricants ____________________________greases based of mineral oils to NLGI-class 2, DIN 51818.
Oils : on request
Synthetic greases : on request
Operating temperature ______________________- 20 oC up to + 80 oC
Depending on the lubricant used, restrictions to the service tempera-
ture are possible.

3
 ORDER NUMBERS FOR GREASE LUBRICATOR FZ - A / B
Item Designation Code no. Remarks
with ratchet drive 21112 - 2100
with free shaft drive 21112 - 4100
21112 - 6310 1
21112 - 6320 2
with reduction gear box position of drive
— 21112 - 6340 4
21112 - 6350 5
21112 - 8210 1
with reduction gear box and flange motor position of drive
21112 - 8250 5
consist of following components :
2,5 litre 63721 - 1411
8,0 litre 63721 - 1451 rights
and
15 litre 63721 - 1441 lefts
30 litre 63721 - 1461 rotational direction
1 reservoir of the delivery insert
2,5 litre 63721 - 1481
8,0 litre 63721 - 1471
rights
15 litre 63721 - 1401
30 litre 63721 - 1491
pump body type FZ - A no. of outlets 1 62227 - 2211
no. of outlets 2 62227 - 2221
no. of outlets 3 62227 - 2231
no. of outlets 4 62227 - 2241
no. of outlets 5 62227 - 2251
no. of outlets 6 62227 - 2261 max. quantity delivered per
no. of outlets 7 62227 - 2311 outlet for one rotation of 0.1 ccm
no. of outlets 8 62227 - 2321
no. of outlets 9 62227 - 2331
2 sequence of outlets no. of outlets 10 62227 - 2341
no. of outlets 11 62227 - 2351
no. of outlets 12 62227 - 2361
no. of outlets 6 62227 - 2411 6 x 0.2 ccm 

no. of outlets 7 62227 - 2421 5 x 0.2 ccm + 2 x 0.1 ccm  max.

no. of outlets 8 62227 - 2431 4 x 0.2 ccm + 4 x 0.1 ccm  quantity
62227 - 2441 3 x 0.2 ccm + 6 x 0.1 ccm  delivered per
no. of outlets 9 
62227 - 2451 2 x 0.2 ccm + 8 x 0.1 ccm  outlet per
no. of outlets 10 
no. of outlets 11 62227 - 2461 1 x 0.2 ccm + 10 x 0.1 ccm  rotation of

no. of outlets 1 62227 - 2521 1 x 1.2 ccm ( 12 x 0.1 ccm )  the plunger
pump body type FZ - B 
no. of outlets 2 62227 - 2511 2 x 0.6 ccm ( 6 x 0.1 ccm ) 
i = 3:1 61161 - 1411
i = 12 : 1 61161 - 1421
with ratchet drive
i= 25 : 1 61161 - 1431
i= 50 : 1 61161 - 1441
i= 3:1 61171 - 1711
i= 12 : 1 61171 - 1721
with free shaft drive
i= 25 : 1 61171 - 1731
3
i= 50 : 1 61171 - 1741
rotary drive with i= 95 : 1 61121 - 1411 not suitable with motor 1500 min.-1
reduction gear i = 215 : 1 61121 - 1471
or with 30 : 1 i = 345 : 1 61121 - 1421
reduction gear i = 710 : 1 61121 - 1431
and i = 1420 : 1 61121 - 1441
flange motor 60 : 1 i = 2880 : 1 61121 - 1461
69111 - 7821 for pump with ratchet drive and reduction gear box
4 loose componets assemblies 69111 - 7831 for pump with free shaft end
(components required for the assembly of units)
69111 - 7841 for pump with reduction gear box
3 - phase AC motor 230 / 400 V / 50 Hz 1500 min.-1
76911 - 5133
5 B 14 C 90 - 63 x 0.18 kW 260 / 460 V / 60 Hz nominal RPM 1800 min.-1
DIN 42677 500 V / 50 Hz 76911 - 5153 1500 min.-1

4
 ORDER NUMBERS FOR GREASE LUBRICATOR FZ - A / B (continued)
Item Designation Code no. Remarks
Accessories must ordered separately
min. 65121 - 6231
reservoir 8 litre
min. + max. 65121 - 6511
min. 65121 - 6151
6 low level switch reservoir 15 litre permanently fixed
min. + max. 65121 - 6321 to the casic equipment
min.
reservoir 30 litre
min. + max.
7 filler valve 65231 - 2111
Solderless tube fittings with cutting ferules are supplied as separate parts
for pipe - Ø 6 73442 - 1233
straight male stud fitting for pipe - Ø 8 73442 - 1324 cylindrical threaded stud
for pipe - Ø 10 73442 - 1414
73443 - 8123
for pipe - Ø 6
8 73442 - 1233 The elbow union can only be used
elbow fittings 73443 - 8133 together with a straight screw-in fitting
and for pipe - Ø 8 (take care that the nominal value is
straight male stud fitting 73442 - 1324 the same as that of the outside pipe
73443 - 8193 diameter).
for pipe - Ø 10
73442 - 1414
9 sealing ring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu 72712 - 1214 Every straight screw-in fitting requires
a seal ring

DIMENSIONS (mm)

Drive with ratched lever Drive with free shaft end and reduction gear box

5
 DIMENSIONS (mm)

Drive with free shaft end Drive with reduction gear and flange motor

EXAMPLE FOR ORDER

for drive with free shaft end and reduction gear box
________________________________ Code no.
1 Grease lubricator FZ - A
with reduction gear box ________ 21112 - 6340
consists of :
Item 1 Reservoir 8 l __________________ 63721 - 1451
Item 2 Pump body with 9 outlets _______ 62227 - 2331
Item 3 Drive with
reduction gear box i = 1420 : 1 61121 - 1441
Item 4 Loose component assembly for
Pump with reduction gear box __ 69111 - 7841
Item 6 Low level switch 8 litre min. _____ 65124 - 1121
Item 7 Filler valve ___________________ 65231 - 2111

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Operating instructions

for

Autolub - M

Index

Page
General....................................................................... 2 - 3
Safety ......................................................................... 4 - 5
Design and principle of operation............................... 6 - 8
Pump installation ............................................................. 9
Commissioning.............................................................. 10
Maintenance........................................................... 11 - 16
Failures, their possible reasons and repair ................... 17
Accessories................................................................... 18

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 1 of 18

 GENERAL

1. Introduction
2. Application
3. Some information on the product
3.1 Characteristics
3.2 Specification
3.3 Copyright
4. Company’s address, addresses for spare parts and after-sales service

1. Introduction
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on
any liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
Should there once still occur any difficulties, please contact our engineering department (for the address,
please refer to GENERAL, item no. 4, firm address), which will be well prepared to help you.
These operating instructions only apply to the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they become necessary for the improvement of the
lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M.
The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M is only intended for field of application described in the operating
instructions under "GENERAL, itom no. 2, Application".
Before the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M is used outside its contractual field of application, the engineering
department of DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH is to be consulted as otherwise the guarantee will
become ineffective.

2. Application
In the sector of plants and machinery:
Machine tools, presses, punching machines, shears, hoisting plants, water pumps, etc.

Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's
intended purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it.
The corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

3. Some information on the product

3.1 Characteristics
Designation of the lubricant pump : AUTOLUB-M
Year of construction : see identification
Code No. : 21118 - 3000

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 2 of 18

 GENERAL

3.2 Specification
Discharge pressure : ................................................................................................................. max. 250 bar
Output volume per pump element : ........... at choice 0.1 (2.2); 0.15 (3.3); or 0.2 (4.4) cm³/stroke (cm³/min)
Number of pump elements : ....................................................................................................... 1 to 5 pieces
Gear reduction : .................................................................................................................................... 60 : 1
Operating temperature : ................................................................................................ - 20° C up to + 60° C
Usable lubricants : greases based on mineral oil NLGI-class 000 to 2 DIN 51818 (51825)
mineral oils with viscosity over 68 mm²/s at operating temperature
synthetic and biolodegradable lubricants on request
Usable bowl capacity : metall bowl ................................................................................... 2.5 or 8 Ltr.
plastic bowl ..................................................................................... 2 or 4 Ltr.
Filling : ....... via conical head lubrication nipple DIN 71412, filling valve with coupler or top cover of housing
-1
Mode of driving : ..................... ................... Motor IMB 14-C90-63-0,18 kW-230/400V-50Hz-1500min and
-1
...................................................... 260/460V- 60Hz -1800min - DIN 42677
Protective system : ................................................................................................................................. IP 54
Installation position : ............................................................................................................................ vertical

3.3 Copyright
The copyright on this OI is kept reserved to Messrs. Firma DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH. These
OI are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain technical regulations
and drawings which must neither completely nor partically be reproduced or distributed. It is also
prohibited to use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.

4. Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 3 of 18

 SAFETY

1. Informative signs within the Operating Instructions

2. Qualification and training of staff
3. Dangers involved in the nonobservance of the safety instructions
4. Working in the consciousness of safety
5. Safety instructions for the user / operator
6. Safety instructions for maintenance, inspectional and assembly works
7. Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
8. Inadmissible modes of operation
These Operating Instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these Operating Instructions are
studied by the erecting engineer and the competent qualified staff/user prior to erection and
commissioning. It must always be available at the place of use of the machine/plant.
There are not only the general safety instructions mentioned under the main item SECURITY which are to
be observed, but also the safety instructions mentioned under the other main items.

1. Informative signs within the Operating Instructions

The safety instructions within the Operating Instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause
danger to life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign

Safety sign according to DIN 4844-W 9

In case of warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

Safety sign according to DIN 4844-W 8

If it deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:

ATTENTION

Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
- arrow for rotation direction
- mark for fluid connections
must by all means be observed and maintained in a completely legible condition.

2. Qualification and training of staff

The staff being competent for operation, maintenance, inspection and erection must have the necessary
qualification for these works. The scope of responsibility, the competence and the supervision of the staff
must be regulated by the user. If the staff does not have the necessary knowlege, it has to be trained and
instructed accordingly. This can be done, if necessary, by order of the user of the machine by the
manufacturer/supplier. Furthermore, the user has to make sure that the staff fully understands the
contents of the Operating Instruction.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 4 of 18

 SAFETY

3. Dangers involved in the nonobservance of the safety instructions

The nonobservance of the safety instructions may involve an endangerment to persons as well as to the
environment and machines. The nonobservance of the safety instructions may result in a loss of any
claims for damages.
Here some examples for endangerments resulting from the nonobservance in question:
- Failure of important functions of the machine/plant
- Failure of methods prescribed for maintenance and repair
- Danger to harm persons caused by electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
- Danger to the environment by leakage of dangerous substances

4. Working in the consciousness of safety

The safety instructions mentioned in these Operating Instructions, the existing national regulations as to
the prevention of accidents as well as possible internal working, operating and safety regulations of the
user are to be observed.

5. Safety instructions for the user / operator

- If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts, must be protected against contact by the
customer.
- Contact protections for moving parts (e.g. coupler) must not be removed while the machine is in
operation.
- Leakages (e.g. at the shaft seal) of dangerous materials to be conveyed (e.g. explosive, toxic, hot
materials) must be eliminated in such a way that no endangerment will arise for persons or for the
environment. Legal rules are to be observed.
- Endangerments by electric power are to be excluded (for details, please refer for example to the
regulations of the VDE and of the local electric supply companies).

6. Safety instructions for maintenance, inspectional and assembly works

The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out
by authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the
Operating Instructions thoroughly.
For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine, the machine must imperatively be out of operation.
The procedure for stopping the machine described in the Operating Instructions must by all means be
observed.
Pumps or pump aggregates delivering media that are injurious to health have to be decontaminated.
Immediately after termination of the works, all safety devices and protective equipments must be
reinstalled and/or put into function.
Prior to recommissioning it is essential to pay attention to the items mentioned in the paragraph
"Commissioning".

7. Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts

Any modification or changer to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any
other parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

8. Inadmissible modes of operation

The operational reliability of the machine supplied is only guaranteed on condition the machine is used for
its intended purposes (please refer to GENERAL, item no. 2 "Application"). The limit values specified in
the paragraph GENERAL, item no. 3.2 "Specification" must in no case be exceeded.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 5 of 18

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

1. Pump design
2. Drawing with measurements
3. Principle of operation / pump
4. Principle of operation / pump elements

1. Pump design
The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M with its individual components:
(Items, see MAINTENANCE, item no. 1, spares drawing)
¨ Motor 230/400V; 50 Hz - 260/460V; 60 Hz (item no. 3)
¨ Screw gear transmission (item no. 21 and 40)
¨ Housing (item no. 26) with eccentric (item no.27)
¨ Pump element (item no. 52 to 61)
¨ Housing (item no. 8) and agitator (item no. 34)
¨ Filling valve (item no. 2)

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 6 of 18

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

2. Drawing with measurements

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 7 of 18

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

3. Principle of operation / pump

(Items see MAINTENANCE, item no.1, spares drawing)
The motor shaft of the motors (item no. 3) drives a screw gear (item no. 21 and 40) via a coupling (item
no. 45 and 47). The shaft (item no.20) is firmly connected to the worm wheel (item no.21) of the screw
gear, to the eccentric (item no. 27) and the agitator (item no. 34). The screw gear causes the shaft to
rotate. The eccentric (item no. 27) actuates the pump element (item nos. 52 to 61) and the agitator.
Due to its rotational motion, the agitator delivers lubricant from the tank (item no. 8) into the housing (item
no. 26). The lubricant that has been forced into the housing, is sucked in by the pump element and carried
to the consumers via the connected lubricant line.

4. Principle of operation / pump element

Intake stroke

According to the eccentric position, the piston is pushed to the right by springiness so that a diminished
1pressure is created in the space between the non-return valve and the piston. In the course of the next
intake stroke, the piston unblocks the section holes. Now the space between the non-return valve and the
piston fills with lubricant.
Pressure stroke

The eccentric pushes the piston to the left and closes the suction holes. In the course of the next pressure
stroke of the piston, the lubricant pushes the non-return valve to the left, and the lubricant is pushed to the
lubricant line connection.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 8 of 18

 PUMP INSTALLATION

1. Assembly of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M

2. Electric connection

1. Assembly of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M

ATTENTION

Install the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M in vertical position only!

Fix the lubricant pump by means of 2 screws M 10.

A central and easily accessible position of the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M at the machine or the plant
has the following advantages:

- optimal line lenghts to the friction points

- for the lubricant filling via a filling valve or top cover
- for an easy reassembly and assembly of pump elements

Consider pressure load capacity for piping material and olive screw joints.
Do not use fittings!

The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M is adapted to be used only for the max. feed pressure as stipulated in
the technical specification under the title GENERAL. When the pressure limit is exceeded; there is the
hazard inherent to lead to destruction of pump or pump elements. Care should be taken by installation the
entire system adequately (pipework, components, pressure relief valve) in order to prevent that the max.
admissible discharge pressure be exceeded.

2. Electric connection

The electric connection of the motor is to be made by specialists only.

The electric instructions must be observed.

ATTENTION

The motor is to be connected in such a way that the agitator turns clockwise (right).

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 9 of 18

 COMMISSIONING

1. Filling
2. Deaeration
3. Connection of pipe lines

1. Filling
Fill lubricant pump AUTULOB-M with clean lubricant only, namely via the filling valve or from the top with
the hinged lid being opened (metal bowl) or with lid being removed (plastic bowl). Air bubbles that might be
enclosed in the grease will escape during operation of the lubricant pump. The lubricant pump deaerates
automatically.

ATTENTION

While refilling the pump AUTOLUB-M make sure to protect it to avoid acceidental starting.
In order to ensure thet deaeration is effected rather quickly fill up the reservoir of the pump AUTOLUB-M
from the top, during first commissioning and squeeze the gerase into the suction chambre by using an
adequate device such as a scraper or smoother. While doing this, take care to avoid air bubbles, then top
up the reservoir with the required lubricant quantity.
The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M must not run without lubricant!

Should the agitator inside the grease pump AUTOLUB-M become visible, proceed as described above.
Always use clean lubricant and proceed with painstakenly cleanliness to avoid any kind of contamination.
Dirt particles are the most frequent reasons for failures and damages.
Replenished reservoir always in time.

2. Deaeration
Start the grease pump AUTOLUB-M and keep it running unconnected (for abt. 20 min) until lubricant with
no air bubbles emerges.

3. Connection of pipe lines

Before installing the pipes, clean them all throughly by tapping and blowing them through with compressed
air and fill them with unpulluted lubricant by means of grease gun.
Then connect the pipe lines.

Check the pre-determined opening pressure of the pressure relief valves located downflow in the pipe
lines.
Observe max. operating pressure of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M and that of the components of the
system.
The pressure outlet ports of the pump elements must not be closed. In case of non-observance there is
the risk of destroying both pump and pump elements.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 10 of 18

 MAINTENANCE

1. Spares drawing
2. Spares list
3. Replacing and refitting of pump element
4. Assembly & disassembly / pump element
5. Assembly & disassembly / lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M

1. Spares drawing

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 11 of 18

 MAINTENANCE

1. Spares drawing

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 12 of 18

 MAINTENANCE

1. Spares drawing

2. Spares list
item piece Designation Code no.
- - lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M 21118 - 3000
min. 2 l plastic bowl 65121 - 7811 Z
1 1 lubricant level switch min. 4 l plastic bowl 65121 - 7821 Z
min. 8 l metal bowl 65124 - 1111 Z
min. and max. 8 l metal bowl 65124 - 2111 Z
2 1 conical head lubrication nipple AR ¼ DIN 71412 73683 - 1713
filling valve with coupler (coupling plug) 69111 - 8751 Z
-1
3 1 motor - IMB 14-C90-63-0,18kW-230/400V-50Hz-1500min and 76911 - 5133
-1
260/460V-60Hz-1800min DIN 42677
4 4 cheese-head screw M 6 x 50 DIN 912 74102 - 0654
5 4 seal A 6 x 10 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1034 E
6 1 top cover (only by plastic bowl) 73751 - 5241
7 1 O-ring DIN 3771 180x5 - N-NBR 70 (only by plastic bowl) 72711 - 2863
2 l plastic 73721 - 6411
8 1 bowl (tank) 4 l plastic 63721 - 6261
2,5 l metal 63721 - 2711
8 l metal 63721 - 2721
9 1 hose DN 10 outside dia. 14 NBR (only by plastic bowl) 73312 - 2933
10 1 deep groove ball bearing 6000 DIN 625 71418 - 1194
11 2 axial bearing disk 12 x 26 71419 - 1183
12 3 cheese-head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 912 74102 - 1954
13 1 flange 74354 - 5391
14 1 deep groove ball bearing 6202 DIN 625 71418 - 1274
15 1 circlip 35 x 1,5 DIN 472 74186 - 1493
16 1 Woodruff key 6 x 7,5 DIN 6888 71951 - 4073
17 1 circlip 20 x 1,2 DIN 471 74186 - 1124
18 1 packing ring A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094 E
19 1 plug M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
20 1 shaft 71222 - 1141
21 1 worm wheel 60:1 71353 - 1811
22 1 housing 74311 - 2631
23 1 seal 72727 - 3232 E
24 1 circlip 15 x 1 DIN 471 74186 - 1064
25 1 seal 72725 - 2251 E

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 13 of 18

 MAINTENANCE

2. Spares list (continue)

item piece Designation Code no.
26 1 housing 74321 - 3151
27 1 eccentric 71541 - 1471
28 1 Woodruff key 3 x 5 DIN 6888 71951 - 4084
29 1 inner raceway 30 x 37 x 18 71419 - 1193
30 1 circlip 30 x 1,5 DIN 471 74186 - 1174
31 1 O-ring 170 x 3 DIN 3771 - NBR 70 72711 - 2853 E
32 5 disk A6,4-St-galvanized DIN 9021 (only by plastic bowl) 74185 - 1854
33 4 cheese-head screw M 6 x 25 DIN 912 74102 - 1964
2 and 4 l plastic 62631 - 1291
34 1 agitator for bowl 2,5 l metal 62631 - 1431
8l metal 62631 - 1421
35 1 seal (only by plastic bowl) 72729 - 1231
36 1-4 seal screw M 22 x 1,5 74106 - 2183
37 1 circlip 22 x 1 DIN 472 74186 - 1274
38 1 deep groove ball bearing 608 DIN 625- C4 71418 - 1334
39 1 circlip 8 x 0,6 DIN 471 74186 - 1024
40 1 drive shaft 60:1 71353 - 3111
41 1 needle bearing 14 x 22 x 13 71418 - 1453
42 1 packing ring 14 x 22 x 3 DIN 3760 72712 - 2173 E
43 6 cheese-head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 7984 74102 - 1134
44 1 Woodruff key 5 x 9 DIN 6888 71951 - 4054
45 1 hub Ø 16H7 71931 - 1593
46 4 cheese-head screw M 5 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1034
47 1 hub Ø 11H7 71931 - 1513
48 1 flange 74354 - 5631
49 1 circlip 16 x 1 DIN 471 74186 - 1074
50 1 seal 72731 - 1812 E
51 1 cap 71471 - 2212
- pump element : 0.1 cm³/stroke 62211 - 2711
1 consisting of 0.15 cm³/stroke 62211 - 2721
item nos. 52 to 61 0.2 cm³/stroke 62211 - 2731
0.1 cm³/stroke 74332 - 9511 N
52 1 housing 0.15 cm³/stroke 74332 - 9521 N
0.2 cm³/stroke 74332 - 9531 N
53 1 screw 74141 - 1571 *
54 1 transmission disk with guide pin 73641 - 5613 E
55 1 compression spring 71614 - 2141 E
56 1 cover disk 74185 - 0053 E
57 1 seal 72722 - 1251 E
58 1 conical 73641 - 5131 E
0.1 cm³/stroke 72105 - 1191 N
59 1 piston 0.15 cm³/stroke 72106 - 1241 N
0.2 cm³/stroke 72107 - 1411 N
60 1 compression spring 71616 - 6171
61 1 spring plate 71641 - 3551
62 1 cheese-head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 012 74102 - 2064
The parts marked 'E' are recommended to be carried in stock.
They can be supplied commonly as repair kit for the version with metal bowl under code no. 69111-8931.
For the version with plastic bowl, it is necessary to order additionally item nos. 7, 9 and 35.
The parts marked "N" are not supplied individually as spare parts.
* torque 8 Nm
The parts marked "Z" are accessories. In case of requirement, they must be specified separately on the order.
21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 14 of 18
 MAINTENANCE

3. Replacing or refitting of pump element

• Disconnect motor and level siwtch by qualified staff, and/or protect pump against unintended switching
on.
• Loosen lubricant line carefully from pump element. Unscrew pump element by using a wrench
(wrench size across flats 24), but do not remove entirely from resevoir.
To prevent the piston of pump element from getting clung in the lubricant, rotate the element (by
spinning movements) in order to create a cavination. When removing the element take care that the
piston is showing diagonally, to the top.

ATTENTION

• Refill the suction or piston channels of new pump element of those which have been repaired with
grease.
• Push element into the housing bore with pistons showing diagonally to the top, then screwing it into
the pump and tightened it firmly with a torque of 35 to 40 Nm.
• Motor and level switch have to be connected to the mains by qualified staff only, and the protection
against accidental switching-on to be removed.

• Pay attention to correct rotary direction of the agitator, sense of rotation = right-hand/clockwise.

ATTENTION

• Deaerate pump (see COMMISSIONING)

4. Assembly & disassembly / pump element

• Pull piston (item no. 59) out of the housing (item no. 52).
• Unscrew screw (item no. 53) by means of a wrench (wrench size across flats 6)
• Remove non-return valve
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts of damages.
• Replace damaged parts.
• Assemble pump element in reverse order.

ATTENTION

• Tighten screw (item no. 53) with a torque 8 Nm.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 15 of 18

 MAINTENANCE

5. Assembly & disassembly of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M

• Disconnect motor by qualified staff.

• Remove pump from the machine and/or from the system.
• Dismantle pump element.
• Remove screws (item no. 46) and take off motor (item no. 3)

ATTENTION

• Unscrew agitator (item no. 34). Attention - lefthanded thread!

• Remove screws (item no. 33 and item no. 62) and take off housing (item no. 8).
• Remove eccentric (item no. 27) and woodruff key (item no. 28).
• Remove screws (item no. 12) and take off gear from the housing (item no. 26).
• Remove screws (item no. 4) and take off flange (item no. 13) from the housing (item no. 22).
• Remove screws (item no. 43) and take off top cover (item no. 51).
• Remove circlip (item no. 37).
• Push drive shaft (item no. 40) out of the housing (item no. 22) with the help of a drift.
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts of damages.
• Replace all seals by new ones.
• Assemble lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M in reverse order.
• Install pump element.

ATTENTION

Before putting the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-M into operation again, fill gear with gear lubricant via the
plug (item no. 19).
Recommended lubricants:
Aral Degol BG 680
BP Energol GR - XP 680
Calypsol fluid grease WIK 260 X (filled with lubricant by DELIMON)
Esso Spartan EP 680
Mobil Mobilgear 636
Shell Omala 680
Texaco Meropa 680

New AUTOLUB-M lubricant pumps are filled with gear lubricant by the manufacturer.
• Mount pump to the machine and/or into the system.

• Connect motor by qualified staff.

• Ray attention to correct rotational sence of the agitator; sense of rotation = right-hand/clockwise.
• Deaerate pump (see COMMISSIONING).

• Dispose of old oil and grease remnants according to rule.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 16 of 18

 Failures, their possible reasons and repair

Failure Possible reasons Repair

Pump does not deliver filling level is lower than min. value Fill up lubricant and deaerate as described
lubricant (reservoir empty) under COMMISSIONING.

Electric connection of geared motor has Check pin connection.

been polarized in the wrong way.

Voltage incorrect Check voltage

Pump does not run Voltage supply is interrupted. Check voltage at the battery.

Lubrication point is blocked
to find out which lubrication points and/or which
lubrication point group is blocked, loosen pipe
connections at pump elements one after the
other.
When the bloecked bundle has been loosened,
the pump must start running again.
Localize the lubrication points concerned by
loosening the connection lines. The failure may
have been caused by dirt accumulation in the
lubrication point, blocked up lubrication points
or squeezed lubricant lines.

Pump element does Pump element is defective
not deliver lubricant
By loosening the pipe connections at the pump
elements you will find the pump element which
does not deliver lubricant after the pump has
been switched on.
Dirt accumulation within the piston or heavy
mechanical damages to the pump element are
possible reasons for the failure.
If removal and purification of the pump element
do not result in an improvement, the pump
element has to be replaced by a new one.
ATTENTION
When assembling the cleaned pump element,
the screw (item no. 53) must be tightened with
a torque of 8 Nm only.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 17 of 18

 ACCESSORIES

1. Filling valve with coupler

2. Level switch for plastic tank
3. Level switch for metal tank

1. Filling valve with coupler

The filling valve with coupler (item no. 2) consists of a coupler plug G ¼, a nipple G ¼ and a dust cap, and
in case of need it is screwed in instead of the conical head lubricantion nipple (item no. 2).

2. Level switch for plastic tank

The level switch for the lubricant pump Autolub-M with plastic tank consists of a proximity switch with
housing, a mounted lid and a plug according to DIN 43650-A / ISO 4400.
If required, the level switch is mounted on the tank (item no. 8) instead of the lid (item no. 6). When the
level switch is ordered, the technical data as well as the pin connections can taken from a operating
instruction which is supplid with the level switch. In this case, this operating instruction will be part of the
present operating instructions.

3. Level switch for metal tank

The level switch for the lubricant pump Autolub-M with metal tank consists of one or two proximity
switches with housing, two threaded rods M6, one threaded pipe G 3/8 as well as connection box. If
required, the level switch is installed in the tank (item no. 8).
When the level switch ordered, the technical data, a detailed functional description of the connection box
as well as the measurements for fixing can be taken from the operating instructions, which are supplied
with the level switch. In this case, these operating instruction will be part of the present operating
instructions.

21118 - 3000 e / 4 0600HF replacement for 3 0699HF Page 18 of 18

 Operating instructions

for

AUTOLUB-E

Index

................................................................................. Page
General .................................................................... 2 - 3
Safety....................................................................... 4 - 5
Design and principle of operation ............................. 6 - 9
Pump installation......................................................... 10
Commissioning............................................................ 11
Maintenance......................................................... 12 - 15
Failures, their possible reasons and repair .................. 16
Accessories................................................................. 16

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 1 of 16

 GENERAL

1. Introduction
2. Application
3. Some information on the product
3.1 Characteristics
3.2 Specification
3.3 Copyright
4. Company’s address, addresses for spare parts and after-sales service

1. Introduction
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
Should there once still occur any difficulties, please contact our engineering department (for the address,
please refer to GENERAL, item no. 4, firm address), which will be well prepared to help you.
These operating instructions only apply to the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they become necessary for the improvement of the lubricant
pump AUTOLUB-E.
The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E is only intended for field of application described in the operating
instructions under "GENERAL, itom no. 2, Application".
Before the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E is used outside its contractual field of application, the engineering
department of DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH is to be consulted as otherwise the guarantee will
become ineffective.

2. Application
In the sector of plants and machinery:
Machine tools, presses, punching machines, shears, hoisting plants, etc.
In the sector of commercial vehicles:
Trucks, buses, crawler trucks, excavators, cranes, steering gears of ships, etc.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

3. Some information on the product

3.1 Characteristics
Designation of the lubricant pump : AUTOLUB-E
Year of construction : see identification
Code No. : 21118 - 1300

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 2 of 16

 GENERAL

3.2 Specification
Discharge pressure : ................................................................................................................. max. 250 bar
Output volume per pump element : ............ at choice 0.1 (1.8); 0.15 (2.7) or 0.2 (3.6) cm³/stroke (cm³/min)
Number of pump elements : ....................................................................................................... 1 to 3 pieces
Operating temperature : ................................................................................................ - 20° C up to + 80° C
Usable lubricants : greases based on mineral oil NLGI-class 000 to 2 DIN 51818 (51825)
mineral oils with viscosity over 68 mm²/s at operating temperature
synthetic and biolodegradable lubricants on request
Usable bowl capacity ..................................................................................................................... 2 or 4 Litre
Filling : ............................................................... via filling valve (conical head lubrication nipple DIN 71412)
filling valve with coupler or top cover of housing
Mode of driving : .........................direct-current geared motor (noise-suppressed N with right-hand motion).
12V version:
Current consumption at DC 12V with blocked drive .................................................... max. 1 A
-1
Rated speed at DC 12V * .........................................................................................18 ± 3 min
24V version:
Current consumption at DC 24V with blocked drive ................................................. max. 0.5 A
-1
Rated speed at DC 24V * .........................................................................................18 ± 3 min
Protective system : ................................................................................................................................. IP 54
Electric connection : .............................................................. 10 m connecting lead, flexible, 2 pins, 1.5 mm²
Conductor “1“ = DC 12V / 24V (+)
Conductor “2“ = earth (-)
Installation position : ............................................................................................................................ vertical

* Note:
In case of voltage variations, the numer of revolutions of the motor changes linearly to the voltage
variation with equal load.

3.3 Copyright
The copyright on this OI is kept reserved to Messrs. Firma DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH. These OI
are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain technical regulations and
drawings which must neither completely nor partically be reproduced or distributed. It is also prohibited to use
or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.

4. Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 3 of 16

 SAFETY

1. Informative signs within the Operating Instructions

2. Qualification and training of staff
3. Dangers involved in the nonobservance of the safety instructions
4. Working in the consciousness of safety
5. Safety instructions for the user / operator
6. Safety instructions for maintenance, inspectional and assembly works
7. Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
8. Inadmissible modes of operation
These Operating Instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection, operation
and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these Operating Instructions are studied by the
erecting engineer and the competent qualified staff/user prior to erection and commissioning. It must always
be available at the place of use of the machine/plant.
There are not only the general safety instructions mentioned under the main item SECURITY which are to be
observed, but also the safety instructions mentioned under the other main items.

1. Informative signs within the Operating Instructions

The safety instructions within the Operating Instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
to life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign

Safety sign according to DIN 4844-W 9

In case of warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

Safety sign according to DIN 4844-W 8

If it deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:

ATTENTION

Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
- arrow for rotation direction
- mark for fluid connections
must by all means be observed and maintained in a completely legible condition.

2. Qualification and training of staff

The staff being competent for operation, maintenance, inspection and erection must have the necessary
qualification for these works. The scope of responsibility, the competence and the supervision of the staff
must be regulated by the user. If the staff does not have the necessary knowlege, it has to be trained and
instructed accordingly. This can be done, if necessary, by order of the user of the machine by the
manufacturer/supplier. Furthermore, the user has to make sure that the staff fully understands the contents of
the Operating Instruction.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 4 of 16

 SAFETY

3. Dangers involved in the nonobservance of the safety instructions

The nonobservance of the safety instructions may involve an endangerment to persons as well as to the
environment and machines. The nonobservance of the safety instructions may result in a loss of any claims
for damages.
Here some examples for endangerments resulting from the nonobservance in question:
- Failure of important functions of the machine/plant
- Failure of methods prescribed for maintenance and repair
- Danger to harm persons caused by electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
- Danger to the environment by leakage of dangerous substances

4. Working in the consciousness of safety

The safety instructions mentioned in these Operating Instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible internal working, operating and safety regulations of the user are
to be observed.

5. Safety instructions for the user / operator

- If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts, must be protected against contact by the
customer.
- Contact protections for moving parts (e.g. coupler) must not be removed while the machine is in
operation.
- Leakages (e.g. at the shaft seal) of dangerous materials to be conveyed (e.g. explosive, toxic, hot
materials) must be eliminated in such a way that no endangerment will arise for persons or for the
environment. Legal rules are to be observed.
- Endangerments by electric power are to be excluded (for details, please refer for example to the
regulations of the VDE and of the local electric supply companies).

6. Safety instructions for maintenance, inspectional and assembly works

The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the Operating
Instructions thoroughly.
For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine, the machine must imperatively be out of operation. The
procedure for stopping the machine described in the Operating Instructions must by all means be observed.
Pumps or pump aggregates delivering media that are injurious to health have to be decontaminated.
Immediately after termination of the works, all safety devices and protective equipments must be reinstalled
and/or put into function.
Prior to recommissioning it is essential to pay attention to the items mentioned in the paragraph
"Commissioning".

7. Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts

Any modification or changer to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

8. Inadmissible modes of operation

The operational reliability of the machine supplied is only guaranteed on condition the machine is used for its
intended purposes (please refer to GENERAL, item no. 2 "Application"). The limit values specified in the
paragraph GENERAL, item no. 3.2 "Specification" must in no case be exceeded.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 5 of 16

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

1. Pump design
2. Drawing with measurements
3. Principle of operation / pump
4. Principle of operation / pump elements
5. Change in delivery rate
6. Level limitation
7. Connection diagram / geared motor

1. Pump design
The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E with its individual components:
(Items, see MAINTENANCE, point no. 1, spares drawing)
¨ Direct-current geared motor 12V / 24V (item no. 1)
¨ Pump housing (item no. 2) with eccentric
¨ Agitator (item no. 4) and scraper (item no.5)
¨ Bowl (item no. 6) with removable top cover (item no. 8)
¨ Pump element (1 to 3 units - at choice)
¨ Level switch (item no. 9), to be specified separately on the order as accessories
¨ Element (item no. 10) for catridge filling, to be specified separately on the order as accessories

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 6 of 16

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

2. Drawing with measurements

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 7 of 16

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

3. Principle of operation / pump

The drive shaft of the geared motor (item no. 1) drives the eccentric (item no. 19) and the agitator
(item no. 4). The agitator (item no.4) is provided with the scraper (item no. 5), which clears the inner wall of
the bowl by rotating clockwise so that the filling level inside the bowl (item no. 6) can be well recognized.
The eccentric (item no. 19) actuates up to 3 pump elements. The lubricant pressed into the housing (item no.
2) by the agitator (item no. 4) is sucked in by the pump elements and carried to the lubrication points or to the
lubricant distributors via a connected lubricant line.

4. Principle of operation / pump element

Intake stroke Pressure stroke

According to the eccentric position, the piston is pushed
to the right by springiness so that a diminished pressure
is created in the space between the non-return valve
and the piston. In the course of the next intake stroke,
the piston unblocks the suction holes. Now the space
between the non-return valve and the piston fills with
lubricant.
The eccentric pushes the piston to the left and closes
the suction holes. In the course of the next pressure
stroke of the piston, the lubricant pushes the non-return
valve to the left, and the lubricant is pushed to the
lubricant line connection.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 8 of 16

 DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

4. Change in delivery rate

A change in the delivery rate can only be achieved by exchanging the pump elements as the delivery rate is
determined by the diameter of the piston. That means if you desire a different delivery rate, please find the
code no. of the corresponding pump element in the spares list which is part of these Operating Instructions.

5. Level limitation

6. Connection diagram / geared motor

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 9 of 16

 PUMP INSTALLATION

1. Assembly of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E

2. Electric connection

1. Assembly of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E

ATTENTION
Install the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E in vertical position only!
Fix the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E by means of 2 screws M 10, 2 hexagon nuts M 10 and 2 spring washers
10 on an even surface.
To guarantee a quick and safe assembly of the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E, a drill template
(75511-1611) is supplied to drill the fixing holes.
A central fixing device ensures optimal line lengths, consequently most unimportant losses in the lines.
A good access to the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E is essential
- for a good visual level control
- for the lubricant filling via a conical head lubrication nipple according to DIN 71412 (item no. 25),
the filling valve with coupler (item no. 25) or the removable top cover (item no. 8)
- for a problem-free dismantling and installation of the pump element.
• Consider pressure load capacity for piping material and olive screw joints.
• Do not use fittings!

The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E is adapted to be used only for the max. feed pressure as stipulated in the
technical specification under the title GENERAL. When the pressure limit is exceeded; there is the hazard
inherent to lead to destruction of pump or pump elements. Care should be taken by installation the entire
system adequately (pipework, components, pressure relief valve) in order to prevent that the max. admissible
discharge pressure be exceeded.

2. Electric connection
For the connection of the geared motor of the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E to an electronic control unit, a
10 m long flexible connection lead with 2 conductors (1.5 mm²) is fixied in series.
Conductor “1“ = DC 12V / 24V (+), conductor “2“ = earth (-).

For the connection to an electronic control unit, it is essential that this is done by qualified staff only and that
the voltage is eliminated (see GENERAL, item no. 3.2 „Specification“ and DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF
OPERATION, item no. 6 connection diagram/geared motor).
An electric control unit is to be installed by specialists only.
The local electric instructions must be observed (see SAFETY, itm no. 4, Working in the consciousness of
safety).
ATTENTION
It is absolutely essential that the agitator (item no. 4) turns clockwise. An arrow on the bowl (item no. 6)
indicates the correct direction of rotation of the agitator (item no. 4). If the agitator (ite, no. 4) turns
anticlockwise, the polarity of the geared motor (item no. 1) has to be checked according to the connection
diagram/geared motor (see DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION, item no. 6) of these Operating
Instructions.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 10 of 16

 COMMISSIONING

1. Filling
2. Deaeration
3. Connection of pipe lines

1. Filling
Fill bowl (item no. 6) of lubricant pump AUTULOB-E with clean lubricant only, namely via the conical head
lubrication nipple (item no. 25), the filling valve with coupling (item no. 25) or from the top by removing the lid
(item no. 8). Air bubbles that might be enclosed in the grease will escape during operation of the lubricant
pump. The lubricant pump deaerates automatically.

ATTENTION

While refilling the pump AUTOLUB-E make sure to protect it to avoid acceidental starting.
In order to ensure thet deaeration is effected rather quickly fill up the reservoir of the pump AUTOLUB-E from
the top, during first commissioning and squeeze the gerase into the suction chambre by using an adequate
device such as a scraper or smoother. While doing this, take care to avoid air bubbles, then top up the
reservoir with the required lubricant quantity.
The lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E must not run without lubricant!
Should the agitator inside the grease pump AUTOLUB-E become visible, proceed as described above.
Always use clean lubricant and proceed with painstakenly cleanliness to avoid any kind of contamination.
Dirt particles are the most frequent reasons for failures and damages.
Replenished reservoir always in time.

2. Deaeration
Start the grease pump AUTOLUB-E and keep it running unconnected (for abt. 20 min) until lubricant with no
air bubbles emerges.

3. Connection of pipe lines

Before installing the pipes, clean them all throughly by tapping and blowing them through with compressed air
and fill them with unpulluted lubricant by means of grease gun.
Then connect the pipe lines.

Check the pre-determined opening pressure of the pressure relief valves located downflow in the pipe lines.
Observe max. operating pressure of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E and that of the components of the system.
The pressure outlet ports of the pump elements must not be closed. In case of non-observance there is the
risk of destroying both pump and pump elements.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 11 of 16

 MAINTENANCE

1. Spares drawing
2. Spares list
3. Replacing and refitting of pump element
4. Assembly & disassembly / pump element
5. Assembly & disassembly / lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E

ATTENTION
Should it once become necessary to exchange or dismount the geared motor (item no. 1), the cheese-head
screws (item no. 21) must be replaced by new ones. These cheese head screws are provided with an
adhesive which can be used twince only. (see point no. 5 Assembly & disassembly / lubricant pump
AUTOLUB-E, page 15)
The geared motor (item no. 1) can be only be supplied together with item nos. 23 and 24 (cap/upper part and
cap/lower part).
Should the agitator (item no. 4) be exchanged or disassembled, the safety adhesive of Messrs. Locite no.
243, code no. 78542-1333, has to be used (see point no. 5 Assembly & disassembly / lubricant pump
AUTOLUB-E, page 15) for the re-installation.

1. Spares drawing

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 12 of 16

 MAINTENANCE

2. Spares list
Item Pieces Designation Code no.
- - Lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E 21118 – 1300
Pump DC 12 V 2l 21118 – 1411
- 1 consisting of item DC 24 V 2l 21118 – 1421
nos. 1-9 and 12-33 DC 12 V 4l 21118 – 1431
DC 24 V 4l 21118 – 1441
- 1 repair kit geared motor DC 12 V 69111 – 8911
consiting of item nos. 1, 23, 24, 25 and 28 - 33 DC 24 V 69111 – 8921
geared motor, DC 12 V 76911 – 1563 N
1 1 -1
rated speed 18 min DC 24 V 76911 – 1573 N
2 1 housing 74321 – 3141
1 Pump element at choice 0.1 cm³/stroke 62211 – 2711
- 1 consisting of item nos. 34 - 43 0.15 cm³/stroke 62211 – 2721
0.2 cm³/stroke 62211 – 2731
3 1 O-ring DIN 3771 170 x 3 - N - NBR 70 72711 – 2853 E
4 1 agitator, complete 62631 – 1291
5 1 rubber hose DN 10 outside dia. 14 NBR 73312 – 2933 E
2l 73721 – 6411
6 1 bowl
4l 63721 – 6261
7 1 O-ring DIN 3771 180 x 5 - N - NBR 70 72711 – 2863 E
8 1 top cover 73751 – 5241
2l 65121 – 7811 Z
9 1 min contents control
4l 65121 – 7821 Z
10 1 element 73751 – 5261 Z
11 1 seal 72729 – 1231 E
12 1 deep groove ball bearing 6000 DIN 625 71418 – 1194
13 2 axial bearing disk 26 / 12 mm dia. 71419 – 1183
14 1 locking ring 30 x 1.5 DIN 471 74186 – 1174
15 5 cheese-head screw M 6 x 25 DIN 912 - 8.8 74102 – 1964
16 5 disk A 6.4 DIN 9021 - St 74185 – 1854
17 1 Woodruff key 63 x 5 DIN 6888 71951 – 4084
18 1 inner raceway 30 x 38 x 18 71419 – 1193
19 1 eccentric 71541 – 1471
20 1 slotted ring 10 x 18 x 5 - NBR 70 72713 – 5553 E
21 3 cheese-head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 912 INBUS PLUS 8.8 74102 – 1954
22 1 seal 72727 – 2241 N
23 1 upper part of cap 73761 – 4381 N
24 1 lower part of cap 73761 – 4391 N
conical head lubrication nipple AR 1/4 DIN 71412 73683 – 1713
25 1
filling valve with coupler 69111 – 8751 Z
26 3 seal screw M 22 x 1.5 GPN 730 74106 – 2183
27 1 twisted nipple PG 13.5 76927 – 2333 N
28 10 m plastic trip line, flexible, 2 conductors (1.5 mm²) 76921 – 2533 N
29 1 nut LPG 13.5 plastic DIN 46320 76927 – 2893 N
30 2 tapping screw M 3 x 8 DIN 7513 74105 – 2293 N
31 1 cable clip, galvanized 76927 – 4913 N

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 13 of 16

 MAINTENANCE

2. Spares list (continue)

Item Pieces Designation Code no.
32 2 solderness pin-and-socket connector with insulation DIN 46245 76928 – 2033 N
0.1 cm³/stroke 74332 – 9511 N
33 1 housing 0.15 cm³/stroke 74332 – 9521 N
0.2 cm³/stroke 74332 – 9531 N
34 1 screw 74141 – 1571
35 1 transmission disk with guide pin 73641 – 5613 E
36 1 compression spring 71614 – 2141 E
37 1 cover disk 74185 – 0053 E
38 1 seal 72722 – 1251 E
39 1 conical 73641 – 5131 E
0.1 cm³/stroke 72105 – 1191 N
40 1 piston 0.15 cm³/stroke 72106 – 1241 N
0.2 cm³/stroke 72106 – 1411 N
41 1 compression spring 71616 – 6171
42 1 spring plate 71641 – 3551
The parts marked "E" recommended to be held in stock as spare.
They can be supplied commonly as repair kit, code no. 69111-8791.
The parts marked "N" are not supplied individually as spare part.
The parts marked "Z" are accessories. In case of requirement, they must be specified separately on the order.

3. Replacing or refitting of pump element

• Disconnect motor and level siwtch by qualified staff, and/or protect pump against unintended switching
on.
• Loosen lubricant line carefully from pump element. Unscrew pump element by using a wrench (wrench
size across flats 24), but do not remove entirely from resevoir.
To prevent the piston of pump element from getting clung in the lubricant, rotate the element (by spinning
movements) in order to create a cavination. When removing the element take care that the piston is
showing diagonally, to the top.

ATTENTION
• Refill the suction or piston channels of new pump element of those which have been repaired with
grease.
• Push element into the housing bore with pistons showing diagonally to the top, then screwing it into the
pump and tightened it firmly with a torque of 35 to 40 Nm.
• Motor and level switch have to be connected to the mains by qualified staff only, and the protection
against accidental switching-on to be removed.

• Pay attention to correct rotary direction of the agitator, sense of rotation = right-hand/clockwise.

ATTENTION
• Deaerate pump (see COMMISSIONING)

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 14 of 16

 MAINTENANCE

4. Assembly & disassembly / pump element

• Pull piston (item no. 40) out of the housing (item no. 33).
• Unscrew screw (item no. 34) by means of a wrench (wrench size across flats 6)
• Remove non-return valve
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts of damages.
• Replace damaged parts.
• Assemble pump element in reverse order.
ATTENTION
• Tighten screw (item no. 34) with a torque 8 Nm.

5. Assembly & disassembly of lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E

• Disconnect motor by qualified staff.

• Remove pump from the machine and/or from the system.
• Dismantle pump elements.
• Pull off top cover (item no. 8) from the bowl (item no. 6)
ATTENTION
• Screw off agitator (item no. 4). Attention - lefthanded thread! Schwergängig, da das Rührwerk mit
Sicherungsmittel eingeklebt wurde.
• Remove screws (item no. 15) and take off bowl (item no. 6).
• Remove eccentric (item no. 19) and woodruff key (item no. 17).
• Remove screws (item no. 21) and take geared motor (item no. 1) with protection caps (item no.
23 + 24) off the housing (item no. 2).
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether (this does not apply to the geared motor (item no. 1) with its
protection caps (item no. 23 + 24) ).
• Check parts for damages.
• Replace all seals by new ones.
• Assemble lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E in reverse order.
ATTENTION
• For mounting the geared motor (item no. 1) with the protection caps (item no. 23 and 24) to the housing,
use new screws (item no. 21) only. The screws (item no. 21) are provided with an adhesive which allows
two uses only.
• For the installation of the agitator (item no. 4) onto the shaft of the geared motor (item no. 1), observe the
following points:
1. Clean thread on the shaft of the geared motor (item no. 1) and the thread in the hub of the agitator
(item no. 4) from all remnants of grease and adhesive with the help of a suitable detergent.
2. Wet thread on the shaft of the geared motor (item no. 1) or thread in the hub of the agitator (item no.
4) with adhesive no. 243 of the company Locite, code no. 78542-1333.
3. Screw agitator (item no. 4) onto the shaft of the geared motor (item no. 1).
• Install pump element.
• Mount pump to the machine and/ot into the system.

• Connect motor to current supply by qualified staff

ATTENTION
• Pay attention to correct rotational sence of the agitator; sense of rotation = right-hand/clockwise.
• Deaerate pump (see COMMISSIONING).

• Dispose of old oil and grease remnants according to rule.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 15 of 16
 Failures, their possible reasons and repair
Failure Possible reasons Repair
Pump does not deliver filling level is lower than min. value Fill up lubricant and deaerate as described under
lubricant (reservoir empty) COMMISSIONING.
Electric connection of geared motor has Check pin connection.
been polarized in the wrong way.

Voltage incorrect Check voltage

Pump does not run Voltage supply is interrupted. Check voltage at the battery.
Lubrication point is blocked To find out which lubrication points and/or which
lubrication point group is blocked, loosen pipe
connections at pump elements one after the other.
When the bloecked bundle has been loosened, the
pump must start running again.
Localize the lubrication points concerned by loosening
the connection lines. The failure may have been caused
by dirt accumulation in the lubrication point, blocked up
lubrication points or squeezed lubricant lines.
Pump element does Pump element is defective By loosening the pipe connections at the pump
not deliver lubricant elements you will find the pump element which does not
deliver lubricant after the pump has been switched on.
Dirt accumulation within the piston or heavy mechanical
damages to the pump element are possible reasons for
the failure.
If removal and purification of the pump element do not
result in an improvement, the pump element has to be
replaced by a new one.
ATTENTION
When assembling the cleaned pump element, the screw
(item no. 34) must be tightened with a torque of 8 Nm
only.

ACCESSORIES

1. Element for cartridge filling

2. Filling valve with coupler
3. Level switch

1. Element for cartridge filling

The element (item no. 10) (accessory part) for the cartridge filling has been designed in such a way that it can
be sticked between top cover (item no. 8) and bowl (item no. 6) of the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E, if
required. In this case, the seal (item no. 11) is removed. Grease cartridges of 4.5 kg (e.g. Top Autol 2000)
can be used.

2. Filling valve with coupler

The filling valve with coupler (item no. 25) consists of a coupler plug G ¼, a nipple G ¼ and a dust cap, and in
case of need it is screwed in instead of the conical head lubricantion nipple (item no. 25).

3. Level switch
The level switch for the lubricant pump AUTOLUB-E consists of a proximity switch with housing, a mounted
lid and a plug according to DIN 43650-A/ISO 4400.
If required, the level switch is mounted on the tank (item no. 6) instead of the lid (item no. 8).
When the level switch is ordered, the technical data as well as the pin connections can be taken from a
measurement sheet which is supplied with the level switch. In this case, this measurement sheet will be part
of the present operating instructions.

21118 BA 1e / 5 9903HF Replacement for 21118 BA 1e / 4 9705 Wi Page 16 of 16

Lubrication Pumps TA-D (for oil) and TB-D (for grease)
for operation by hand lever or pneumatically

ADVANTAGES
For lubrication at friction points on presses, stamping
presses, machine tools, conveyors, etc.
• for multi-line systems with up to max. 8 outlets at
hand-operated and at up to max. 9 outlets by pneu -
matically operated
• for progressive systems with distributors of types E4,
ZP-A or ZP-B, with connection on outlet X
• for single-line systems with distributors of types ZE-C
(for grease), ZE-D (for oil or semifluid grease) and
ZE-E (for oil)
• for spray lubrication systems
• for mixed lubrication systems, which supply a mixture
of oil or semifluid grase and oil to the lubrication points

TB - D
for hand-operated or pneumatically

APPLICATIONS AND TECHNICAL DATA

Pumps Ü
Type : TA - D TB - D
Drive : hand lever pneumatically hand lever pneumatically
Applications : multi-line system single-line system multi-line system single-line system
progressive system multi-line system progressive system multi-line system
mixed lubrication system progressive system
Lubricant : lubrication oil from service viscosity 30 mm s
2 -1 lubrication grease up to NLGI-class 2, DIN 51818
Outlets : 1 up to 8 1 up to 9 1 up to 8 1 up to 9
the desired outlets must always lie in a closed numerical order starting from 1.
Output volume per outl. : 0,5 cm3/double stroke 0,5 cm3/double stroke 0,5 cm3/double stroke 0,5 cm3/double stroke
Operation temperature : – 20 oC to + 80 oC – 20 oC to + 80 oC – 20 oC to + 80 oC – 20 oC to + 80 oC
Pressure max. (bar) : 25 100 25 100
Reservoir capacity : 0,25 l or 0,65 l 1,6 l or 4 l 0,25 l or 0,65 l 1,6 l or 4 l

21153 P 1e / 2 796 1000HF

replacement for 21153 P 1e
 APPLICATIONS
. . . for multi-line systems (fig. 1)
In a single lubrication cycle each of the 8 and/or 9 lubrica-
tion points receives 0.5 cm3 lubricant in turn, starting at
no. 1.
The number of lubrication points must be stated on the
order: the number can be changed subsequently only
by changing the loose part groups (see operating in-
structions).
If it is required that a lubrication points hall receive 1.0 or
1.5 cm3 lubricant per lubrication cycle, 2 or 3 outlets must
be connected together.
Fig. 1. Example of application :
multi-line pump with 3 normal outlets and 1 outlet with double delivery
volume, pneumatically-operated.

. . . with progressive distributors

at operating through hand lever (fig. 2):
a progressive system can also be used to supply 4.0 cm3
lubricant per stroke from outlet X, the outlet 1 to 8 in that
case being closed. Depending on the local circumstan-
ces, this may enable a more favourable line layout to be
used. Due to the appropriate design of the progressive
distribur it is possible to supply connected lubrication
Fig. 2. Example of application :
points with different quantities of lubricant. progressive system for differently lubricant quantity.

at pneumatically-operated (fig. 3):

if more than 9 lubrication points are to be supplied with
grease, or if certain lubrication points are to receive less
than 0.5 cm3 lubricant per lubrication cycle, progressive
distributors can be added. Furthermore, it is possible to
monitor the operation of the pump by means of a limit
switch fitted on the progressive distributor, in conjunction
with an electrical control system. In Fig. 3, e.g., the type
ZP-A progressive distributor connected to outlet X, supp-
lies each of the 12 lubrication points connected to it with
4.5 cm3 per pump stroke, lubricant in a before choice Fig. 3. Example of application :
relation. progressive system for differently lubricant quantity.

. . . for single-line systems (fig. 4)

using type ZE-D distributors for oil or semifluid grease, or
type ZE-E for oil. If the lubricant requirement for all the lubrica-
tions points is less than 1.5 cm3 and if at the sam time, the
main feed lines in the system are short (= 5 m), then all the
lubrication points can be supplied with lubricant in one lu-
brication cycle. In this case the main feed line for the sing-
le-line system, is connected to outlet X. All the other
outlets are closed. Pressure relief from the main feed line is Fig. 4. Example of application :
effected via a second connection from the main feed line single-line system for oil with about 15 lubrication points and an as the
to Y. max. total amount of lubricant to be supplied from 1.5 cm3.

2
 APPLICATIONS (continuous)
. . . for spray lubrication systems (grease) (fig. 5)
For exposed gearwheels which only need to be sprayed
with lubricant occasionally, it is possible to use a spray lu-
brication system with its air supply controlled by a timer.
An signal issued from the series-connected pulse trans-
mitter causes a way valve to operate momentarily, resul-
ting in the pump operating and 0.5 cm3 grease being
delivered to the spray nozzles from each of the outlets 1 to
4, while at the same time cpmpressed air is fed to the
nozzles to spray the grease.

Fig. 5. Example of application :

spray lubrication system for grease.

. . . for mixed lubrication (oil or semifluid grease) (fig. 6)

In the system shown, the pump outlets 4 and 5 are directly
connected to lubrication points and 3 spray lubrication
points are connected via mixing segments to the pump
outlets 1 to 3. In each pressure cycle, 0.5 cm3 oil or semi-
fluid grease is pumped into each of the 3 mixing segments.
The compressed air supply to the mixing valve is turned on
by a way solenoid valve. The lubricant is forced along the in-
side wall of the line to the spray nozzle, where the compres-
sed air causes it to spray out during a period of some length.
If there are more than 8 lubrication points a single-line sy-
stem with mixing distributors should be used. The system
can be supplied with a system for monitoring the lubricant, Fig. 6. Example of application :
the compressed air and any blockage of the nozzles. In combined multi-line and mixed lubrication system.
this case the lubricant supply to the mixing distributors is
via a progressive distributor (see publication X 60P 5e)

Control system dependent on the machine cycle (fig. 7)

e.g. by means of a mechanical pulse counter fitted to pres-
ses or machine tools. Each time after the set number of
pulses has been counted, compressed air is applied mo- Fig. 7. Example of application :
mentarily to the pump, thereby initiated a lubrication cycle. control by pulse counter working on the machine cycle.

3
 DIMENSIONS ( mm )

4
 CODE NOS.
Item Designation TA - D (oil) TB - D (grease) TA - D (oil) TB - D (grease)
hand lever operated pneumatically operated
— lubrication pump 21153 - 9000 21153 - 4000 21153 - 9000 21153 - 4000
reservoir 0,25 l oil 63721 - 1141 — — —
reservoir 0,65 l oil 63721 - 1161 — — —
reservoir 0,25 l grease — 63721 - 1151 — —
reservoir 0,65 l grease — 63721 - 1171 — —
1
reservoir 1,60 l oil — — 63721 - 1811 —
reservoir 4,01 l oil — — 63721 - 1821 —
reservoir 1,60 l grease — — — 63721 - 1831
reservoir 4,01 l grease — — — 63721 - 1841
2 pump body 62871 - 1321 62871 - 1221
loose components group (L-group)
outlet number
open closed
1 2 up to 8 and X 69112 - 1611
1 and 2 3 up to 8 and X 69112 - 1621
1 up to 3 4 up to 8 and X 69112 - 1631
1 up to 4 5 up to 8 and X 69112 - 1641
1 up to 5 6 up to 8 and X 69112 - 1651 ———
1 up to 6 7 and 8 and X 69112 - 1661
1 up to 7 8 and X 69112 - 1671
1 up to 8 X 69112 - 1681
X 1 up to 8 69112 - 1691
3 1 2 up to 9, X and Y 69112 - 1411
1 and 2 3 up to 9, X and Y 69112 - 1421
1 up to 3 4 up to 9, X and Y 69112 - 1431
1 up to 4 5 up to 9, X and Y 69112 - 1441
1 up to 5 6 up to 9, X and Y 69112 - 1451
1 up to 6 7 up to 9, X and Y ——— 69112 - 1461
1 up to 7 8 up to 9, X and Y 69112 - 1471
1 up to 8 9 up to X and Y 69112 - 1481
1 up to 9 X and Y 69112 - 1491
X 1 up to 9 and Y 69112 - 1511
X and Y 1 up to 9 69112 - 1521

EXAMPLE OF ORDERING
A grease pump TA - D for multi-line systems with a 1.6 l
reservoir for oil with 9 outlets and pneumatic operation is
required.
1 oil lubrication pump TA-D 9 / 1.6
pneumatically operated
Code no.: ___________________________ 21153 - 9000

5
 ACCESSORIES
Code no. for screw joints
Pipe Designation Code no.
external dia.
male fitting 73511 - 5153
6
double conical ring 73511 - 2644
ring connection piece
optionally hollow bolt
6 double conical ring 63422 - 3071
male fitting
2 seal rings
connection piece 73490 - 5263
seal ring 72712 - 1094
8
male fitting 73511 - 5223
double conical ring 73511 - 2654
optionally
ring connection piece
hollow bolt
8 2 seal rings 63422 - 3091
male fitting
double conical ring

Code no. for special accessories, pneumatically operated

Designation Code no.
non return valve
73611 - 5123
response pressure 0.5 bar
3/2-way solenoid valve 24 V DC 38152 - 1423
3/2-way solenoid valve 220 V 50 Hz 38152 - 1413

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Fettschmierpumpe FH -B für hydraulischen Anschluß
Grease lubrication pump FH - B for hydraulic operation

ANWENDUNG
Die Fettschmierpumpe FH - B wird zur Schmierung
von Maschinen oder Geräten eingesetzt, die mit einer
Hydraulikanlage ausgestattet sind.
Die Fettschmierpumpe FH - B wird bevorzugt in Ver-
bindung mit Progressiv-Verteilern eingesetzt, die die unter
Druck zugeführte Schmierstoffmenge solange auf die an-
geschlossenen Reibstellen aufteilen, bis der hydraulische
Druck abgeschaltet wird.
Soll der Progressiv-Verteiler nur einen Schmiertakt
ausführen, wird der hydraulische Druck durch Kontakt-
gabe des Endtasters am Verteiler über ein Wegeventil ab-
geschaltet.
Bei manueller Betätigung kann hierzu ein einfacher
Blockkugelhahn vorgesehen werden. AUFBAU
Die Fettschmierpumpe FH - B besteht aus einem dop-
APPLICATIONS peltwirkenden Hydraulikzylinder mit nachgeschaltetem
Rückschlagventil und Kegel- oder Flachschmiernippel für
The grease pump FH - B is used to lubricate machines die Befüllung des Hydraulikzylinders mit Schmierstoff. Die
and equipment which are hydraulically operated. Kolbenstange dient zur Anzeige des Befüllungszustan-
The grease pump FH - B is predominantly applied in des. Bei leerem Schmierstoffraum ist die Kolbenstange
conjunction with grogressive distributors, the adequate nahezu im Innern des Zylinders verschwunden.
amount of lubricant is delivered under pressure to the lube
point, and operation continues long as the hydraulic pres-
sure is switched in. DESIGN
If the progressive distributor is supposed to do one cy-
The grease pump FH - B consists of a double-acting
cle only, the hydraulic pressure is switched off by means of
hydraulic cylinder with check valve and conical of flat
a way valve which is actuated by the limit switch, located at
nipple installed downflow, the latter being used to fill the
the distributor.
hydraulic cylinder with lubricant. The piston rod provided
For manual operation a simple ball valve can be serves to indicate the lubricant level inside the cylinder.
provided. When the chamber is empty, the piston rod almost dis-
appears into the inside of the cylinder.

ABMESSUNGEN (mm) DIMENSIONS (mm)

21164 P 2 d + e / 2 1090 1000HF

 TECHNISCHE DATEN Benennung Bestell - Nr.
Designation Code no.
Anwendungsbereich: Fettschmierpumpe Kegelschmiernippel 21164 - 2611
Schmierfette ..................... bis NLGI-Klasse 3 DIN 51818 FH - B mit Conical nipples
Grease pump Flachschmiernippel
Schmieröle .......... ISO VG 5 bis ISO VG 1500 DIN 51519 FH - B with 21164 - 2621
Flat nipples
Betätigungsdruck Hydraulik : ..................... max. 200 bar
Zubehör muß gesondert bestellt werden: ---
Betriebsdruck Schmierstoff : ............................... 187 bar Accessories must ordered separately:
Raumtemperatur : .......................... - 20 oC bis + 80 oC Rohrschelle 73573 - 3191
Nenninhalt : ............................................................... 0,8 l Pipe clamp
Einbaulage : ........................................................ beliebig Kegelschmiernippel,
Greifkupplung 73681 - 9013
Gewicht : ................................................................... 6 kg für Füllanschluß Conical nipples,
Grit adapter
Flachschmiernippel,
for filling stud
TECHNICAL DATA Ziehkupplung 73681 - 1923
Flat nipples,giant tate
Application: nipple adapter
Grease ........................... up to NLGI-Klasse 3 DIN 51818
Grease oils ....... ISO VG 5 up to ISO VG 1500 DIN 51519
Actuation force (hydraulic) : ........................ max. 200 bar
Operating pressure (lubricant) : ........................... 187 bar
Ambient temperature : ................ - 20 oC up to + 80 oC
Nominal content : ...................................................... 0,8 l
BESTELLBEISPIEL
Installation : ....................................................... at choice 1 Fettschmierpumpe FH -B .. Bestell-Nr. 21164 - 2611
Weight : ..................................................................... 6 kg mit Kegelschmiernippel
Antrieb hydraulisch
1 Rohrschelle ........................ Bestell-Nr. 73573 - 3191
1 Greifkupplung ..................... Bestell-Nr. 73681 - 9013
für Kegelschmiernippel

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

1 Grease pump FH -B ............. Code no. 21164 - 2611
with conical nipples
method of drive hydraulic
1 Pipe clamp ........................... Code no. 73573 - 3191
1 Giant tate nipple adapter ...... Code no. 73681 - 9013
for conical nipples

Beispiel einer Schmieranlage mit Fettschmierpumpe FH-B

und nachgeschalteten Progressiv-Verteiler für 6 Reibstellen.
Specimen of a typical lubrication system with FH-B pump and
progressive distributors for 6 lubrication points.

Die Anlage wird durch Kontaktgabe eines Zeitrelais

oder Impulsgebers über ein 2/2-Wegeventil unter Druck
gesetzt und abgeschaltet, wenn der Endtaster am Pro-
gressiv-Verteiler einen vollen Schmiertakt meldet.
The system is pressurized and switched off respective-
ly by contact of a timer or pulse transmitter in conjunction
with 2/2-way valve, this is performed as soon as the limit
switch located at progressive distributor indicates that a full
cycle has been made.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Oil Lubrication Pump VB - A
Grease Lubrication Pump VB - B
APPLICATION
The VB-type lubrication pumps are reservoir pumps with a single-action plunger operated by a hand lever.
Oil lubrication pumps of type VB - A have no anti-cavitation plate. Grease lubrication pumps, type VB - B, have an
anti-cavitation plate complete with a level indicator projecting out of the top of the reservoir.
The pumps are available with reservoirs of 1 ltr., 1.6 ltr. or 4 ltr. capacity.

For Single-line systems :

with the hand lever in the pressure release position R, the
pump’s com pres sion cham ber and suc tion cham ber
are in ter con nec ted, so that in this le ver po si tion, the
de pres su ri sa tion of the main de li very line, ne ces sa ry
for the ope ra tion of the sing le-line dis tri bu tor ZE-C, can
take pla ce.
For Dual-line systems :
in this application, as shown in Fig. 4, the 4/2-way valve,
available as an accessory, must be connected by the P Fig. 1 single-line systems with lubrication pump VB - B
and R connection to the pump having a 1.6 ltr. or 4 ltr.
reservoir. If, at the end of the second lubrication cycle, the
hand lever is moved into the pressure release position, For filling and greasing systems and for grease
both main delivery lines are depressurised during the testing systems :
lubrication interval; this is an advantage under adverse a special version, called the VB-S type grease pump, is
operating conditions. available for determining the content od solids in lubrica-
tion greases by the method soecified in DIN 51813 (see
For Progressive systems : 21531-9221 M 1.1).
in these systems, it is recommended to screw a non-return
valve into the pump outlet P, so that if the pump is depres- The pump is also suitable for grease depressurisation test
surised unintentionally, no pressure drop occurs in the systems (see 21531-9231 M 1.1).
main delivery line.

Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4

Lubrication pump VB-B with 1 ltr. Lubrication pump VB-A with 1.6 ltr. Lubrication pump VB-B with 4 ltr.
reservoir for semi-fluid grease or reservoir for oil (without anti-cavitation reservoir for grease and 4/2-way
grease (with anti-cavitation plate) plate) valve for dual-line systems

21531 P 1 e / 2 0296HF
DIMENSIONS ( mm )

Pump with 1 ltr. reservoir

Pump with 1.6 ltr. and 4 ltr. reservoir

Pump with 4/2-way valve fitted for dual line systems

2
 MODE OF OPERATION SPECIFICATION

The hand lever has three positions of rest, P, P1 and R. Delivery pressure : ...................................... max. 120 bar
The delivery stroke takes place when the lever is moved Quantity delivered per delivery stroke : ................. 2 ccm
from P1 to P. The suction stroke takes place when the lever Useful reservoir capacity : ................ 1 ltr., 1.6 ltr. or 4 ltr.
is moved from P to P1. In the position R, the delivery and Usable lubricants :
suction chambers of the pump are connected. VB - A : ...... oil up to 2000 mm2s-1 at the operating temp.
The pump has a relief permanently set at approx. 120 VB - B : ............... greases up to consistency class 2 and
bar, and a strainer. An indicator rod projects out of the ...................... a worked penetration exceeding 265
housing if the max. operating pressure reaches 120 bar,
Installation position : .......................... vertical (as shown)
and the relief valve opens. On single-line and dual-line sy-
Fixing : ....................................... with 2 screws M 10 x 30
stems, this indicates the cessation of the lubrication ope-
Filling valve :
ration.
............. Flat lubrication nipple AM 16 x 1.5 DIN 3404
Pumps having 1.6 ltr. and 4 ltr. reservoirs are fitted with
Filter screen mesh :
a filling valve which facilitates replenishing of the reservoir
wire mesh 0.4 x 0.18 DIN 4189 - Cu Zn 37
with clean, air-free, lubricant.
See X 70 P1e for suitable filling systems, couplings,
grease guns, etc.

CODE NO.
Type Lubricants Reservoir capacity Dimensions ( mm ) Weight Code no.
Ltr. l h kg
VB - A oil 21531 - 4111
1.0 — — 9.6
VB - B grease 21531 - 4511
VB - A oil 21531 - 4121
1.6 300 140 9.6
VB - B grease 21531 - 4521
VB - A oil 21531 - 4131
4.0 495 335 10.5
VB - B grease 21531 - 4531
4/2-way valve only in conjunction with 1.6 ltr. and 4 ltr. reservoir 1.9 63632 - 3211

Connection at the 4/2-way valve

Pos. Designation Code no.
— Grease lubrication pump VB - B consisting of: 21531 - 6100
Grease lubrication pump VB - B (1.6 ltr.) 21531 - 4521
1
Grease lubrication pump VB - B (4.0 ltr.) 21531 - 4531
2 4/2 - way valve 63632 - 3211

EXAMPLE OF ORDER
1 Grease lubrication pump VB - B ....... 21531 - 6100
consisting of :
1.1 Grease lubrication pump VB - B ....... 21531 - 4521
1.2 4/2 - way valve ................................... 63632 - 3211

3
 ACCESSORIES
Fittings Code no.
for main delivery line, dia. 6
1 Connector 73490 - 5321
1 Olive 73511 - 2644
1 Union 73511 - 5153
for main delivery line, dia. 8
1 Connector 73490 - 5331
1 Olive 73511 - 2654
1 Union 73511 - 5223
for main delivery line, dia. 10
Straight threaded coupling 73442 - 1424

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
BM - B Pump for Oil / Grease / Semi fluid grease

USE
The BM - B pump, because of ist constructional
characteristics, may be used in single line-, dual line-,
progressive- and spray lubricating systems.
Regardless of the number of lubrication points, the
pump can be effectively adapted to meet any require-
ments. It can also be used for refilling and mobile greasing
systems.

ADVANTAGES
q Extremely reliable due to positive control
q Long service life thanks to the use of wear-resistant
high-grade steel
q Compact and robust contruction
q Adjustable pump operating pressure

APPLICATION
Iron and steel works, Rolling mills, Mining industry,
Power stations, Heavy machinery, Cement works, Sugar
mills, Building machinery

TECHNICAL DATA
Delivery pressure adjustable : __________ max. 400 bar
Delivery in the case of a geared motor (50 Hz) :
63 min-1 ______________________ 34 cm3/min (2,0 l/h)
125 min-1 ______________________ 67 cm3/min (4,0 l/h)
Gear reduction in the case of a free shaft end :
________________ (delivery at driving speed 1500 rpm)
23 : 1 (34 cm3/min) ______________ 11 : 1 (67 cm3/min)
22 : 1 (34 cm3/min up to -20° C) MODE OF OPERATION
Max. rpm geared motor version : _____ max. 125 min-1 The pump can be supplied complete with a geared
Max. rpm freeend stud version : _____ max. 1500 min-1 motor or a gear box with free shaft end. It consists essenti-
Direction of rotation of the pump : ______ anticlockwise ally of a housing with pump unit and an integral lubricant
Reservoir capacity : ____________________ 8, 15 or 30 l reservoir.
Operating temperature The delivery and control plungers of the pump ele-
according to type : ____________ - 20° C up to + 80° C ment are driven by eccentric cams to which they are rigidly
Compatible lubricants : connected. As a result there of, they are positively control-
Lubricating grease on led.
Mineral oil basis _______ up to NLGI-class 3 DIN 51818 A blockage (as may happen with spring-controlled
Mineral oils __________ ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) plungers or a hydraulic pressure transfer) is not possible.
at service temperature The required delivery pressure can be adjusted by means
Synthetic oils ___________________________ at request of an integralted pressure relief valve.
Built-in grease filter _____ wire cloth 0,4 x 0,18 DIN 4189 It prevents damages to the pump in the event of an in-
Filter area ________________________________ 19 cm2 admissibly high counter-pressure situations. The pump
Builin pressure relief valve : need not be vented.
___ can be adjustable from 0 to 450 bar, set to 450 bar
When using the hydraulic 4/2-way valve SA - K, the set
pressure may not exceed 350 bar.

22113 P 1e / 03 0996HF
Replacement for 02 0793HF
 DIMENSIONS (mm)

Design Weight with Dimensions (mm)

gear motor a b c d e f g h
8l abt. 25 kg ø 190 595 785
reservoir 15 l abt. 28 kg ø 240 630 870
30 l abt. 31 kg ø 310 700 1010
motor- 0.18 kW for 63 min-1 406 289 ø 14 k6 18 16
power 0.37 kW for 63 min-1 432 324 ø 16 k6 28 18
rating 0.37 kW for 125 min-1 424 289 ø 14 k6 18 16

2
 CODE NO.
Part Denomination Code no.
no.
with with free
gear motor shaft end
1 Grease lubrication pump BM-B 22113 - 1200 22113 - 1300
consisting of following components:
8l 22113 - 1111
2 Pump with reservoir 15 l 22113 - 1121
30 l 22113 - 1131
3 Loose components group (for transmission gear box and gear motor) 69111 - 7711
220 - 240 / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz
18 kW, 71111 - 3213
243 - 277 / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
0 to + 80 oC
290 / 500 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 3223
delivery
220 - 240 / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz
Flange rpm 71111 - 3243
0,37 kW,
4 gear power 243 - 277 / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
- 20 to + 80 oC
motor B 5 temperature
290 - 305 / 500 - 525 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 3253
range
220 - 240 / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz
0,37 kW, 71111 - 3273
243 - 277 / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
0 to + 80 oC
290 - 305 / 500 - 525 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 3283

0 to + 80 oC 23 : 1 0,18 kW Q = ca. 2 l/h 71111 - 1263

ratio at
required
1.500 rpm &
Flange
5 temperature - 20 to + 80 oC 22 : 1 0,37 kW Q = ca. 2 l/h 71111 - 1273
geared
range
delivery by
1500 U/min
0 to + 80 oC 11 : 1 0,37 kW Q = ca. 4 l/h 71111 - 1283

— Accessoiries to be ordered optionally upon request

6 Filling valve 65231 - 2111
8 l/min. 65124 - 1121
15 l/min. 65124 - 1131
30 l/min. 65124 - 1141
7 Level control
8 l/min. + max. 65124 - 2121
15 l/min. + max. 65124 - 2131
30 l/min. + max. 65124 - 2141

3
 EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING
1.01 BM-B pump ____________________ 22113 - 1200
consisting of :
1.02 Pump, reservoir 15 ltr. ___________ 22113 - 1121
1.03 Loose components group ________ 69111 - 7711
1.04 Geared motor __________________ 71111 - 3213
1.06 Filling valve ____________________ 65231 - 2111
1.07 Low level controll, min. ___________ 65124 - 1131
ACCESSORIES
Electric 4/2-way valve SA-V _______ Leaflet 34133 PB2e
Hydraulic 4/2-way valve SA - K ____ Leaflet 34135 PB12
Electric 4/2-way cock SA - H ______ Leaflet 34133 PB2e
Pneumatic 3/2-way valve SA - E ___ Leaflet 38141 PB1e
Switchgear SG - A ______________ Leaflet 34184 PB1e
Pressure gauge console _________ Leaflet 65119 PB1e
Dual-line distributor ZV - B ________ Leaflet 35712 P 2e
Single-line distributor ZE - C ______ Leaflet 35640 P 1e
Progressive distributor ZP - A/B ___ Leaflet 35500 P 1e
Filling pump, pneumatic BF - G ___ Leaflet 22542 P 1e
Filling pump, electric BF - E _______ Leaflet 22543 P 1e
Electric control unit ______________________ at request

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211-7774-0 ⋅ Fax: 0211-7774-210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Grease Lubrication Pump BS - B
USE
The BS - B-type pump is ideally suitable for applica-
tions where long extended main line runs and a large
number of friction points are to be reliably served from one
central station.
In conjunction with ZV - B-type metering blocks down-
stream the pump is predominantly used in dual-line cen-
tralized systems, but also as filling-or greasing pump.

ADVANTAGES
q Low capital investment
q Optimum adaptability to meet individual requirement
q Fully automatic operation and system monitoring
thanks to a large number of optional extras (study
accessories)
q Catering for over 1,000 lubrication poits
q Extension of installation at any time
q Line change-over determined by pressure due to an
unique end-of-line differential switch
q Self-contained working pressure adjustment accor-
ding to prevailing conditions
q Compact and sturdy construction thus ideally suited
under rough and adverse operating conditions
q Utmost reliability in functioning thanks to positive-
ly-controlled plunger movement
q Minimum maintenance
q Long lifetime thanks to weaproof special steel
contruction
PRINCIPLE OF FUNCTIONING
The pump is supplied, at choise, either with flange-
coupled electric geared motor, or with transmission gear-
box and free-end stud. Basically it consists of a body with
APPLICATIONS
plunger assembly and reservoir. The rotation is converted
Iron + Steel Works, Rolling Mills, Mining, Power inside the pump head into an oscillating movement. The
Stations, Cement Works, Sugar Refineries, Contruction BS-B double-acting pump has two pairs of plunger (feed
Machinery pistons and pilot pistons) which move simultaneously into
a common bore.
Whilst one pair of pistons is on the suction stroke in
one bore, the other pair forces the lubricant in a second
bore into the pressure channel. The pilot pistons are posi-
CONFIGURATION tively-controlled i.e. they are displaced mechanically into
ist end position following each cycle, thus preventing
In dual-line systems lubricant is being delivered under blocking, as is likely to occur with hydraulically-or
pressure by means of electric or pneumatic control valves spring-controlled plungers.
into a main feed line and towards the metering blocks dis- The required feed pressure is adjustable thanks to an
tributing it uniformly and precisely-metered to the points. integral pressure relief valve. In the event of an inadmissi-
Varying lubricant quantities can be coped with by selec- bly overpressure situation occuring an additional safegu-
ting different blocks. ard (burst plates) is incorporated to protect the pump ele-
ment from damage. The pump need not be bled (see
maintenance).

22123 P 1e / 03 0700HF
Replacement for 22123 P 1e / 02 0996HF
 TECHNICAL DATA
Feed pressure adjustable, max. : ________________________________________________________________ 400 bar
Delivery rate at : ________________________ 80 min-1 : _________________________________ 120 cm3/min ( 7 l/h )
______________________________________ 160 min-1 : _________________________________ 235 cm3/min ( 14 l/h )
______________________________________ 250 min-1 : _________________________________ 365 cm3/min ( 22 l/h )
Transmission ratio at free-end stud version : ___________________________________ ( output volume at 1,500 min-1)
18 : 1 ( 120 cm3/min ) ______________________________________________________________ 17 : 1 ( 113 cm3/min )
9 : 1 ( 240 cm3/min ) ______________________________________________________________ 5,5 : 1 ( 365 cm3/min )
max. rpm : ______________ with geared motor version : ___________________________________________ 250 min-1
________________________ with free-end stud version : __________________________________________ 1500 min-1
Direction of rotation : __________________________________________________________ clockwise or anti-clockwise
Reservoir capacity : _________________________________________________________________ 30, 60 or 100 litre
Ambient temperature range according to design : _____________________________________ - 20 oC up to + 80 oC
Compatible lubricants : ____________________________________________________ up to NLGI class 3, DIN 51818
Integral strainer : __________________________________ strainer area 40 cm2, wire mesh suze 0,4 x 0,18 DIN 4189
Integral pressure relief valve : ______________________________ range from 0 up to 450 bar, adjusted to 450 bar
Weights (60-litre-reservoir capacity) : ______________________________________________ see simensional drawing

DIMENSIONS (mm)

Design Dimensions
a b c d e f
130 l ø 310 760 1140 200
Reservoir 160 l ø 400 810 1190 230
100 l ø 500 920 1200 280
0,37 kW f. 80 min-1 500 369
Motor 0,75 kW f. 80 min-1 563 411
power
rating 1,5 kW f. 160 min-1 575 411
1,5 kW f. 250 min-1 575 411
Weights :
Pump with geared motor version : ____________________________abt. 67 kg
Pumpe with free-end stud version : ___________________________abt. 54 kg

2
 DIMENSIONS (mm) DIMENSIONS (mm)

stationary pump on base frame mobile pump

Design Dimensions
a b
Design Dimensions 130 litre 1045 511
a b Reservoir 160 litre 1095 541
0,37 kW 500 630 100 litre 1205 591
0,55 kW 500 687 Weight : _________________________________ abt. 110 kg
Motor power rating
0,75 kW 500 687 The greasing pistol is part of the assembly (item 2).
1,5 kW 550 726 Item 7 further optional extras according to dimensional dra-
Weight : _________________________________ abt. 115 kg wing 73681 M 1.1e to advised with order.

MAINTENANCE
When commissioning the pump, allow lubricant to be
discharged free from air bubbles out of the pressure port
(P) to ensure trouble-free functioning, then connect the
feed lines filled with lubricant.
For further particulars study manual 22123 BA 1e.
The pump is mantenance-minded, but efficient ope-
ration demands clean lubricant thus care should be taken
to avoid contamination. Eventually replenish via an auto-
matic filling station with barrel pump; a filler plug is stan-
dard fitting.
ACCESSORIES
Level switch, pressure gauge and adapters
see schedule page 4 + 5
__________________________________________ Printle
Electric 4/2 way reversing valve SA - V ___ 34133 PB 2e
Electric 4/2 way shut-off valve SA - H ____ 34133 PB 2e
Pneumatic 3/2 way valve SA - E _________ 38141 PB 1e
Differential switch box SG - A ___________ 34184 PB 1e
Pressure gauge unit ___________________ 65119 PB 1e
Metering block ZV - B __________________ 35712 P 2e
Pneumatic filling pump BF - G __________ 22542 P 1e
Electric filling pump BF - E _____________ 22543 P 1e
Electrical control system _______________ upon request

3
 REMARKS
The delivery rate is proportional to the rotation speed per minute and therefore subject to change. For temperatures
below – 20 oC special low temperature or winter-grade lubricants must be used.
Details supplied on request, please consult us.

PARTICULARS REQUIRED FOR ORDERING

Part Denomination Code no.
no.
with with with mobile
geared free-end base with
motor stud frame gearbox
— Grease lubrication pump BS - B 22123 - 1200 22123 - 1300 22123 - 1500 22123 - 1700
— consisting of:
30 l 22123 - 1111 22123 - 1411 22123 - 1611
1 Pump with reservoir 60 l 22123 - 1121 22123 - 1421 22123 - 1621
100 l 22123 - 1131 22123 - 1431 22123 - 1631
Loose components group (screws, seals to assemble pump) 69111 - 7711 — —
Loose components group (flexible hose, plug, screws, seals etc. — — — 69111 - 7721
Loose components group for motor 0,37 kW 69111 - 7731
2
0,55 kW
69111 - 7741
(hubs, sleeves, hood, pressure gauge, 0,75 kW
screws, seals etc.) 1,5 kW 69111 - 7751

0,37 kW 80 min-1 220 - 240 V / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz

71111 - 2313 71111 - 2313
0 oC to + 80 oC 243 - 277 V / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
290 V / 500 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 2333 71111 - 2333

0,75 kW 80 min -1 220 - 240 V / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz

71111 - 2353 71111 - 2353
Geared - 20 oC to + 80 oC 243 - 277 V / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
motor
rpm 290 V / 500 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 2363 71111 - 2363
power 220 - 240 V / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz
temperature 1,5 kW 160 min-1 71111 - 3013 71111 - 3013
range 0 oC to + 80 oC 243 - 277 V / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
290 V / 500 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 3023 71111 - 3023

1,5 kW 250 min -1 220 - 240 V / 380 - 415 V; 50 Hz

71111 - 3113 71111 - 3113
0 oC to + 80 oC 243 - 277 V / 420 - 480 V; 60 Hz
290 V / 500 V; 50 Hz 71111 - 3123 71111 - 3123
model P = n = U =V F / cycle
3 kW min-1
71 0,37 1500 230 / 400 50 76911 - 3063
71 0,37 1500 500 50 76911 - 3073
71 0,37 1800 260 / 440 60 76911 - 3063
80 0,55 1500 220 / 380 50 * 76911 - 3113
AC 3phase 80 0,55 1500 500 50 * 76911 - 3123
flange motor
80 0,55 1800 220 / 380 60 * 76911 - 3113
DIN 42673
80 0,75 1500 230 / 400 50 76911 - 3163
80 0,75 1500 500 50 76911 - 3173
80 0,75 1800 260 / 460 60 76911 - 3163
90 L 1,5 1500 230 / 400 50 76911 - 3573
90 L 1,5 1500 500 50 76911 - 3233
90 L 1,5 1800 260 / 460 60 76911 - 3573

4
 PARTICULARS REQUIRED FOR ORDERING (continued)
Part Denomination Code no.
no.
with with with mobile
geared free-end base with
motor stud frame gearbox
18 : 1; 0,37 kW; 0 oC to + 80 oC 71111 - 1213
Transmission gearbox
ratio at required 17 : 1; 0,75 kW; - 20 oC to + 80 oC 71111 - 1223
1,500 rpm & temperature 9 : 1; 1,5 kW; 0 oC to + 80 oC 71111 - 1233
range
5,5 : 1; 1,5 kW; 0 C to + 80 C
o o 71111 - 1243
0,37 kW 230 V 50 Hz 1,8 - 2,5 A 76924 - 2563
0,37 kW 400 V 50 Hz 1,0 - 1,6 A 76924 - 2553
0,37 kW 500 V 50 Hz 0,7 - 1,0 A 76924 - 2543

4 0,37 kW 440 V 60 Hz 1,0 - 1,6 A 76924 - 2553

0,75 kW 230 V 50 Hz 2,8 - 4,0 A 76924 - 2573
Motor protection switch for the 0,75 kW 400 V 50 Hz 1,8 - 2,5 A
following motor specification 76924 - 2563
0,75 kW 500 V 50 Hz 1,8 - 2,5 A
0,75 kW 440 V 60 Hz 1,8 - 2,5 A
1,5 kW 230 V 50 Hz 4,5 - 6,3 A 76924 - 2583
1,5 kW 400 V 50 Hz 2,8 - 4,0 A
1,5 kW 500 V 50 Hz 2,8 - 4,0 A 76924 - 2573
1,5 kW 440 V 60 Hz 2,8 - 4,0 A
— Accessories to be ordered optionally upon request
min. 30 l 65124 - 1141
min. 60 l 65124 - 1151
min. 100 l 65124 - 1161
5 Level switch
min. and max. 30 l 65124 - 2141
min. and max. 60 l 65124 - 2151
min. and max. 100 l 65124 - 2161
6 Loose components group (pressure gauge 0 - 600 bar incl. accessories) 69111 - 7761
Conical mouth piece (short) 73681 - 1713
Conical mouth piece (long) 73681 - 1723
Hollow mouth piece (short) 73681 - 1813
7 Hollow mouth piece (long) 73681 - 1823
Flexible coupling with ball joint (lube head dia. 10) 73681 - 1913
Flexible coupling with ball joint (lube head dia. 16) 73681 - 1923
Flexible coupling with ball joint (lube head dia. 22) 73681 - 1933
* Special version

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

______________________________________ Code no.
1.00 Grease lubrication pump BS - B ___ 22123 - 1200
consisting of:
1.01 Pump with 60 litere reservoir _______ 22123 - 1121
1.02 Loose components group ________ 69111 - 7711
1.03 Geared motor ___________________ 71111 - 2353
1.05 Level switch min. and max. ________ 65124 - 2151
1.06 Loose components group ________ 69111 - 7761

5
Fettschmierpumpe BH - C mit hydraulischem Antrieb
Grease pump type BH - C with hydraulic drive
ANWENDUNG
Die hydraulisch angetriebene Fettschmierpumpe
BH-C wird zusammen mit Verteilern überwiegend in
Progressiv-Schmieranlagen eingesetzt.

USE
The hydraulic grease pump BH - C is used in con-
junction with dividers predominantly in progressive lubri-
cation systems.

VORTEILE
q Individuelle Anpassung an die zu schmierende
Maschine
q Lastabhängige Steuerung
q Minimaler Wartungsaufwand
q Problemlose Montage
q Versorgung von ca. 100 Schmierstellen
q Preisgünstige Anschaffung

ADVANTAGES
q Individually adaptable to machine to be lubricated
q Load-determined control AUFBAU
q Minimum maintenance Bei Verwendung in Progressivsystemen wird der
Schmierstoff unter Druck über eine Hauptleitung den
q Problem-free installation Verteilern zugeführt und von dort dosiert an die Schmier-
q To service as much as a 100 lubrication points stellen angegeben.
q Low-priced investment Die Auswahl der entsprechenden Verteiler gewähr-
leistet eine optimale Schmierstoffabgabe an die Reib-
stellen. Unterschiedliche Schmierstoffmengen von 0,07 -
3,0 cm3 sind möglich.

EINSATZMÖGLICHKEITEN
Bergbau, hydraulische Baumaschinen, Kunststoff-
verarbeitungsmaschinen, Sondermaschinen
APPLICATIONS
Mining, hydraulically-operated buildung machines,
injection processing machines, special machinery
CONFIGURATION
When used in progressive systems lubricant is pres-
surized in the main feed line to the dividers and quantities
are precisely metered to suit the individual requirements of
the lubrication points.
Optimal lubricant delivery is ensured by selecting
respective divider types, lubricant output volumes between
0.07 up to 3.0 cm3.

22164 PB 1 d + e / 41090HF
 FUNKTION
Die Pumpe besteht aus einem einfach wirkenden
Hydraulikzylinder mit nachgeschaltetem Rückschlagventil
sowie einem Fettbehälter mit Folgekolben. Als optische
Inhaltskontrolle dient eine integrierte Kolbenstange. Bei
eingefahrener Kolbenstange muß Schmierstoff nachge-
füllt werden.
Bei jedem hydraulischen Druckwechsel wird die
Schmierpumpe betätigt. Der Kolben des Hydraulikzylin-
ders drückt den im Pumpenraum befindlichen Schmier-
stoff in die Hauptleitung. Bei Abfall (Entlastung) des Hy-
draulikdruckes (max. 5 bar) schiebt eine Druckfeder den
Kol ben zu rück. Der Pum pen raum wird wie der mit
Schmierstoff gefüllt. Das Fördervolumen ist werksseitig
auf 10 cm3/Hub eingestellt. Durch Austausch einer Buch-
se (Pos.20) kann die Fördermenge auf 5 cm3/Hub be-
grenzt werden.
Mittels einer elektrischen Steuerung (siehe Zubehör)
können die hydraulischen Betätigungen addiert werden,
so daß erst nach Ablauf von mehreren Arbeitsgängen ein
Schmierimpuls ausgelöst wird. Dazu ist der Einsatz von
externen 2/2- oder 3/2-Wegeventilen erforderlich.
Bei größeren Schmierintervallen kann der Hydraulik-
druck auch über ein manuell betätigtes Ventil zugeschaltet
werden.
FUNCTIONING
The pump consists of a simple hydraulic cylinder with
check valve downflow, reservoir and follower piston. The le-
vel inside the reservoir is monitored optically by an integral
piston rod; when the rod has moved inside, replenishing is
necessary.
The grease pump is actuated every time the hydraulic
pressure changes, the hydraulic cylinder piston is desi-
gned to squeeze the lubricant inside the pump chamber
toward the main feed line. When pressure is dropping,
(relieving) (max. 5 bar) the piston is moved to ist initial
position thanks to the spring-loaded action. The pump
chamber is then refilled with lubricant. The output volume is
set to 10 cc/stroke in our works. When exchanging a bush
(part 20), the output volume can be confined to 5
cc/stroke.
An optional electric control (see accessories) is availa-
ble to allow to accumulate the hydraulic movements so as
to ensure that an impulse is triggered only after several ope-
ration sequences. This necessitates the inclusion of an ex-
ternal 3/2 or 2/2-way valve.
When larger lubrication intervals are involved, the hy-
draulic pressure can also be switched via a manually- ope-
rated valve.
TECHNISCHE DATEN
Förderdruck: __________ Hydraulikdruck abzügl. 10 bar
Hydraulikdruck: ______________________ max. 200 bar
Restvolumen (Hydraulik): ________________ max. 5 bar
Fördervolumen:
wahlweise: _ 5 bis 10 cm3/Hub (bei Bestellung angeben)
Hubfrequenz: ________________________ max. 10 min-1
Pumpenansteuerung *: ____ 3/2-Wegeventil empfohlen
(Ventil gehört nicht zum Lieferumfang)
Behälterinhalt: _________________________________ 4 l
Füllanschluß zum Befüllen des Behälters:
Kegelschmiernippel: ________________ nach DIN 71412
geeignete Schmierstoffe: ______ Fett bis NLGI-Klasse 3
DIN 51818 (Öle und andere Medien auf Anfrage)
Inhaltskontrolle: _______________________ min, optisch
Temperatur: ____________________ - 20 oC bis + 80 oC
Gewicht: _________________________________ ca. 8 kg
Einbaulage: ____________________________ senkrecht
10 cm3 : ___________________ Bestell-Nr. 22164 - 1211
15 cm3 : ___________________ Bestell-Nr. 22164 - 1221
SPECIFICATION
Feed pressure: _________ hydraulic pressure less 10 bar
Hydraulic pressure: ____________________ max. 200 bar
Residual pressure (hydraulic): _____________ max. 5 bar
Output volume optionally:
__ 5 and 10 cc / stroke ( to be advised in case of order )
Cycle frequency: _____________________ max. 10 min-1
Control of pump *: ___ 3-way valve to be recommended
(valve is not part of our scope of supply)
Reservoir capacity: _____________________________ 4 l
Filling stud to reservoir:
Conical head nipple: ____________________ DIN 71412
Compatible lubricants: ______ grease up to NLGI class 3
DIN 51818 (oils and other media to consult)
Level control: __________________________ low, optical
Ambient temperature: __________ - 20 oC up to + 80 oC
Weight: ________________________________ abt. 8 kgs
Installation: ________________________________ vertical
10 cc: ______________________ Code No. 22164 - 1211
15 cc: ______________________ Code no. 22164 - 1221
∗ Pumpenansteuerung
∗ Control of pump
3/2-Wegeventil 2/2-Wegeventil
3/2-way valve 2/2-way valve
ABMESSUNGEN ( mm ) ERSATZTEILLISTE
DIMENSIONS ( mm )
Pos. Stück Benennung Bestell - Nr.
-- -- Fettschmierpumpe BH-C 22164-0000
1 1 Kappe 73761-4712
2 1 Sicherungsring 74182-1612
Behälter bestehend aus
-- 1 63721-1181
Pos. 3 und 4
3 1 Mantel 73751-6622 N
4 1 Bodenring 73761-6531 N
Zylinderschraube
5 2 74102-1234
M 8 x 16 DIN 7984
6 2 Federring 8 DIN 7980 74185-3044
Pumpenkörper best. aus
-- 1 62230-1211
Pos. 7 bis 17
7 1 Federteller 71641-1121
8 2 Sprengring B 60 DIN 7993 74186-2073
9 1 Deckel 73751-1131
Sechskantmutter
10 1 74175-1424
M 12 x 1,5 DIN 936
Runddichtring 49,2 x 5,7
11 2 72711-1693 E
DIN 3770 - NB 90
12 1 Federring 12 DIN 7980 74185-3064
13 1 Zylinder 72281-1221
14 1 Druckfeder 71618-8141
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG 15 1 Nutring 25 x 17 x 5,5 72713-5283 E
SPARE PARTS DRAWING Gehäuse bestehend aus
—- 1 64332-1261 N
Pos. 16 und 17
16 1 Kolben 72125-1171 N
17 1 Gehäuse 74331-8171 N
18 1 Ventil - Innenteile komplett 73641-5563 E
19 1 Schraube 74141-1551
Buchse ( 10 cm3 ) 71447-1141
20 1 Dichtring A 30 x 36
72712-1584
DIN 7603 Cu ( 5 cm3 )
21 1 Stutzen 73490-4091
Runddichtring 50 x 4
22 1 72711-1733 E
DIN 3770 - NB 70
23 1 Lasche 74362-2621
24 4 Federring 6 DIN 7980 74185-3034
Zylinderschraube
25 5 74102-1134
M 6 x 16 DIN 7984
Kegelschmiernippel
26 1 73683-1614
AM 10 x 1 DIN 71412
27 1 Dichtring 71459-1222 E
28 1 Druckplatte 72199-1621 N
29 1 Rohr 73151-1921 N
30 1 Stopfen 73411-1193
Die mit ,,E’’ gekennzeichneten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen.
Die mit ,,N’’ gekennzeichneten Teile werden nicht einzeln als Ersatzteil ge-
liefert.
 SPARE PARTS LIST WARTUNG
No. Pcs. Denomination Code no. Die Fettschmierpumpe BH-C ist wartungsfreundlich.
-- -- grease pump BH-C 22164-0000 Der Behälter sollte nachgefüllt werden, wenn ca. 90 % des
Inhaltes verbraucht sind. Zum Befüllen (Füllanschluß,
1 1 lid 73761-4712
Kegelschmiernippel) des Behälters ist die Kappe abzu-
2 1 circlip 74182-1612 nehmen; danach kann der Folgekolben herausgezogen
reservoir consisting of: werden. Nach dem Befüllen werden durch wiederholtes
-- 1 63721-1181
parts 3 and 4 Nachdrücken des Folgekolbens Lufteinschlüsse im Fett
3 1 housing 73751-6622 N vermieden. Ein weiteres Entlüften ist nicht erforderlich.
4 1 base ring 73761-6531 N
cheese head screw
5 2 74102-1234 MAINTENANCE
M 8 x 16 DIN 7984
6 2 lock washer 8 DIN 7980 74185-3044 The grease pump BH-C is very maintenance-minded.
The reservoir is to be refilled as soon as abt. 90 % of its con-
pump body, consisting of
-- 1 62230-1211 tents has been used up. For filling remove cap, then take
parts 7 up to 17 out follower piston and after filling push follower piston
7 1 spring cup 71641-1121 several times to prevent air inclusions. An additional
8 2 burst ring B 60 DIN 7993 74186-2073 de-aeriation is not necessary.
9 1 lid 73751-1131
hexagon nut
10 1 74175-1424
M 12 x 1,5 DIN 936

11 2
O-ring 49,2 x 5,7
72711-1693 E
ZUBEHÖR
DIN 3770 - NB 90
Schmierstoffanschluß
12 1 lock washer 12 DIN 7980 74185-3064
gerade Einschraubverschraubung G 1/4 - Ø 10
13 1 cylinder 72281-1221
Bestell-Nr. ___________________________ 73442 - 1414
14 1 pressure spring 71618-8141
15 1 V-ring 25 x 17 x 5,5 72713-5283 E Hydraulikanschluß
housing consisting of: gerade Einschraubverschraubung G 3/8 - Ø 10
-- 1 64332-1261 N
parts 16 and 17 Bestell-Nr. ___________________________ 73442 - 1424
16 1 piston 72125-1171 N
Schmierstoffverteiler ZP-
17 1 housing 74331-8171 N
Greifkupplung für Kegelschmiernippel (Füllanschluß)
18 1 valve - inner parts cpl. 73641-5563 E
Bestell-Nr. ___________________________ 73681 - 9013
19 1 screw 74141-1551
bush ( 10 cc ) 71447-1141 elektrisches Steuer- und Überwachungsgerät mit
20 1 copper washer A 30 x 36 impulsabhänger Pauseneinstellung und Überwachung
72712-1584
DIN 7603 Cu ( 5 cm3 ) der Schmieranlage auf Anfrage
21 1 stud 73490-4091
O-ring 50 x 4
22 1 72711-1733 E ACCESSORIES
DIN 3770 - NB 70
23 1 fish plate 74362-2621 Pipe connection
24 4 lock washer 6 DIN 7980 74185-3034 straight male stud connector 1/4" BSP 10 mm dia.
cheese head screw Code no. ____________________________ 73442 - 1414
25 5 74102-1134
M 6 x 16 DIN 7984
Hydraulic connection port
conical head nipple
26 1 73683-1614 straight male stud connector 3/8" BSP 10 mm dia.
AM 10 x 1 DIN 71412
Code no. ____________________________ 73442 - 1424
27 1 gasket 71459-1222 E
28 1 pressure plate 72199-1621 N Lubricant distributor ZP-
29 1 tube 73151-1921 N Grid adapter for conical head nipple (filling stud)
30 1 plug screw 73411-1193 Code no. ____________________________ 73681 - 9013
All parts marked ‘E’ are recommended to be run on stock as vital wear parts. Electrical control- and monitoring device
All parts marked ‘N’ are not available as single items. comprising pulse-depending interval setting and monito-
ring of system, available as optional extra upon request.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Faßpumpe BF - G 15 : 1; 50 : 1
Barrel Pump BF - G 15 : 1; 50 : 1
ANWENDUNG
Die Faßpumpe BF-G ist für die Entnahme von
Schmierfetten der Penetrationsklassen 000 bis 2 aus Roll-
reifen-Deckelfässer mit 50 l, 200 l und 216 l Inhalt nach DIN
6644 vorgesehen.
WIRKUNGSWEISE
Die Grundausführung des Gerätes besteht aus dem
Luftmotor (=Druckluftzylinder) mit Steuerung und dem
Pumpenteil, sowie einem Zentrierdeckel und dem Folge-
kolben.
Die Kolbenpumpe saugt das Fett beim Abwärtshub
ihres Kolbens an und fördert es beim Aufwärtshub zum
Verbraucher. Der erreichbare Schmierstoffdruck ergibt
sich annähernd aus der inneren Übersetzung der Pumpe,
multipliziert mit dem Druck der Antriebs-Druckluft. Die
Kennlinien (siehe Diagramm) zeigen die Anhängigkeit der
Fördermenge vom Gegendruck.
Die Folgeplatte ist mit einer Gummi-Dichtung verse-
hen. Durch ein neuartiges, hydraulisch dichtendes Pa-
ckungssystem zwischen Luftmotor und Fettpumpenseite
ist die Faßpumpe BF-G nahezu wartungsfrei. Bei Ausfüh-
rung mit verstellbarer Inhaltskontrolle kann ein optisches oder
akustisches Signal ausgelöst werden, wenn das Faß nahezu
leer ist.
ABMESSUNGEN (mm) - DIMENSIONS (mm)
USE
The barrel pump BF-G is adapted to take the grease of
penetration class 000 up to 2 straight from a 50 l, 200 l and
216 litre barrel (DIN 6644).
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The pump basically comprises an air motor (=com-
pressed air cylinder) with control system and a pump sec-
tion, together with a centering lid and a follower piston.
The plunger-type pump is so designed as to suck lubri-
cant during the downward stroke of the plunger and to for-
ce it to the user during the upward stroke. The grease pres-
sure which can be achieved is approximately proportional
to the compressed air pressure used for operation, multi-
plied by the internal ration factor of the pump. The charac-
teristics shown how the output rating depends on the
counterpressure.
The edge of the next plate is fitted with a rubber lip for
sealing purposes. An new kind of packing between the
compressed air motor and the grease pump creates a seal
by hydraulic means and results in almost maintenance-free
drum emptying. In the model with adjustable level control,
an optical and acoustical warning signal indicates that the
quantity of grease left in the barrel is down to almost zero.
22542 P 1 d+e / 8 0010HF
 BILDZEICHEN - CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

mit Inhaltskontrolle - with level control ohne Inhaltskontrolle - without level control

TECHNISCHE DATEN - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Drucküber- Fördermenge je Erforderlicher Luftverbrauch je Gewicht Inhalts- Entlastungs- Bestell-Nr. Bestell-Nr.
setzung Doppelhub Luftdruck Doppelhub kontrolle leitung Faßinhalt 200 l Faßinhalt 50 l
Normal-Liter

Pressure ration Output volume Air pressure Air consumption Weight Level control Relief line Code no. Code no.
each double required each double stroke 200 litre barrel 50 litre barrel
stroke N-litre
cm2 bar kg

  22542 - 1211 
15 : 1 40 1,8 - 12 ca. 0,7
x Luftdruck •  22542 - 1221 
18
apt. 0.7   22542 - 1311 22542 - 2211
50 : 1 12 3 - 9 x air pressure •  22542 - 1321 22542 - 2221
• • 22542 - 1331 
Verwendbare Schmierstoffe : _________ Fette bis NLGI-Klasse 2 auf Mineralölbasis (Grundölviskosität max. 200 cSt)
Suitable lubricants : _________________ Mineral oil base grease up to NLGI class 2 (viscosity of oil base max. 200 cSt)
Andere Schmierstoffe : ______________________________________________________________________ auf Anfrage
Other lubricants : ___________________________________________________________________________ on request

SONDERZUBEHÖR ACCESSORIES
Wartungseinheit Druckschrift 15521/22 P1 Compressed air processing unit Leaflet 15521/22 P1
Schläuche Druckschrift 63311 P1 Hoses Leaflet 63311 P1

ELEKTRISCHE DATEN DER INHALTS- ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION LOW

KONTROLLE LEVEL CONTROL
Kontaktart 1 Schließer, Schutzart IP 67 Type of contact 1 closing contact, protection IP 67
Schaltleistung Ein 60 VA, Aus 15 VA Switching capacity ON 60 VA, OFF 15 VA
Schaltstrom Ein 0,24 A, Aus 0,06 A Current ON 0,24 A, OFF 0,06 A
Spannung max. 250 V AC Voltage max. 250 V AC

BESTELLBEISPIEL EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Für eine Faßpumpe BF-G, Druckübersetzung 50 : 1 mit Barrel pump BF-G, ration 50 : 1 with level control and relief
Inhaltskontrolle und Entlastungsleitung: line:
1 Faßpumpe BF-G Bestell-Nr. 22542 - 1331 1 Barrel pump BF-G Code no. 22542 - 1331

2
 PUMPENÜBERSETZUNG SCHMIERSTOFF - PUMP TRANSLATION LUBRICANT

Druckluft - Compressed air 15 : 1 Druckluft - Compressed air 50 : 1

Luftdruck - Air pressure :  4 bar

⋅⋅⋅ 5 bar
-------- 6 bar

Prüfmedium : Fett : ___________________ Pluto KU 2 Test medium: Grease : ________________Pluto KU 2

Penetrationsklasse _______________ 2 Penetration class ________________ 2
Prüftemperatur _______________ 20o C Ambient temperature _________ 20o C

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Operating Instructions

for

Oil gear pump AD - L

Index
Page
1. General ............................................................................................... 2
2. Application .......................................................................................... 2
3. Safety ................................................................................................. 2
4. Design ................................................................................................ 3
5. Principle of operation .......................................................................... 3
6. Drawing (measurement) ..................................................................... 4
7. Technical data .................................................................................... 5
8. Electrical wiring diagram ..................................................................... 6
9. Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 6
10. Spare parts drawing ........................................................................... 7
11. Spare parts list .................................................................................... 8
12. Disassembly and Assembly ............................................................... 9
13. Maintenance ..................................................................................... 10
14. Operating troubles and their reasons .............................................. 10

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 1 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they necessary for the improvement of the oil gear pump
AD-L.
The copyright on this operating instruction is kept reserved to Mssrs. DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH.
These operating instruction are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain
technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely nor partically or distributed. It is also
prohibited to use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.
Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
2. Application
The type oil gear pump AD-L is ideally suited in single-line centralized lubrication systems. In these systems,
lubricant is being delivered intermittently under pressure (pressurizing - and relief cycles) through the main
feed lines towards the meter elements installed downflow and from there through the lube lines to the points
of application.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.
3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the compotent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user are to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
or life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case for warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

It is deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
- arrow for rotation directions
- mark for fluid connections
must be all means be observed and maintenance in a completely legible condition.
Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
Any modification or changer to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Orinigal spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 2 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
4. Design
(items see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The oil lubricator basically consists of a gear pump (item no. 9) with A.C. single-phase motor, (item no. 36),
the oil reservoir (item no. 12), the electronic control unit (item no. 35) and a valve (item no. 23) which
ensures that the line is depressurized when the A.C. single-phase motor (item no. 36) is switched off (relief
cycle).
An integral pressure relief valve (item no. 6) is opened as soon as reaching a pressure of 2 MPa (20 bar)
thus protecting the oil gear pump from damage in the event of an overpressure situation occuring. After
relief the main line, the valve (item no. 23) maintains a resudial pressure of approx. 0.08 MPa (0.8 bar) and
thus prevents that the main line runs empty.
The entire system is either time- or pulse controlled, at choice.

5. Principle of operation
A lubricating cycle begins after connection of the electric current supply with a lubricating process, either
immediately of after expiration of the starting delay time, which can lie between 0 and 15 minutes. During
this process, the oil pump delivers the lubricant via the metering elements to the friction points.
The running time of the oil pump depends on the number of friction points, line length, etc. and the pressure
build-up monitored by an integrated pressure switch. The running time of the oil pump ends when a
discharge pressure of 2 MPa (20 bar) has been obtained and an after-running time of 3 seconds is over. If
the required discharge pressure is not obtained after 20 seconds, a visual fault alarm occurs.
After this, the lubrication pause begins, and the main line is relieved. Depending on the kind of machine to
be lubricated, the lubrication pause is time or pulse dependent and adjustable from 1 to 9999 minutes or
pulses. In case of a time dependent pause, the pause time can be added via connections 5 of the electronic
control unit (item no. 35) and, as a result, the next lubriating process can be triggered after expiration of the
adjusted pause time. In case of a pulse dependent pause, the pulse coming in via connections 5 of the
electronic control unit (item no. 35) are counted, and after achievemenmt of the adjusted number of pulses,
the next lubricating process is triggered.
The filling level can be recongnized at any time if it deals with a plastic tank (item no. 12). In case of a metal
tank (item no. 12), the filling level can be recognized via oil sight-feed glasses. In addition to this, the oil
pump is furnished in series with a float-type switch having 2 switching points. When the oil level in the tank
falls below min.1, a visual warning is given via the luminuous diode (item no. 34). When the level falls below
min.2 the oil pump switched off.
A lubricating process is indicated by a permanent green light from a luminuous diode (item no. 34) as long
as the oil level in the tank lies above the switching point min.1. When the oil level sinks between the
switching points min.1 and min.2, this fact is indicated by a green flashing light - even during the lubricating
process - and signalized potentil-free via connection 8 and 9 of the electronic control unit (item no. 35).
Any further sinking of the oil level below the switching point min.2 of the non-achievement of the discharge
pressure during a lubriating process is indicated by a permanent red light from the luminuous diode and
signaliezed potential-free via connecion 11-13 of the electronic control unit (item no. 35). The oil pump is
switched off.
The actuation of the integrated pressure switch (item no. 32) releases a lubricating process and clears an
existing fault alarm.

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 3 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
6. Drawings with dimensions

AD-L with plastic reservoir 2,5 l AD-L with metal reservoir, 2,5 l and 5 l
(transparent)

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 4 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
7. Technical Data
Output volume : ............................................................................................................................ 80 cm³/min
Feed pressure : .................................................................. 2 MPa ( 20 bar) limited by pressure relief valve
Reservoir volume : ........................................................ 2,5 l plastic PC transparent; 2,5 l and 5 l metal St
Ambient temperature : ........................................................................................................... - 0° C to + 40°C
Compatible lubricants on mineraloil basis : Oil .......................... 30-850 mm²/s , operating viscosity
-1

Semi-fluids ............................................. upon request

Pressure connection : ....................................................................................................................... M 10 x 1
Protective system : IP 40 optional IP 54
(IP 40 - provided in our works. If the customer prefers IP 54, he has to specifity it on the order)
Weight without filling : with plastic reservoir 2,5 l....................................................................approx. 4 kg
with metal reservoir 2,5 l .....................................................................approx. 7 kg
with metal reservoir 5 l ........................................................................approx. 9 kg
Operating voltage, at choice : ....................... AC 115 or 230V ± 5%, 47 to 63 Hz; set to 230V on our works
Current consumption at 115V : .........................................................................< 2A at 50 Hz, < 3A at 60 Hz
Current consumption at 230V : .........................................................................< 1A at 50 Hz, < 2A at 60 Hz
Power consumption : ..........................................................................110 Watt at 50 Hz, 160 Watt at 60 Hz
Pause settings, digital : .......................1 to 9999 minutes or 1 to 9999 pulses; set to 1 minute on our works
Inherent start delay : ..................................................................... 0 to 15 min.; set to 0 minute on our works
Post running time : ................................................................................................................................3 sec.
Max. cycle time : .................................................................................................................................20 sec.
Inlet pulse duration : ...........................................................................................................................≥ 30 ms
Load of signal transmitter : ..................................................................................................... DC 24V 20mA
Cable entry : .......................................................................................................................2 pcs. thread 13,5
Relay outputs:
Rated voltage max. : ............................................................................................................................. 250 V
Current consumption max. : ...................................................................................................................... 6 A
Switching capacity max. : .............................................................................................1100 VA (ohmic load)
Switching capacity max. at DC 24V : .............................................................................. 120 W (ohmic load)

Connection diagram

Code No.
Reservoir Voltage 115 / 230V
Frequency
50 Hz 60 Hz
2,5 l Plastic 23315 - 1211 23315 - 1231
2,5 l Metal 23315 - 1311 23315 - 1331
5 l Metal 23315 - 1411 23315 - 1431

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 5 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
8. Electric wiring diagram

9. Installation and Commissioning

Install the oil gear pump AD-L in horizontal position only! Fix the oil gear pump by means of 2 screws M6.
It should be installed at a central point of easy access. These offers the following advantages:
• Optimal line lenghts to the friction points.
• Easy filling of oil pump.
• Good visibility of oil level in the oil pump tank.
• Good visibility of the luminuous diode to monitor running time and fault alarms of the oil pump-

The electric connections of the oil pump are to be effected by qualified staff only.
The local electric instructions must be observed.
ATTENTION

• When adjusting the mains voltage and the required pause time, change the adjustments made in our
works, if neccesary.
• If possible, install main line in a rising position from the oil pump and avoid syphons - socalled sacks -,
when for instance obstacles are to be bypassed. Un such syphons, there will occur air inclusions, which
cannot be eliminated during deaeration of the main line.
• Take care that the lines are clean and free from chips or other impurities.
• Fill oil pump with clean oil only and avoid all kinds of impurities. Dirt particles are the most frequent
reason for failures and damages.
• Let oil pump run until oil comes bubble-free out of the the min line connections, do not connect main line
before this is ensured.
• The oil pump must not be operated with a discharge pressure exceeding MPa (20 bar).

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 6 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
10. Spare parts drawing

Plastic reservoir 2,5 l

View A
Metal reservoir 2,5 l and 5 l

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 7 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
11. Spare parts ist

item Pcs. Denomination Code No.

no.
Plastic reservoir Metal reservoir Metal reservoir
2,5 l 2,5 l 5l
- - Oil gear pump Voltage 115/230V 50 Hz 23315 - 1211 23315 - 1311 23315 - 1411
AD-L 60 Hz 23315 - 1231 23315 - 1331 23315 - 1431
- 1 Loose component group for protective system 69111 - 8011
IP 54 comprising part item no. 2 and 37
1 5 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 6 DIN 84 74104 - 1314
2 twist clamp thread 13,5 76927 - 2323
Mind, Fitting A thread 13,5x6 - 13,5-FS 76927 - 2883
2 1 only for Plug N thread 13,5 - FS DIN 46320 76927 - 1334
IP 54 O-ring 9 Pg 13,5 - IT DIN 46320 76927 - 1454
3 6 Cheese-head screw M 5 x 10 DIN 7984 74102 - 1024 -
4 4 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 30 DIN 7984 74102 - 1884
5 4 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1014
6 1 Pressure relief valve, set to 20 bar 63611 - 3221
7 1 Sealing A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094 E
8 1 Flange 74354 - 5051
9 1 Gearing pump 72811 - 2433
10 3 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1874
11 1 Float-type switch 39161 - 4193
12 1 Reservoir 73721 - 6271 63721 - 7111 73721 - 7121
13 1 Strainer 73671 - 1743
14 1 Sealing joint 72731 - 4221 72731 - 4231 E
15 1 Plug screw G 3/4 74106 - 2053
16 1 Housing 74331 - 8391 74331 - 8381
17 1 Male fitting for pipe 6 - M 10 x 1 73511 - 5781
18 1 Conical ring for pipe 6 73511 - 2721
19 1 Pressure gauge 0 - 40 bar 75111 - 2323
20 1 Bonnet 73761 - 4371
21 1 O-ring 10 x 1,3 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2423 E
22 1 Spring 71614 - 3122
23 1 Valve 63611 - 4181
24 1 Shaft 71210 - 1121
25 1 Dowel pin 1,5 x 10 DIN 1481 74225 - 5344
26 1 Sleeve 71461 - 8151
27 1 O-ring 6 x 1,5 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2413 E
28 1 Dowel pin 2,5 x 10 DIN 1481 74225 - 5334
29 1 Pressure switch, set to 15 bar 34241 - 1533
30 4 Spacer 74179 - 0053
31 4 Cheese-head screw M 3 x 4 DIN 84 74104 - 1464
32 1 Push-button 76925 - 4163
33 1 Sealing lid 76925 - 9263
34 1 Housing for LED 76941 - 4113
35 1 Electronic module 66202 - 2461
36 1 Alternating current motor 115 / 230V 50 Hz or 76911 - 1513 E
60 Hz 76911 - 1523
37 1 Mind only for IP 54 E
O-ring 152,5 x 2,5 DIN 3770 -NB 70 72711 - 2813
38 4 Cheese-head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 7984 -- 74102 - 1134
39 3 Sight glass with O-ring -- 75241 - 2413
40 3 Fitting nut G ½ DIN 431 -- 74175 - 1034

Parts marked with "E" are recommended to be kept on stock.

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 8 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
12. Disassembly and Assembly
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Protect oil pump against unintended actuation and disconnect it electrically by qualified staff.
• Remove oil gear pump from the machine and/or from the system.
• Remove cheese-head screws (item no. 3).
• Remove aggregate from tank (item no. 12).
• Remove seal (item no. 14) from tank (item no. 12).
• Remove cheese-head screws (item no. 10).
• Remove gear pump (item no. 9), O-ring (item no. 21), washer (item no. 22) and valve (item no. 23) from
the flange (item no. 8).
• Screw off pressure relief valve (item no. 6) and remove O-ring (item no. 7).
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts for damages.
• Replace all seals by new ones.
• Assemble oil gear pump in reverse order.
• Mount oil gear pump to the machine and/or the system.

• Make electric connection of oil pump by qualified staff and remove protection against unintended
actuation.

ATTENTION

• Deaerate oil pump (see page 6 point 9.) and put lubrication system into operation again.

• Check whether the pressure relief valve (item no. 6) of the oil pump opens at a pressure of 2 MPa
(20 bar). If nit, readjust pressure relief valve (item no. 6). Clockwise turning of the screw in the pressure
relief valve (item no. 6) will increase the operating pressure, anticlockwise turning will deaerate it.

• Dispose of old oil remnants according to rule.

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 9 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
13. Maintenance
The oil pump requires low maintenance only, and there are no further measures required to maintain the
pump ready for operation.
The following points should be observed:
• The sieve (item no. 13) must not be removed when the oil pump is filled.
• The sieve (item no. 13) should be cleaned after several filling process.
• Do not use aggresive media to clean the pump. Use Naphtha or petroleum ether only.

14. Operating troubles and their reasons

Early wear of the gear pump (item no. 9), the mobile parts and the sealings is mainly caused by polluted
lubricating oil.
Failures within the system can above all occur if the lubricant lines are not deaerated perferctly.
Permanent red light from the luminous diode (item no. 34) at the oil pump is caused by falling of the oil level
in the tank below min.2 of the float-type switch (item no. 11) or by absence of the pressure build-up at the oil
pump.

23315 BA 1e / 5 9710 HF/Wi Page 10 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 1 / 4 0895 1000Hf
 Operating Instructions

for

Oil gear pump AD - K

Index
Page
1. General ............................................................................................... 2
2. Application .......................................................................................... 2
3. Safety ................................................................................................. 2
4. Design ................................................................................................ 3
5. Principle of operation .......................................................................... 3
6. Drawing (measurement) ..................................................................... 4
7. Technical data .................................................................................... 5
8. Electrical wiring diagram ..................................................................... 6
9. Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 6
10. Spare parts drawing ........................................................................... 7
11. Spare parts list .................................................................................... 8
12. Disassembly and Assembly ............................................................... 9
13. Maintenance ..................................................................................... 10
14. Operating troubles and their reasons .............................................. 10

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 1 of 10

1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they necessary for the improvement of the oil gear pump
AD-K.
The copyright on this operating instruction is kept reserved to Mssrs. De Limon Fluhme GmbH. These
operating instruction are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain
technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely nor partically or distributed. It is also
prohibited to use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.
Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

2. Application
The type oil gear pump AD-K is ideally suited in single-line centralized lubrication systems. In these
systems, lubricant is being delivered intermittently under pressure (pressurizing - and relief cycles) through
the main feed lines towards the meter elements installed downflow and from there through the lube lines to
the points of application.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the compotent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user are to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
or life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case for warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

It is deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
- arrow for rotation directions
- mark for fluid connections
must be all means be observed and maintenance in a completely legible condition.
Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
Any modification or changer to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Orinigal spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 2 of 10

4. Design
(items see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The oil lubricator basically consists of a gear pump (item no. 9) with A.C. single-phase motor, (item no. 36),
the oil reservoir (item no. 12), the electronic control unit (item no. 35) and a valve (item no. 23) which
ensures that the line is depressurized when the A.C. single-phase motor (item no. 36) is switched off (relief
cycle).
An integral pressure relief valve (item no. 6) is opened as soon as reaching a pressure of 0,8 MPa (8 bar)
thus protecting the oil gear pump from damage in the event of an overpressure situation occuring. After
relief the main line, the valve (item no. 23) maintains a resudial pressure of approx. 0.08 MPa (0.8 bar) and
thus prevents that the main line runs empty.
The entire system is either time controlled.

5. Principle of operation
A lubricating cycle begins after connection of the electric current supply with a lubricating process. During
this process, the oil pump delivers the lubricant via the metering elements to the friction points.
The running time of the oil pump is time dependent and adjustable from 0.1 to 9.9 minutes. The pressure
buuild-up is monitored by an integrated pressure switch.
Then the lubrication pause begins, and the main line is relieved. The lubrication pause is time dependent
and adjustable from 1 to 99 minutes or hours. Via connection 5 of the electronic control unit (item no. 35) the
pause time can be added and, as a result, after expiration of the adjusted pause time, the next lubrication
cycle can be triggered.
The filling level is visible due to the transparent plastic tank (item no. 12), and in case of the metal tank (item
no. 12) due to oil sight-feed glasses. In addition to this, the oil pump is furnished in series with a float-type
switch having 2 switching points. When the oil level in the tank falls below min.1, a visual warning is given
via the luminuous diode (item no. 34). When the level falls below min. 2 the oil pump switched off.
A lubricating process is indicated by a permanent green light from a luminuous diode (item no. 34) as long
as the oil level in the tank lies above the switching point min. 1. When the oil level sinks between the
switching points min. 1 and min. 2, this fact is indicated by a green flashing light - even during the lubricating
process - and signalized potentil-free via connection 8 and 9 of the electronic control unit (item no. 35).
If the oil level keeps on sinking and gets below the switching point min. 2 or if the discharge pressure of 4
bar is not obtained during a lubricating cycle, a red permanent light is emitted by the luminous diode, and
via connection 11 – 13 of the electronic control unit (item no. 35) “potential-free“ is signalized. The oil pump
is switched off.
By actuation of the integrated push button switch (item no. 32), a lubricating cycle is triggered and a pending
failure is cleared.

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 3 of 10

6. Drawings with dimensions

AD-K with plastic reservoir 2,5 l AD-K with metal reservoir, 2,5 l and 5 l
(transparent)

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 4 of 10

7. Technical Data
Output volume : ............................................................................................................................ 80 cm³/min
Feed pressure : ................................................................. 0,8 MPa ( 8 bar) limited by pressure relief valve
Reservoir volume : ........................................................ 2,5 l plastic PC transparent; 2,5 l and 5 l metal St
Ambient temperature : ........................................................................................................... - 0° C to + 40°C
Compatible lubricants on mineraloil basis : Oil .......................... 30-850 mm²/s , operating viscosity
-1

Semi-fluids ............................................. upon request

Pressure switch :.............................................................................................................. adjustable on 4 bar
Pressure connection : ....................................................................................................................... M 10 x 1
Protective system : IP 40 optional IP 54
(IP 40 - provided in our works. If the customer prefers IP 54, he has to specifity it on the order)
Weight without filling : with plastic reservoir 2,5 l....................................................................approx. 4 kg
with metal reservoir 2,5 l .....................................................................approx. 7 kg
with metal reservoir 5 l ........................................................................approx. 9 kg
Operating voltage, at choice : ....................... AC 115 or 230V ± 5%, 47 to 63 Hz; set to 230V on our works
Current consumption at 115V : .........................................................................< 2A at 50 Hz, < 3A at 60 Hz
Current consumption at 230V : .........................................................................< 1A at 50 Hz, < 2A at 60 Hz
Power consumption : ..........................................................................110 Watt at 50 Hz, 160 Watt at 60 Hz
Pause settings, digital : .......................1 to 9999 minutes or 1 to 9999 pulses; set to 1 minute on our works
Operating settings, digital :..............................................0,1 to 9,9 minutes; set to 0,3 minutes on our works
Delay of the pressure control : ..................................................... 3 seconds (adjustable up to approx. 10 s)
Inlet pulse duration : ...........................................................................................................................≥ 30 ms
Load of signal transmitter : ..................................................................................................... DC 24V 20mA
Cable entry : .......................................................................................................................2 pcs. thread 13,5
Relay outputs:
Rated voltage max. : ............................................................................................................................. 250 V
Current consumption max. : ...................................................................................................................... 6 A
Switching capacity max. : .............................................................................................1100 VA (ohmic load)
Switching capacity max. at DC 24V : .............................................................................. 120 W (ohmic load)

Connection diagram

Code No.
Reservoir Voltage 115 / 230V
Frequency
50 Hz 60 Hz
2,5 l Plastic 23315 - 2211 23315 - 2231
2,5 l Metal 23315 - 2311 23315 - 2331
5 l Metal 23315 - 2321 23315 - 2341

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 5 of 10

8. Electric wiring diagram

9. Installation and Commissioning

Install the oil gear pump AD-K in horizontal position only! Fix the oil gear pump by means of 2 screws M 6.
It should be installed at a central point of easy access. These offers the following advantages:
• Optimal line lenghts to the friction points.
• Easy filling of oil pump.
• Good visibility of oil level in the oil pump tank.
• Good visibility of the luminuous diode to monitor running time and fault alarms of the oil pump-

The electric connections of the oil pump are to be effected by qualified staff only.
The local electric instructions must be observed.
ATTENTION

• When adjusting the mains voltage and the required pause time, change the adjustments made in our
works, if neccesary.
• If possible, install main line in a rising position from the oil pump and avoid syphons - socalled sacks -,
when for instance obstacles are to be bypassed. Un such syphons, there will occur air inclusions, which
cannot be eliminated during deaeration of the main line.
• Take care that the lines are clean and free from chips or other impurities.
• Fill oil pump with clean oil only and avoid all kinds of impurities. Dirt particles are the most frequent
reason for failures and damages.
• Let oil pump run until oil comes bubble-free out of the the min line connections, do not connect main line
before this is ensured.
• The oil pump must not be operated with a discharge pressure exceeding 0.8 MPa (8 bar).

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 6 of 10

10. Spare parts drawing

Plastic reservoir 2,5 l

View A
Metal reservoir 2,5 l and 5 l

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 7 of 10

11. Spare parts ist

Item Pcs. Denomination Code No.

no.
Plastic reservoir Metal reservoir Metal reservoir
2,5 l 2,5 l 5l
- - Oil gear pump Voltage 115/230V 50 Hz 23315 - 2211 23315 - 2311 23315 - 2321
AD-K 60 Hz 23315 - 2231 23315 - 2331 23315 - 2341
- 1 Loose component group for protective system 69111 - 8011
IP 54 comprising part item no. 2 and 37
1 5 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 6 DIN 84 74104 - 1314
2 twist clamp thread 13,5 76927 - 2323
Mind, Fitting A thread 13,5x6 - 13,5-FS 76927 - 2883
2 1 only for Plug N thread 13,5 - FS DIN 46320 76927 - 1334
IP 54 O-ring 9 Pg 13,5 - IT DIN 46320 76927 - 1454
3 6 Cheese-head screw M 5 x 10 DIN 7984 74102 - 1024 -
4 4 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 30 DIN 7984 74102 - 1884
5 4 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1014
6 1 Pressure relief valve, set to 20 bar 63611 - 3221
7 1 Sealing A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094 E
8 1 Flange 74354 - 5051
9 1 Gearing pump 72811 - 2433
10 3 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1874
11 1 Float-type switch 39161 - 4193
12 1 Reservoir 73721 - 6271 63721 - 7111 73721 - 7121
13 1 Strainer 73671 - 1743
14 1 Sealing joint 72731 - 4221 72731 - 4231 E
15 1 Plug screw G 3/4 74106 - 2053
16 1 Housing 74331 - 8391 74331 - 8381
17 1 Male fitting for pipe 6 - M 10 x 1 73511 - 5781
18 1 Conical ring for pipe 6 73511 - 2721
19 1 Pressure gauge 0 - 40 bar 75111 - 2323
20 1 Bonnet 73761 - 4371
21 1 O-ring 10 x 1,3 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2423 E
22 1 Spring 71614 - 3122
23 1 Valve 63611 - 4181
24 1 Shaft 71210 - 1121
25 1 Dowel pin 1,5 x 10 DIN 1481 74225 - 5344
26 1 Sleeve 71461 - 8151
27 1 O-ring 6 x 1,5 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2413 E
28 1 Dowel pin 2,5 x 10 DIN 1481 74225 - 5334
29 1 Pressure switch, set to 4 bar 34241 - 1543
30 4 Spacer 74179 - 0053
31 4 Cheese-head screw M 3 x 4 DIN 84 74104 - 1464
32 1 Push-button 76925 - 4163
33 1 Sealing lid 76925 - 9263
34 1 Housing for LED 76941 - 4113
35 1 Electronic module 66202 - 2381
36 1 Alternating current motor 115 / 230V 50 Hz or 76911 - 1513 E
60 Hz 76911 - 1523
37 1 Mind only for IP 54 E
O-ring 152,5 x 2,5 DIN 3770 -NB 70 72711 - 2813
38 4 Cheese-head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 7984 -- 74102 - 1134
39 3 Sight glass with O-ring -- 75241 - 2413
40 3 Fitting nut G ½ DIN 431 -- 74175 - 1034

Parts marked with "E" are recommended to be kept on stock.

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 8 of 10

12. Disassembly and Assembly
(Item. see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Protect oil pump against unintended actuation and disconnect it electrically by qualified staff.
• Remove oil gear pump from the machine and/or from the system.
• Remove cheese-head screws (item no. 3) from the 2.5 l plastic tank or cheese-head screws (item no. 38)
from the 2.5 l and the 5 l metal tank.
• Remove aggregate from tank (item no. 12).
• Remove seal (item no. 14) from tank (item no. 12).
• Remove cheese-head screws (item no. 10).
• Remove gear pump (item no. 9), O-ring (item no. 21), washer (item no. 22) and valve (item no. 23) from
the flange (item no. 8).
• Screw off pressure relief valve (item no. 6) and remove O-ring (item no. 7).
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts for damages.
• Replace all seals by new ones.
• Assemble oil gear pump in reverse order.
• Mount oil gear pump to the machine and/or the system.

• Make electric connection of oil pump by qualified staff and remove protection against unintended
actuation.

ATTENTION

• Deaerate oil pump (see page 6 point 9.) and put lubrication system into operation again.

• Check whether the pressure relief valve (item no. 6) of the oil pump opens at a pressure of 0,8 MPa
(8 bar). If nit, readjust pressure relief valve (item no. 6). Clockwise turning of the screw in the pressure
relief valve (item no. 6) will increase the operating pressure, anticlockwise turning will deaerate it.

• Dispose of old oil remnants according to rule.

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 9 of 10

13. Maintenance
(Item. see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The oil pump requires low maintenance only, and there are no further measures required to maintain the
pump ready for operation.
The following points should be observed:
• Use clean mineral oil only for filling the oil pump. Avoid all kinds of impurities as dirt particles are the
most frequent cause of failures and damages.
• Different kinds of lubricant must not be mixed.
• The sieve (item no. 13) must not be removed when the oil pump is filled.
• The sieve (item no. 13) should be cleaned after several filling process.
• Do not use aggresive media to clean the pump. Use Naphtha or petroleum ether only.

14. Operating troubles and their reasons

(Item. see spare parts drawing, page 7)
Early wear of the gear pump (item no. 9), the mobile parts and the sealings is mainly caused by polluted
lubricating oil.
Failures within the system can above all occur if the lubricant lines are not deaerated perferctly.
The emission of red permanent light by the luminous diode (item no. 34) at the oil pump is caused by a
sinking of the oil level in the tank below min. 2 of the float-type switch (item no. 11), or there is no sufficient
pressure build-up of 4 bar taking place at the oil pump.

23315 BA 2e / 1 9911 HF Page 10 of 10

 Operating Instructions

for

Oil gear pump AD - P

Index
Page
1. General ............................................................................................... 2
2. Application .......................................................................................... 2
3. Safety ................................................................................................. 2
4. Design ................................................................................................ 3
5. Principle of operation .......................................................................... 3
6. Drawing (measurement) ..................................................................... 4
7. Technical data .................................................................................... 5
8. Electrical wiring diagram ..................................................................... 6
9. Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 6
10. Spare parts drawing ........................................................................... 7
11. Spare parts list .................................................................................... 8
12. Disassembly and Assembly ............................................................... 9
13. Maintenance ..................................................................................... 10
14. Operating troubles and their reasons .............................................. 10

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 1 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they are necessary for the improvement of the oil gear pump
AD-P.
The copyright on this operating instruction is kept reserved to Mssrs. DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH.
These operating instructions are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They
contain technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely nor partially be reproduced or
distributed. It is also prohibited to use or convey them without authority to any persons for competition
purposes.
Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
2. Application
The type oil gear pump is ideally suited in progressive centralized lubrication systems. In these systems, the
lubricant is carried under pressure to the progressive distributors from where it is then supplied via lines to
the friction points.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the competent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user are to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
to life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case for warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

If it deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Signs that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
- arrow for rotation directions
- mark for fluid connections
must by all means be observed and maintained in a completely legible condition.
Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
Any modification or change to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Orinigal spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 2 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
4. Design
(items see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The oil lubricator basically consists of a gear pump (item no. 9) with A.C. single-phase motor, (item no. 36),
the oil reservoir (item no. 12), the electronic control unit (item no. 35) and a valve (item no. 23) which
ensures that the line is depressurized when the A.C. single-phase motor (item no. 36) is switched off (relief
cycle).
An integral pressure relief valve (item no. 6) is opened as soon as reaching a pressure of 2 MPa (20 bar)
thus protecting the oil gear pump from damage in the event of an overpressure situation occuring. After
relief the main line, the valve (item no. 23) maintains a resudial pressure of approx. 0.08 MPa (0.8 bar) and
thus prevents that the main line runs empty.
The entire system is either time- or pulse controlled, at choice.

5. Principle of operation
A lubricating cycle begins after connection of the electric current supply with a lubricating process, either
immediately of after expiration of the starting delay time, which can lie between 0 and 15 minutes. During
this process, the oil pump delivers the lubricant via the progressive distributors to the friction points.
With the help of an integrated proximity switch at the progressive distributor, the motion of a distributor
piston is interrogated and converted into an electrical signal, which is supplied to the monitoring part of the
electronic control unit.
After one circulation of the orogressive distributor, a signal change (off-slope) of the proximity switch occurs,
which resets the oil pump and the monitoring time expired by then.
After this, the lubrication pause begins, and the main line is relieved. Depending on the kind of machine to
be lubricated, the lubrication pause is time or pulse dependent and adjustable from 1 to 9999 minutes or
pulses. In case of a time dependent pause, the pause time can be added via connections 5 of the electronic
control unit (item no. 35) and, as a result, the next lubriating process can be triggered after expiration of the
adjusted pause time. In case of a pulse dependent pause, the pulse coming in via connections 5 of the
electronic control unit (item no. 35) are counted, and after achievemenmt of the adjusted number of pulses,
the next lubricating process is triggered.
The filling level can be recongnized at any time if it deals with a plastic tank (item no. 12). In case of a metal
tank (item no. 12), the filling level can be recognized via oil sight-feed glasses. In addition to this, the oil
pump is furnished in series with a float-type switch having 2 switching points. When the oil level in the tank
falls below min.1, a visual warning is given via the luminuous diode (item no. 34). When the level falls below
min.2 the oil pump switched off.
A lubricating process is indicated by a permanent green light from a luminuous diode (item no. 34) as long
as the oil level in the tank lies above the switching point min.1. When the oil level sinks between the
switching points min.1 and min.2, this fact is indicated by a green flashing light - even during the lubricating
process - and signalized potentil-free via connection 8 and 9 of the electronic control unit (item no. 35).
If the adjusted monitoring time (which is adjustable from 0,1 to 9,9 minutes) expires during a lubricating
cycle, or if the filling level falls below the switching point 2, the oil pump is switched off. This indicated by
permanent red light given by the luminous diode and signalized via connection 11-13.
The actuation of the integrated pressure switch (item no. 32) releases a lubricating process and clears an
existing fault alarm.

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 3 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
6. Drawings with dimensions

AD-P with plastic reservoir 2,5 l AD-P with metal reservoir, 2,5 l and 5 l
(transparent)

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 4 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
7. Technical Data
Output volume : ............................................................................................................................ 80 cm³/min
Feed pressure : .................................................................. 2 MPa ( 20 bar) limited by pressure relief valve
Reservoir volume : ........................................................ 2,5 l plastic PC transparent; 2,5 l and 5 l metal St
Ambient temperature : ........................................................................................................... - 0° C to + 40°C
Compatible lubricants on mineraloil basis : Oil .......................... 30-850 mm²/s , operating viscosity
-1

Semi-fluids ............................................. upon request

Pressure connection : ....................................................................................................................... M 10 x 1
Protective system : IP 40 optional IP 54
(IP 40 - provided in our works. If the customer prefers IP 54, he has to specifity it on the order)
Weight without filling : with plastic reservoir 2,5 l....................................................................approx. 4 kg
with metal reservoir 2,5 l .....................................................................approx. 7 kg
with metal reservoir 5 l ........................................................................approx. 9 kg
Operating voltage, at choice : ....................... AC 115 or 230V ± 5%, 47 to 63 Hz; set to 230V on our works
Current consumption at 115V : .........................................................................< 2A at 50 Hz, < 3A at 60 Hz
Current consumption at 230V : .........................................................................< 1A at 50 Hz, < 2A at 60 Hz
Power consumption : ..........................................................................110 Watt at 50 Hz, 160 Watt at 60 Hz
Pause settings, digital : .......................1 to 9999 minutes or 1 to 9999 pulses; set to 1 minute on our works
Monitorint time, digital : ........................................................................................................... 0.1 to 9.9 min.
Inlet pulse duration : ...........................................................................................................................≥ 30 ms
Load of signal transmitter : ..................................................................................................... DC 24V 20mA
Load of connections 7 and 16 ........................................................................................... max. 60 mA, total
Cable entry : .......................................................................................................................2 pcs. thread 13,5
Relay outputs:
Rated voltage max. : ............................................................................................................................. 250 V
Current consumption max. : ...................................................................................................................... 6 A
Switching capacity max. : .............................................................................................1100 VA (ohmic load)
Switching capacity max. at DC 24V : .............................................................................. 120 W (ohmic load)

Connection diagram

Code No.
Reservoir Voltage 115 / 230V
Frequency
50 Hz 60 Hz
2,5 l Plastic 23315 – 1611 23315 – 1631
2,5 l Metal 23315 – 1811 23315 – 1831
5 l Metal 23315 - 1821 23315 - 1841

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 5 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
8. Electric wiring diagram

9. Installation and Commissioning

Install the oil gear pump AD-P in horizontal position only! Fix the oil gear pump by means of 2 screws M6.
It should be installed at a central point of easy access. These offers the following advantages:
• Optimal line lenghts to the friction points.
• Easy filling of oil pump.
• Good visibility of oil level in the oil pump tank.
• Good visibility of the luminuous diode to monitor running time and fault alarms of the oil pump-

The electric connections of the oil pump are to be effected by qualified staff only.
The local electric instructions must be observed.
ATTENTION

• When adjusting the mains voltage and the required pause time, change the adjustments made in our
works, if neccesary.
• Install main line in a rising position from the oil pump and avoid syphons - socalled sacks -, when for
instance obstacles are to be bypassed. Un such syphons, there will occur air inclusions, which cannot be
eliminated during deaeration of the main line.
• Take care that the lines are clean and free from chips or other impurities.
• Fill oil pump with clean oil only and avoid all kinds of impurities. Dirt particles are the most frequent
reason for failures and damages.
• Let oil pump run until oil comes bubble-free out of the the min line connections, do not connect main line
before this is ensured.
• The oil pump AD-P must not be operated with a discharge pressure exceeding MPa (20 bar).

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 6 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
10. Spare parts drawing

Plastic reservoir 2,5 l

View A
Metal reservoir 2,5 l and 5 l

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 7 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
11. Spare parts ist

item Pcs. Denomination Code No.

no.
Plastic reservoir Metal reservoir Metal reservoir
2,5 l 2,5 l 5l
- - Oil gear pump Voltage 115/230V 50 Hz 23315 - 1611 23315 - 1811 23315 - 1821
AD-P 60 Hz 23315 - 1631 23315 - 1831 23315 - 1841
- 1 Loose component group for protective system 69111 - 8011
IP 54 comprising part item no. 2 and 37
1 5 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 6 DIN 84 74104 - 1314
2 twist clamp thread 13,5 76927 - 2323
Mind, Fitting A thread 13,5x6 - 13,5-FS 76927 - 2883
2 1 only for Plug N thread 13,5 - FS DIN 46320 76927 - 1334
IP 54 O-ring 9 Pg 13,5 - IT DIN 46320 76927 - 1454
3 6 Cheese-head screw M 5 x 10 DIN 7984 74102 - 1024 -
4 4 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 30 DIN 7984 74102 - 1884
5 4 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1014
6 1 Pressure relief valve, set to 20 bar 63611 - 3221
7 1 Sealing A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094 E
8 1 Flange 74354 - 5051
9 1 Gearing pump 72811 - 2433
10 3 Cheese-head screw M 4 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1874
11 1 Float-type switch 39161 - 4193
12 1 Reservoir 73721 - 6271 63721 - 7111 73721 - 7121
13 1 Strainer 73671 - 1743
14 1 Sealing joint 72731 - 4221 72731 - 4231 E
15 1 Plug screw G 3/4 74106 - 2053
16 1 Housing 74331 - 8391 74331 - 8381
17 1 Male fitting for pipe 6 - M 10 x 1 73511 - 5781
18 1 Conical ring for pipe 6 73511 - 2721
19 1 Pressure gauge 0 - 40 bar 75111 - 2323
20 1 Bonnet 73761 - 4371
21 1 O-ring 10 x 1,3 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2423 E
22 1 Spring 71614 - 3122
23 1 Valve 63611 - 4181
24 1 Shaft 71210 - 1121
25 1 Dowel pin 1,5 x 10 DIN 1481 74225 - 5344
26 1 Sleeve 71461 - 8151
27 1 O-ring 6 x 1,5 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2413 E
28 1 Dowel pin 2,5 x 10 DIN 1481 74225 - 5334
29 1 Plug screw M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
30 4 Spacer 74179 - 0053
31 4 Cheese-head screw M 3 x 4 DIN 84 74104 - 1464
32 1 Push-button 76925 - 4163
33 1 Sealing lid 76925 - 9263
34 1 Housing for LED 76941 - 4113
35 1 Electronic module 66202 - 2471
36 1 Alternating current motor 115 / 230V 50 Hz or 76911 - 1513 E
60 Hz 76911 - 1523
37 1 Mind only for IP 54 E
O-ring 152,5 x 2,5 DIN 3770 -NB 70 72711 - 2813
38 4 Cheese-head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 7984 -- 74102 - 1134
39 3 Sight glass with O-ring -- 75241 - 2413
40 3 Fitting nut G ½ DIN 431 -- 74175 - 1034

Parts marked with "E" are recommended to be kept on stock.

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 8 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
12. Disassembly and Assembly
(items see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Protect oil pump against unintended actuation and disconnect it electrically by qualified staff.
• Remove oil gear pump from the machine and/or from the system.
• Remove cheese-head screws (item no. 3) in case of 2.5 l plastic tanks or cheese-head screws (item no.
38) in case of 2.5 l and 5 l metal tanks.
• Remove aggregate from tank (item no. 12).
• Remove seal (item no. 14) from tank (item no. 12).
• Remove cheese-head screws (item no. 10).
• Remove gear pump (item no. 9), O-ring (item no. 21), washer (item no. 22) and valve (item no. 23) from
the flange (item no. 8).
• Screw off pressure relief valve (item no. 6) and remove O-ring (item no. 7).
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts for damages.
• Replace all seals by new ones.
• Assemble oil gear pump in reverse order.
• Mount oil gear pump to the machine and/or the system.

• Make electric connection of oil pump by qualified staff and remove protection against unintended
actuation.

ATTENTION

• Deaerate oil pump (see page 6 point 9.) and put lubrication system into operation again.

• Check whether the pressure relief valve (item no. 6) of the oil pump opens at a pressure of 2 MPa
(20 bar). If nit, readjust pressure relief valve (item no. 6). Clockwise turning of the screw in the pressure
relief valve (item no. 6) will increase the operating pressure, anticlockwise turning will deaerate it.

• Dispose of oil remnants and cleanser according to rule.

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 9 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
13. Maintenance
(items see spare parts drawing, page 7)
The oil pump requires low maintenance only, and there are no further measures required to maintain the
pump ready for operation.
The following points should be observed:
• Use clean mineral oil only to fill the oil pump. Avoid all kinds of impurities as dirt particles are the most
frequent reason for failures and damages.
• Different kinds of lubricant must not be mixed.
• The sieve (item no. 13) must not be removed when the oil pump is filled.
• The sieve (item no. 13) should be cleaned after several filling process.
• Do not use aggresive media to clean the pump. Use Naphtha or petroleum ether only.

14. Operating troubles and their reasons

(items see spare parts drawing, page 7)
Early wear of the gear pump (item no. 9), the mobile parts and the sealings is mainly caused by polluted
lubricating oil.
Failures within the system can above all occur if the lubricant lines are not deaerated perferctly.
Permanent red light from the luminous diode (item no. 34) at the oil pump is caused by falling of the oil level
in the tank below min.2 of the float-type switch (item no. 11) or by absence of the signal from the
progressive distributor before expiration of the adjusted monitoring time.

23315 BA 3 e / 2 9801 HF/Wi Page 10 of 10

Replacement for 23315 BA 3 / 1 1195 1000Hf
 Operating Instructions

for

Magnetic pump Microjet

23318 – 0521 AC 24 V / 60 Hz with level switch
23318 – 0551 AC 24 V / 60 Hz
23318 – 1511 AC 230 V / 50 Hz
23318 – 1521 AC 230 V / 50 Hz with level switch

Index
Page
1. General .................................................................................. 2
2. Application ............................................................................. 2
3. Safety ..................................................................................... 2
4. Design .................................................................................... 3
5. Principle of operation ............................................................. 3
6. Drawing (measurement) ........................................................ 4
7. Technical data ....................................................................... 5
8. Installation and Commissioning ............................................. 6
9. Spare parts drawings and Spare parts lists .................... 7 - 8
10. Disassembly and Assembly ............................................ 9 - 10
11. Maintenance ........................................................................ 10
12. Operating troubles and their reasons ................................. 10

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 1 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they necessary for the improvement of the magnetic pump
Microjet.
The copyright on this operating instruction is kept reserved to Mssrs. DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH.
These operating instruction are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain
technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely nor partically or distributed. It is also
prohibited to use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.
Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

2. Application
The magnetic pump Microjet is used as delivery pump in single-line systems in connection with restrictor
elements.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the compotent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user are to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
or life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case for warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

It is deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
• arrow for rotation directions
• mark for fluid connections
must be all means be observed and maintenance in a completely legible condition.

Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts

Any modification or changer to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Orinigal spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 2 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
4. Design
(item nos. see spare parts drawings, page 7 and 8 )
The magnetic pump consists of a pump outlet body, a flange-mounted control magnet (item no. 8.2) and a
tank (item no. 4) as well as of a nonreturn valve (item no. 8.10), which is fixed within the outlet and to which
the mainline is connected.
The pump outlet body consists of a housing (item no. 8.6) with a metallic sealing piston (item no. 8.7) and a
suction valve (item no. 8.12 and 8.13).
The electric connection for the control magnet (item no. 8.2) is effected via an appliance plug with integrated
rectifier (item no. 8.1) for a mains voltage of AC 24 V / 60 Hz for the pumps 23318 - 0521 / - 0551 and
AC 230 V / 50 Hz for the pumps 23318 - 1511 / - 1521.

5. Principle of operation
(item nos. see spare parts drawings, page 7 and 8 )
When the electric current supply is switched on, the control magnet (item no. 8.2) is actuatec and the
magnet core displaces the piston (item no. 8.7) abruptly downwards against the springiness of the
compression spring (item no. 8.5). By the abrupt actuation of the piston (item no. 8.7), the suction valve
(item no. 8.12 and 8.13) is closed via the lubricant in the pump outlet body room, and at the same time, the
lubricant is displaced into the main line by the nonreturn valve (item no. 8.10).
When the electric current supply is switched off, the piston (item no. 8.7) with the magnet core is displaced
upwards by the springiness of the compression spring (item no. 8.5). Due to the displacement of the piston
(item no. 8.7), a vacuum is created which causes the spring-loaded nonreturn valve (item no. 8.10) to close.
This is to prevent that the lubricant is sucked back from the main line. Simultaneously, the suction valve
(item no. 8.12 and 8.13) is opened, and lubricant is sucked from the tank (item no. 4) into the pump outlet
body.
ATTENTION
Use the magnetic pump Microjet only in connection with restrictor elements.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 3 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
6. Drawing (Measurement)

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 4 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
7. Technical Data

Pump
Output volume : .................................................................................................................... 250 mm³/stroke
Feed pressure : .......................................................................................................................... max. 25 bar
Clock rate : ....................................................................................................................................... max. 2/s
Reservoir volume : .............................................................................................................................. 4 Liter
Reservoir material : ............................................................................... Polyethylen transparent ( PE - HD )
Filling strainer (only at 23318 - 0551 / - 1511 ......................................... Wire netting 0,25 x 0,16 DIN 4189
Connection pressure line : .................................... tube fitting for pipe Ø 6 with olive and cap nut DIN 2353
-1
Lubricant : ........................................................... mineral oil, at service viscosity between 20 to 400 mm²s
Ambient temperature : ....................................................................................................... - 20°C to + 50°C
Installation position : ........................................................................................................................... vertical
Magnet
Voltage : ............................................................................. AC 24 V / 60 Hz pump 23318 - 0521 / - 0551
............................................................................................ AC 230 V / 50 Hz pump 23318 - 1511 / - 1521
Power : .................................................................................................................................................. 35 W
Percentage duty cycle : ....................................................................................................................... 100 %
Magnet and utensil socket : ................................................................................................ 4 x 90° rotatable
Level switch min. (float-type switch)
Type of contact : .............................................................................................. 1 change-over (reed contact)
Switching voltage : ........................................................................................................ max. AC or DC 48 V
Constant current : ......................................................................................................................... max. 0,3 A
Switching capacity : ................................................................................................................................ 3 VA
Utensil socket : .................................................................................................................... 4 x 90° rotatable
Switching symbol :

Code No..
Magnetic pump AC 24 V / 60 Hz with level switch ................................................................ 23318 - 0521
Magnetic pump AC 24 V / 60 Hz ........................................................................................... 23318 - 0551
Magnetic pump AC 230 V / 50 Hz ........................................................................................... 23318 - 1511
Magnetic pump AC 230 V / 50 Hz with level switch ................................................................ 23318 - 1521

ATTENTION
Use the magnetic pump only in connection with restrictor elements.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 5 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
8. Installation and Commissioning
(item nos. see spare parts drawing, page 7 and 8)
Install the magnetic pump Microjet in vertical position only! Fix the magnetic pump by means of 2 srews
M 8. It should be installed at a central point of easy access. This offers the following advantages:
• Optimal lenghts to the firction points.
• Easy filling of the magnetic pump.
• Good visibility of the filling level in the magnetic pump.

The electric connection of the magnetic pump are to be effected by qualified staff only. The local electric
instructions must be observed. - connection voltage AC 24 V / 60 Hz and/or AC 230 V / 50 Hz.
ATTENTION
• If possible, install main line in a rising position from the magnetic pump and avoid syphons - socalled
sacks -, when for instance onstacles are to be bypassed. In such syphons, there will occur air inclusions,
which cannot be liminated during deaeration of the main line.
• Take care that the lines are clean and free from chips or other impurities.
• Prefill main line with oil prior to commissioning.
• Fill magnetic pump with clean oil only and avoid all kinds of impurities. Dirt particles are the most
frequent reason for failures and damages.
• When commissioning the magnetic pump, screw nonreturn valv (item no. 8.10) off the socket piece (item
no. 8.9) and actuate the magnetic pump until oil escapes without air bubbles. After this, screw nonreturn
valve (item no. 8.10) in again and actuate the magnetic pump until oil comes out at the nonreturn valve
also without air bubbles. Then connect main line.
ATTENTION
When deaerating the pump, the oil level in the reservoir (item no. 4) has to be at least 50 mm.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 6 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
9. Spare parts drawings and spare parts lists

Item Denomination Code No. Pieces

Magnetic pump AC 24 V / 60 Hz with level switch 23318 - 0521 •
Magnetic pump AC 24 V / 60 Hz 23318 - 0551 •

Magnetic pump AC 230 V / 50 Hz 23318 - 1511 •
Magnetic pump AC 230 V / 50 Hz with level switch 23318 - 1521 •
1 Cover 73752 - 2123 1 1
2 Filling strainer 73671 - 1613 1 1
3 Ring 71457 - 1131 1 1
4 Reservoir 4 l 73721 - 6091 1 1 1 1
5 Fitting nut A G 1/4 - 14 H - DIN 431 74175 - 1013 1 1 1 1
6 Socket piece 73490 - 4921 1 1 1 1
7 Sealing A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1214 1 1 1 1 E
Magnetic pump AC 24 V / 60 Hz, consisting of item nos. 8.1 to 8.14 23318 - 0541 1 1
8
Magnetic pump AC 230 V / 50 Hz, consisting of item nos. 8.1 to 8.14 23318 - 1611 1 1
9 Level switch min., consisting of item nos. 9.1 to 9.4 65124 – 0351 1 1
Parts marked with “E“ are recommended to be kept on stock.
23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 7 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
 Item Denomination Code no. Pieces
Magnetic pump AC 24 V / 60 Hz 23318 - 0541 •
8.0
Magnetic pump AC 230 V / 50 Hz 23318 - 1611 •
In-line box 76928 - 9483 1
8.1
Coupler plug with rectifier for AC 230 V / 50 Hz 76931 - 0133 1
Magnet 76931 - 1363 1
8.2
Magnet 76931 - 0123 1
8.3 O-ring 40 x 3 DIN 3771 - NB 70 72711 - 1863 1 1 E
8.4 Spring plate 71641 - 1321 1 1
8.5 Compression spring 71615 - 5231 1 1
8.6 Housing 74331 - 6141 1 1 N
8.7 Piston 72108 - 2471 1 1 N
8.8 Sealing A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1094 1 1
8.9 Socket piece 73490 - 4911 1 1
8.10 Non-return valvel 73611 - 4343 1 1
8.11 O-ring 11 x 2 DIN 3771 - NB 70 72711 - 1353 1 1 E
8.12 Socket piece 73490 - 4931 1 1
8.13 Ball 5,5 mm - V 71961 - 4134 1 1
8.14 O-ring 9 x 2 DIN 3771 - NB 70 72711 - 3763 1 1 E
9.0 Level switch 65124 - 0351 •
9.1 Float-type switch 39161 - 0523 1
9.2 Cover 73752 - 2131 1
9.3 O-ring 29 x 3,5 DIN 3771 - NB 70 72711 - 1653 1 E
9.4 Retaining ring BR 34 74187 - 1023 1
Parts marked with “E“ are recommended to be kept on stock.
Parts marked with “N“ are not supplied individually as spare parts.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 8 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
10. Disassembly and Assembly
(item no.s see spare parts drawings, page 7 and 8)
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kind or works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Protect magnetic pump against unintended actuation and disconnect it electrically by qualified staff. (pull
out appliance plug (item no. 8.1) ).
• Remove pump from the machine and/or from the system.
• Remove cover (item no. 1), filling strainer (item no. 2), ring (item no. 3) and/or level switch (item no. 7)
from the reservoir (item no. 4).
• Empty tank (item no. 4).
• Loosen nut (item no. 5) with the help of a long socket wrench (wrench size across flats 22).
• Remove reservoir (item no. 4) from the stud (item no. 6).
• Loosen screws at the magnet (item no. 8.2) and remove magnetic pump.
• Remove O-ring (item no. 8.3), piston (item no. 8.7) and compression spring (item no. 8.5).
• Screw off non-return valve (item no. 8.10) and stud (item no. 8.9) and remove sealing joint (item no. 8.8).
• Screw off socket piece (item no. 8.12) and remove ball (item no. 8.13).
• Remove O-ring (item no. 8.11) from socket piece (item no. 8.12) and take O-ring (item no. 8.14) out of
bore.
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts of damages.
• Replace all parts and seals by new ones.
• Assemble magnetic pump in reverse order.
• Mount magnetic pump to the machine and/or the system.
• Fill the reservoir.

• Make electric connection of magnetic pump by qualified staff and remove protection against unintended
actuation.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 9 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi
 ATTENTION

• When recommissioning the magnetic pump, screw nonreturn valv (item no. 8.10) off the socket piece
(item no. 8.9) and actuate the magnetic pump until oil escapes without air bubbles. After this, screw
nonreturn valve (item no. 8.10) in again and actuate the magnetic pump until oil comes out at the
nonreturn valve also without air bubbles. Then connect main line.

ATTENTION

• When deaerating the pump, the oil level in the reservoir (item no. 4) has to be at least 50 mm.

• Dispose of oil remnants and cleanser according to rule.

11. Maintenance
(item no. see spare parts drawings, page 7)
The magnetic pump requires low maintenence only, and there are no further measures required to maintain
the magnetic pump ready for operation.
The following points should be observed:
• Use clean mineral oil only to fill the magnetic pump. Avoid all kinds of impurities as dirt particles are the
most frequent reason for failures and damages.
• Different kinds of lubricant must not be mixed.
• The filling strainer (item no. 2) must not be removed when the magnetic pump is filled.
• The filling strainer (item no. 2) should be cleaned after several filling process.
• Do not use aggresive media to clean the magnetic pump. Use Naphtha or petroleum ether only.

12. Operating troubles and their reasons

Early wear of the mobile parts and the sealings is mainly caused by polluted lubricating oil.
Failures within the system can above all occur if the magnetic pump and the lubricant lines are not
deaerated perfectly.

23318 BA 1e / 2 01 00 HF Page 10 of 10
Replacement for 23318 BA 1e / 1 9803 Wi

Centralized Lubrication Unit
ZE 2,7 / 0,25 / SMS - MIN1+2 - DSW
USE
The centralized lubrication unit ZE 2,7 is a compact
aggregate being used in intermittently working single-line
centralized lubrication systems in connection with piston
distributors.
ADVANTAGES
• compact design
• low in costs
• easy installation
• minimal maintenance expenditure
• float-type switch for level monitoring
• Pressure switch for the observation of the pressure
build-up
• Plug-in connection for all electrical component parts
APPLICATIONS
Machine tools, printing machines, wood-working
machines, plastics processing machines, wrapping
machines, textile machines, paper processing machines,
special purpose machines.
DESIGN
The centralized lubrication unit ZE 2,7 consists of a
transparent plastic tank, the gear pumping unit with a
pressure control, change-over and relief valve being
integrated in the control block, a pressure switch, which
is fixed laterally to the control block and intended for the
observation of the pressure build-up, a filler neck with
sieve and float-type switch for the automatic control of
the filling level. The electrical connections of the motor,
pressure switch and float-type switch are led onto a pin-
and socket-connector which facilitates the connection of
the aggregate considerably.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The lubricating process is released by the control system
of the machine. When voltage is applied to the pump
motor, lubricant is delivered to the lubrication points via
the metering elements. After actuation of the metering
elements, the pump carries the whole quantity of
lubricant via the pressure control valve back into the
tank. Due to the pressure switch, the pump operation
period can be controlled pressure dependently, and the
pressure build-up can be observed simultaneously.
When the pump motor has been switched off, the
pressure in the main line is reduced via the relief valve to
the preset residual pressure. The retention of a residual
pressure prevents the lines from draining off in case of
longer pause and/or standstill times.
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH - 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 - 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 - Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 - Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
System SAXONIA
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
TECHNICAL DATA
Centralized lubrication unit ZE 2,7
Bowl capacity ............................................................. 2,7 l
Relief pressure range .................................... 0,1 ... 1 bar
Weight .......................................................... approx. 2 kg
Temperature range ......................................... 0 bis 40°C
Pump
Rated lubricant flow ......................................... 0,25 l/min
Pressure ........................................................ max. 30 bar
Allowed service viscosity ..................... 10 ... 1000 mm2/s
..................................... for higher viscosity to consult us.
Three-phase A.C. motor 1LA-7050-4AB12
Voltage / tolerance .......... 230/400 V ± 10% / 460 V ± 10%
Frequency ............................................... 50 Hz / 60 Hz
Rated current ...................................... 0,35/0,2 A / 0,2 A
Rated speed ............................. 1295 min-1 / 1600 min-1
Rated power ................................................. 60 W / 70 W
Operating mode ......................................................... S 1
Protective system .................................................... IP 55
Isolation ................................................................ class F
Float-type switch SSA 130 / S - O
Switching voltage max. ..................................... 150 V DC
Switching current max. .......................................... 0,25 A
Switching capacity max. ............................................ 5 W
Type of contact: preliminary switching point ......... NO
lower switching point .................. NC
Protective system .................................................... IP 54
see data sheet
Pressure switch DSW-ST-N 50/15-42
Switching voltage max. ............................................. 42 V
Switching capacity ............................................ 4 A / 42 V
Protective system .................................................... IP 65
Switching pressure ..................................... 15 ± 3,0 bar
23322 P 1e / 4 01 2000HF
 System SAXONIA

DIMENSIONS

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

23322 P 1e / 4 01 2000HF
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH - 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 - 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 - Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 - Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Lubrication pump AB - K, hand lever for oil and semi-fluids
USE
The AB - K lubrication pump is used to dispense oil or
semi-fluids in single-line metering element type systems
ZE-E or ZE-G.

ADVANTAGES
• simple and quick to arrange - versatile
• inexpensive
• problemfree installation, easy to be overlooked
• less maintenance and repair cost
• extension or alteration of existing systems is no
proble
• capacity up to 100 lubrication points

APPLICATIONS
wood-working machines
printing machines
textile machines
presses
paper and pulp machinery
machine-tools
packaging machines
special machines

CONFIGURATION
In a single-line system lubricant is being delivered un-
der pressure intermittently (pressurizing and depressuri-
zing cycle) via the main feed line through the metering ele-
ments up to the lubrication points.
The single-line system feeds many lubrication points
with equal or varying lubricant volumes (from 10 to 1000
mm3/stroke) whilst overcoming different counter pressu-
res (max. 30 bar).
OPERATION
The hand lever is actuated only once to complete a de-
livery stroke then feeding all single-line metering elements
with lubricant. The second lever actuation must only take
place after an interval of 20 seconds to allow the system to
relieve.
The pump housing assembly together with reservoir
can be rotated by 90o clockwise or counter-clockwise so
that the hand lever may be located for side operation.

PRINCIPLE OF FUNCTIONING TECHNISCHE DATEN

In order to operation the metering units the main line
(the line to connect pump with metering units) is pressuri-
zed for a short time, and subsequently, after the cycle is
terminated, relieved down to a residual pressure of 0,8
bar.
This limitation permits sufficient volumetric capacity to
allow for pressure build-up, permitting trouble-free opera-
tion of the metering elements to allow that metering cham-
bers are properly recharged with lubricant.
Operating pressure max. : ___________________ 40 bar
Output volume per pressure stroke max. : _____ 10 cm3
Temperature range : ______________ - 20oC to + 80oC
Reservoir capacity (useable) : __________________ 1,5 l
Suitable lubricants (oils)
(at service temperature) ___________ 30 to 2000 mm2s-1
Suitable semfluid grases
(at service temperature) _____________ NLGI class 000
Main feed line connection : ____ female thread M 10 x 1
Weight without filling : _______________________ 2,0 kg
Code no. : ___________________________ 23332 - 1221

23332 PB 2 e / 2 1000HF
 ABSOLUTE MAX. LUBRICANT DELIVERY VOLUME OF PUMP (Volume rating VA)
VA = VV + VSch + VSt

VA = volume rating (total rating of the system in cm3)

VV = metering volume (sum of all metered quantities in cm3)
VSch = hose volume (1 cm3 per metre of main flexible hose)
VSt = control volume (metering element ZE-G 0.1 cm3 per outlet)
The total lubricant rating of AB-K pump should not exceed 7500 mm3 per stroke (cycle).

Example: system parameters - calculation of total pump ratingsh VA

It is intended to lay out a singleline system with 30 lubrication points, i.e.: 15 metering elements of 50 mm3,
10 of 100mm3 and 5 elements of 200 mm3 /stroke, 4 m main feed line, of which 3 m nylon pipe 6 x 1 mm and 1 m flexi-
ble hosing NW 4.
VV 15 metering elements 50 mm3/stroke = 750 mm3
10 metering elements 100 mm3/stroke = 1000 mm3
5 metering elements 200 mm3/stroke = 1000 mm3
VSch 3 m nylon pipe, 6 x 1 (volume capacity 500 mm3
per meter / cycle) (3 x 500 mm3) = 1500 mm3
1 m flexible hose (output capacity per meter) = 1000 mm3
VA total requirement per cycle = 5250 mm3
VSt in case ZE-G metering elements are being used, add 100 mm3 per outlet to the result obtained.
in case ZE-E metering elements, semi-fluid on request.

AVAILABILITY OF FITTINGS at choice, suitable for main feed line AB-K

Accessoiries for pipe Code no.
d dia. dia.

M 10 x 1 6 73490 - 5243
Adapter
M 10 x 1 8 73490 - 5263

Sealing ring DIN 7603 - Cu 10 x 13,5 72712 - 1094

M 10 x 1 6 73511 - 5153
Cap screw DIN 3871
M 14 x 1,5 8 73511 - 5223

6 6 73511 - 2644
Clamping ring DIN 3862
8 8 73511 - 2654

Straight male stud coupling M 10 x 1 6 73442 - 1244

Banjo coupling including sealing rings, M 10 x 1 6 63422 - 3071

clamping rings and cap screws M 10 x 1 8 63422 - 3091

4 73511 - 4123
Nylon pipe reinforcing sleeve 6 x 1 8 x 1,5
5 73511 - 4133

2
 DIMENSIONS (mm) SPARE PARTS DRAWING

SPARE PARTS LIST

Part Pcs. Denomination Code no.
-- -- Oil pump AB - K 23332 - 1221
1 1 Lid 73751 - 3912
2 1 Reservoir 63721 - 6221
3 1 Girder 74351 - 6231
4 4 Hexagon screw M 6 x 55 DIN 931 74101 - 2254
5 1 Housing 74331 - 4181
6 1 O-ring 24,2 x 3 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1623 E
7 1 Piston 72125 - 1131
8 1 O-ring 60 x 2 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2333 E
9 1 Seal ring A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603 -Cu 72712 - 1094 E
10 1 Cap screw M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
11 1 Strainer 73671 - 1713
12 2 Screw B 2,9 x 6,5 DIN 7971 74105 - 1114
13 1 Screw-plug 73752 - 2613
14 1 Circlip 16 x 1 DIN 472 74186 - 1473
15 1 Washer 74181 - 1681
16 1 Spring 71614 - 3122
17 2 Valve seat 73641 - 3391
18 2 O-ring 6 x 2 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1233 E
19 1 Seal ring A 16 x 22 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1314 E
20 1 Stud 73490 - 2971
21 1 O-ring 3,68 x 1,78 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1123 E
22 1 Pressure spring 71615 - 6191
23 1 Cylindric pin 8 h 8 x 20 DIN 7 74225 - 1174
24 1 Grover lock pin 5 x 28 DIN 1481 74225 - 5164
25 1 Grover lock pin 3 x 28 DIN 1481 74225 - 5074
26 1 Hand lever 65221 - 1141
27 1 Grover lock pin 4 x 40 DIN 7343 74225 - 7014
28 1 Spring 71614 - 2112
29 1 Ball V 3/8 DIN 5401 71961 - 4224
30 1 Plug-in coupling G ¼ - 10 73449 - 1413

The parts marked “E” are recommended to be carried in stock.

3
 METERING ELEMENT ZE - E METERING ELEMENT ZE - G
(10 to 200 mm3) (10 to 200 mm3)

• Precise metering • Precise metering

• Low price • Low price
• Little space • Little space

Connection M 8 x 1 for pipe outside dia. 4 with

male fitting and cone ring

Metering volume mm3/stroke Code no.

Metering volume mm3/stroke Code no. 10 35636 - 1211
10 35691 - 1111 25 35636 - 1221
25 35691 - 1121 50 35636 - 1231
50 35691 - 1131 100 35636 - 1241
100 35691 - 1141 150 35636 - 1251
200 35691 - 1151 200 35636 - 1251

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Operating instructions

for

Lubricant pump AB - K

pneumatic operation

Index
Page
1. General ............................................................. 2 - 3
2. Safety................................................................ 4 - 5
3. Design and principle of operation ...................... 6 - 8
4. Pump installation .................................................... 9
5. Commissioning..................................................... 10
6. Maintenance.................................................. 11 - 15
7. Failures, their possible reasons and repair ........... 16

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 1 of 16

 1. GENERAL

1.1 Introduction
1.2 Application
1.3. Some information on the product
1.3.1 Characteristics
1.3.2 Specification
1.3.3 Copyright
1.4. Company’s address, addresses for spare parts and after-sales service

1.1 Introduction
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
Should there once still occur any difficulties, please contact our engineering department (for the address,
please refer to GENERAL, item no. 4, firm address), which will be well prepared to help you.
These operating instructions only apply to the lubricant pump AB-K.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they become necessary for the improvement of the lubricant
pump AB-K.
The lubricant pump AB-K is only intended for field of application described in the operating instructions under
"GENERAL, itom no. 2, Application".
Before the lubricant pump AB-K is used outside its contractual field of application, the engineering
department of DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH is to be consulted as otherwise the guarantee will
become ineffective.

1.2 Application
Wood-working machines, printing machines, textile machienes, presses, punching machines, shears, paper
& pulp machinery, machine-tools, packaging machines, plastics processing machinery, chain lubrication
systems, all kinds of special machines.

Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

1.3. Some information on the product

1.3.1 Characteristics
Designation of the lubricant pump : AB-K
Year of construction : see identification
Code No. : without reservoir 23332 - 1121
with 1 l reservoir 23332 - 2100
with 4 l reservoir 23332 - 2500
with 12 l reservoir 23332 - 2900

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 2 of 16

1.3.2 Specification
Discharge pressure : ..................................................................................................................... max. 40 bar
Gear transmission ration P1 ( lubricant ) = 7
P2 (air) 1
Residual pressure on depressurization ................................................................................................. 0.8 bar
Output volume per stroke ...................................................................................................................... 10 cm³
Max. output volume .............................................................................................................................. 7.5 cm³
Reservoir capacity .......................................................................................................................... 1 l; 4 l; 12 l
Reservoir materials ............. 1 I - PA; 4 l - GFK; 12 l - AL (lubricant pump is also available without reservoir)
Max. suction head 1000 mm ........................................................................................................... on request
Temperature range ......................................................................................................... - 20° C up to + 80° C
Usable lubricanting oils .................................................................... 30 to 2000²s-1 at operating temperature
Usable semi-fluid greases ............................................................... NLGI-class 000 at operating temperature
Main line connection ................................................................................................... female thread M 10 x 1
Contents control 1 l reservoir ............................................................................................................. optically
Contents control 4 l / 12 l reservoir ........................................................................... optically and electrically
Specification of contents control
for 4 l reservoir for 12 l reservoir
Make of contact 2 N.O.C 1 change-over switch
Switching voltage max. 48 V 250 V
Constant current max. 0.5 A 1A
Circuit breaking capacity 10 VA 60 VA

Installation position : ...................................................................................................... pump outlet horizontal

ATTENTION

In case that the metering elements ZE-D, ZE-E or ZE-G are used with liquid grease, do not use lubricant
pump before having consulted us.
The lubricant pump with 12 l reservoir has to be used in connection with progressive systems only.

1.3.3 Copyright
The copyright on this OI is kept reserved to Messrs. Firma DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH. These OI
are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain technical regulations and
drawings which must neither completely nor partically be reproduced or distributed. It is also prohibited to
use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.

1.4 Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 3 of 16

 2. SAFETY

2.1 Informative signs within the Operating Instructions

2.2 Qualification and training of staff
2.3 Dangers involved in the nonobservance of the safety instructions
2.4 Working in the consciousness of safety
2.5 Safety instructions for the user / operator
2.6 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspectional and assembly works
2.7 Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
2.8 Inadmissible modes of operation
These Operating Instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these Operating Instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the competent qualified staff/user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine/plant.
There are not only the general safety instructions mentioned under the main item SECURITY which are to be
observed, but also the safety instructions mentioned under the other main items.

2.1 Informative signs within the Operating Instructions

The safety instructions within the Operating Instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
to life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign

Safety sign according to DIN 4844-W 9

In case of warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

Safety sign according to DIN 4844-W 8

If it deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:

ATTENTION

Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
• mark for max. operating pressure
• mark for fluid connections
must by all means be observed and maintained in a completely legible condition.

2.2 Qualification and training of staff

The staff being competent for operation, maintenance, inspection and erection must have the necessary
qualification for these works. The scope of responsibility, the competence and the supervision of the staff
must be regulated by the user. If the staff does not have the necessary knowlege, it has to be trained and
instructed accordingly. This can be done, if necessary, by order of the user of the machine by the
manufacturer/supplier. Furthermore, the user has to make sure that the staff fully understands the contents
of the Operating Instruction.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 4 of 16

2.3 Dangers involved in the nonobservance of the safety instructions
The nonobservance of the safety instructions may involve an endangerment to persons as well as to the
environment and machines. The nonobservance of the safety instructions may result in a loss of any claims
for damages.
Here some examples for endangerments resulting from the nonobservance in question:
- Failure of important functions of the machine/plant
- Failure of methods prescribed for maintenance and repair
- Danger to harm persons caused by electrical, mechanical and chemical influences
- Danger to the environment by leakage of dangerous substances

2.4 Working in the consciousness of safety

The safety instructions mentioned in these Operating Instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible internal working, operating and safety regulations of the user are
to be observed.

2.5 Safety instructions for the user / operator

- If hot or cold machine parts lead to dangers, these parts, must be protected against contact by the
customer.
- Contact protections for moving parts (e.g. coupler) must not be removed while the machine is in
operation.
- Leakages (e.g. at the shaft seal) of dangerous materials to be conveyed (e.g. explosive, toxic, hot
materials) must be eliminated in such a way that no endangerment will arise for persons or for the
environment. Legal rules are to be observed.
- Endangerments by electric power are to be excluded (for details, please refer for example to the
regulations of the VDE and of the local electric supply companies).

2.6 Safety instructions for maintenance, inspectional and assembly works

The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the Operating
Instructions thoroughly.
For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine, the machine must imperatively be out of operation. The
procedure for stopping the machine described in the Operating Instructions must by all means be observed.
Pumps or pump aggregates delivering media that are injurious to health have to be decontaminated.
Immediately after termination of the works, all safety devices and protective equipments must be reinstalled
and/or put into function.
Prior to recommissioning it is essential to pay attention to the items mentioned in the paragraph
"Commissioning".

2.7 Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts

Any modification or changer to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

2.8 Inadmissible modes of operation

The operational reliability of the machine supplied is only guaranteed on condition the machine is used for its
intended purposes (please refer to GENERAL, item no. 2 "Application"). The limit values specified in the
paragraph GENERAL, item no. 3.2 "Specification" must in no case be exceeded.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 5 of 16

 3. DESIGN and PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

3.1 Pump design

3.2 Drawing with measurements
3.2.1 Pump with reservoir 1 litre
3.2.2 Pump with reservoir 4 litre
3.2.3 Pump with reservoir 12 litre
3.3 Principle of operation / Pump AB-K
3.4 Usable output volumes

3.1 Pump design

The lubricant pump AB-K with its individual components
(item nos. see point 6.1.1 pump without reservoir)
¨ Pneumatic cylinder (consisting of item no. 1 and 4)
¨ Piston rod (item no. 7)
¨ Pump body with delivery piston (consisting of item no. 11 and 15)
¨ Inlet valve (consisting of item no. 26 to 28)
¨ Relief valve with residual pressure retaining valve (consisting of item no. 18 to 25)

3.2 Drawings with measurements

3.2.1 Lubricant pump with 1 l reservoir

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 6 of 16

3.2.2 Lubricant pump with 4 l reservoir

3.2.3 Lubricant pump with 12 l reservoir

ATTENTION! Lubricant pump has to be used in connection with progressive systems

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 7 of 16

3.3 Principle of operation / lubricant pump AB-K (see point 6.1.1)
It is essential for the correct function of metering elements used with single line lubrication systems for the
main piping attached to the lubricant pump AB-K to be pressurized together with the metering elements, and
then relieved down to a residual pressure of 0.8 bar.

3.4 Usable output volumes

The total pump rating VA for a system is defined as the quantity of lubricant which the pump must discharge
to operate all the metering elements once.
This rating should not exceed 75% of the absolute delivery volume of single pumps, so aa to maintain the
necessary air capacity for pressurizing.
The rating value comprises the following factors:

VA = VV + VSch + Vst

VA = Rating
= Total rating of the system in cm³
VV = Metering volume
= Sum of all metered quantities in cm³
VSch = Hose volume
= 1 cm³ per metre of main flexible hose
VSt = Control volume
= metering element ZE-D 0.1 cm³ per outlet
metering element ZE-E and ZE-G 0 cm³ per outlet

Example:
System with lubricant pump AB-K 10 cm³, 12 metering outlets ZE-E per outlet 0.2 cm³,
5 metering outlets ZE-D per 0.4 cm³ and 2 m main flexible hose

VA max. = 75% of the lubricant volume 10 cm³ VSch = 2 m main flexible hose
of the lubricant pump AB-K = 2x1
= 10 x 75 = 2 cm³
100
= 7.5 cm³ VSt = 5 metering outlets ZE-D
= 5 x 0.1
VV = 12 metering outlets ZE-E 0.2 cm³ and = 0.5 cm³
5 metering outlets ZE-D 0.4 cm³
= 12 x 0.2 + 5 x 0.4 VA = VV + VSch + VSt
= 4.4 cm³ = 4.4 + 2 + 0.5
= 6.9 cm³ ≤ 7.5 cm³

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 8 of 16

 4. PUMP INSTALLATION

4.1 Assembly of lubricant pump AB-K

4.2 Electric connection

4.1 Assembly of lubricant pump AB-K

ATTENTION

The lubricant pump AB-K has to be installed in such a way that the lubricant pump outlet is in horizontal
position.
The lubricant pump with 1 l reservoir is fixed with 2 screws M 8, the lubricant pump with 4 l Behälter with 4
screws M 6 and the lubricant pump with 12 l reservoir with 4 screws M 8.

A central and easily accessible position of the lubricant pump AB-K at the machine or the plant has the
following advantages:
• optimal line lenghts to the friction points
• good accessibility for filling of the lubricant pump
• for an easy reassembly and assembly of pump elements

ATTENTION

When the lubricant pump is used at temperatures below 0°C, take care for sufficient air dewatering.

Consider pressure load capacity for piping material, double cone and olive screw joints.
Do not use fittings!
If a pressure control valve is provided in the pipeline to protect the lubricant pump or other elements of the
plant, it must not be set higher than the max. service pressure of the lubricant pump or of the plant's
elements.

4.2 Electric connection

The electric connection of the contents control and the 3/2-way valve for the activation of the lubricant pump
is to be made by specialists only.
The electric instructions must be observed.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 9 of 16

 5. COMMISSIONING

5.1 Filling
5.2 Deaeration
5.3 Connection of pipe lines

5.1 Filling
Fill the lubricant pump AB-K with clean lubricant.

ATTENTION

Allways fill bowl with lubricant in time.

The lubricant pump AB-K must not run without lubricant!
Always use pure lubricant for filling and avoid all kinds of contamination. Dirt particles are the most frequent
reason for failures and damages.

5.2 Deaeration
Switch on grease pump AB-K and let it run lubricant comes out of the pump outlet.

5.3 Connection of pipe lines

Do not install lubricant lines before lubricant comes out of the pump elements without air bubbles.
Before installing the pipes, clean them all throughly by tapping and blowing them through.

Check installed pressure control valves for their operating pressure.

Observe max. operating pressure of lubricant pump AB-K and component parts of the system.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 10 of 16

 6. MAINTENANCE
6.1 Spares drawings and spares lists
6.1.1 Lubricant pump without reservoir
6.1.2 Lubricant pump with 1 l reservoir
6.1.3 Lubricant pump with 4 l reservoir
6.1.4 Lubricant pump with 12 l reservoir
6.2 Assembly & disassembly / lubricant pump AB-K

6.1 Spares drawings and spares lists

6.1.1 Lubricant pump without reservoir

Item Piece Designation Code no.

- - lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, without reservoir 23332 - 1121
1 1 cylinder 62275 - 1111
2 1 hexagon nut M 12 DIN 934 74175 - 1314
3 1 spring washer 12 DIN 7980 74185 - 3064
4 1 complete piston 72184 - 1633
5 1 ring 74181 - 5121
6 1 pressure spring 71617 - 7112
7 1 piston rod 71511 - 2411
8 3 cheese-head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1144
9 3 spring washer 6 DIN 7980 74185 - 3034
10 1 flange 74354 - 5241
11 1 housing 74331 - 4191
12 1 pressure spring 71615 - 5171
13 1 cylindrical pin 8h8 x 20 DIN 7 74225 - 1174
14 1 V-ring N 24 - 16 72713 - 5393 E
15 1 piston 72125 - 1141
16 1 copper washer A 10 x 13.5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094 E
17 1 pipe plug M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
18 1 retaining ring 16 x 1 DIN 472 74186 - 1473
19 1 disk 74181 - 1681
20 1 spring 71614 - 3122
21 2 valve disk 73641 - 3391
22 2 O-ring 6 x 2 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1233 E
23 1 copper washer A 16 x 22 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1314 E
24 1 nozzle 73490 - 2971
25 1 O-ring 3.68 x 1.78 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1123 E
26 1 spring 71614 - 2112
27 1 ball 3/8 V DIN 5401 71961 - 4224
28 2 screw coupling G ¼ - Ø 10 73449 - 1413
The parts marked 'E' are recommended to be carried in stock.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 11 of 16

6.1.2 Lubricant pump with 1 l reservoir

Item Piece Designation Code no.

- - lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, with reservoir 1 litre 23332 - 2100
1 1 lid 73751 - 3912
2 2 plate screw B 2.9 x 6.5 DIN 7971 74105 - 1114
3 1 lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, withou reservoir 23332 - 1121
4 4 hexagon screw M 6 x 55 DIN 931 74101 - 2254
5 1 joist 74351 - 6211
6 1 O-ring 60 x 2 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 2333 E
7 1 reservoir 63721 - 6221
8 1 strainer 73671 - 1713 E
9 1 screw cap 73752 - 2613
The parts marked 'E' are recommended to be carried in stock.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 12 of 16

6.1.3 Lubricant pump with 4 l reservoir

Item Piece Designation Code no.

- - lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, with reservoir 4 litre 23332 - 2500
1 1 lid 73751 - 3922
2 1 seal 72731 - 4412 E
3 10 cheese-head screw M 6 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1124
4 1 strainer 73671 - 1613
5 1 screw cap 73752 - 2613
6 1 float-type switch 39161 - 4213
7 1 lock nut G 1 DIN 2950 73461 - 4354
8 1 plate 74362 - 1341
9 1 tube 73131 - 1441
10 1 copper washer A 14 x 18 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1214 E
11 1 pipe plug M 14 x 1.5 DIN 908 74106 - 1174
12 1 copper washer 72727 - 3321 E
13 1 flange 74354 - 5061
14 4 copper washer A 6 x 10 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1034 E
15 4 cheese-head screw M 6 x 25 DIN 7984 74102 - 1154
16 1 lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, without reservoir 23332 - 1121
17 3 oil sight glass with copper washer 75241 - 2413
18 3 pipe nut G ½ DIN 431 74175 - 1034
19 1 reservoir 63721 - 6241
The parts marked 'E' are recommended to be carried in stock.
23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 13 of 16
6.1.4 Lubricant pump with 12 l reservoir

ATTENTION
The lubricant pump has to be used in connection with progressive systems only

Item Piece Designation Code no.

- - lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, with 12 l reservoir 23332 - 2900
1 1 lubricant pump AB-K, pneumatic, without reservoir 23332 - 1121
2 18 cheese-head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 7984 72102 - 1144
3 4 copper washer A 6 x 10 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1034 E
4 1 seal 72727 - 3321 E
5 14 lock washer 6 DIN 7980 74185 - 3034
6 1 flange 74354 - 5191
7 1 cap 74351 - 4551
8 1 seal 72731 - 4423 E
9 1 reservoir 73721 - 6013
10 1 tube 10 x 1 DIN 2393 lenght 170 mm 73100 - 1334
11 1 pipe plug G 3/8 DIN 908 74106 - 1254
12 1 copper washer A 17 x 21 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1324 E
13 2 cheese-head screw M 4 x 6 DIN 84 74104 - 1314
14 2 copper washer A 4 x 8 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1014 E
15 1 strainer with nut 39111 - 1413
16 1 blind flange 73454 - 2221
17 4 cheese-head screw M 5 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1034
18 1 contents control 39161 - 1113
19 1 O-ring 86 x 2.5 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1793 E
The parts marked 'E' are recommended to be carried in stock.
23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 14 of 16
6.2 Assembly & disassembly of the lubricant pump AB-K (see point 6.1.1)

Disconnected electrical connection of the contents control and of the 3/2-way valve by qualified staff only.

• Remove aggregate from the machine and/or from the system

• Decompose lubricant pump from aggragate
• Loosen cylinder with the help of a belt key
• Pull complete piston with piston rof and compression spring out of the cylinder
• Loosen screws and remove flange from housing
• Pull out piston and cpmpression spring
• Remove groove ring
• Remove suction valve
• Screw off relief valve and residual pressure retaining valve
• Remove valve cup
• Remove locking ring
• Take off spring and valve cup
• Clean parts in Naphtha or petroleum ether
• Check parts for damages and replace defective parts by new ones
• Replace old seals by new ones
• Assemble lubricant pump in reverse order
• Mount lubricant pump to the machine and/or into the system

Disconnected electrical connection of the contents control and of the 3/2-way valve by qualified staff only.

• Fill lubricant pump and deaerate ir (see paragr. 5)

Dispose of old oil and grease remnants according to rule.

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 15 of 16

 7. Failures, their possible reasons and repair

Failure Possible reasons Repair

Lubricant pump does not Filling level is lower than min. value Fill up lubricant and deaerate as described
deliver lubricant under point 5

Air supply is interrupted Replace 3/2-way valve

Main line is squeezed Replace main line
Allowed oil viscosity is too low or too Change oil type
high

Lubricant pump does nit Suction or relief line with residual
produce pressure pressure retaining valve is
contaminated
Groove ring at piston is destroyed
Pneumatic piston is defective
Dismantle lubricant pump and clean it
(see point 6.2)
Exchange groove ring
Exchange pneumatic piston

Lubricant pump does not Relief valve is contaminated Dismantle lubricant pump and clean it
relieve (see point 6.2)

23332 BA 3e / 2 1095 HF/Wi Page 16 of 16


Zentralschmierpumpen ZP 150 bis ZP 950
Central lubricating pumps ZP 150 to ZP 950
1. BESCHREIBUNG
Die Zentralschmierpumpen ZP 150/.. bis ZP 950/..
werden vorwiegend in Zweileitungsanlagen für Fett als
Druckstromerzeuger eingesetzt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpen bestehen aus den Haupt-
baugruppen
l Pumpengehäuse mit Getriebe und Rührwerk
l 2 Pumpwerke
l Schmierstoffbehälter
l Getriebemotor
l Druckregelung
l Befestigungsrahmen
Der Antrieb der Zentralschmierpumpen erfolgt durch
den Getriebemotor. Dieser treibt einen Exzenter an, des-
sen Zapfen über einen Gleitstein die Kreuzschleife in eine
Hubbewegung versetzt. Die Hubbewegung ist zum Be-
treiben der Pumpenwerke erforderlich.
Eine im Getriebe vertikal gelagerte Welle wird zur Be-
tätigung des Rührwerkes genutzt. Das Rührwerk hat die
Aufgabe, den Schmierstoff im Schmierstoffbehälter zu
walken und durch ein Siebblech in die Ansaugkanäle der
Pumpwerke zu fördern. Gleichzeitig ist ein Abstreifer mit
dem Rührwerk verbunden, der durch die rotierende Be-
wegung konsistente Schmierstoffe von der Behälterwand
abstreift.
Die Pumpwerke sind an den beiden Seiten des Pum-
pengehäuses gegen überliegend angeflanscht. In diesen
befinden sich Pumpenelemente deren Kolben durch die
Kreuzschleife zwangsgeführt werden.
Durch die Hubbewegung der Kreuzschleife arbeitet
jeweils ein Kolben auf Saug- und der andere auf Druck-
hub. Die Förderung des Schmierstoffes erfolgt im Wech-
sel über die außenliegenden Rohrleitungen zur Druckre-
gelung und somit zum Anschlußstutzen für die Druck-
leitung.
Die Druckregelung wirkt als Sicherheits- und Über-
druckventil. Sie ist entsprechend des Pumpentypes ein-
stellbar und gegen unsachgemäßes Verstellen geschützt.
Bei Überschreiten des eingestellten maximalen Druckes
wird der überschüssige Schmierstoff in den Behälter zu-
rückgeführt.
Der Befestigungsrahmen nimmt die gesamte Zen-
tralschmierpumpe auf und dient zum besseren Transport
und zur Befestigung des gesamten Gerätes. Die am Be-
festigungsrahmen eingebrachten 4 Löcher Durchmesser
35 sind als Anschlagmöglichkeit bei Verwendung von He-
bezeugen vorgesehen.
System SAXONIA
1. DESCRPTION
The central lubricating pumps ZP 150/.. to ZP 950/..
are mainly used to pressure double-line systems.
The central lubricating pumps consist of the main
components
l Pump housing with gearbox and stirring
mechanism
l 2 Pump mechanisms
l Lubricant reservoir with level indicator
l Geared motor
l Pressure regulator
l Mounting frame
The drive for the central lubricating pumps comes from
the gear motor. The drive from the gear motor is converted
into a stroke-motion by use of an eccentric and a sliding
bearing with cross-slider. The stroke-motion is necessary
to drive the pumps.
A vertically mounted shaft from the gearbox drives the
stirring mechanism, wich froces the lubricant through a
sieve into the suction canals of the pump mechanisms. At
the same time, a scraper attached to the stirrer continuous-
ly cleans excess lubricant from the walls of the reservoir.
The pump mechanisms are mounted on both opposi-
te sides of the pump housing, in wich the cross-slider dri-
ves the pistons, alternately one on pressure-stroke and
one on suction-stroke.
The lubricant supply travels through the external piping
to the pressure regulator and from there to the pressure
line connections.
The pressure regulator works as a safety and relief val-
ve and can be adjusted to suit the type of pump used and is
protected against inapropriate adjustement. When the re-
lief valve opens, excess lubricant is directed back into the
lubricant reservoir.
The fixing frame holds the complete central lubricating
pump and serves as transport frame for the unit.
The four holes (diameter 35 mm) can be used for lifting
the unit.
22119 PB 1 d+e / 4 0401HF
Ersatz für 22119PB1/ 3 0500HF
 System SAXONIA

2. ABMESSUNGEN (mm) DIMENSIONS (mm)

*) Mindestplatzbedarf für Wartung und Pflege / Minimum space necessary for maintenance

Legende : Behälter Pumpengehäuse Befüllstutzen Befestigungsrahmen Getriebemotor Druckregelung Pumpwerk

Legend : Reservoir Pump housing Filling point Fixing frame Gear motor Pressure regulator Pump mechanism

3. TECHNISCHE DATEN TECHNICAL DATA

Pumpentyp Pump type ZP 150 ZP 350 ZP 630 ZP 950
Nenndruck Rated pressure bar 400 280 160 100
Betriebsdruck max. max. working pressure bar 500 350 200 125
Fördervolumen Rate of delivery cm3/min. 150 350 630 950
Behälterinhalt Capacity of reservoir l 50 oder/or 80
Temperaturbereich Temperature range oC 5 ... 50
Konsistenzkennzahl Consistency index
00 ... 3
(NLGI-Klasse DIN 51818) (NLGI class DIN 51818)
Gewicht ohne Schmierstoff Weight without lubricant kg 175
Druckleitungsanschluß RA Pressure line connection ext. dia. mm 16
Stirnrad-Getriebemotor 230/400V; 50Hz bzw.
Getriebemotor: Gear motor:
Front wheel gear motor 290/500V; 50Hz and/or
Leistung Power W 750
Drehzahl min-1 Rotational speed rpm -1 U/min. 700 / 16
Spannung 1) Voltage 1) V 230/400 AC bzw., and/or 290/500 AC
Stromaufnahme 1) Current adsorbed 1) A 3,65/2,1 bzw., and/or 2,6/1,5
Schutzart Type of protection IP 54
Inhaltskontrolle * Filling level indicator *
1) entspricht Normalausführung
1) corresponding to standard version

* bei Ausführung mit Inhaltskontrolle siehe Ultraschall-Füllstandschalter, Druckschrift-Nr.: 76951-6011-2d

* while carrying out with filling level indicator see level switch, printlet no.: 76951-6011-2e

2

3.1 SCHMIERSTOFFÜLLUNG
Pumpengehäuse 11,0 dm3
Schmieröl DIN 51512 - SAE 80 W
Getriebemotor 1,2 dm3
Schmieröl DIN 51512 - SAE 80 W
4. INBETRIEBNAHMEHINWEISE
ACHTUNG
Vor Inbetriebnahme sind das Pumpengehäuse und
der Getriebemotor mit Getriebeöl zu füllen. (siehe Ab-
schnitt 3.)
Der Elektroanschluß des Getriebemotors muß über
einen Motorschutzschalter erfolgen, wobei die vorgege-
bene Drehrichtung zu beachten ist. (Drehrichtung des
Lüfterrades des Getriebemotors im Uhrzeigersinn; Dreh-
richtung des Schaufelrades entgegen dem Uhrzeiger-
sinn)
Der elektrische Anschluß der Zentralschmierpumpe
für eine Zweileitungsanlage muß im Zusammenhang mit
dem Umsteuerorgan in der Weise erfolgen, daß mit Be-
ginn des Umsteuervorganges der Getriebemotor der
Schmierpumpe abgeschaltet und erst nach Beendigung
des Umsteuervorganges wieder eingeschaltet wird.
Das Befüllen des Schmierstoffbehälters kann manuell
oder mit Hilfe einer Befülleinrichtung erfolgen. Wesentlich
ist, daß hierbei auf Sauberkeit des einzufüllenden
Schmierstoffes geachtet wird. Es ist zu empfehlen, nach
dem Schließen des Deckels des Fettbehälters das Vor-
hängeschloß ebenfalls zu schließen, um unbefugtes Öff-
nen des Deckels zu vermeiden. Vor Anschluß der Druck-
leitung Pumpe drucklos arbeiten lassen, bis Fett am An-
schlußstutzen der Druckleitung austritt.
System SAXONIA
3.1 LUBRICANT QUANTITIES
Pump housing 11.0 dm3
lube oil DIN 51512 - SAE 80 W
Gear motor 1.2 dm3
lube oil DIN 51512 - SAE 80 W
4. COMMISSIONING
ATTENTION
Before operating, fill the pump housing and gear
motor with lubricant (see section 3.)
The lectrical connections can be made from any side
as desired, due to the swivelling connection box. The
connection must be through a motor protection switch,
observing the correct rotation (Ventilator on gear motor :
clockwise; Paddle-wheel : anti-clockwise).
The electrical connections to dual-line systems must
made so that the pump is switched off at the start of
operation of the change-over valve and is not switched
on again until completion of the change-over process.
The filling of the lubricant reservoir can occur manu-
ally or automatically with are filling pump controlled by the
level indicator and a timer. It is important that the used
lubricant is clean. It is advised to lock the lubricant reservoir
against unauthorised opening.
3
 System SAXONIA

5. BESTELLANGABEN (Beispiele) 5. ORDERING CONDITIONS (Examples)

Bezeichnung einer Zentralschmierpumpe mit einem
Fördervolumen von 150 cm³, einem Behälterinhalt von
80 dm³ und einer Spannung von 400 V AC
Zentralschmierpumpe ZP 150/80-400AC
Bestell-Nr. 22119 - 1521
Designation of a central lubrication pump with an out-
put volume of 150 cm³ and a lubricant reservoir capacity of
80 dm³ and a voltage of 400 V AC.
Central lubricating pump ZP 150/80-400 AC
Order no. 22119 - 1521

Bezeichnung einer Zentralschmierpumpe mit einem
Fördervolumen von 150 cm³, einem Behälterinhalt von
80 dm³ und einer Spannung von 500 V AC
Zentralschmierpumpe ZP 150/80-500AC
Bestell-Nr. 22119 - 1671
Designation of a central lubrication pump with an out-
put volume of 150 cm³ and a lubricant reservoir capacity of
80 dm³ and a voltage of 500 V AC.
Central lubricating pump ZP 150/80-500 AC
Order no. 22119 - 1671

Bezeichnung einer Zentralschmierpumpe mit einem
Fördervolumen von 350 cm³, mit einem Behälterinhalt von
80 dm³ und einer Spannung von 400 V AC, mit Ultra-
schall-Füllstandschalter.
Zentralschmierpumpe ZP 350 / 80 / FS - 400 AC
Bestell-Nr. 22119 - 1746
Designation of a centralized lubrication pump with an
output volume of 350 cm³, with a reservoir capacity of 80
dm³ and a tension of 400 V AC, with ultrsonic level switch.
Centralized lubrication pump ZP 350 / 80 / FS - 400 AC
Order no. 22119 - 1746

Ausführungs - Varianten Design variants

Kurzbezeichnung Behältervolumen Anschlußspannung mit mit fahrbar Bestell - Nr.
Ultraschall- Druckab-
Füllstand- schaltung
schalter
Code designation Reservoir capacity Mains voltage with with mobile Order no.
ultrasonic pressure
230 / 400 V 290 / 500 V level switch cutoff
50 kg 80 kg
AC 50 Hz AC 50 Hz
ZP 150/80 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1521
ZP 150/80 - 500 AC X X 22119 - 1671
ZP 150/80/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1511
ZP 150/80/FS - 500 AC X X X 22119 - 1731
ZP 150/80/DA - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1756
ZP 150/50 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1786
ZP 150/50/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1776
ZP 150/50/FS - 500 AC
X X X X 22119 - 1766
fahrbar
ZP 350/80 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1641
ZP 350/80 - 400 AC
X X X 22119 - 1346
fahrbar
ZP 350/80 - 500 AC X X 22119 - 1611
ZP 350/80/DA - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1356
ZP 350/80/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1746
ZP 350/50 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1316
ZP 350/50/DA - 400 AC
X X X X 22119 - 1326
fahrbar
ZP 350/50/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1336
ZP 630/80 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1651
ZP 630/80 - 500 AC X X 22119 - 1621
ZP 630/80/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1386
ZP 630/50 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1366
ZP 630/50/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1376
ZP 950/80 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1661
ZP 950/80 - 500 AC X X 22119 - 1631
ZP 950/80/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1426
ZP 950/50 - 400 AC X X 22119 - 1396
ZP 950/50/FS - 400 AC X X X 22119 - 1416

4
 System SAXONIA

ERSATZTEILLISTE SPARE PARTS LIST

Sehr geehrter Kunde, Dear customer,

an Hand dieser Ersatzteilliste ist Ihnen die Möglichkeit ge- we hope that this spare parts list will help you to achieve
geben, sich die für einen störungsfreien Betrieb notwendi- consistent and reliable results from your lubrication pumps
gen Verschleiß- und Ersatzteile zu beschaffen. and systems.

Einige Erläuterungen zu Handhabung der vorliegenden

Ersatzteilliste.
Bei der Bestellung sind folgende Angaben notwendig: When ordering spare parts, please state

n Benennung n Spare part name

n Bestellnummer n Order number
n Stückzahl n Quantity required

Die Bestellung ist an die Firma: Please address orders as follows:

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH

Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD
Am Bockwald 4 Am Bockwald 4
D – 08340 Beierfeld D – 08340 Beierfeld

zu richten.

Die Ersatzteile, welche mit einem ”X” gekennzeichnet
sind gehören zur Grundausstattung in der entsprechen-
den Zentralschmierpumpe. Die Kennzeichnung von Er-
satzteilen mit einem ”O” erfolgt nur, wenn diese im Rah-
men des Sonderzubehörs zu finden sind.
Spare parts marked with an ”X” are part of the standard
equipment for the relevant lubricating pump.
Spare parts marked with an ”O” are special purpose
accessories.

BESTELLBEISPIEL ORDERING EXAMPLES

Bestellung von zwei Exzenter: Order for two eccentrics:
__________________________ Bestell - Nr. ___________________________ Order no.
2 Stück Exzenter _________________ 71541 - 0311 2 pcs. Eccentric ________________ 71541 - 0311

Bestellung von 20 Tellerfedern für Druckregelung: Order for twenty springs for pressure regulator:
20 Stück Tellerfedern für ___________ 71661 - 2033 20 pcs. Plate spring for ____________ 71661 - 2033
Druckregelung pressure regulator

5
 System SAXONIA

Lfd. Nr. Benennung Symbol Bestell - Nr. ZP 150 ZP 350 ZP 630 ZP 950
Item Denomination Symbol Order no.

Kreuzschleife
1 71941 - 0511 X X X X
Cross-slider

Druckbolzen
2 71551 - 0711 X X X X
Pressure bolt

Platte für Kreuzschleife

3 74351 - 5931 X X X X
Plate for cross-slider

Exzenter kompl.
4 61541 - 0311 X X X X
Eccentric complete

Exzenter
5 71541 - 0311 X X X X
Eccentric

Kegelrad für Exzenter

6 71327 - 0251 X X X X
Conical gear for eccentric

Gleitstein
7 72512 - 0211 X X X X
Slider

Rührwerkwelle kompl.
8 61225 - 0211 X X X X
Stirrer shaft complete

Rührwerkswelle
9 71220 - 0241 X X X X
Stirrer shaft

Kegelrad für Rührwerkwelle

10 71327 - 0241 X X X X
Conical gear for stirrer shaft

Zylinderstift 6m 6 x 24 DIN 6325

11 74225 - 1234 X X X X
Cylinder pin 6m 6 x 24 DIN 6325

Rillenkugellager 6005 DIN 625

12 71418 - 1624 X X X X
Deep groove ball bearing 6005

Füllstandschalter min. + max. 65124 - . . . .

13 O O O O
Low level switch min. and max. 65125 - . . . .

Behälter kompl. 80 dm3

14 63721 - 0641 X X X X
Reservoir complete 80 dm3

6
 System SAXONIA

Lfd. Nr. Benennung Symbol Bestell - Nr. ZP 150 ZP 350 ZP 630 ZP 950
Item Denomination Symbol Order no.

Dichtung / Seal

für Pumpwerk
* nur für Ersatzbedarf Baujahr ≤ 01/2001
15 * 72731 - 0731 X X X X
for pump mechanism * only for repla-
cements for pumps constructed before 01/2001

für Pumpengehäuse
16 72731 - 0751 X X X X
for pump housing

für Rührwerkslager
17 72729 - 0511 X X X X
for stirrer bearing

für Behälterflansch
18 72729 - 0521 X X X X
for reservoir lange

für Motorflansch
19 72729 - 0531 X X X X
for motor flange

Pumpwerk 80 / ZP 150
20 62211 - 1066 X
Pump mechanism 80 / ZP 150

Pumpenelement 80 / III / S
mit Ventilkolben
21 62212 - 0211 X
Pump element 80 / III / S
with valve piston

22 Pumpwerk 150 / ZP 350 62211 - 1076 X

Pump mechanism 150 / ZP 350

Pumpenelement 150 / III / S

23 62212 - 0221 X
Pump element 150 / III / S

7
 System SAXONIA

Lfd. Nr. Benennung Symbol Bestell - Nr. ZP 150 ZP 350 ZP 630 ZP 950
Item Denomination Symbol Order no.

Ventil 150 / III / S

24 63611 - 0511 X X
Valve 150 / III / S

Pumpwerk 300 / ZP 630

25 62211 - 1086 X
Pump mechanism 300 / ZP 630

Pumpenelement 300 / III / S 62212 - 0241 X

26
Pump element 300 / III / S

Pumpwerk 500 / ZP 950 62211 - 1096 X

27
Pump mechanism 500 / ZP 950

Pumpenelement 500 / III / S

28 62212 - 0251 X
Pump element 500 / III / S

Ventil 500 / III / S

29 63611 - 3611 X
Valve 500 / III / S

Druckfeder für Pumpwerk

30 71616 - 6411 X X X X
Spring for pump mechanism

Dichtschnur
31 78511 - 0223 X X X X
Sealing string

Rillenkugellager DIN 625 - 6015

32 71418 - 1634 X X X X
Deep groove ball bearing

Druckscheibe
33 74181 - 0371 X X X X
Pressure washer

Bordscheibe
34 74181 - 0361 X X X X
Location washer

Nadelrolle B 2 x 17,8 G 2
35 71961 - 2534 X X X X
Needle roller DIN 5402

8
 System SAXONIA

Lfd. Nr. Benennung Symbol Bestell - Nr. ZP 150 ZP 350 ZP 630 ZP 950
Item Denomination Symbol Order no.

Druckregelung kompl.
36 62511 - 0211 X X X X
Pressure regulator complete

Tellerfeder für Druckregelung

37 71661 - 2033 X X X X
Plate spring for pressure regul.
Verschraubung CS 20 / 16 B
38 73442 - 2181 X X X X
Compression fitting CS 20 / 16 B

Siebblech
39 73671 - 0241 X X X X
Sieve plate

Getriebemotor / Gear motor

40 71111 - 4823 X X X X
ZG 3/3 DK 80G4 230/400 V 50 Hz
Getriebemotor / Gear motor
41 71111 - 4833 X X X X
ZG 3/3 DK 80G4 290/500 V 50 Hz
Verschraubung CS 16 B DIN 2353
42 73442 - 0203 X X X X
Comp. fitting CS 16 B DIN 2353
Druckmeßgerät 0 bis 600 bar
Pressure gauge 0 up to 600 bar
43 75111 - 8733 X X X X
M 20 x 1,5 10016-D
DIN 16064-165A
Wellendichtring / Rotary shaft seal
44 72712 - 0554 X X X X
A 22 x 40 x 7 NB DIN 3760
Wellendichtring / Rotary shaft seal
45 72712 - 2284 X X X X
A 75 x 100 x 10 NB DIN 3760

Dichtring / Seal ring

46 A 10 x 13,5 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1094 X X X X
47 A 12 x 17 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 2324 X X X X
48 A 16 x 20 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1274 X X X X
49 A 20 x 24 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1744 X X X X
50 A 20 x 26 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 2264 X X X X
51 A 21 x 26 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1364 X X X X
52 A 22 x 27 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1384 X X X X
53 A 24 x 29 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 0524 X X X X
54 A 28 x 33 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1963 X X X X
55 A 30 x 36 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1584 X X X x
56 A 38 x 44 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 1993 X X X X
57 A 45 x 52 Cu DIN 7603 72712 - 0514 X X X X
Dichtungssatz für ZP 150
58 69113 - 0221 X
Sealing set for ZP 150
Dichtungssatz für ZP 350
59 69113 - 0231 X
Sealing set for ZP 350
Dichtungssatz für ZP 630
60 69113 - 0241 X
Sealing set for ZP 630
Dichtungssatz für ZP 950
61 69113 - 0251 X
Sealing set for ZP 950

9
 System SAXONIA

Gilt für den Umbau von Zentralschmierpumpen ZP 150 / … bis ZP 950 / ..., die vor Januar
2001 hergestellt wurden.
Applies to the modification of centralized lubrication pumps ZP 150 /… to ZP 950 /..., which
were manufactured before January 2001.

Lfd. Nr. Benennung Symbol Bestell - Nr. ZP 150 ZP 350 ZP 630 ZP 950
Item Denomination Symbol Order no.
Umbausatz ZP 150
Pumpwerk 80 / ZP 150
62 69111 - 5656 X
Modification kit ZP 150
pump mechanism 80 / ZP 150
Umbausatz ZP 350
Pumpwerk 150 / ZP 350
63 69111 - 5666 X
Modification kit ZP 350
pump mechanism 150 / ZP 350
Umbausatz ZP 630
Pumpwerk 300 / ZP 630
64 69111 - 5676 X
Modification kit ZP 630
pump mechanism 300 / ZP 630
Umbausatz ZP 950
Pumpwerk 500 / ZP 950
65 69111 - 5686 X
Modification kit ZP 950
pump mechanism 500 / ZP 950

Anmerkung: Pro Pumpe werden 2 Umbausätze benötigt!

Note: 2 modification kits are required per pump.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

Schmierpumpe ZPA
1. Beschreibung
Die Schmierpumpe A ist eine handbetätigte Kolben
pumpe, die vorrangig in kleinen Zweileitungsanlagen
eingesetzt wird. Die Verwendung in Progressiv-
anlagen ist ebenfalls möglich.
Sie besteht im wesentlichen aus den Baugruppen
• Pumpensockel mit handbetätigter Umsteuerung
(2), Rückschlagventil (3), Druckanzeige (4) und
Füllstandsanzeige (5)
• Schmierstoffbehälter (6) mit Nachfolgekolben
Die Pumpe wird durch Betätigung des Handhebels (7)
in Betrieb gesetzt. Dabei wird durch das Herausziehen
des Förderkolbens (8) ein Unterdruck erzeugt, der
den Schmierstoff aus dem Behälter ansaugt. Der
oberhalb des Schmierstoffes im Behälter befindliche
Nachfolgekolben unterstützt diesen Vorgang.
Beim darauffolgenden Druckhub wird der angesaugte
Schmierstoff über das Rückschlagventil und ent-
sprechend der Stellung des Steuerkolbens in eine der
beiden Hauptleitungen gefördert. Gleichzeitig erfolgt
die Druckentlastung der bisher mit Druck beauf-
schlagten Hauptleitung zurück in den Behälter.
Der Handhebel muß solange betätigt werden, bis der
Anzeigestift aus der Druckanzeige austritt. Dies ist die
Gewähr dafür, daß der für die Funktion der nach-
geordneten Zumeßventile erforderliche Betriebs-druck
erreicht ist, und die Umsteuerung auf die zweite
Hauptleitung vorgenommen werden kann.
Um die zweite Hauptleitung mit Druck zu beauf-
schlagen, wird mit Hilfe des Drehgriffes der hand-
betätigten Umsteuerung, der Steuerkolben (9) um
180° bis zum Anschlag in die andere Endlage gedreht.
Danach wird der Druckaufbau in dieser Hauptleitung
wie bereits beschrieben durchgeführt.
Der Vorgang kann je nach Schmierstoffbedarf der
angeschlossenen Schmierstellen beliebig oft wieder-
holt werden. Es ist darauf zu achten, daß sich der
Steuerkolben immer in der jeweiligen Endlage be-
findet.
Als Kontrolle bei entleertem Behälter dient die Füll-
standsanzeige, die durch den Nachfolgekolben im
Schmierstoffbehälter betätigt wird. Bei einem Mindest-
füllstand entsperrt der Nachfolgekolben einen federbe-
lasteten Anzeigestift, der aus dem Pumpensockel
austritt und die Notwendigkeit der Nachfüllung an-
zeigt. Nach Befüllung des Behälters ist dieser Stift
wieder hineinzudrücken.
101 101 BA 1 / 1 9708 HF/Wi
System SAXONIA
Lubricating pump ZPA
1. Description
The lubricating pump A is an hand-operated piston-
type pump, wich is mainly used in small-size double-
line systems. It is also possible to use these pump in
progressive systems.
The pump consist of the following components
• Pump pedestal (1) with hand-operated reversing
valve (2), non-return valve (3), pressure indicator
(4) and lubricant level indicator (5)
• Lubricant reservoir (6) with succession piston.
The pump is operated by use of the hand lever (7).
This action pulls out the feed piston (8), wich draws
the lubricant out of the reservoir. The succession
piston on top of the lubricant assist this action.
The succeeding pressure stroke delivers the
lubricant, through the non-return valve and into one
of the two main lines, depending on the position of
the reversing valve in the pump pedestal. At the
same time, the previously pressurized main line
releases it's surplus lubricant back into the lubricant
reservoir.
The hand lever must be operated until the indicator-
pin of the pressure indicator is pushed out. This
ensures that the operating pressure for the metering
valves has been achieved and that the reversing to
the second main line can take place.
To pressurize the second main line, the pilot piston
(9) of the hand-operated reversing valve must be
turned 180° (the hand wheel is turned until the stop
is felt). Then the pressurization of this main line can
take place as decribed above.
The operation can be repeated as often as
necessary, depending on the required supply
quantity at the lubrication points. It must be ensured
that the reversing valve is always in the end position.
The level indicator is operted by the succession
piston. When the minimum lubricant level is reached,
the succession piston releases a spring-loaded pin
wich is pushed out of the pedestal as a visible
indication that the lubricant reservoir must be refilled.
After refilling, the pin is to be pushed by hand back
into the pedestal.
Seite/Page 1 von/of 4

1. Beschreibung (Fortsetzung)
Es ist darauf zu achten, daß der Schmierstoffbehälter
nie restlos leergepumpt wird, da ansonsten Luftein-
schlüsse die Funktion der Schmierpumpe beeinträch-
tigen können. Sollten doch durch unsachgemäße
Befüllung oder Nichtbeachten dieser Forderung Luft-
einschlüsse vorhanden sein, so können diese durch
Lösen der Entlüftungsschraube (10) mit Hilfe eines
Sechskant-Stiftschlüssels um 2 bis 3 Umdrehungen
und durch mehrmaliges Betätigen des Handhebels
leicht entfernt werden.
2. Technische Daten
Nenndruck ........................................................ 160 bar
Betriebsdruck max ........................................... 200 bar
Fördervolumen ............................................ 5 cm³/Hub
Behälterinhalt ........................................................... 3 l
Einbaulage.......................................senkrecht stehend
Erforderliche Handkraft bei Nenndruck ...............200 N
Filtrationsfeinheit............................................... 100 µm
Konsistenzkennzahl (NLGI-Klasse DIN 51818) . 00....3
Temperatureinsatzbereich.............................. 0...60 °C
Druckleitungsanschluß .................................................
.......................... Verschraubung CS 10 DIN 2353 oder
................................................ Verschraubung S 16/16
Gewicht................................................................ 14 kg
3. Schaltbild
101 101 BA 1 / 1 9708 HF/Wi
System SAXONIA
1. Description (continue)
It is important that the lubricant reservoir is never
pumped fully dry, because air pockets in the
lubricant can affect the efficiency of the pump.
Should this occur, the vent screw (10), is to be
unscrewed two to three turns and the hand lever is
to operate until no more air pockets are present. The
event screw must then be retightened.
2. Technical data
Rated pressure ............................................. 160 bar
Max. operating pressure............................... 200 bar
Rate of delivery..................................... 5 cm³/stroke
Reservoir capacity ................................................3 l
Installation position ..........................upright standing
Necessary hand force at rated pressure .........200 N
Filtering fineness .......................................... 100 µm
Consistency index (NLGI-class DIN 51818)... 00....3
Temperature range..................................... 0...60 °C
Pressure line connection
................... screwed connection CS 10 DIN 2353 or
..................................... screwed connection S 16/16
Weight ..............................................................14 kg
3. Wiring diagram
Seite/Page 2 von/of 4
 System SAXONIA

4. Abmessungen (in mm) 4. Dimensions (in mm)

1 Pumpensockel 1 Pump pedestal

2 handbetätigte Umsteuerung 2 Hand operated reversing valve
3 Rückschlagventil 3 Non-return valve
4 Druckanzeige 4 Pressure indicator
5 Füllstandanzeige 5 Lubricant level indicator
6 Schmierstoffbehälter mit Nachfolgekolben 6 Lubricant reservoir with succession piston
7 Handhebel 7 Hand lever
8 Förderkolben 8 Feed piston
9 Steuerkolben 9 Pilot piston
10 Entlüftungsschraube 10 Vent screw

101 101 BA 1 / 1 9708 HF/Wi Seite/Page 3 von/of 4


5. Inbetriebnahmehinweise
Die Schmierpumpe A ist an der dafür vorgesehenen
Stelle der Maschine zu befestigen. Danach können die
beiden Hauptleitungen angeschlossen werden.
Bei Inbetriebnahme ist der im Schmierstoffbehälter
befindliche Nachfolgekolben herauszunehmen und
eine luftblasenfreie Befüllung mit sauberem Schmier-
stoff vorzunehmen. Sollten bei der erstmaligen
Befüllung Probleme beim Ansaugen des Schmier-
stoffs auftreten, bringt eine geringe Menge höher-
viskoses Schmieröl oder ein Fett-Öl-Gemisch im
Verhältnis 2:1 Abhilfe.
Nach der Befüllung ist der Nachfolgekolben wieder
einzusetzen und der Behälterdeckel zu schließen.
6. Bestellangaben
Die Schmierpumpe A wird standardmäßig ohne
Zubehör, wie z.B. Rohrverschraubungen, Dichtringe
und Befestigungselemente geliefert. Diese sind bei
Bedarf gesondert zu bestellen.
7. Bestellbezeichnung
Schmierpumpe A.....................Bestell-Nr. 1011010000
8. Ersatzteile
Pumpensockel komplett ................ 1011010000-10000
Druckanzeige komplett ................. 1011010000-12000
Rundring 12x3 WS 1.957 ....................................50314
Innenlippenring A 10 WS 1.019 ..........................50351
101 101 BA 1 / 1 9708 HF/Wi
System SAXONIA
5. Commissioning
The lubricating pump A is to be fitted in the position
reserved for it on the machine. Then the two main
lines can be connected.
On commissioning, the succession piston is to be
removed from the lubricant reservoir, wich is then to
be filled with lubricant., ensuring that there are no air
pockets present.
To prevent problems on first use, a small quantity of
high viscosity oil or a grease-oil mixture (proportions
2:1) should be used.
After refilling, the succession piston is to be replaced
and the lubricant reservoir cover closed.
6. Ordering conditions
The lubricating pump A is delivered without
accessories (i.e. pipe connections, seal rings, fixing
screws). These must be ordered seperately.
7. Order designation
Lubricating pump A .................Order No. 1011010000
8. Spare parts
Pump pedestal complete............... 1011010000-10000
Pressure indicator complete.......... 1011010000-12000
O-ring 12x3 WS 1.957........................................ 50314
Internal lip ring A 10 WS 1.019........................... 50351
Seite/Page 4 von/of 4

Zentralschmierpumpe 3000/M
1. Beschreibung
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 3000/M in den verschieden-
en Ausführungsvarianten werden zur Direktschmierung
in Mehrleitungsanlagen (ein Förderelement pro Schmier-
stelle) oder als Förderpumpe von Schmierstoff für
Progressivanlagen eingesetzt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe besteht aus den Hauptbau-
gruppen
• Pumpwerk (1)
• Antrieb (2)
• Schmierstoffbehälter (3)
Der Antrieb der Zentralschmierpumpe 3000/M erfolgt
über einen Elektromotor mit Untersetzungsgetriebe, der
an das Gehäuse angeflanscht ist und mit der
Schneckenwelle über eine Paßfeder formschlüssig
verbunden ist.
Jeder Schmierstellenanschluß (4) besitzt einen
Förderkolben (5) und einen Steuerkolben (6). Über
den Antrieb wird die Pumpenwelle (9) mit
Kurvenscheibe (10) in Drehbewegung versetzt, dabei
wird der Förderkolben in Hubbewegung gebracht.
Das Steuerrad betätigt den Steuerkolben. Durch die
Hubbewegung der Förderkolben wird, über die
Steuerkanäle (12) der Steuerkolben, Schmierstoff
angesaugt und in die Druckbohrung (13) gefördert.
Das Streichblech (14) fördert dabei den Schmierstoff
zu den Ansaugbohrungen (15). Im
Schmierstoffbehälter befindet sich der Rührflügel
(16), der den Schmierstoff über das Siebblech (17) in
den Saugraum (18) drückt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 3000/M kann mit einem
Pumpwerk (1) mit max. 8 Schmierstellenanschlüssen
gefertigt werden. Bei Auslieferung der Erzeugnisse ist
das Fördervolumen auf den Maximalwert eingestellt.
Das Fördervolumen ist stufenlos von 0...0,2 cm³
einstellbar. Nicht benötigte Schmierstellen-
anschlüsse sind auf "Null-Fördervolumen" zu stellen
und dürfen nicht verschlossen werden. Es besteht die
Möglichkeit zwischen Schmierstoffbehältern aus
Aluminium und aus Kunststoff zu wählen. Der
Schmierstoffbehälter aus Kunststoff können auf
Wunsch mit einer elektrischen Füllstandskontrolle
ausgerüstet werden, die den minimalen Füllstand
anzeigt.
3000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF
System SAXONIA
Central Lubrication pump 3000/M
1. Description
The central lubrication pumps 3000/M in various
design versions are used for direct lubrication in
multi-line systems (one delivery element per
lubricating point) or as delivery pump for lubricant in
progressive systems.
The central lubrication pump consist of such following
main assembles as:
• Pumping unit (1)
• Drive (2)
• Lubricant reservoir (3)
Drive of central lubrication pump 3000/M is effected
by means of electromotor with step-down gearing
flanged onto the housing and linked with the worm
shaft via Woodruff key in form-fit connection.
Each feed-line connection (4) is equipped with a
delivery piston (5) and a control piston (6). A rotary
motion is imparted on the pump shaft (9) With cam
disk (10) via drive the delivery piston getting a stroke
motion. The control gear (11) is to actuate the control
piston. Due to the stroke motion of delivery pistons,
lubricant intake is effected through the control ducts
(12) of control pistons and delived into the pressure
bore (13). The scraper plate (14) is delivering the
lubricant to the suction bores (15). The stirrer blade
(16) pressing the lubricant through the sieve plate
(17) into the suction compartment (18) is arranged in
the lubricant reservoir.
The central lubrication pump 3000/M can be supplied
with 1 pumping unit (1) with a maximum of 8 feed-line
connections. Upon dispatch of pumps, the rate of
delivery has been set to maximum value.
The rate of delivery can be set infinitely from 0 to 0,2
cm³. Feed-line connections not required shall be put
to "zero rate of delivery" and should not be closed.
There is a possibility of choose between aluminium
and plastic lubricant reservoirs. The lubricant
reservoir made of plastics can be equipped upon
request with electric filling-level control indicating the
minimum filling level.
Seite/Page 1 von/of 4
 System SAXONIA

2. Schnittdarstellung 2. Sectional view

Legende Legend
Antriebsseite links (rechts) drive side LH (RH)
Zuordnung der Förderkolben zu den Assignment of delivery pistons
Schmierstellenanschlüssen to the feed-line connections

3000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 2 von/of 4

 System SAXONIA

3. Technische Daten 3. Technical data

Nenndruck ...................................................... 160 bar
Betriebsdruck max :
in Abhängigkeit von Betriebsart und Einsatzbe-
dingungen (Absprache mit Hersteller)
Fördervolumen je Auslaß .................. 0 ... 0,2 cm³/Hub
Anschlußgewinde für Schmierstellenleitung ...M12x1,5
Untersetzung 190:1 380:1
570:1 760:1 1140:1
Fördervolumen 1,43 0,72 .................cm³/min
0,48 0,36 0,24 ....cm³/min
-1
Drehzahl der Pumpenwelle ................... max. 12 min
Elektromotor ............................... DAS 56 K4 IM B14K
-1
Drehzahl ..................................................... 1360 min
Antriebsleistung ............................................. 0,12 kW
NLGI-Klasse ..................................................... 000...3
Temperatureinsatzbereich .................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Anzahl der Auslässe ........................................ max. 8
Behälterinhalt Aluminiumbehälter ................... 2 kg
Kunststoffbehälter ............... 3; 5 kg
Gewicht .................................................. 6 bzw. 13 kg
Rated pressure ............................................... 160 bar
Max. operating pressure:
in dependence on operating mode and operating
conditions (to be agreed upon with the manufacturer)
Rate of delivery per outlet ..............0 ... 0,2 cm³/stroke
Pipe connection for feed line ......................... M12x1,5
Step-down ratio 190:1 380:1
570:1 760:1 1140:1
Delivery rate 1,43 0,72..................cm³/min
0,48 0,36 0,24.....cm³/min
-1
Rated speed of pump shaft (rpm) ......... max. 12 min
Electro motor .............................. DAS 56 K4 IM B14K
-1
Rated speed ............................................... 1360 min
Motor power .................................................. 0,12 kW
NLGI-class ...................................................... 000...3
Temperature range ............................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Number of outlets ............................................. max. 8
Reservoir capacity (Aluminium) .......................... 2 kg
(Plastic) ........................... 3; 5 kg
Weight ................................................. 6 and/or 13 kg

4. Hauptabmessungen 4. Main parameters

Typ 3000/M mit Kunststoffbehälter Type 3000/M with PC reservoir

3000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 3 von/of 4

4. Inbetriebnahmehinweise
Vor der Inbetriebnahme ist der Schmierstoffbehälter
zu füllen. Die Befüllung erfolgt von Hand. Es ist
unbedingt auf Sauberkeit des einzufüllenden
Mediums zu achten.
Vor Anschluß der Schmierstellenleitungen Pumpe
drucklos arbeiten lassen, bis Schmierstoff austritt.
Die Einstellung der Fördermenge erfolgt über die
Stellschrauben (19) an den einzelnen Förderkolben.
Diese sind durch Entfernen der Staubkappe (20)
erreichbar. Die zu justierenden Stellschrauben sind
auf "Null-Förderung" herauszuschrauben und nach-
folgend bis zum Erreichen der gewünschten Förder-
menge wieder einzuschrauben. Sämtliche Stell-
schrauben sind anschließend mit der vorhandenen
Sechskantmutter (21) zu kontern. Nach Beendigung
der Einstellarbeiten ist die Staubkappe unbedingt
wieder aufzuschrauben.
Die Befestigung der Zentralschmierpumpen erfolgt
über die zwei Befestigungsbohrungen am Be-
festigungswinkel (22) mit Sechskantschrauben
M 8 x 20.
Der Anschluß der Rohrleitungen erfolgt über
Verschraubungen nach DIN 2353. Das Gewinde in
den Pumpwerken zum Anschluß der Schmierstellen-
leitungen ist M 12 x 1,5. Demzufolge können
Schmierstellenleitungen mit dem Außendurchmesser
6 oder 8 mm angeschlossen werden.
Die entsprechenden Verschraubungen, die als
Zubehör mitbestellt werden können, sind
für RA-Ø 6 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CS 6B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 1293
für RA-Ø 8 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CL 8B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 1383
5. Wartung
Die Zentralschmierpumpen 3000/M sind wartungsfrei.
6. Bestellangaben
Für die Bestellung ist der Bestellschlüssel für
Mehrleiter-Zentralschmierpumpen anzuwenden (Bei
Bedarf bitte anfordern).
3000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF
System SAXONIA
4. Hints for putting into operation
Prior to putting into operation, fill the lubricant
reservoir. Filling is effected manually. Pay particular
attention to cleanliness of medium to be filled-in.
Prior to connecting the feed lines, the pump shall work
in nonpressurized condition until lubricant is emerging
from the feed-line connections. The rate of delivery
can be adjusted by means of setscrews (19) at the
individual delivery pistons. These setscrews become
accessible after removing the dust cap (20). The
setscrews to be adjusted have to be unscrewed up to
"zero rate of delivery" and, to be screwed-in again
until reaching the rate of delivery desired. Finally, lock
all setscrews by means of hexagon nut (21) provided.
After completion of setting work, screw-on the dust
cap again.
Fastening of central lubrication pumps is ensured via
two fastening bores at the fastening angle plate (22)
by means of hexagon-head screws M 8 x 20.
The pipelines are connected via screwed connections
according to DIN 2353. The thread in the pumping
units for connecting the feed lines is
M 12 x 1.5. Feed lines having an outer diameter of 6
or 8 mm can be connected.
The respective screwed connections to be ordered as
accessories are
for outer pipe dia. 6 mm screwed connection
DIN 2353-CS 6B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 1293
for outer pipe dia. 8 mm screwed connection
DIN 2353-CL 8B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 1383
5. Maintenance
The central lubrication pumps 3000/M are
maintenance-free.
6. Ordering conditions
When placing the order with us, please apply the
order key for multi-line centralized lubrication pumps
(please ask for if required.
Seite/Page 4 von/of 4

Zentralschmierpumpe 4000/M
1. Beschreibung
Die Zentralschmierpumpen 4000/M in den verschieden-
en Ausführungsvarianten werden zur Direktschmierung
in Mehrleitungsanlagen (ein Förderelement pro Schmier-
stelle) oder als Förderpumpe von Schmierstoff für
Progressivanlagen eingesetzt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 4000/M besteht aus den
Hauptbaugruppen
• Pumpwerk (1)
• Antrieb (2)
• Schmierstoffbehälter (3).
Der Antrieb der Zentralschmierpumpe 4000/M erfolgt
über einen Elektromotor mit Untersetzungsgetriebe,
der an das Gehäuse angeflanscht ist und mit der
Schneckenwelle über eine Paßfeder formschlüssig
verbunden ist. Jeder Schmierstellenanschluß (4) be-
sitzt einen Förderkolben (5) und einen Steuerkolben
(6). Über den Antrieb wird die Pumpenwelle (9) mit
Kurvenscheibe (10) in Drehbewegung versetzt, dabei
wird der Förderkolben in Hubbewegung gebracht.
Das Steuerrad (11) betätigt den Steuerkolben. Durch
die Hubbewegung der Förderkolben wird, über die
Steuerkanäle (12) der Steuerkolben, Schmierstoff
angesaugt und in die Druckbohrung (13) gefördert.
Das Streichblech (14) fördert dabei den Schmierstoff
zu den Ansaugbohrungen (15). Im Schmierstoff-
behälter befindet sich der Rührflügel (16), der den
Schmierstoff über das Siebblech (17) in den
Saugraum (18) drückt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 4000/M kann mit einem
Pumpwerk mit max. 8 Schmierstellenanschlüssen
gefertigt werden. Bei Auslieferung der Erzeugnisse ist
das Fördervolumen auf den Maximalwert eingestellt.
Das Fördervolumen ist stufenlos von 0....0,2 cm³
einstellbar. Nicht benötigte Schmierstellenanschlüsse
sind auf "Null-Fördervolumen" zu stellen und dürfen
nicht verschlossen werden. Es besteht die Möglich-
keit zwischen Schmierstoffbehältern aus Blech und
aus Kunststoff zu wählen. Die Schmierstoffbehälter
aus Kunststoff können auf Wunsch mit einer
elektrischen Füllstandskontrolle ausgerüstet werden,
die den minimalen Füllstand anzeigt.
4000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF
System SAXONIA
Central Lubrication pump 4000/M
1. Description
The central lubrication pumps 4000/M in various
design versions are used for direct lubrication in
multi-line systems (one delivery element per
lubricating point) or as delivery pump for lubricant in
progressive systems.
The central lubrication pump 4000/M consist of such
following main assembles as:
• Pumping unit (1)
• Drive (2)
• Lubricant reservoir (3)
Drive of central lubrication pump 4000/M is effected
by means of electromotor with step-down gearing
flanged onto the housing and linked with the worm
shaft via Woodruff key in form-fit connection. Each
feed-line connection (4) is equipped with a delivery
piston (5) and a control piston (6). A rotary motion is
imparted on the pump shaft (9) With cam disk (10) via
drive the delivery piston getting a stroke motion. The
control gear (11) is to actuate the control piston. Due
to the stroke motion of delivery pistons, lubricant
intake is effected through the control ducts (12) of
control pistons and delived into the pressure bore
(13). The scraper plate (14) is delivering the lubricant
to the suction bores (15). The stirrer blade (16)
pressing the lubricant through the sieve plate (17) into
the suction compartment (18) is arranged in the
lubricant reservoir.
The central lubrication pump 4000/M can be supplied
with 1 pumping unit (1) with a maximum of 8 feed-line
connections. Upon dispatch of pumps, the rate of
delivery has been set to maximum value.
The rate of delivery can be set infinitely from 0 to 0,2
cm³. Feed-line connections not required shall be put
to "zero rate of delivery" and should not be closed.
There is a possibility of choose between sheet-metal
and plastic lubricant reservoirs. The lubricant
reservoir made of plastics can be equipped upon
request with electric filling-level control indicating the
minimum filling level.
Seite/Page 1 von/of 5
 System SAXONIA

2. Schnittdarstellung 2. Sectional view

Legende Legend
Antriebsseite links (rechts) drive side LH (RH)
Zuordnung der Förderkolben zu den Assignment of delivery pistons
Schmierstellenanschlüssen to the feed-line connections

4000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 2 von/of 5

 System SAXONIA

3. Technische Daten 3. Technical data

Nenndruck ...................................................... 160 bar
Betriebsdruck max :
in Abhängigkeit von Betriebsart und Einsatzbe-
dingungen (Absprache mit Hersteller)
Fördervolumen je Auslaß .................. 0 ... 0,2 cm³/Hub
Anschlußgewinde für Schmierstellenleitung ...M14x1,5
Untersetzung 150:1 300:1
450:1 600:1 900:1
Fördervolumen 1,81 0,91 .................cm³/min
0,6 0,45 0,3 ......cm³/min
-1
Drehzahl der Pumpenwelle ................... max. 12 min
Elektromotor ............................. K21R 63 G4 IM B14K
-1
Drehzahl ..................................................... 1360 min
Antriebsleistung ............................................. 0,18 kW
NLGI-Klasse ..................................................... 000...3
Temperatureinsatzbereich .................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Anzahl der Auslässe ........................................ max. 8
Behälterinhalt Blechbehälter ..................... 5; 10 kg
Kunststoffbehälter .............. 5; 10 kg
Gewicht .................................................. 9 bzw. 16 kg
Rated pressure ............................................... 160 bar
Max. operating pressure:
in dependence on operating mode and operating
conditions (to be agreed upon with the manufacturer)
Rate of delivery per outlet ..............0 ... 0,2 cm³/stroke
Pipe connection for feed line ......................... M14x1,5
Step-down ratio 150:1 300:1
450:1 600:1 900:1
Delivery rate 1,81 0,91..................cm³/min
0,6 0,45 0,3.......cm³/min
-1
Rated speed of pump shaft (rpm) ......... max. 12 min
Electro motor ............................ K21R 63 G4 IM B14K
-1
Rated speed ............................................... 1360 min
Motor power .................................................. 0,18 kW
NLGI-class ...................................................... 000...3
Temperature range ............................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Number of outlets ............................................. max. 8
Reservoir capacity (Sheet-metal) ................. 5; 10 kg
(Plastic) .......................... 5; 10 kg
Weight ................................................. 9 and/or 16 kg

4. Hauptabmessungen 4. Main parameters

Typ 4000/M mit Kunststoffbehälter Type 4000/M with PC reservoir

4000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 3 von/of 5
 System SAXONIA

4. Inbetriebnahmehinweise 4. Hints for putting into operation

Vor der Inbetriebnahme ist der Schmierstoffbehälter
zu füllen. Die Befüllung erfolgt von Hand. Es ist
unbedingt auf Sauberkeit des einzufüllenden
Mediums zu achten.
Vor Anschluß der Schmierstellenleitungen Pumpe
drucklos arbeiten lassen, bis Schmierstoff austritt.
Die Einstellung der Fördermenge erfolgt über die
Stellschrauben (19) an den einzelnen Förderkolben.
Diese sind durch Entfernen der Staubkappe (20)
erreichbar. Die zu justierenden Stellschrauben sind
auf "Null-Förderung" herauszuschrauben und nach-
folgend bis zum Erreichen der gewünschten Förder-
menge wieder einzuschrauben. Sämtliche Stell-
schrauben sind anschließend mit der vorhandenen
Sechskantmutter (21) zu kontern. Nach Beendigung
der Einstellarbeiten ist die Staubkappe unbedingt
wieder aufzuschrauben.
Die Befestigung der Zentralschmierpumpen erfolgt
über die zwei Befestigungsbohrungen am Be-
festigungswinkel (22) mit Sechskantschrauben
M 10 x 20.
Der Anschluß der Rohrleitungen erfolgt über Ver-
schraubungen nach DIN 2353. Das Gewinde in den
Pumpwerken zum Anschluß der Schmierstellen-
leitungen ist M 14 x 1,5.
Demzufolge können Schmierstellenleitungen mit dem
Außendurchmesser 8 oder 10 mm angeschlossen
werden.
Die entsprechenden Verschraubungen, die als
Zubehör mitbestellt werden können, sind
für RA-Ø 8 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CS 8B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 0813
für RA-Ø 10 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CL 10B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 1473
Prior to putting into operation, fill the lubricant
reservoir. Filling is effected manually. Pay particular
attention to cleanliness of medium to be filled-in.
Prior to connecting the feed lines, the pump shall work
in nonpressurized condition until lubricant is emerging
from the feed-line connections. The rate of delivery
can be adjusted by means of setscrews (19) at the
individual delivery pistons. These setscrews become
accessible after removing the dust cap (20). The
setscrews to be adjusted have to be unscrewed up to
"zero rate of delivery" and, to be screwed-in again
until reaching the rate of delivery desired. Finally, lock
all setscrews by means of hexagon nut (21) provided.
After completion of setting work, screw-on the dust
cap again.
Fastening of central lubrication pumps is ensured via
two fastening bores at the fastening angle plate (22)
by means of hexagon-head screws M 10 x 20.
The pipelines are connected via screwed connections
according to DIN 2353. The thread in the pumping
units for connecting the feed lines is
M 14 x 1.5.
Feed lines having an outer diameter of 8 or 10 mm
can be connected.
The respective screwed connections to be ordered as
accessories are
for outer pipe dia. 8 mm screwed connection
DIN 2353-CS 8B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 0813
for outer pipe dia. 10 mm screwed connection
DIN 2353-CL 10B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 1473

5. Wartung 5. Maintenance
Die Zentralschmierpumpen 4000/M sind wartungsfrei. The central lubrication pumps 4000/M are
maintenance-free.

6. Bestellangaben 6. Ordering conditions

Für die Bestellung ist der Bestellschlüssel für When placing the order with us, please apply the
Mehrleiter-Zentralschmierpumpen anzuwenden (Bei order key for multi-line centralized lubrication pumps
Bedarf bitte anfordern). (please ask for if required.

4000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 4 von/of 5

 System SAXONIA

Anschlußschaltbild für Füllstandschalter und Pumpenmotor ZP 4000/M

Connection diagram for low level switch and pump motor ZP 4000/M

Motor / motor

Die Drehrichtung des Rührflügels muß mit dem Pfeil am Behälter übereinstimmen. Eine Änderung der
Drehrichtung erfolgt durch Tausch von zwei Phasen am Klemmbrett des Motors.
The rotational direction of the agitator blade has to correspond to the arroww on the tank. A change of
the rotational direction is obtained by an exchange of two phases at the terminal board of the motor.

Füllstandschalter / low level switch

Die Betätigung des Schalters erfolgt bei Unterschreitung des Mindestfüllstandes.

The switch is actuated when the filling level falls below the min. value.

4000/M BA 1 / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 5 von/of 5


Zentralschmierpumpe 5000/M
1. Beschreibung
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 5000/M werden zur
Direktschmierung in Mehrleitungsanlagen (ein
Förderelement pro Schmierstelle) oder als Förder-
pumpe von Schmierstoff für Progressivanlagen
eingesetzt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 5000/M besteht aus den
Hauptbaugruppen
• Pumpwerk (1)
• Antrieb (2)
• Schmierstoffbehälter (3)
Der Antrieb der Zentralschmierpumpe 5000/M erfolgt
über einen Elektromotor mit Untersetzungsgetriebe,
der an das Gehäuse angeflanscht ist und mit der
Schneckenwelle über eine Scheibenfeder form-
schlüssig verbunden ist.
Jeder Schmierstellenanschluß (4) besitzt einen
Förderkolben (5) und einen Steuerkolben (6). Über
den Antrieb (2), die senkrechte Welle (7) und einem
Kegelradpaar (8) wird die Pumpenwelle (9) mit
Kurvenscheibe (10) in Drehbewegung versetzt, dabei
wird der Förderkolben (5) in Hubbewegung gebracht.
Das Steuerrad (11) betätigt den Steuerkolben (6).
Durch die Hubbewegung der Förderkolben (5) wird,
über die Steuerkanäle (12) der Steuerkolben (6),
Schmierstoff angesaugt und in die Druckbohrung (13)
gefördert. Das Streichblech (14) fördert dabei den
Schmierstoff zu den Ansaugbohrungen (15). Im
Schmierstoffbehälter (3) befindet sich der Rührflügel
(16), der den Schmierstoff über das Siebblech (17) in
den Saugraum (18) drückt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 5000/M kann mit einem
oder zwei Pumpwerken (1) (gegenüberliegend) mit
max. 8 Schmierstellenanschlüssen gefertigt werden.
Das Fördervolumen ist stufenlos von 0...0,2 cm³/Hub
einstellbar. Bei Auslieferung der Erzeugnisse ist das
Fördervolumen auf den Maximalwert eingestellt.
Nicht benötigte Schmierstellenanschlüsse sind auf
"Null-Fördervolumen" zu stellen und dürfen nicht
verschlossen werden.
Es besteht die Möglichkeit zwischen Schmierstoff-
behältern aus Blech und aus Kunststoff zu wählen.
Der Schmierstoffbehälter aus Kunststoff können auf
Wunsch mit einer elektrischen Füllstandskontrolle
ausgerüstet werden, die den minimalen Füllstand
anzeigt.
21134 BA 3 d+e / 3 0900HF
System SAXONIA
Central Lubrication pump 5000/M
1. Description
The central lubrication pumps 5000/M are used for
direct lubrication in multi-line systems (one delivery
element per lubricating point) or as delivery pump for
lubricant in progressive systems.
The central lubrication pump consist of such following
main assembles as:
• Pumping unit (1)
• Drive (2)
• Lubricant reservoir (3)
Drive of central lubrication pump 5000/M is effected
by means of electromotor with step-down gearing
flanged onto the housing and linked with the worm
shaft via Woodruff key in form-fit connection.
Each outlet (4) is equipped with a delivery piston (5)
and a control piston (6). A rotary motion is imparted
on the pump shaft (9) with cam disk (10) via drive (2),
vertical shaft (7) and bevel-gear pair (8) the delivery
piston (5) getting a stroke motion. The control gear
(11) is to actuate the control piston (6). Due to the
stroke motion of delivery pistons (5), lubricant intake
is effected through the control ducts (12) of control
pistons (6) and delived into the pressure bore (13).
The scraper plate (14) is delivering the lubricant to
the suction bores (15). The stirrer blade (16) pressing
the lubricant through the sieve plate (17) into the
suction compartment (18) is arranged in the lubricant
reservoir (3).
The central lubrication pump 5000/M can be supplied
with 1 or 2 pumping units (1) installed opposite to
each other with a maximum of 8 outlets each. The
rate of delivery can be set infinitely from 0...0,2
cm³/stroke. Upon dispatch of pumps, the rate of
delivery has been set to maximum value.
Outlets not required shall be out to "zero rate of
delivery" and should not be closed.
There is a possibility of choose between sheet-metal
and plastic lubricant reservoirs. The lubricant
reservoir made of plastics can be equipped upon
request with electric filling-level control indicating the
minimum filling level.
Seite/Page 1 von/of 5
 System SAXONIA

2. Schnittdarstellung2. 2. Sectional view

Zuordnung der Förderkolben zu den Schmierstellenanschlüssen

Assignment of delivery pistons to the feed-line connections

Legende Legend
Schmierstellenanschluß Outlet (feed-line connection)
Stellschraube Setscrew

21134 BA 3 d+e / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 2 von/of 5

 System SAXONIA

3. Technische Daten 3. Technical data

Nenndruck ..................................................... 160 bar
Betriebsdruck max :
in Abhängigkeit von Betriebsart und Einsatzbe-
dingungen (Absprache mit Hersteller)
Fördervolumen je Auslaß .................. 0 ... 0,2 cm³/Hub
Anschlußgewinde für Schmierstellenleitung ...M14x1,5
Untersetzung 150:1 300:1
450:1 600:1 900:1
Fördervolumen 1,81 0,91 .................cm³/min
0,6 0,45 0,3 ......cm³/min
-1
Drehzahl der Pumpenwelle ................... max. 12 min
Elektromotor ............................. K21R 63 G4 IM B14K
-1
Drehzahl ..................................................... 1360 min
Antriebsleistung ............................................. 0,18 kW
NLGI-Klasse ..................................................... 000...3
Temperatureinsatzbereich .................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Anzahl der Auslässe ...................................... max. 16
Behälterinhalt Blechbehälter ............... 5; 10; 20 kg
Kunststoffbehälter ........ 5; 10; 20 kg
Gewicht mit einem Pumpwerk .............. 21 kg
mit zwei Pumpwerken ............. 24 kg
Rated pressure .............................................. 160 bar
Max. operating pressure:
in dependence on operating mode and operating
conditions (to be agreed upon with the manufacturer)
Rate of delivery per outlet ..............0 ... 0,2 cm³/stroke
Pipe connection for feed line ......................... M14x1,5
Step-down ratio 150:1 300:1
450:1 600:1 900:1
Delivery rate 1,81 0,91..................cm³/min
0,6 0,45 0,3.......cm³/min
-1
Rated speed of pump shaft (rpm) ......... max. 12 min
Electro motor ............................ K21R 63 G4 IM B14K
-1
Rated speed ............................................... 1360 min
Motor power .................................................. 0,18 kW
NLGI-class ...................................................... 000...3
Temperature range ............................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Number of outlets ........................................... max. 16
Reservoir capacity (Sheet-metal) ........... 5; 10; 20 kg
(Plastic) .................... 5; 10; 20 kg
Weight with 1 pump unit ...................... 21 kg
with 2 pump units .................... 24 kg

4. Hauptabmessungen . 4. Main parameters

Typ 5000/M mit Kunststoffbehälter Type 5000/M with PC reservoir

21134 BA 3 d+e / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 3 von/of 5

 System SAXONIA

4. Inbetriebnahmehinweise 4. Hints for putting into operation

Vor der Inbetriebnahme ist der Schmierstoffbehälter
zu füllen. Die Befüllung kann von Hand bzw. mit Hilfe
einer Befüllpumpe erfolgen. Ein Befüllanschluß am
Pumpengehäuse ist serienmäßig nicht vorhanden,
kann aber auf Wunsch angebracht werden. Es ist
unbedingt auf Sauberkeit des einzufüllenden
Mediums zu achten.
Vor Anschluß der Schmierstellenleitungen muß die
Pumpe drucklos arbeiten, bis Schmierstoff austritt.
Die Einstellung der Fördermenge erfolgt über die
Stellschrauben (19) an den einzelnen Förderkolben.
Diese sind durch Entfernen der Staubkappe (20)
erreichbar. Die zu justierenden Stellschrauben sind
auf "Null-Förderung" herauszuschrauben und nach-
folgend bis zum Erreichen der gewünschten Förder-
menge wieder einzuschrauben. Sämtliche Stell-
schrauben sind anschließend mit der vorhandenen
Sechskantmutter (21) zu kontern. Nach Beendigung
der Einstellarbeiten ist die Staubkappe unbedingt
wieder auzuschrauben.
Die Befestigung der Zentralschmierpumpen erfolgt
über die vier Befestigungsbohrungen am Gehäuse.
Der Anschluß der Rohrleitungen erfolgt über
Verschraubungen nach DIN 2353. Das Gewinde in
den Pumpwerken zum Anschluß der Schmierstellen-
leitungen ist M 14 x 1,5.
Es können Schmierstellenleitungen mit dem
Außendurchmesser 8 oder 10 mm angeschlossen
werden.
Die entsprechenden Verschraubungen, die als
Zubehör mitbestellt werden können, sind
für RA-Ø 8 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CS 8B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 0813
für RA-Ø 10 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CL 10B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 1473
Prior to putting into operation, fill the lubricant
reservoir. Filling can be effected manually or be
means of a filler pump. A filler pump connection at the
pump housing can be attached upon request. Pay
particular attention to cleanliness of medium to be
filled-in.
Prior to connecting the feed lines, the pump shall
work in nonpressurized condition until lubricant is
emerging from the outlets. The rate of delivery can be
adjusted by means of setscrews (19) at the individual
delivery pistons. These setscrews become accessible
after removing the dust cap (20). The setscrews to be
adjusted have to be unscrewed up to "zero rate of
delivery" and, then, to be screwed-in again until
reaching the rate of delivery desired. Finally, lock all
setscrews by means of hexagon nut (21) provided.
After completion of setting work, screw-on the dust
cap again.
Fastening of central lubrication pumps is ensured via
four fastening bores at the housing
The pipelines are connected via screwed fittings
according to DIN 2353. The thread in the pumping
units for connecting the feed lines is
M 14 x 1.5.
Feed lines having an outer diameter of 8 or 10 mm
can be connected.
The respective screwed connections to be ordered as
accessories are
for outer pipe dia. 8 mm screwed fitting
DIN 2353-CS 8B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 0813
for outer pipe dia. 10 mm screwed fitting
DIN 2353-CL 10B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 1473

5. Wartung 5. Maintenance
Die Zentralschmierpumpen 5000/M sind wartungsfrei. The central lubrication pumps 5000/M are
maintenance-free.

6. Bestellangaben 6. Ordering conditions

Für die Bestellung ist der Bestellschlüssel für When placing the order with us, please apply the
Mehrleiter-Zentralschmierpumpen anzuwenden (Bei order key for multi-line centralized lubrication pumps
Bedarf bitte anfordern). (please ask for if required.

7. Ersatzteile 7. Spare Parts

Pumpwerk ZP 5000 komplett Pump unit ZP 5000 complete
(je nach Pumpenausführung) (depending on pump type)
Rundring 110 x 3 .................... Bestell-Nr. 72711-3473 O-ring 110 x 3 .......................... Order no. 72711-3473

21134 BA 3 d+e / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 4 von/of 5

 System SAXONIA

21134 BA 3 d+e / 3 0900HF Seite/Page 5 von/of 5


Zentralschmierpumpe 6000/M
1. Beschreibung
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 6000/M werden zur
Direktschmierung in Mehrleitungsanlagen (ein
Förderelement pro Schmierstelle) oder als Förder-
pumpe von Schmierstoff für Progressivanlagen
eingesetzt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 6000/M besteht aus den
Hauptbaugruppen
• Pumpwerk (1)
• Antrieb (2)
• Schmierstoffbehälter (3)
Der Antrieb der Zentralschmierpumpe 6000/M erfolgt
über einen Elektromotor mit Untersetzungsgetriebe,
der an das Gehäuse angeflanscht ist und mit der
Schneckenwelle über eine Scheibenfeder form-
schlüssig verbunden ist.
Jeder Schmierstellenanschluß (4) besitzt einen
Förderkolben (5) und einen Steuerkolben (6). Über
den Antrieb (2), die senkrechte Welle (7) und einem
Kegelradpaar (8) wird die Pumpenwelle (9) mit
Kurvenscheibe (10) in Drehbewegung versetzt, dabei
wird der Förderkolben (5) in Hubbewegung gebracht.
Das Steuerrad (11) betätigt den Steuerkolben (6).
Durch die Hubbewegung der Förderkolben (5) wird,
über die Steuerkanäle (12) der Steuerkolben (6),
Schmierstoff angesaugt und in die Druckbohrung (13)
gefördert. Das Streichblech (14) fördert dabei den
Schmierstoff zu den Ansaugbohrungen (15). Im
Schmierstoffbehälter (3) befindet sich der Rührflügel
(16), der den Schmierstoff über das Siebblech (17) in
den Saugraum (18) drückt.
Die Zentralschmierpumpe 6000/M kann mit einem
oder zwei Pumpwerken (1) (gegenüberliegend) mit
max. 16 Schmierstellenanschlüssen gefertigt werden.
Das Fördervolumen ist stufenlos von 0...0,2 cm³/Hub
einstellbar. Bei Auslieferung der Erzeugnisse ist das
Fördervolumen auf den Maximalwert eingestellt.
Nicht benötigte Schmierstellenanschlüsse sind auf
"Null-Fördervolumen" zu stellen und dürfen nicht
verschlossen werden.
6000/M BA 1 / 4 0301HF
System SAXONIA
Central Lubrication pump 6000/M
1. Description
The central lubrication pumps 6000/M are used for
direct lubrication in multi-line systems (one delivery
element per lubricating point) or as delivery pump for
lubricant in progressive systems.
The central lubrication pump consist of such following
main assembles as:
• Pumping unit (1)
• Drive (2)
• Lubricant reservoir (3)
Drive of central lubrication pump 6000/M is effected
by means of electromotor with step-down gearing
flanged onto the housing and linked with the worm
shaft via Woodruff key in form-fit connection.
Each feed-line connection (4) is equipped with a
delivery piston (5) and a control piston (6). A rotary
motion is imparted on the pump shaft (9) with cam
disk (10) via drive (2), vertical shaft (7) and bevel-
gear pair (8) the delivery piston (5) getting a stroke
motion. The control gear (11) is to actuate the control
piston (6). Due to the stroke motion of delivery
pistons (5), lubricant intake is effected through the
control ducts (12) of control pistons (6) and delived
into the pressure bore (13). The scraper plate (14) is
delivering the lubricant to the suction bores (15). The
stirrer blade (16) pressing the lubricant through the
sieve plate (17) into the suction compartment (18) is
arranged in the lubricant reservoir (3).
The central lubrication pump 6000/M can be supplied
with 1 or 2 pumping units (1) installed opposite to
each other with a maximum of 16 feed-line
connections. The rate of delivery can be set infinitely
from 0...0,2 cm³/stroke. Upon dispatch of pumps, the
rate of delivery has been set to maximum value.
Feed-line connections not required shall be out to
"zero rate of delivery" and should not be closed.
Seite/Page 1 von/of 4
 System SAXONIA

2. Schnittdarstellung 2. Sectional view

Zuordnung der Förderkolben zu den Schmierstellenanschlüssen

Assignment of delivery pistons to the feed-line connections

Legende Legend
Schmierstellenanschluß Outlet (Feed-line connection)
Stellschraube Setscrew

6000/M BA 1 / 4 0301HF Seite/Page 2 von/of 4

 System SAXONIA

3. Technische Daten 3. Technical data

Nenndruck ...................................................... 160 bar
Betriebsdruck max :
in Abhängigkeit von Betriebsart und Einsatzbe-
dingungen (Absprache mit Hersteller)
Fördervolumen je Auslaß .................. 0 ... 0,2 cm³/Hub
Anschlußgewinde für Schmierstellenleitung ...M14x1,5
Untersetzung 150:1 300:1
420: 1 600:1 840:1
Fördervolumen 1,69 0,84 .................cm³/min
0,60 0,42 0,30 ....cm³/min
-1
Drehzahl der Pumpenwelle ................... max. 12 min
Elektromotor ............................. K21R 71 G4 IM B14K
-1
Drehzahl ..................................................... 1360 min
Antriebsleistung ............................................. 0,37 kW
NLGI-Klasse ..................................................... 000...3
Temperatureinsatzbereich .................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Anzahl der Auslässe ...................................... max. 32
Behälterinhalt Blechbehälter ............. 10; 20; 30 kg
Gewicht mit einem Pumpwerk .............. 40 kg
mit zwei Pumpwerken ............. 50 kg
Rated pressure ............................................... 160 bar
Max. operating pressure:
in dependence on operating mode and operating
conditions (to be agreed upon with the manufacturer)
Rate of delivery per outlet ..............0 ... 0,2 cm³/stroke
Pipe connection for feed line ......................... M14x1,5
Step-down ratio 150:1 300:1
420: 1 600:1 840:1
Delivery rate 1,69 0,84..................cm³/min
0,60 0,42 0,30.....cm³/min
-1
Rated speed of pump shaft (rpm) ......... max. 12 min
Electro motor ............................ K21R 71 G4 IM B14K
-1
Rated speed ............................................... 1360 min
Motor power .................................................. 0,37 kW
NLGI-class ...................................................... 000...3
Temperature range ............................. - 30 bis + 60°C
Number of outlets ........................................... max. 32
Reservoir capacity (Sheet-metal) ......... 10; 20; 30 kg
Weight with 1 pump unit ...................... 40 kg
with 2 pump units .................... 50 kg

4. Hauptabmessungen............................................. 4. Main parameters

Typ 6000/M mit Blechbehälter Type 6000/M with sheet-metal reservoir

6000/M BA 1 / 4 0301HF Seite/Page 3 von/of 4


4. Inbetriebnahmehinweise
Vor der Inbetriebnahme ist der Schmierstoffbehälter
zu füllen. Die Befüllung kann von Hand bzw. mit Hilfe
einer Befüllpumpe erfolgen. Ein Befüllanschluß am
Pumpengehäuse ist serienmäßig nicht vorhanden,
kann aber auf Wunsch angebracht werden. Es ist
unbedingt auf Sauberkeit des einzufüllenden
Mediums zu achten.
Vor Anschluß der Schmierstellenleitungen muß die
Pumpe drucklos arbeiten, bis Schmierstoff austritt.
Die Einstellung der Fördermenge erfolgt über die
Stellschrauben (19) an den einzelnen Förderkolben.
Diese sind durch Entfernen der Staubkappe (20)
erreichbar. Die zu justierenden Stellschrauben sind
auf "Null-Förderung" herauszuschrauben und nach-
folgend bis zum Erreichen der gewünschten Förder-
menge wieder einzuschrauben. Sämtliche Stell-
schrauben sind anschließend mit der vorhandenen
Sechskantmutter (21) zu kontern. Nach Beendigung
der Einstellarbeiten ist die Staubkappe unbedingt
wieder auzuschrauben.
Die Befestigung der Zentralschmierpumpen erfolgt
über die vier Befestigungsbohrungen am Gehäuse.
Der Anschluß der Rohrleitungen erfolgt über
Verschraubungen nach DIN 2353. Das Gewinde in
den Pumpwerken zum Anschluß der Schmierstellen-
leitungen ist M 14 x 1,5.
Es können Schmierstellenleitungen mit dem
Außendurchmesser 8 oder 10 mm angeschlossen
werden.
Die entsprechenden Verschraubungen, die als
Zubehör mitbestellt werden können, sind
für RA-Ø 8 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CS 8B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 0813
für RA-Ø 10 mm Verschraubung
DIN 2353-CL 10B-St-verzinkt
Bestell-Nr. 73442 – 1473
5. Wartung
Die Zentralschmierpumpen 6000/M sind wartungsfrei.
6. Bestellangaben
Für die Bestellung ist der Bestellschlüssel für
Mehrleiter-Zentralschmierpumpen anzuwenden (Bei
Bedarf bitte anfordern).
6000/M BA 1 / 4 0301HF
System SAXONIA
4. Hints for putting into operation
Prior to putting into operation, fill the lubricant
reservoir. Filling can be effected manually or be
meeans of a filler pump. A filler pump connection at
the pump housing can be attached upon request. Pay
particular attention to cleanliness of medium to be
filled-in.
Prior to connecting the feed lines, the pump shall
work in nonpressurized condition until lubricant is
emerging from the feed-line connections. The rate of
delivery can be adjusted by means of setscrews (19)
at the individual delivery pistons. These setscrews
become accessible after removing the dust cap (20).
The setscrews to be adjusted have to be unscrewed
up to "zero rate of delivery" and, then, to be screwed-
in again until reaching the rate of delivery desired.
Finally, lock all setscrews by means of hexagon nut
(21) provided. After completion of setting work,
screw-on the dust cap again.
Fastening of central lubrication pumps is ensured via
four fastening bores at the housing
The pipelines are connected via screwed fittings
according to DIN 2353. The thread in the pumping
units for connecting the feed lines is
M 14 x 1.5.
Feed lines having an outer diameter of 8 or 10 mm
can be connected.
The respective screwed connections to be ordered as
accessories are
for outer pipe dia. 8 mm screwed connection
DIN 2353-CS 8B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 0813
for outer pipe dia. 10 mm screwed connection
DIN 2353-CL 10B-St-galv.
order-no. 73442 – 1473
5. Maintenance
The central lubrication pumps 6000/M are
maintenance-free.
6. Ordering conditions
When placing the order with us, please apply the
order key for multi-line centralized lubrication pumps
(please ask for if required.
Seite/Page 4 von/of 4
11
 Lubrication System for moving lubrication points
WS - E and WS - P

The quick driplet . . . . .

. . . safely hits - within a fraction of a second - the

WS - E, our quickest unit with full electric operations:
passing lubrication points of:
max. cycling: ___________________________ 5 Hz
• Roller chains
• Link chains max. duration of a shot
• Kardan chains of 10 mm3: ____________________ approx. 1/100 sec.
• Casters
• Guide rollers Trigger: _____________ electronic proximity switch
• Hook swirels
• Hinges
etc.

WS - P, with fully pneumatic or electr.-pneumatic

operation:
in:
max. cycling: ___________________________ 1 Hz
• Escalator
• Bucked elevators max. duration of a shot
of 10 mm3: ____________________ approx. 1/50
• Conveyors sec.

• Plate belts Trigger: ____________________ mechanic valve or

• Hinged belts ____________________ electronic proximity switch
• Ovens
etc. Connection of cleaning nozzles is possible

X 20 P 3 e / 2 0201HF
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Centralized Lubrication System WS - P
for moving lube points

APPLICATIONS
The WS-P trolley lubricator for all types of moving lubri-
cation points such as roller chains, links, hinged joints,
guide rolls and casters, etc. It is also adapted to sprinkle
the parts on a time-controlled assembly line with oil (e.g.
engine bearings prior to the assembly of the crank shaft).
The operation is safe and very quick. This pneumati-
cally-operated system is especially suitable wherever fla-
me-proof design is a precondition.

LAYOUT
The system, in princiole, consists of: Fig. 1 WS-P schematic layout with mechanic/pneumatic
1. air-operated oil lubricator TA-D control
2. pipe lines
3. ZE-E-type metering elements
4. pneumatic control (vide section "control")

CONTROL
It is the very moving lube points which control the com-
pressed air system to operate. This is done as follows:
1. either mechanically via a 3/2-way valve by actuating
a lever,
or
2. electrically, thanks to a proximity switch influenced
by metal parts, thus energizing a 3/2-way solenoid
Fig. 2 WS-P schematic layout with electric/pneumatic
valve. control
Optionally, the unit can be supplied with an electric
control system with preset operation and interval times.

TECHNICAL DATA
Max. air pressure : ........................................................ 4 bar
Pump reservoir capacity : .................................. 1.6 l and 4 l
Air consumption Qn/stroke (with 2.5 bar) : .................... 0,5 l
Max. frequency : ........................................................ 1 sec-1
Greasing oils between 40 ... 550 mm2s-1 at operation
temperature can be used
FUNCTION
When energizing the 3/2-way valve either mechanically
or electrically compressed air is delivered into the operation
plunger of the TA-D lubricator thus pressurizing with a dyna-
mic shock the "teed-in" pressure line to the metering ele-
ments. This pressure shock wave is sufficient enough to
operte the ZE-E's discharging a metered quantity of oil with
high speed through the nozzles. As soon as the metal part,
usually a chain link, is leaving the field influenced by the lever
valve or the proximity switch respectively, the operation plun-
ger of the TA-D pump is depressurized thus allowing to make
the suction stroke. At the end of the suction stroke the main
feed line is relieved via the y-connection of the pump, where-
by the pressure relief valve provided keeps a residual pres-
sure of 0.5 to 1 bar in the main line. This allows the metering
elements ZE-E to be recharged for the next cycle to come.

21153 P 3 e / 2 0201HF
 CODE NOS. AND DIMENSIONS (mm)

Code nos. for pumps

Item Denomination Code no.
-- Oil lubricator type TA - D 21153 - 9000
consisting of the following components:
Reservoir 1.6 l oil 63721 - 1811
1
Reservoir 4 l oil 63721 - 1821
2 Pump body 62871 - 1221
Loose components group (L-group)
Number of outlet
3
open closed
x and y 1 to 9 69112 - 1521

Metering element for pipe Ø 4

Output volume mm3/cycle Code no.
10 35691 - 1111
Nozzle, code no. 73654 - 2141

Oil lubricator TA-D

ATTENTION:
When using plastic tubes it is recommended to have
sleeves for reinforcement.
Reinforcement sleeves for pipe Ø 6 mm,
code no. 73511 - 4123

Manifolds with outlets arranged unilaterally

No. of Dimensions (mm) Code no. Metering element
outlets
l a b
2x1 57 1 x 18 -- 63662 - 3121
3x1 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 3131
4x1 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 3141
5x1 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 3151
Nozzle
6x1 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 3161
7x1 165 7 x 18 108 63662 - 3171
8x1 165 7 x 18 108 63662 - 3181
9x1 201 9 x 18 144 63662 - 3191
10 x 1 201 9 x 18 144 63662 - 3211
11 x 1 237 11 x 18 180 63662 - 3221
12 x 1 237 11 x 18 180 63662 - 3231

Manifold with 2 to 12 outlets

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Übertragungsgerät KS-A
Die Schienen und Laufräder von Kränen unterliegen
durch betriebsbedingte Seitendrücke während der
Kranfahrt erheblichen Abnutzungen.
DELIMON-Kranschienenschmierung
• beseitigt trockene Reibung an Schienenflanken
und Spurkränzen
• verhindert vorzeitigen Verschleiß der Reibungs-
flächen
• verlängert die Lebensdauer von Rad und Schiene
• erspart hohe Kosten für Reparaturen und
Betriebsausfall des Krans
Bild / Figure 1
Bestelltext: 2 Übertragungsgeräte KS - A
Bestell-Nr. 25414 - 2111
Die Schmieranlage besteht aus den Übertragungs-
geräten KS-A (pro Schiene 1 Gerät) und einer Fett-
schmierpumpe FZ-A.
Für die Bestellung der Pumpe bitte Druckschrift
21112 P 1 / Betriebsanleitung 21112 BA 1 anfordern.
Seite/Page 1 von/of 4
Transfer unit KS-A
The rails and truck wheels of cranes are subject to
considerable wear and tear during crane travel
because of side thrusts determined by the service
conditions.
The DELIMON crane rail lubrication
• Removes dry friction at rail sides and wheel
flanges
• Prevents early wear and tear of the friction
surfaces
• Prolongs the service life of wheel and rail
• Saves great expenses caused by repairs and
breakdown of the crane
Wording of order: 2 Transfer units KS - A
Order no. 25414 - 2111
The lubrication system consists of the transfer units
KS-A (1 unit per rail) and a grease lubrication pump
type FZ-A.
Please request brochure 21112 P 1 e / operating
instructions 21112 BA 1 e for the pump.
25414 PB 1 / 3 0900HF
Wirkungsweise (Bild 2)
Die Fettschmierpumpe FZ-A wird entweder über
Exzenter und Pendelhebel zwangsläufig vom Fahr-
werk der Kranfahrwerkswell angetrieben oder als
Aggregat mit Motorantrieb jedesmal dann einge-
schaltet, wenn das Kranfahrwerk betätigt wird. Das
von der Pumpe geförderte Fett wird über Rohrl-
leitungen den Spindeln (2) des Übertragungsgerätes
zugeführt. Von dort gelangt es in die Übertragungs-
scheiben (3) aus Kunststoff, die das Fett beim Ab-
rollen der Scheiben auf den Schienenflanken als
gleichmäßig dünnen Film abgeben. Die Lage des
Fettfilm auf den Schienenflanken ist durch die Spindel
(3) einstellbar. Eine Zugfeder (1) verhindert, daß sich
die Scheiben von den Schienenflanken abheben.
Jede Verschiebung des Fahrwerks gegen-über den
Schienen wird von den Pendelarmen (4)
aufgenommen. Durch diese Ausgleichseinrichtung ist
die Verwendung des Gerätes für jede Kran- und
Schienengröße möglich.
Der Fettverbrauch beträgt pro Übertragungsgerät und
Stunde Laufzeit ca. 8 Gramm.
Bild 2 Einbaumaße
Seite/Page 2 von/of 4
Mode of operation (Figure 2)
The grease lubrication pump FZ-A is either driven
nonslip by the traversing gear shaft of the crane via
eccenter and swinging lever of if it a unit with motor-
drive, it is switched-on each time the traversing gear
of the crane is operated. The grease delivered by the
pump is fed the spindles (2) of the transfer unit via
pipelines. From there it flows to the transfer discs (3)
which are made of synthetic material; they deposit
the grease as an equally thin film when the discs are
rolling slong the sides of the rails. The locality of the
grease-film at the sides of the rails can be adjusted
by the spindles (2). A draw-spring (1) prevents the
lifting-off of the discs from the sides of the rails. Each
shifting of the traversing gear against the rails is
taken up by the swinging-levers (4). Because of this
balancing equipment it is possible to usw the unit for
any size of crane or rail.
The grease consumption per transper unit and hour
of operation is approx. 8 grams.
Figure 2 Mounting dimensions
25414 PB 1 / 3 0900HF
Einbau (Bild 3)
Die Befestigungsplatte des Übertragungsgerätes (2)
wird am Fahrwerksrahmen unterhalb des Puffers
über Schienenmitte angebracht. Die Schmirpumpe
(1) wird etwa auf Kranmitte neben der Fahrwerks-
welle (3) aufgestellt. Falls der Pumpenantrieb über
Exzenter und Pendelhebel erfolgen soll und die
Antriebsteile mit der Pumpe geliefert werden sollen,
sind in der Bestellung Durchmesser und Drehzahl der
Kranfahrwerkswelle anzugeben.
Bedarfsweise werden auch Rohre, Schläuche, Rohr-
verschraubungen und -Befestigungsteile mitgeliefert.
Bemerkung:
Von der Schmierpumpe FZ-A können bedarfsweise
auch andere Reibstellen am Kranfahr-werk mit
Schmierstoff versorgt werden. Bitte Zahl der
Schmierstellen und Schmierstoffbedarf bei der
Bestellung angeben.
Bild 3
Anordnung der Kranschienenschmierung
Seite/Page 3 von/of 4
Mounting (Figure 3)
The mounting plate of the transfer unit (2) is fixed to
the traversing gear frame, below the buffer, approx.
above the center of the rail. The grease pump (1) is
mounted aproximately in the center of the crane,
next to the traversing gear shaft (3). Should the
pump drive be effected by cam and swinging lever
and should the drive parts be supplied together with
the pump, diameter and speed of the traversing gear
shaft must be stated in the order.
If so required, pipes, hoses, fittings and fasteners
are supplied with the unit.
N.B.:
If required, other friction points at the traversing gear
can be supplied with grease by the grease pump FZ-
A. Please state number of grease points and grease
volume required when ordering.
Figure 3
Arrangement of crane rail lubrication
25414 PB 1 / 3 0900HF
Schema einer kombinierten Schmieranlage für die Diagram of a combined lubrication system for the two
beiden Kranschienen und für die 14 Lagerstellen crane-rails and for the 14 bearings (friction points) of
(Reibstellen) der Längsfahrt sowie die 12 Lagerstellen the longitudinal travel and the 12 bearings of the
der Katze eines Kranes trolley of a crane

Pos. Stück Benennung Designation Bestell-Nr.

Item pcs. Order-No.
1 1 Fettschmierpumpe FZ-A mit Schwinghebel- Grease lubrication pump FZ-A with oscillating 21112 - . . . .
antrieb, Übersetzung 3:1, 8 Auslässe lever drive, ratio 3:1, 8 feed-ports
2 2 Progressiv-Verteiler E4 mit 4 Auslässen Progressive distributor E4 with 4 outlets 35512 - 5111
3 2 Progressiv-Verteiler E4 mit 3 Auslässen Progressive distributor E4 with 3 outlets 35512-5111 / 63421-4411
4 2 Kranschienenschmiergerät KS-A Crane rail lubricating unit KS-A 25414 - 2111
5 1 Fettschmierpumpe FZ-A mit Schwinghebel- Grease lubrication pump FZ-A with oscillating
antrieb, Behälter 10 l, Übersetzung 3:1, lever drive, reservoir 10 l, ratio 3:1, 21112 - . . . .
12 Auslässe 12 feed-ports
6 80 m geschw. Präzisionsstahlroht Ø 8x1 Welded precision steel pipe Ø 8x1 73100 - 1144
7 4m Nylonrohr Ø 8x1,5 Nylon-tube Ø 8x1.5 73100 - 2144
8 26 gerade Verschraubung 8 mm Straight joints 8 mm 73442 - 2314
9 32 gerade Einschraubverschraubung R ¼“, Ø 8 Straight screw-joint R ¼“, Ø 8 73442 - 1324

Seite/Page 4 von/of 4 25414 PB 1 / 3 0900HF

Zentralschmiersystem WS-E für wandernde Schmierstellen
Central lubrication system WS-E for moving lubrication points

ANWENDUNG APPLICATION
Das Zentralschmiersystem WS - E wird zur auto- The central lubrication system WS - E is used for
matischen und dosierten Schmierung von Ketten, automatic and metered lubrication of chains, joints,
Gelenken, Rollen, Scharnieren etc. eingesetzt. rollers, hinges, etc.

Seite / page 1 - 2 25712 P 1 / 3. 0301HF

 AUFBAU
Die Zentralschmieranlage WS-E besteht aus:
1. Elektrischer Schalteinrichtung
2. Optoelektronischer Näherungsschalter *
3. Reflektor (entfällt bei induktivem Näherungsschalter)
4. Zahnradpumpen-Aggregat mit angebautem Magnet-
ventil und integrierter Drossel.
5. Rohr 6 x 0,7 (Rohr wird benötigt, wenn die Anlage
ohne “Losteilgruppe mit Rahmen” bestellt wird).
6. Spritzdüse
7. Dosierelement ZE-E
8. Verteilerleiste
9. Losteilgruppe mit Rahmen (je nach Bedarf).
* An Stelle des optoelektronischen Näherungsschalters mit
Reflektor kann wahlweise auch ein induktiver Näherungs-
schalter eingesetzt werden.
FUNKTION
Beim Einschalten der Anlage läuft das Zahnrad-
pumpenaggregat an und wälzt das Öl über das geöffnete
Magnetventil und die geöffnete Drossel drucklos um.
Sobald ein Impuls durch den vorhandenen Näherungs-
schalter (optoelektronisch oder induktiv) von der Kette
ausgelöst wird, schließt das Magnetventil und der Öl-
Kreislauf wird unterbrochen. Die von der Pumpe ab-
gehende Hauptleitung und die nachgeschalteten Dosier-
elemente ZE-E werden schlagartig mit Druck beauf-
schlagt. Die Dosierelemente geben ihre vorgespeicherte
Schmierstoffmenge mit hoher Geschwindigkeit über die
Spritzdüsen (in Form eines gezielten Tropfens) an die
Reibstellen ab. Verläßt die Kette den Schaltbereich des
Annäherungsschalters, öffnet das Magnetventil, der Druck
in der Hauptleitung fällt ab und im Dosierelement ZE-E wird
Öl für den nächsten Schmiertakt vorgespeichert.
Der oben beschriebene Öl-Kreislauf beginnt erneut.
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
LAYOUT
The central lubrication system WS-E consits of:
1. Electrical switching device
2. Opto-electronical proximity switch *
3. Reflector (deleted with inductive proximity switch)
4. Gear pump aggregate with mounted solenoid valve
integrated throttle.
5. Tube 6 x 0,7 (necessary, when system is ordered
without “loose assembly with frame”).
6. Spray nozzle
7. Metering element ZE-E
8. Manifold
9. Loose components group with base frame
(optionally).
* The opto-electronical proximity switch with reflector may
optional be replaced by an inductive proximity switch.
FUNCTION
After switching on the system the gear pump aggre-
gate starts and circulates oil without pressure via the
opened solenoid valve and the opened restrictor. As
soon as a impulse is initiated via the existing proximity
switch (opto-electronical or inductive) by the chain, the
solenoid valve closes and the oil circulation is
interrupted. Die main line leaving the pump and the
following metering elements ZE-E are admitted rapidly
with pressure. The metering elements release the stored
lubricant quantity with speed to the friction points via
spray nozzles (in form of a directed drop).
When the chain leaves the switching range of the
proximitiy switch, the solenoid valve opens, the
pressure in the main line decreases and oil in stored in
metering element ZE-E for the next lubrication cycle.
The above circulation recommences.
Central Lubrication System WS - E
for alternating lubrication points
Operating instructions
APPLICATION
The central lubrication system WS - E is used for
automatic and metered lubrication of chains, joints,
rollers, hinges, etc.
This system is also suitable for application with oil wet-
ting of integral parts (engine crankshaft).
CONSTRUCTION
The central lubrication system WS-E consits of:
1. Electrical switching device
2. Opto-electronical proximity switch *
3. Reflector (deleted with inductive proximity switch)
4. Gear pump aggregate with mounted solenoid valve
integrated throttle.
5. Tube 6 x 0,7 (necessary, when system is ordered
without “loose assembly with frame”).
6. Spray nozzle
7. Metering element ZE-E
8. Manifold
9. Loose components group with base frame
(optionally).
* The opto-electronical proximity switch with reflector may
optional be replaced by an inductive proximity switch.
FUNCTION
After switching on the system the gear pump aggrega-
te starts and circulates oil without pressure via the opened
solenoid valve and the opened restrictor. As soon as a im-
pulse is initiated via the existing proximity switch (opto-
electronical or inductive) by the chain, the solenoid valve
closes and the oil circulation is interrupted. Die main line
leaving the pump and the following metering elements
ZE-E are admitted rapidly with pressure. The metering ele-
ments release the stored lubricant quantity with speed to
the friction points via spray nozzles (in form of a directed
drop).
When the chain leaves the switching range of the
proximitiy switch, the solenoid valve opens, the pressu-
re in the main line decreases and oil in stored in metering
element ZE-E for the next lubrication cycle. The above
circulation recommences.
SPECIFICATION
Ambient temperature : _________________ 0oC to 40oC
a) Gear pump aggregate
Flow rating : _____________________ 1200cm3/min
Delivery pressure, fix adjusted ____________ 30 bar
Reservoir capacity : ____________________ 4 or 12 l
Drive:
3-phase motor 220/380V; 50Hz; 0,18kW; 3000min-1
AC motor __________ 220V; 50Hz; 0,18kW; 3000min-1
Solenoid valve:
AC current _________ 220V; 50Hz; make time 100%
Power consumption _____ pick-up 34 VA; hold 9 VA
DC current _________________ 24V; make time 50%
Power consumption ______________________ 23 W
b) Metering element ZE-E:
Metering volume ______________________ 10 mm3
Number of elements per system ___ max. 12 pieces
c) Spray nozzle:
Length 150 mm for horizontal and vertical
installation.
Lenght 250 mm for vertical installation only
Spray distance _____________________ 20 - 50 mm
d) Opto-electronical proximity switch
Voltage _______________________ 220V; 50 - 60 Hz
Residual voltage _________________________ 1,8 V
Continuous load _______________________ 200 mA
Idle current (internal consumption) ______ < 20 mA
e) Inductive proximity switch
Voltage range __________ 20 - 250V AC; 50 - 60 Hz
Contact distance _______________________ 10 mm
Condition ________________________________ N/0
Max. load current ______________________ 500 mA
Min. load current _________________________ 2 mA
Temperature range ___________ - 25oC to + 70oC
Protection system ________________________ IP 67
Connection _______________ 2 m lead; 3 x 0,5 mm2
25712 BA 5 e / 1 0986HF
 SPECIFICATION (Continuation)
f) Inductive proximity switch
Voltage range _____________________ 10 - 30V DC
Contact distance _______________________ 10 mm
Switching characteristic ________________ pnp N/0
Max. load current _______________________ 80 mA
Temperature range ___________ - 25 oC to + 70oC
Protection system ________________________ IP 67
Connection ______________ 2 m lead; 3 x 0,25 mm2
g) Volume control (min)
Switching voltage ________________ max. 250V AC
Contact voltage _______________________ max. 1A
Switching capacity __________________ max. 60 VA
Contact type ___________________ resersing switch
INSTALLATION
1. The maximal tube length (tube 6 x 0,7) between gear
aggregate and the most remote metering element
ZE-E (7) must not exceed 5 m.
2. The distributor outlets should preferably always
show upward.
3. The routing of the tubes should enable a later
ventilation.
4. The proximity switch (5) should be located visible
and easily accessible. The desired pulse triggering
must only be performed by the provided machine
component, e.g. certain chain section.
5. The nozzles (10) should be aligned such that the
nozzle orifice shows in direction to the friction point
in the moment of pulse triggering.
6. The electric connection should be performed within the
terminal box according to the illustrated wiring diagram.
Wiring diagram of aggregate with AC motor single phase
2
Wiring diagram of aggregate with AC motor three-phase
Attention!
During connecting the motor, the correct direction of ro-
tation must be observed, which is indicated by arrow on
motor.
COMMISSIONING
1. Fill oil reservoir (1).
2. Switch on pump aggregate (2).
The filled oil is circulated now without pressure
through opened solenoid valve (3) and throttle (4).
Attenuate the electro-magnetic field of the proximity
switch (5) or interrupt the ligth beam of the opto-
electronic proximity switch (6) resp.
3. Ventilate the tubes carefully by loosening the plugs (8)
on the metering elements ZE-E (7). It is recommen-
ded to place a container below the elements to pre-
vent environmental contamination by emerging oil.
4. As soon as blubble-free oil is visible, fasten plugs (8)
tightly.
5. Recreate impulse-free condition on proximity switch (5).
Close throttle screw (9) on solenoid valve (3) by
slowly turning clockwise until all metering elements
ZE-E release oil in a continuous fine spray by pres-
sure build-up in main line.
Repeat this procedure serveral times, if necessary,
after turning throttle screw (9) anti-clockwise.
6. When tubes, elements and nozzles are ventilated
correctly, open throttle screw (9) again by turning
anti-clockwise.
7. Release serveral lubrication cycles. For this purpose
release serveral consecutive pulses on proximity
switch (5) by repeated attenuation of the electronic
field or by interruption of the light ray resp.
8. The system is now ready for operation.
9. With running system adjust position of nozzles (10)
and response point of proximity switch (5) until the
released oil drops hit the desired lubrication points
exactly.
 LUBRICANTS
Mineral oils with operating viscosity between 40 and
900 mm2s-1 attain proper spraying results (refer to dia-
gram). Synthetic oils or solid additives, solvents, higher or
lower viscosity affect the function of the system, i.e. the
maximal possible pulse sequence, the metering accuracy
and the spraying result.
In case of queries please contact us.

3
 SPARE PARTS DRAWING - Central lubricating system WS - E

4
 SPARE PARTS DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST - Central lubricating system WS - E

Item Pcs. Designation Code no.

-- -- Central lubrication system WS-E 25712 - 0000
1 1 Gear pump aggregate 12 l 23321 - 4610
2 2 Connection set 63422 - 3071
3 2 Rainforcement sleeves 73511 - 4123
4 1 Tube (length 0,3 m) 73100 - 2134
5 2 Spray nozzle 73654 - 2151
6 2 Metering element ZE-E 35691 - 1111
7 1 Manifold 73662 - 1121
8 1 Plate 64356 - 0031
9 1 Rail 74371 - 1141
10 7 Plug screw M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
11 4 Cylinder head screw M 8 x 30 DIN 7984 74102 - 1264
12 4 Spring washer 8 DIN 7980 74185 - 3044
13 4 Tube 73151 - 1321
14 2 Strap 74371 - 1131
15 1 Reflector 76925 - 9073
16 2 Cylinder head screw M 4 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1014
17 8 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 25 DIN 7984 74102 - 1154
18 4 Tube clamp 73573 - 8113
19 4 Bar 71511 - 2281
20 8 Hexagon nut M 10 DIN 934 74175 - 1294
21 8 Washer B 10,5 DIN 125 - St 74185 - 1084
22 4 Spring washer 10 DIN 7980 74185 - 3054
23 1 Terminal box 76922 - 7743
24 1 Cylinder head screw M 4 x 25 DIN 912 74102 - 1684
25 3 Gasket A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094
26 1 Hexagon nut M 4 DIN 934-6 74175 - 1234
27 1 Washer A 4,3 DIN 125 St 74185 - 1034
28 1 Opto-electronic proximity switch 76925 - 5333
29 2 Cylinder head screw M 10 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1374
30 2 Spring washer 10 DIN 7980 74185 - 3054

5
 SPARE PARTS DRAWING - Pump

6
 SPARE PARTS LIST - Pump
Item Pieces Designation Code no.
220 V; 50 Hz WS 23321 - 4331 ---
4l
220 / 380 V; 50 Hz 3~ 23321 - 4341 ---
--- --- Pump
220 V; 50 Hz WS --- 23321 - 4451
12 l
220 / 380 V; 50 Hz 3~ --- 23321 - 4461
1 1 Cover 73751 - 3922 74351 - 4551
2 2 Cylinder head screw M 4 x 16 DIN 84 --- 74104 - 1174
3 2 Gasket A 4 x 8 DIN 7603 - Cu --- 72712 - 1014 E
4 1 Filter --- 39111 - 1413
5 1 Blind flange --- 74354 - 2221
6 4 Cylinder head screw M 5 x 12 DIN 7984 --- 74102 - 1034
7 4 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1144
8 4 Spring washer 6 DIN 7980 74185 - 3034
9 1 Flange 74354 - 5181
AC motor B 14 - C 90 - 63 x 0,18 x 3000 A; 220 V; 50 Hz 76911 - 1863
10 1
3-phase motor B 14 - C 90 - 63 x 0,18 x 3000; 220/380 V; 50 Hz 3~ 76911 - 5213
11 1 Coupling 71931 - 1341
12 2 Thread pin M 5 x 5 DIN 913 74107 - 2224
13 1 Coupling 71931 - 1351
14 1 Connector 73490 - 5263
15 1 Sleeve screw AL 8 DIN 3871 73511 - 5223
16 1 Dual cone ring 8 DIN 3862 73511 - 2654
--- 1 Suction tube consisting of item nos. 17, 22, 28, 30 and 31 63111 - 1211 63111 - 1221
17 6 Gasket A 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603 Cu 72712 - 1094 E
18 4 Cylinder head screw M 5 x 50 DIN 7984 74102 - 1624
19 4 Spring washer 5 DIN 7980 74185 - 3024
20 1 Gear pump 72811 - 1713
21 1 Annular connector 74111 - 4241
22 2 Tube screw 74111 - 4041
23 2 Sleeve screw ALL 6 DIN 3871 73511 - 5153
24 2 Dual cone ring 6 DIN 3862 73511 - 2644
25 2 Cylinder head screw M 4 x 45 DIN 912 74102 - 1664
26 2 Spring washer 4 DIN 7980 74185 - 3014
27 1 Tube 6 x 0,7 length 150 mm 73100 - 1134
length 125 mm 73151 - 2311 --- N
28 1 Suction tube
length 175 mm --- 73151 - 2321 N
length 160 mm N
29 1 Tube 8 x 1 73100 - 1144
length 210 mm N
30 1 Annular connector 74111 - 4351 N
31 1 Threaded plug 73752 - 2613 ---
32 1 Strainer 73671 - 1613 ---
33 1 Plug screw M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
34 1 Screw 74168 - 1611
35 2 Ball 1/4 - V DIN 54 71961 - 4174
36 1 Compression spring 71614 - 5191
37 1 Usit - Ring U 4,1 x 7,2 x 1 72713 - 5113 E
38 1 O-ring 86 x 2,5 DIN 3770 - NB 70 72711 - 1793 E
39 1 Gasket A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1214 E
40 1 Plug screw M 14 x 1,5 DIN 908 74106 - 1174
Parts marked with “E” are recommended for spare parts stock holding.
Parts marked with “N” are not available separately as spare parts.

7
 SPARE PARTS DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST - Gear Pump-Aggregate

Item Pieces Designation Code no.

4l 23321 - 4510 ---
--- --- Gear pump aggregate
12 l --- 23321 - 4610
220 V; 50 Hz WS 23321 - 4331 ---
4l
220 / 380 V; 50 Hz 3~ 23321 - 4341 ---
1 1 Pump
220 V; 50 Hz WS --- 23321 - 4451
12 l
220 / 380 V; 50 Hz 3~ --- 23321 - 4461
2 1 Tube 8 x 1 length 300 mm 73100 - 1144
3 1 Socket 73490 - 3031
4 1 O-ring 3,68 x 1,78 DIN 3770 NB 70 72711 - 1123 E
5 1 Sleeve screw ALL 8 DIN 3871 73511 - 5163
6 1 Dual cone ring 8 DIN 3862 73511 - 2654
7 1 Tube screw 74111 - 4193
8 3 Gasket A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1214 E
9 1 Annular connector 74111 - 4261
24 V 38152 - 1163
10 1 3/2 - way valve
220 V; 50 Hz WS 38152 - 1133
11 1 Dual nipple 73491 - 1331 73491 - 1341
12 1 Gasket A 17 x 21 DIN 7603 - Cu --- 72712 - 1324 E
13 1 Reservoir 63721 - 6111 73721 - 6013
14 1 Oil level gauge --- 75241 - 1141
15 3 Oil gauge glass with gaske 75241 - 2413 ---
16 3 Tube nut BR 1/2 DIN 431 74175 - 1034 ---
17 1 Gasket 72731 - 4412 72731 - 4423
6 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 12 DIN 7984 74102 - 1124 ---
18
10 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 20 DIN 7984 --- 74102 - 1144
19 10 Spring washer 6 DIN 7980 --- 74185 - 3034
20 4 Cylinder head screw M 5 x 12 DIN 7984 --- 74102 - 1034
21 1 Float switch --- 39161 - 1113
Parts marked with “E” are recommended for spare parts stock holding.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Automatic lubrication of gear wheels system NV-K
APPLICATION

The gear wheel lubrication system NV-K is predomi-

nantly used for open girth gears, i.e. in all instances where
dip lubrication or spray systems (with the help of compressed
air) is not feasible. Gear wheel lubrication is ideal especially
for gear wheels with vertical shafts, such as e.g. in slew gears
in cranes and excavators, but also for gears in mills and rota-
ry kilns, winches, crushers and dumpers, in the quarrying &
mining industry etc.
Lubricant is fed under pressure to the transfer unit shaft
through one or two pipelines and then applied to the loaded
tooth flanks of the pinion drive of the gears to be lubricated,
through the holes provided on the transfer unit disks.

fig. 1 showing how the lubricant is applied and distributed

Fig. 2 feeding lubricant on to the gear mesh line

The transfer unit consists, according to the width of the The different wheel disks are separated on the shaft by
pinion wheel to be lubricated, of one or several aluminium spacers.
tooth wheel transfer disks. There is a direct connection from
the lubrication grooves to the holes provided on the tooth
wheel disks and to the tooth flanks, the lubricant is thus
discharged tooth by tooth along the mesh line in a staggered
way. This allows that the entire large surface of the tooth
TECHNICAL DATA
flanks is uniformly covered by lubricant, and, moreover, the
lubrication grooves are so arranged to ensure that there is a suitable for girth gears of module 10 up to 30
connection between the pressure feed line and lubricant and for girth gear widths from
outlet only on one side of the tooth flank, the one which is 60 up to 400 mm
being in mesh at the time. and rpm up to 350

The transfer unit tooth wheels are not self-propelled but
are driven by the pinion drive. If the gear to be lubricated is
rotating in one direction only, all outlet ports are arranged
on one side of the tooth flanks; if, however, the direction of
rotation changes alternately, the tooth wheel disks on the
shaft are so positioned as to ensure that one flank is lubrica-
ted from one disk and the other side of the flank from anot-
her disk
Tooth wheel dia (pitch) from: _ 80 up to 240 mm approx.
Transfer unit shaft dia.: ________________ 40 or 60 mm
Transfer unit number of teeth: _____________________ 8
Compatible lubricants: grease up to penetration class 3 oil
Lubricant connection ports at transfer unit
1/4" at gear widths:
abt. 18o mm = 1; over 180 mm = 2
Range of ambient temperature: _ + 20 up to + 100 degr. C
upon request, special design: _______ up to 2oo degr. C

25811 P 1e / 01 0995HF
 1. grease lubrication pump
2. transfer unit NV-K
3. transfer of lubricant in
mesh with tooth wheel
4. tooth flanks of pinion
drive to be lubricated
5. tooth flanks of girth gear
to be lubricated

fig. 3 feeding lubricant to the transfer unit

FEEDING AND DISTRIBUTION OF

LUBRICANT QUANTITIES

The width and the number of tooth wheels to be lubrica-

ted are the underlying determining factors in a gear lubrica-
tion system as to whether to lay out one or several pipe lines.
Especially a multi-line feed pump is suitable for being
used to create the lubricant pressure in order to be able to
discharge small lubricant quantities at short intervals. These
pumps are optionally either driven by flanged electric motors
(lubricator aggregate) or via ratchet lever by a drive shaft
from the machine to be lubricated. The pump station can be
controlled, at choice, by time relay in preset operating- and fig. 4 transfer unit with mounting flange for alternating
pause times. directions of rotation NV-K ZH ZV, ready for installation
Occasionally both normal bearing-friction points and
girth gears can be lubricated by the same system. Compati-
ble lubricants for both applications:
e.g. Shell adhesive grease
Mobiltac SL Denominations for ordering e.g. 2 x 2 H / V
and Esso Beacon EP 2 number of groups
For further information consult respective lubricant manu- number of gear disks each group
facturers.
suitable for clockwise rotation (H) or
If more than one lube point is to be serviced, it is recom-
mended to use the multi-line lubricator type FZ-A, and, if the anti-clockwise (V) (according to mounting position)
system is to be monitored, additionally, the pump type FZ-B
with progressive divider and limit switch is suitable. The
pumps can be driven by a separate electric motor or by the
machine to be lubricated (particulars vide leaflet 21112
P2e).

SPECIFICATION FOR ORDERING

(or enquiry resp.)

Gear module gear width gear drive rpm type of lubri-

cant direction of rotation fitting facilities for the transfer unit
angle between fitting angle and gear mesh point

fig. 5 examples for various gear widths showing 2 or 3 resp.

NV-K tooth wheel disks mounted side by side

page 2
 EXAMPLES OF APPLICATIONS GEAR WHEEL LUBRICATION NV - K

fig. 6 rope winch fig. 7 slew gear drive of crane

fig. 8 anchor windlass fig. 9 travel gear

fig. 10 on-board winch fig. 11 mill drive

fig. 12 lubrication of a harbour crane travel gear via FZ-A direct-feed pump and progressive dividers downflow to lubricate both
bearings and open girth gears at the same time

page 3
 Fig. 13 travel gear and girth gear lubrication in a shovel dredger oder (bucket wheel reclaimer)

fig. 14 girth gear lubrication in a quarrying mill

fig. 15 rotary kiln, combined girth gear and bearing lubrication fig. 16 wheel rim, combined lubrication for bearing and girth gear

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Zentralschmiersystem RK - C
für wandernde Schmierstellen
Centralised lubrication system RK -C
for mobile lubrication points

ANWENDUNG
Das Zentralschmiersystem RK-C wird für wandernde
Schmierstellen an Kettenförderern, Plattenbändern und
ähnlichen Transporteinrichtungen zum Schmieren der
Gelenkbolzen, Laschenglieder und Führungsrollen einge-
setzt. Die Schmierstellen werden dazu mit gehärteten
Schmiernippeln versehen.
APPLICATION
RK-C centralised lubrication systems are generally
used to server moving parts such as links, guide rollers,
chain pins, castors, hinged joint, etc. whilst the conveyors,
plate bands ar ancillary mechanisms are in motion.

AUFBAU LAYOUT

1. Elektrische Schalteinrichtung
2. Druckspeichereinheit bestehend aus:
Druckspeicher
Druckmeßgerät (Manometer)
Druckschalter 180 bar
Druckbegrenzungsventil 200 bar
3. Schlauchleitung zum Schmierkopf
4. Drehschieber
5. Träger für den Schmierkopf
6. Schmierkopf
7. Rücklaufleitung
8. Druckleitung
9. Fettschmierpumpe BS-B

1. Electrical control cabinet (optional)

2. Pressure storage unit consisting of:
Accumulator
Pressure gauge
Pressure switch range 180 bar
Pressure relief valve 200 bar
3. Flexible hose connecting the lubrication head
4. Rotary slide valve
5. Lubrication head bracket
6. Lubrication head
7. Return line
8. Pressure feed line
9. BS-B type grease lubricator

25315 BA 2 d+e / 2 1100HF

Ersatz für 25315BA2 / 1 0782
 TECHNISCHE DATEN
Betriebsdruck max.: _______________________ 160 bar
Schmierstoffe Fett bis _____ NLGI-Klasse 1, DIN 51813*
Raumtemperatur: ____________________ - 20º bis 80ºC
a) Fettschmierpumpe BS-B
Fördervolumen _________________ 7, 14 oder 22 l/h
Druckbegrenzungsventil eingest. auf _ max. 160 bar
b) Druckspeichereinheit
Vorfüllmedium Stickstoff __________ 70 bis 100 bar
Speichervolumen Schmierstoff max. ______ 400 cm3
Druckbegrenzungsventil ____ eingestellt auf 200 bar
Druckschalter _____________ eingestellt auf 180 bar
c) Drehschieber
Öffnungswinkel für Druckphase ______________ 60º
Öffnungswinkel für Entlastungsphase _______ 260º
d) Schmierkopf
Dosiermenge __ 0,2; 0,3; 0,4 vorzugsweise 0,5 cm3
Steuervolumen je
Abschmierung __________ max. 4 cm3/Schmierkopf
* Sollen Schmierstoffe der NLGI-Klasse 2 eingesetzt werden, so
bitten wir um Rückspache.
FUNKTION
Die Abschmierorgane des Schmiersystems RK-C
sind Schmierköpfe, die den Schmierstoff fortlaufend an
die Gelenkbolzen während ihres Eingriffes in die gezahn-
ten Umlenkscheiben abgeben.
Die Schmierköpfe (6) sind mit Trägern (5) an den Um-
lenkscheiben befestigt und stehen während des Eingriffes
achsgleich mit den Gelenkbolzen. Ein Drehschieber (4)
(3/2-Wegeventil), der an der Stirnfläche der Scheiben an-
gebracht ist, hat die Aufgabe, den Schmierstoffdurchfluß
zu den Schmierköpfen jeweils dann freizugeben, wenn die
Kettenbolzen in die den Schmierköpfen zugeordneten
Zahnlücken der Umlenkscheiben einlaufen. Je nach Bol-
zenart der Kette und Zähnezahl der Umlenkscheibe wer-
den ein oder mehrere Schmierköpfe benötigt, um alle
Schmierstellen zu erreichen.
Der Pumpendruck führt zunächst den Düsenkolben
dichtend gegen den Schmiernippel des Gelenkbolzens
und bewirkt dann erst mit Hilfe des Förderkolbens den
Ausstoß des Schmierstoffes. Durch enrsprechende Ein-
stellung des Förderkolbenhubes durch Zuteilschrauben
kann die Schmierstoffmenge geändert werden.
Bevor der Gelenkbolzen die Umlenkscheibe verläßt,
schließt der Drehschieber (4) den Fettzutritt ab und öffnet
eine Verbindung zum Schmierkopf (6) zur Rücklaufleitung
(7), worauf der federbelastete Kolben im Schmierkopf in
seine Ausgangsstellung zurückfährt. Dabei wird durch
Umschichtung des Schmierstoffes durch den Förderkol-
ben das für den nächsten Abschmiervorgang benötigte
Schmierstoffvolumen vorgespeichert.
Da die Schmierköpfe immer nur während eines Teiles
des Umlenkscheiben-Umlaufes mit einem Kettenbolzen
in Eingriff stehen, die Fettschmierpumpe (9) aber kontinu-
ierlich fördert, hat die Druckspeichereinheit (2) während
des übrigen Umlenkscheiben-Umlaufes die Aufgabe, so-
viel Fett aufzunehmen und unter Druck vorrätig zu halten,
wie für einen Abschmiervorgang benötigt wird.
2
TECHNICAL DATA
Pressure ratings max.: ______________________ 160 bar
Lubricant grades __ Grease to NLGI class 1, DIN 51813*
Ambient temperature: _________________ - 20º to 80ºC
a) Grease lubricator BS-B
Output volume ___________________ 7, 14 or 22 l/h
Pressure relief valve preset to ________ max. 160 bar
b) Pressure storage unit
Prefilling medium nitrogen __________ 70 to 100 bar
Storage capacity max. __________________ 400 cm3
Pressure relief valve _______________ set to 200 bar
Pressure switch __________________ set to 180 bar
c) Rotary slide valve
Opening angle to pressurise ________________ 60º
Opening angle to depressurise _____________ 260º
d) Lubrication head
Output volume ___ 0,2; 0,3 or 0,4 preferably 0,5 cm3
Control volume each
greasing cycle ____ max. 4 cm3/per lubrication head
* If lubricants to NLGI class 2 are to be utilised, please consult us
beforehand.
OPERATION
The RK-C lubrication system is designed to deliver a
metered shot of grease to the chain pins once the chain in
positively engaged with the sprocket.
The lubrication heads (6) are mounted on brackets (5)
which are secured to the sprocket in line radially and axially
with chain pins once the chain is engaged. The number of
lubrication heads to ensure that all points are lubricated is
dependent on the number of chain pins and the number of
teeth on the sprocket and can be calculated as shown on
page 4. The system is controlled by the 3 way rotary slide
valve (4) which is secured to the end face of the shaft on
which the sprockets are mounted. This valve connects the
pressure and the relief line in turn to the lubrication heads
as the shaft rotates relative to the body of the valve.
When the lubrication heads (6) are connected to the
pressure line the injection piston is first pushed tightly
against the greasing nipple of the chain and then the lubri-
cant is discharged via the feed piston. The ammount of lu-
bricant delivery may be varied by exchanging the metering
screws which control the stroke of the feed piston.
When the heads are connected to the relief line the
spring loaded piston retracts the injector to its initial positi-
on prior to the chain leaving the sprocket. This also rechar-
ges the feed piston with a fresh quantity of lubricant ready
for the next cycle.
The BS-B grease pump (9) is continually pumping
grease although the lubrication heads are only engaged
with the chain for a partial cycle of the sprocket. During the
relief period the grease is stored under pressure in the ac-
cumulator ready for the next lubrication cycle.
 MONTAGE UND INBETRIEBNAHME
Für die Funktion der Schmieranlagen dürfen die abzu-
schmierenden Nippel gegenüber der Umlenkscheibe, an
der der Schmierkopf befestigt ist, keine größeren Ver-
schiebungen ausführen. Die maximal zulässigen Ver-
schiebungen der Schmiernippel sind in axialer Richtung
± 10 mm. In der zum Bolzen senkrechten Ebene dürfen
sich die Nippel in einem Radius von 4 mm verlagern.
Die Schmiernippel müssen gehärtet sein.
Da beim Durchlaufen der Kette in den Umlenkscheiben
die Bolzen abgeswchmiert werden, müssen die Schmier-
kanäle der Bolzen und Büchsen so angeordent sein, daß
der Schmierkopf ungehindert zu den Reib-stellen fließen
kann. Unterschneiden sich die Schmierkanäle, so müssen
auf den Bolzen oder in den Bücksen Ringkanäle vorgese-
hen werden, damit der Schmierstoff in jeder Kettenlage
mit Sicherheit die Lagerstellen erreicht.
Der erforderliche freie Raum für das Umlaufen der
Schmierköpfe muß mindestens 120 mm von der Vorder-
kante der Schmiernippel bis zur Bandkonstruktion be-
tragen.
An der Einbaustelle der Schmieranlage (Antriebs-
oder Spannstation) muß auf der Welle genügend freier
Raum zwischen dem Lager und der Umlenkscheibe für
den Anschluß der Druckleitung zum Schmierkopf vorhan-
den sein.
Die Auflageflächen fürd die Träger der Schmierköpfe
und den Drehschieber müssen eben und rechtwinklig zur
Drehachse sein. Einwandfrei arbeitende Flächen geran-
tieren störungsfreien Betrieb.
Am Drehschieber ist die Kerbmarke am Schiederzap-
fen einstellbar. Sie muß mit der Kerbmarke am Schie-
bergehäuse übereinstimmen, wenn der Schmierkopf auf
Mitte Umschlingungswinkel des Kettenbandes steht.
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
The lubrication heads should be mounted on the spro-
cket in line radially and axially with the grease nipples when
the chain is positively engaged. The mounting brackets do
allows, however, for minor adjustments enabling the injec-
tor to be aligned accurately with the grease nipples.
Axial adjustemnt ± 10 mm
Radial adjustment ± 4 mm
All locating faces for the mounting brackets and the rotary
slide valve must be maniched flat to ensure correct
alignment.
The grease nipples used should always be hardened.
The maximum clearance required for the lubrication head
between the conveyor framework and the face of the grea-
se nipple is 120 mm, also provision for connection of the lu-
brication heads should be provided.
As the chain pins are lubricated while the chain passes
around the sprocket, the greasing channels of the bolts
and bushes must be positioned so as to allow the lubricant
to flow unimpededly directly to the lubrication points. Ho-
wever, if the greasing channels could become misaligned,
annular groves should be provided around the bolts and
bushes in order to make sure the lubricant can reach the
desired points, irrespective of the position of the chain.
After installation the system should be primed with
grease and the pressure accumulator should be charged
with the nitrogen to a pressure of between 70 and 100 bar.
The rotary slide valve should then be adjusted so that the
notched marks on the centre spindle and the body are in
line with the lubrication head(s) at the start of the greasing
cycle. The lubrication head(s) should then be aligned with
the grease nipples and the system switched on. The heads
should be finally alogned and then doweled into position.
3
 ANLAGENBERECHNUNG
Die Zähnezahl der Umlenkscheibe bestimmt die Rei-
henfolge der Abschmierung bei einem Umlauf, z.B. bei ei-
ner Umlenkscheibe mit 7 Zähnen wird jeweils der 7. Ge -
lenkbolzen der Kette abgeschmiert. Damit die Ab-
schmierung nach jedem vollen Umlauf des Kettenbandes
nacheinander auf andere Gelenkbolzen wechslet, ist eine
Abstimmung der Bolzenzahl auf die jeweilige Zähnezahl
der Umlenkscheibe erforderlich.
Die Anzahl der Schmierköpfe wird aus der Bolzenzahl
und der Zähnezahl der Umlenkscheibe nach folgendem
Rechnungsgang bestimmt:
a) Bolzenzahl und Zähnezahl werden in ihre Primfakto-
ren zerlegt (Primzahl 1 ist einmal einzusetzen).
b) Das Produkt all der Primfaktoren, die sowohl in der
Bolzenzahl als auch in der Zähnezahl vorkommen,
ergibt die erforderliche Schmierkopfzahl.
Beispiele:
Die jeweilige Konstruktion der Kettenbandanlage ist in
Abhängigkeit des Umschlingungswinkels der Kette und
der Zähnezahl der Umlenkscheibe bestimmend, ob die
Anzahl der erforderlichen Schmierköpfe angebracht wer-
den kann. Nach Beispiel 3 müßte theoretisch an jedem
Zahn der Umlenkscheibe ein Schmierkopf angebracht
werden.
Aufgrund des Platzverhältnisses und derFunktion der
Schmieranlage ist dieses nicht möglich. Eine Verände-
rung der Kettenscheibe bzw. der Gliederzahl um einen
Zahn bzw. um ein Glied führt zur Verminderung der erfor-
derlichen Schmierköpfe.
Bei Beispiel 4 wurde die Kette um ein Glied erweitert
und somit die Anzahl der Kettenbolzen auf 64 erhöht. Da-
durch wird gegenüber Beispiel 3 nur noch ein Schmier-
kopf benötigt.
4
SYSTEM CALCULATION
The number of teeth on the sprocket determines the
sequence of lubrication per cycle, e.g. on a 7 tooth spro-
cket every 7th chain pin will be lubricated. However, to en-
sure that the chain indexes around the sprocket, after each
full circuit of the chain, the ration of the number of links on
the chain and the number of teeth on the sprocket has to be
calculated. This, together with the angle the vhain is enga-
ged with the sprocket determines the arraqngement of the
lubrication head(s) on the sprocket.
In order to determine the number of lubricating heads
required from the number of links in the chain and the teeth
on the sprocket, proceed as follows:
a) Divide the number of chain pins into the product of their
prime numbers starting with the number 1. This is done
by dividing each prime number in turn into the number
of pins until the result becomes a fraction in which case
the next prime number should be tried and so on.
b) Then divide of the number of teeth on the sprocket
into the product of their prime number as above.
The number of lubrication heads necessary results
from the product of all the prime factors common
both to the number of pins and the number of teeth.
As shown below in example 1 and 2.
Examples:
As regards example 3, seven lubrication heads theore-
tically are required to lubricate each tooth, which is not fea-
sible due to insufficient space and to the working condi-
tions of the unit.
However, by modifiyning the sprocket or by altering the
number of links by one tooth or one link, the number of lubri-
cation heads required can be reduced.
As regards to example 4, the chain had been modified
by adding one link thus increasing the number of chain
pins to 64, as result of which now only one lubrication head
is necessary to do the job as against 7 in example 3.
 EINZELTEILZEICHNUNGEN UND ERSATZTEILLISTEN
SECTIONAL PART DRAWINGS AND SPARE PART LISTS
Drehschieber / Slide valve
Pos. Benennung Bestell - Nr. St.
Item Designation Code no. Pcs.
Drehschieber SH-D
-- 63621 - 1111 --
Slide valve SH-D
Verschlußschraube R 3/8" DIN 908
1 74106 - 1254 2
Plug screw R 3/8" DIN 908
Dichtring A 18 x 24 DIN 7603 Cu
2 72712 - 1344 3 E
Copper washer
3 Schild / Name plate 75311 - 6212 2
Kerbnagel 2 x 6 DIN 1476
4 74225 - 6534 4
Dowel pin 2 x 6 DIN 1476
5 Flansch / Flange 73418 - 2341 1
6 Schieberzapfen / Centre spindle 72318 - 2111 1 N
7 Schiebergehäuse / Slide housing 74333 - 6111 1 N
Paßschieber 16 x 22 DIN 988
8 74185 - 1984 1 N
Retaining cap 16 x 22 DIN 988
Sicherungsring 16 x 1 DIN 471
9 74186 - 1074 1
Circlip 16 x 1 DIN 471
RDR 18,72 x 2,62 DIN 3770-NB 80
10 72711 - 1483 2 E
O-ring 18,72 x 2,62 DIN 3770-NB 80
Sechskantschraube M 8 x 25 DIN 933
11 74101 - 1344 3
Hex. head screw M 8 x 25 DIN 933
Federring 8 DIN 7890
12 74185 - 3044 3
Lock wasker 8 DIN 7890
Die mit “E” gekennz. Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen.
Die mit “N” gekennz. Teile werden nicht als Ersatzteil mitgeliefert.
Parts marked “E” are recommended to be kept on stock.
Parts marked “N” are not supplied as spares.

Träger / Bracket
Pos. Benennung Bestell - Nr. St.
Item Designation Code no. Pcs.
-- Träger / Bracket 64342 - 3319 --
1 Träger / Bracket 74342 - 3319 1
2 Scheibe 21 DIN 1441 / Disc 74185 - 1514 2
Federring 20 DIN 7980
3 75185 - 3094 1
Lock washer 20 DIN 7980
Sechskantmutter M 20 DIN 934
4 74175 - 1354 1
Hex. head nut M 20 DIN 934
Sechskantschraube M 12 DIN 931*
5 -- 3
Hex. head screw M 12 DIN 931*
6 Bügel / Spacer 74372 - 3511 2
7 Spannhülse / Locating shoulder 74221 - 3611 3
Federring 12 DIN 7980
8 74185 - 3064 3
Lock washer 12 DIN 7980
Sechskantmutter M 12 DIN 934
9 74175 - 1314 3
Hex. head nut M 12 DIN 934
Spannstift 8 x 50 DIN 1481
10 74225 - 5244 2
Dowel pin 8 x 50 DIN 1481
Zylinderschraube M 20 x 90 DIN 931
11 74102 - 1614 1
Cyl. head screw M 20 x 90 DIN 931

* Maße "a", "b" und "c" sind anlagenbedingt

Beispiel für Pos. 1: Träger Best.-Nr. 64342-3319, 60 (Maß "a") x 120 (Maß "b")
Beispiel für Pos. 5: Sechskantschraube M 12 x 90 (Maß "c") DIN 931

* Size “a”, “b” and “c” depend on machine data

Example for part no. 1: Bracket Code no. 64342-3319, 60 (size “a”) x 120 (size "b")
Example for part no. 5: Hexagon head screw M 12 x 90 (size "c") DIN 931

5
 EINZELTEILZEICHNUNGEN UND ERSATZTEILLISTEN
SECTIONAL PART DRAWINGS AND SPARE PART LISTS
Druckspeichereinheit / Pressure storage unit

Pos. Benennung Bestell - Nr. Stück

Item Designation Code no. Pieces
-- Druckspeichereinheit / Pressure storage unit 34511 - 1211 --
1 Druckdämpfer / Pressure accummulator 34511 - 1111 1
2 Druckmeßgerät / Pressure gauge 75111 - 5274 1
3 Druckschalter (eingestellt auf 180 bar) / Pressure switch set at 180 bar 34241 - 1233 1
4 Druckbegrenzungsventil SA-G / Pressure relief valve SA-G 38131 - 2121 1

6
 EINZELTEILZEICHNUNGEN UND ERSATZTEILLISTEN
SECTIONAL PART DRAWINGS AND SPARE PART LISTS
Schmierkopf RK-C / Lubrication Head RK-C

Pos. Benennung Bestell - Br. Stück

Item Designation Code no. Pieces
für Senkschmiernippel / for counter-sunk nipples 25315 - 1111 •
--
Schmierkopf RK - C für Kugelschmiernippel / for hydraulic nipples 25315 - 1121 •
Lubrication head RK - C für Senkschmiernippel / for counter-sunk nipples 25315 - 1211 •
für Kugelschmiernippel / for hydraulic nipples 25315 - 1221 •
-- Gehäuse bestehend aus Pos. 1 und 17 bis 21 / Housing consisting of parts 1 and 17 to 21 64331 - 8111 1 1 1 1 N
1 Gehäuse / Housing 74333 - 3111 1 1 1 1 N
2 Runddichtring 45 x 2 DIN 3770-NB 70 / O-ring 45 x 2 DIN 3770-NB 70 72711 - 1723 1 1 1 1 E
3 Gummiring / Rubber ring 71661 - 4112 1 1 E
4 Stützring / Supporting ring 71647 - 1412 1 1 1 1
5 Kappe / Cap 71461 - 5111 1 1 1 1
6 Druckfeder / Pressure spring 71617 - 7112 1 1 1 1
7 Federteller / Spring cap 71641 - 1211 1 1 1 1
8 Drucknocken / Locating cap 71542 - 1411 1 1
9 Bügel / Retaining bracket 74361 - 9211 1 1
für Senkschmiernippel / for counter-sunk nipples 72114 - 1211 1 1 E
10 Düsenkolben / Injector
für Kugelschmiernippel / for hydraulic nipples 72114 - 1221 1 1 E
11 Runddichtring 13,94 x 2,62 DIN 3770-NB 70 / O-ring 13,94 x 2,62 DIN 3770-NB 70 72711 - 1423 2 2 2 2 E
12 Federhaube / Spring cap 71461 - 1411 1 1 1 1
13 Scheibe / Washer 74181 - 1512 2 2 2 2
14 Druckfeder / Pressure spring 71614 - 5132 1 1 1 1
15 Bolzen / Bolt 71552 - 4111 1 1 1 1
16 Federbolzen / Spring bolt 71552 - 4121 1 1 1 1
17 Sicherungsring / Safety ring 74182 - 1112 1 1 1 1
18 Scheibe / Washer 74181 - 1522 1 1 1 1
19 Zapfenschraube / Retaining screw 74161 - 1121 1 1 1 1
20 Steuerkolben / Control piston 72104 - 1111 1 1 1 1 N
21 Förderkolben / Feed piston 72110 - 1211 1 1 1 1 N
22 Zylinderschraube M 8 x 20 DIN 7984 / Cheese head screw M 8 x 20 DIN 7984 74102 - 1244 2 2
23 Federring 8 DIN 7980 / Lock washer 8 DIN 7980 74185 - 3044 2 2
0,5 cm3 74162 - 3211 1 1 1 1
Zuteilschraube Fördermenge 0,4 cm3 74162 - 3221
24
Metering screw output volime 0,3 cm3 74162 - 3231
0,2 cm3 74162 - 3241
25 Platte / Plate 74342 - 3411 1 1
Die mit “E” gekennzeichneten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen. Die mit “N” gekennzeichneten Teile werden nicht als Ersatzteil geliefert.
Parts marked “E” are recommended to be kept on stock. Parts marked “N” are not supplied as spare.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
12
4/2 - way valve SA - V, 4/2 - way cock SA - H
APPLICATION
For hydraulic systems, particularly dual line system
centralised lubrication.

FEATURES
o Operation by means of a geared D.C. motor with high
torque ensuring reliable action even under unfavor-
able operating conditions (e.g. low temperatures or
tough lubricant).
o Because of the short action times, the plunger passes
through critical valve settings with little overlap, at high
speed, thereby avoiding premature wear.
o Each of the plunger end positions is electrically mo- CODE - NO.
nitoring by a limit switch.
o The motor’s overrun and direction of rotation have no 4/2-way valve SA - V
effect on the limit switch setting or the precision of the AC 110 - 127 V or
change-over. 200 - 240 V; Code no. 34133 - 1311
24 V DC; Code no. 34133 - 1411
o A transformer, rectifier and automatic cut-out are in-
corporated, for connection to a AC 110 - 127 V or 4/2-way cock SA - H
200 - 240 V supply. AC 110 - 127 V or
200 - 240 V; Code no. 34133 - 1321
24 V DC; Code no. 34133 - 1421

TECHNICAL DATA
Max. operating pressure ___________________ 400 bar
Ambient temperature ________ - 20 oC up to + 80 oC ACCESSORIES
Action time _________________________________ 0,5 s . . . . such as pipe unions and adapters see publication
Angle of rotation ____________________________ 180 o 73442/43 P 1e.
Torque ___________________________________ 18 Nm
Torque ____________________________________ 4 Nm
Mains voltage _________ AC 110 - 127 V or 200 - 240 V
_____________________________________ 24 V DC
EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION
Max. power consumption _____________________ 42 W
Protection __________________________________ IP 54
Installation position ____________________ any position
Weight ____________________________________ 13 kg

SA - V as reversing unit for dual line system

34133 PB 2e / 01 0794 1000Hf

replacement for 34133 PB 1e
 DIMENSIONS ( in mm )

For use as a 3/2-way valve close outlet B.

For use as a 2/2-way cock close both the B outlets.
Screw plug G 1/2 DIN 908 Code no. 74106 - 1264
Sealing ring A 22 x 27 DIN 7603-Cu Code no. 72712 - 1384

EXAMPLE OF APPLICATION MODE OF OPERATION (see page 4)

Installation may be in any orientation. The rotary movement of the D.C. motor (23) is transmitted
The connections to type SA-V are as follows : to the eccentric (14) mounted on a grooved ball bearing
(15) and is converted through the yoke (13) into a stroke of
P for pressure line
the plunger (30).
R for return line
A for main line I The limit switch (21) switches off the D.C. motor (23)
as soon as the plunger reaches its end postion opposite
B for main line II
to the one it started from.
The connections to type SA-H may be any way required.
AA main line I
BB main line II

2
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CHANGE IN VALVE SETTING AND
SWITCH POSITION

MAINTENANCE
SA - V and SA - H require practically no maintenance.

When changing the grooved rings, note:

Oil the new grooved rings.

Do not slide the grooved ring over the crossbore

3
 PARTS DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST

No. Pcs. Denomination Code no. No. Pcs. Denomination Code no.
— — 4/2-way valve SA-V, AC 110-127 V; 200-240 V 34133 - 1311 19 1 plate 74361 - 6132
— — 4/2-way valve SA-V, 24 V DC 34133 - 1411 power supply section
— — 4/2-way cock SA-H, AC 110-127 V; 200-240 V 34133 - 1321 4/2-way valve SA-V, AC 110-127 V; 200-240 V 66200 - 0011
— — 4/2-way cock SA-V, 24 V DC 34133 - 1421 20 1 4/2-way valve SA-V, 24 V DC 66200 - 0021
1 2 cheese-head screw M 5 x 35 74102 - 1084 4/2-way cock SA-H, AC 110-127 V; 200-240 V 66200 - 0011
name plate SA - V 75311 - 6322 4/2-way cock SA-V, 24 V DC 66200 - 0021
2 1
name plate SA - H 75311 - 6332 21 1 limit switch 76925 - 5623
3 2 washer A 6,4 DIN 125 - St 74185 - 1064 22 1 self-cutting nipple Pg 13,5 76927 - 2323
4 3 hexagon nut M 6 DIN 934 74175 - 1254 23 1 D.C. motor 24 V / 40 min-1 76911 - 1723
5 2 stud 74144 - 1711 name plate SA - V 75311 - 6361
24 1
6 2 pipe 73131 - 1361 name plate SA - H 75311 - 6371
7 1 cover 73731 - 1821 25 2 sealing ring A 6 x 10 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1034 E
8 4 cheese-head screw M 4 x 8 DIN 84 74104 - 1154 26 1 bush 71441 - 1761
9 1 base plate 74351 - 4521 27 1 cheese-head screw M 6 x 25 74102 - 1154
10 4 filister head screw AM 4 x 8 DIN 88 74104 - 1024 28 1 grooved ring 72713 - 5353 E
11 2 hexagon bolt M 8 x 16 DIN 933 74101 - 1324 housing SA - V consiting of part 64332 - 1411 N
— 1
12 2 spring washer 8 DIN 7980 74185 - 3044 housing SA - H part 29 and 30 64332 - 1421 N
13 1 yoke 74361 - 9231 29 1 housing 74331 - 8341 N
14 1 eccentric 71541 - 1311 plunger SA - V 72115 - 1421 N
30 1
15 1 grooved ball bearing 16003 DIN 625 71418 - 1324 plunger SA - H 72115 - 1411 N
16 1 toothed washer J 6,4 DIN 6797 74185 - 2524 Parts marked with ‘E’ are recommended for spare parts stock holding.
17 3 cheese-head screw M 6 x 16 74102 - 1134 Parts marked with ‘N’ are not available separately as spare parts.
18 3 spring washer 6 DIN 7980 74185 - 3034

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211-7774-0 ⋅ Fax: 0211-7774-210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
4/2 - Wegeventil SA - K hydraulisch gesteuert
4/2 - way valve SA - K hydraulically controlled

ABMESSUNGEN / DIMENSIONS (mm)

ANWENDUNG
Als hydraulisches Umsteuerventil für
o Zweileitungs - Zentralschmieranlagen
o Einleitungs - Zentralschmieranlagen
Die Konstruktion dieses 4/2-Wegeventiles sichert ei-
nen ständigen Austausch des Schmierstoffes in allen Ka-
nälen des Gerätes. Hierdurch werden Betriebsstörungen
durch Schmierstoffalterung und Verhärtung infolge von
Ölabscheidungen aus dem Fett und der daraus entste-
henden Seifenkonzentration vermieden.

APPLICATION
As a hydraulic change-over valve for
o dual-line central lubrication systems
o single-line central lubrication systems
The design of the 4/2-way valve ensures a permanent
exchange of the lubricant in all channels of the appliance.
This is to avoid operating troubles resulting from an
ageing and harding of the lubricant, which are due to
oil separations from the grease and to the resulting
soap concentration.

34135 PB 2 d + e / 03 0799HF
Ersatz für 34135PB 2/212881000
Replacement for 34135 PB 2e/212881000
 TECHNISCHE DATEN
Betriebsdruck max.: _______________________ 350 bar
Umsteuerdruck :
einstellbar von ______________________ 50 bis 350 bar
eingestellt auf ____________________________ 150 bar
Anschlußspannung des Grenztasters max.: _____ 500 V
Schaltstrom max.: ___________________________ 15 A
Schutzart des Grenztasters : __________________ IP 65
Überwachungsschalter : __________________ 10 - 30 V
Überwachungsschalter : ___________________ 200 mA
Rohranschlüsse : _______________ Innengewinde G 3/8
Betriebstemperatur : _____________ - 20oC bis + 80oC
Verwendbare Schmierstoffe:
Fette bis _________________ NLGI-Klasse 3 DIN 51818
Öle ab _________________ Betriebsviskosität 45 mm2s-1
Einbaulage ______________________________ beliebig
Gewicht ___________________________________ 4,4 kg
Bestell-Nr. mit Grenztaster : ____________ 34135 - 1211
Bestell-Nr. ohne Grenztaster : __________ 34135 - 1221
Bestell-Nr. mit Überwachungsschalter : __ 34135 - 1231
WIRKUNGSWEISE
Das 4/2-Wegeventil SA-K bewirkt bei jedem Druckan-
stieg am Anschluß P ein automatisches Umschalten auf
jeweils eine der beiden Hauptleitungen, die an den An-
schlüssen 1 und 2 angeschlossen sind, d.h. es werden
die beiden Hauptleitungen abwechselnd mit Druck beauf-
schlagt. Dabei ist die nicht mit Druck beaufschlagte
Hauptleitung mit dem Anschluß R verbunden.
Der Umsteuerdruck ist mit Hilfe eines Druckbegren-
zungs ventils bis max. 350 bar einstellbar. Es ist darauf zu-
achten, daß der Umsteuerdruck nicht über dem max.
Förderdruck der jeweiligen Schmierpumpe liegt. Ein
elektrischer Grenztaster meldet den jeweiligen Schaltzu-
stand des 4/2-Wegeventiles und ermöglicht ein Abschal-
ten der Pumpe nach Beendigung des Schmiervorganges.
Bei Einleitungsanlagen ist der Anschluß 2 mit einer
Verschlußschraube zu verschließen. Dadurch wird die
Funktion eines 3/2-Wegeventils erreicht.
Beim Drucktakt ist eine Verbindung vom Anschluß P
zum Anschluß 1 vorhanden und in der Pausenzeit vom An-
schluß 1 zum Anschluß R.
WARTUNG
Sollte das 4/2-Wegeventil nicht umsteuern, die
Pumpe jedoch den erforderlichen Druck aufbauen, ist zu
prüfen, ob der Umschaltdruck am 4/2-Wegeventil höher
eingestellt ist, als der Öffnungsdruck des Druckbegren-
zungsventils an der Pumpe.
Sollte das nicht der Fall sein, ist das 4/2-Wegeventil
aus der Anlage auszubauen und in seine Einzelteile zu
zerlegen.
Alle Teile sind in Benzin oder Petroleum auszuwa-
schen, zu kontrollieren, einzuölen und in der richtigen Rei-
henfolge zusammenzusetzen.
Beschädigte Teile sind auszuwechseln und die Dich-
tungen zu erneuern.
2
TECHNICAL DATA
Max. operating pressure : ___________________ 350 bar
Change-over pressure :
adjustable from ______________________ 50 to 350 bar
set to ____________________________________ 150 bar
Power supply to the limit switch max.: __________ 500 V
Switching current max.: _______________________ 15 A
Enclosure of limit switch : _____________________ IP 65
Monitoring switch : _______________________ 10 - 30 V
Monitoring switch : ________________________ 200 mA
Pipe connections : ____________ 3/8 BSP female thread
Service temperature : _____________ - 20oC to + 80oC
Type of lubricants :
Grease up to penetration ______NLGI-class 3 DIN 51818
Oil starting with viscosity of _______________ 45 mm2s-1
Installation : ______________________________ optional
Weight : ___________________________________ 4,4 kg
Code no. with limit switch : _____________ 34135 - 1211
Code no. without limit switch : __________ 34135 - 1221
Code no. with monitoring switch : _______ 34135 - 1231
MODE OF OPERATION
Every time there is a pressure rise at the connection P,
the 4/2-way valve causes an automatic change-over from
one to the other of the two main delivery lines which are
connected to the two connections 1 and 2, i.e. the two
main delivery lines are pressurized alternately. When one
main delivery line is pressurized, the other is connected to
the R connection.
The change-over pressure is adjustable up to maxi-
mum of 350 bars by means of a pressure relief valve. It ia
necessary to ensure that the change-over pressure does
not exceed the max. delivery pressure of the lubrication
pump being used. An electrical limit switch reports the po-
sitions which the 4/2-way valve is set and enables the
pump to be switched off on completion of the lubrication
operation. On single-line systems the connection 2 has to
be closed by means of a plug screw. The valve then opera-
tes as a 3/2-way valve.
During the pressurizing phases there is a free passage
from connection P to connection 1; during the intervals,
from connection 1 to connction R.
MAINTENANCE
If the change-over in the 4/2-way valve does not occur,
although the pump builts up the necessary pressure,
check whether the change-over pressure in the 4/2-way
valve has been set higher than the pressure at which the
pressure relief valve in the pump opens.
If that is not the case, disconnect and remove the
4/2-way valve and disassemble it into its separete parts.
Wash all parts in benzine or paraffin, check them, oil
them and reassemble them in the correct order after chan-
ging all the damaged parts and the sealings.
 ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG SPARE PARTS DRAWING

ERSATZTEILLISTE SPARE PARTS LIST

Pos. Stück Benennung Bestell - Nr.
Item Piece Designation Code no.
4/2-Wegeventil SA-K mit Grenztaster
--- --- 4/2-way valve SA-K with limit switch 34135 - 1211 --- ---

--- --- 4/2-Wegeventil SA-K ohne Grenztaster 34135 - 1221

4/2-way valve SA-K without limit switch
4/2-Wegeventil SA-K mit Überwachungsschalter
--- --- 4/2-way valve SA-K with monitoring switch 34135 - 1231

1 6 Verschlußschraube 74161 - 7941

Plug screw
Stopfen
2 6 Plug 71451 - 9111 E

3 1 Flansch 74354 - 5351

Flange
Kappe
4 1 Cap 73761 - 1271

3
 ERSATZTEILLISTE (Fortsetzung) SPARE PARTS LIST (continued)
Pos. Stück Benennung Bestell - Nr.
Item Piece Designation Code no.
Druckfeder
5 1 Compression spring 71617 - 9141

6 1 Sechskantmutter M 12 x 1,5 DIN 936 - 8 74175 - 1424

Hexagon nut M 12 x 1,5 DIN 936 - 8
Schraube
7 1 Screw 74161 - 1171

8 1 Kerbstift 6 x 60 DIN 1475 74225 - 4054

Spindle 6 x 60 DIN 1475
Federteller
9 2 Spring cup 71641 - 4141

10 6 Zylinderschraube M 6 x 60 DIN 7984 74102 - 1194

Cylinder head screw M 6 x 60 DIN 7984
Federring 6 DIN 7980
11 6 Lock washer 6 DIN 7980 74185 - 3034

--- 1 Gehäuse bestehend aus: Pos. 12 bis 14 64331 - 5411 N

Housing consisting of: item 12 to item 14
Kolben
12 1 Piston 72108 - 2521 N

13 3 Kolben 72108 - 2531 N

Piston
Gehäuse
14 1 Housing 74331 - 7951 N

15 1 Überwurfschraube 73400 - 3121

Cap screw
16 1 Scheibe 74181 - 1621
Disc
Nutring
17 1 Groove ring 72713 - 9093 E

18 1 Verschraubung 74161 - 6591

Screw joint
Bewegungszeiger
19 1 Movement indicator 64161 - 6111 64161 - 6121 E

20 1 Winkel 74361 - 4331 ---

Angle
Grenztaster
21 1 Limit switch 76925 - 5153 ---

22 1 Verschraubung C 4 Pg 11 x 6 - 11 DIN 46320 - Ms 76927 - 1263 ---

Screw joint C 4 Pg 11 x 6 - 11 DIN 46320 - Ms
Zylinderschraube M 4 x 25 DIN 912 - 8.8
23 2 Cylinder head screw M 4 x 25 DIN 912 - 8.8 74102 - 1684 ---

24 2 Scheibe A 4,3 DIN 125 - St 74185 - 1034 ---

Disc A 4,3 DIN 125 - St
Zylinderschraube M 4 x 25 DIN 7984
25 2 Cylinder head screw M 4 x 25 DIN 7984 74102 - 1014 ---

26 2 Federring 4 DIN 7980 74185 - 3014 ---

Lock washer 4 DIN 7980
Überwachungsschalter bestehend aus: Pos. 27 bis 30
--- 1 Monitoring switch consisting of: item 27 to item 30 --- 66925 - 1211

27 1 Näherungsschalter mit Ring --- 66925 - 1221

Proximity switch with ring
Überwurfschraube
28 1 Cap screw --- 73511 - 5731

29 1 Anschlußstück --- 73662 - 2971

Adapter
Gewindestift M 4 x 5 DIN 914
30 1 Thread pin M 4 x 5 DIN 914 --- 74107 - 2474

31 1 Schraube --- 74161 - 6561

Screw

Die mit “E” gekennzeicheten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen.

Die mit “N” gekenzeichneten Teile werden nicht als Ersatzteile geliefert.
Parts marked with “E” are recommended for spare parts stock holding.
Parts marked with “N” are not available separately as spare parts.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211-7774-0 ⋅ Fax: 0211-7774-210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Operating Instructions

for

SG–A – type E.O.L differential switch

Index
Page
1. General ............................................................................................... 2
2. Application .......................................................................................... 2
3. Safety ................................................................................................. 2
4. Design ................................................................................................ 3
5. Mode of operation ............................................................................... 3
6. Drawing (measurement) ..................................................................... 4
7. Technical data .................................................................................... 4
8. Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 5
9. Spare parts drawing and Spare parts list ........................................... 6
10. Disassembly and Assembly ............................................................... 7
11. Maintenance ....................................................................................... 8
12. Operating troubles and their reasons ................................................. 8

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 1 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions!
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they are necessary for the improvement of the differential
pressure unit SG-A.
The copyright on this operating instructions is kept reserved to Mssrs. Firma DELIMON Vertriebs-
gesellschaft mbH. These operating instructions are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising
personnel. They contain technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely not partially be
reproduced or distributed. It is also prohibited to use or convey them without authority to any persons for
competition purposes.
Firm address, adress for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
2. Application
The switching device SG-A is used as differential pressure switch in dual-line centralized lubrication system.
When the differtial pressure is 50 bar and/or 100 bar, it releases a pulse for the reversion of the directional
control valve or for the monitoring of the system.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product’s intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.
3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the competent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user ar to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
to life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case of warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

If it deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Signs that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for exemple
• arrow for rotation directions
• mark for fluid connections
must be all means be observed and maintained in a completely legible condition.
Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
Any modification or change to the machine are at all events subject to prior consent by the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The use of any other
parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 2 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
4. Design
(item nos. see spare parts drawing, page 6)
The switching device SG-A consists of a housing (item nos. 1 to 7 and 11 to 14) with a metallically sealing
piston (item no. 12), which is held in its mid-position by means of two compression springs (item no. 5).
Furthermore, it consists of a limit switch (item no. 15), which is fixed in its position by means of a safety plate
(item no. 8) an a plate (item no. 9), on which these parts are fixed.

5. Principle of operation

(item nos. see spare parts drawing, page 6)

With lubricating cycle 1, lubricant is supplied to main line A. Main line B is relieved. Due to the pressure
build-up in main line A, the piston (item no. 12) is deísplaced downwards against the springiness of the
lower compression spring (item no. 5). When the differential pressure between the two main lines is approx.
50 bar and/or 100 bar, the contacts 1 and 2 are closed via the piston (item no. 12) at the limit switch (item
no. 15). Due to this pulse, the 4/2-way valve is reversed via the electric control of the system.

The reversion of the 4/2-way valve causes lubricating cycle no. 2 to start, and lubricant is supplied to main
line B while main line A is relieved. Due to the pressure build-up in main line B, the piston (item no. 12) is
displaced upwards against the springliness of the upper compression spring (item no. 5). When the
pressure difference between the two main lines is approx. 50 bar and/or 100 bar, the contacts 3 and 4 are
closed via the piston (item no. 12) at the limit switch (item no. 15), and a new reversion process is initiated.

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 3 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
6. Drawing with dimensions (in mm)

7. Technical data
Pressure differential : ........................................................................................................... 50 oder 100 bar
Operating pressure : ................................................................................................................ max. 400 bar
Output volume : ................................................................................................................................ 0,7 mm³
Rated voltage : ....................................................................................................................... max. AC 500 V
Contact rating : .......................................................................................................... min. 10 mA at DC 24 V
Contact rating : .............................................................................................................................. max. 15 A
Power rating at 500 V : ............................................................................................................ max. 7500 VA
Protective system : ................................................................................................................................ IP 65
Compatible lubricants on mineraloil basis :
Lubricant greases NLGI-class 000 up to 3 DIN 51818 (51825)
Oils with a viscosity from 190 mm²/s at operating temperature
Synthetic lubricants upon request
Ambient temperature : ......................................................................................... between -20°C and +80°C
Installation position : .......................................................................................................................... optional
Weight : ................................................................................................................................................... 3 kg

Order no. Pressure differential

34184 - 1311 50 bar
34184 - 1321 100 bar

Switching diagram

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 4 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
8. Installation and Commissioning
The switching device SG-A is arranged before the lubricant distributor, which is the last to be reached by the
pressure build-up in the main lines. Normally, this is the lubricant distributor having the greatest distance to
the 4/2-way valve.
• The switching device is fixed with 2 screws M8. It can be installed in any position desired.

• The electric connection of the differential switch are to be effected by qualified staff only. The local
electric instructions must be observed.
ATTENTION

• Take care that the lubricant lines are clean and free from chips or other impurities. Dirt particles are the
most frequent reason for failures and damages.

• The switching device must not be pressurized with a service pressure exceeding 400 bar.
• Prior to commissioning of the system, the switching device should be deaerated.

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 5 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
9. Spare parts drawing and Spare parts list

item Denomination Order no. Pcs.

- Differential switch SG-A 34184 - 1311 •
34184 - 1321 •
- Housing consisting of part no. 64334 - 1221 1
1 up to 7 and 11 up to 14 64334 - 1241 1
1 Screw plug 74161 - 8721 1 1
2 Copper washer A22x27 72712 - 1384 2 2 E
DIN 7603-Cu
3 Groove ring 72713 - 9093 1 1 E
4 Ring 74181 - 2621 1 1
5 Compression spring 71616 - 7171 2
71616 - 7181 2
6 Washer B 10,5 DIN 125-St 74185 - 1084 2 2
- Housing consisting of part no. 64334 - 1221 1 1 N
7 and 12
7 Housing 74331 - 8161 1 1 N
8 Safety plate 74182 - 5241 1 1
9 Mounting plate 74361 - 5111 1 1
10 Cheese-head screw M6x12 74102 - 1124 4 4
DIN 7984
11 Screw plug 74161 - 8711 1 1
12 Piston 72112 - 1121 1 1 N
13 Cap nut 73400 - 3121 1 1
14 Indicator pin 64161 - 6111 1 1 E
15 Limit switch 76925 - 5113 1 1
16 Cheese-head screw M5x16 74102 - 1044 4 4
DIN 7984
17 Disk A5,3 DIN 125-St 74185 - 1054 4 4

Parts marked with "E" are recommended to be kept on stock.

Parts marked with “N“ are not supplied individually as spare parts.

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 6 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
10. Disassembly and Assembly
(items see spare parts drawing, page 6)
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kinds of works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.
ATTENTION
During disassembly and assembly of the switching devices SG-A, take at all avents care for cleanliness
because dirt particles might casue failures and damages.
Take care that the housing (item no. 7) and the limit switch (item no. 15) are adjusted to a switching
pressure of 50 and/0r 100 bar by the safety plate (item no. 8). To avoid a modification of an adjustment,
never remove the housing and the limit switch simultaneously from the plate (item no. 9).
If it necessary to exchange pieces, which affect the adjustment, e.g. limit switch (item no. 15), compression
spring (item no. 5) or housing (item no. 7), the switching pressure has to be adjusted anew to be fixed by
bending up the tongues of a new safety plate (item no. 8).

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Protect differential switch against unintended actuation and disconnect it electrically by qualified staff.
• Remove differential switch from the machine and/or the system.
• Loosen cheese-head screws (item no. 16) and remove disks (item no. 17) with limit switch (item no. 15).
• Loosen plugs (item no. 1 and 11) and take off seal rings (item no. 2), ring (item no. 4), compression
spring (item no. 5) with disks (item no. 6).
• Remove groove ring (item no. 3) from plug (item no. 1).
• Pull piston (item no. 12) out of the housing (item no. 7).
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether.
• Check parts for damages.
• Exchange damaged parts and old sealings by new ones.
• Assemble differential switch in reverse order.
ATTENTION

• If the limit switch (item no. 15) is exchanged by compression springs (item no. 5), the switching device
has to be adjusted anew.
Bend down the tongues of the safety plate (item no. 8) for the adjustment of the limit switch
(item no. 15).
Fix the limit switch with the cheese-head screws (item no. 16) in such a way that the contact bridge is
located right in the middler between the contacts 1-2 and 3-4. Then refix the position of the limit switch
(item no. 15) anew by bending up the tongues of the safety plate (item no. 8).

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 7 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
10. Disassembly and Assembly (continue)

• Mount differential switch to the machine and/or the system.

• Make electric connection of differential switch by qualified staff and remove protection against unintended
actuation.
ATTENTION

• Actuate the system and/or the machine until lubricant comes air bubble-free out of the connections of the
main lines behind the switching device. Only then tighten the union pieces of the main lines (not before).

• Dispose of oil remnants and cleanser according to rule.

11. Maintenance
The differential switch requires maintenance only, and these are no further measures required to maintain
the differential switch ready for operation.
The following points should be observed:
• Do not use aggressive media to clean the differential switch. Use Naphtha or petroleum ether only.
• Use clean lubricant only to fill the lubricant pump. Avoid all kinds of impurities as dirt particles are the
most frequentl reason for failures and damages.
• Different kinds of lubricant must not be mixed.

12. Operating troubles and their reasons

Early wear of the mobile parts and the sealings is mainly caused by polluted lubricant.
Failures within the system can above all occur if the lubricant lines are not deaerated perfectly.

34184 PB 1e / 5. edition 05 00HF Page 8 of 8

Replacement for 34184 PB 1e / 4. 9809Wi
Druckbegrenzungsventil SA - G
Pressure relief valve SA - G
ANWENDUNG ABMESSUNGEN / DIMENSIONS (mm)
Das Druckbegrenzungsventil SA-G wird vorzugswei-
se als Sicherheitsventil eingesetzt. Die Anlagen werden
durch das SA-G vor Überdruck geschützt. Anwendung
vorzugsweise in Verlustschmiersystemen.

APPLICATION
The relief valve is preferably used as safety valve to pro-
tect central lubrication systems from overpressure. It is suit-
able especially in total-loss systems.

MERKMALE
• Der einfache Aufbau gewährleistet eine lange Lebens-
dauer.
• Die robuste Ausführung garantiert Wartungsfreiheit

CHARACTERISTICS
• simple configuration thus guaranteeing a long life
• the sturdy construction ensures a minimum of
maintenance

TECHNISCHE DATEN TECHNICAL DATA

Öffnungsdruck : _____________ einstellbar 0 bis 400 bar
Temperaturbereich: ______________ - 20 oC bis + 80 oC
Durchflußmedium:
Mineralöle : ___________ über 190 cst Betriebsviskosität
Fette : _________________ bis Walkpenetrationsklasse 3
Einbaulage : _____________________________ beliebig
Gewicht : __________________________________ 1,5 kg
Bestell-Nr.: __________________________ 38131 - 2111
Response pressure : ___ adjustable from 0 up to 400 bar
Range of temperature : ____________ - 20 oC to + 80 oC
Flow media :
Mineral oils : __________ above 190 cSt service viscosity
Grease : __________ up to walk penetration NLGI class 3
Installation : _____________________________ at choice
Weight : ___________________________________ 1.5 kg
Code no.: ___________________________ 38131 - 2111

WIRKUNGSWEISE MODE OF OPERATION

Tritt in der Zentralschmieranlage ein Druck auf, der
über dem eingestellten Wert liegt, kann der Schmierstoff
über die Rücklaufleitung (R) zum drucklosen Saugraum
der Schmierpumpe fließen, bis der Überdruck abgebaut
ist.
In the event of a pressure in a central lubrication system
rising in excess of the pre-set rating, lubricant is allowed to
return via the return line (R) into the depressurized pump
suction chamber, as long as the overpressure situation has
been overcome.

38131 PB 1 d + e / 02 0600 / Ersatz für 38131/32 PB 1 / 01 0697HF

 EINBAU
Für die Befestigung sind Zylinderschrauben M 6 x 40
DIN 7984 vorgesehen. Die Druckleitung wird am Anschluß
(P), die Rücklaufleitung wird am Anschluß (R) befestigt.
Sicherheitshinweis:
Austritt (R) des Ventils ist so zu justieren, daß dieser nicht
auf den Arbeitsbereich von Personen gerichtet ist.
INSTALLATION
The cheese-head screws M 6 x 40 DIN 7984 supplied
are used for fastening. The pressure line is connected to
port (P), and the return line to port (R).
Caution!
Outlet port (R) of valve is to be so positioned as to ensure
that it is not showing towards the area where the personnel
is working.

EINSTELLUNG
Zur Erhöhung des Einstelldruckes ist die Gewinde-
spindel im Uhrzeigersinn bzw. zur Verringerung entgegen
dem Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen, wobei die Feder im Inneren
gespannt bzw. entspannt wird.
SETTING
In order to in crease the setting pressure turn the allan
screw (SW4) clockwise, or to decrease anti-clockwise re-
spectively, whereby the inner spring is being tightened or
relaxed respectively.

ZUBEHÖR ACCESSORIES
. . . wie Rohrverschraubungen und Übergangsstutzen siehe Tube connectors or adaptor pieces study printlets
Druckschrift 73442/43 P 1 und 73490/91 P 1. 73442/43 P 1e and 73490/91 P 1.

ERSATZTEILLISTE UND ERSATZTEILZEICHNING

SPARE PARTS LIST AND SPARE PARTS DRAWING

Pos. Stück Benennung Bestell - Nr.

Part Piece Designation Code no.
no.
Druckbegrenzungsventil SA-G
—- —- 38131 - 2111
Pressure relief valve SA-G
Vierkantschraube M 10 x 50 DIN 480
1 1 74105 - 1513
Square screw M 10 x 50 DIN 480
Bundmutter M 10
2 1 74171 - 5253
Knurled nut M 10
Federteller
3 2 71641 - 3421
Cup spring
Druckfeder
4 1 71616 - 7151
Compression spring
Hülse
5 1 71461 - 3621
Sleeve
Dichtring A 28,5 x 32 DIN 7603-Cu
6 1 Copper washer A 28,5 x 32 71712 - 1574 E
DIN 7603-Cu
Ventileinsatz bestehend aus:
— 1 Pos. 7 + 8 63611 - 1131 E
Valve assy comprising parts 7 and 8
Gehäuse
7 1 74332 - 8741 N
Housing
Kolben
8 1 72105 - 1141 N
Piston
RDR 5,28 x 1,78 DIN 3770 - NB 90
9 1 72711 - 1173
O-ring 5,28 x 1,78 DIN 3770 - NB 90
Gehäuse
10 1 74331 - 7971
Housing
Die mit ,,E’’ gekennzeichneten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung
empfohlen.
Die mit ,,N’’ gekennzeichneten Teile werden nicht einzeln als Ersatzteil
geliefert.
The parts marked “E” are recommended to be kept on stock.
The parts marked “N” are not supplied as single parts.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Druckbegrenzungsventil NU - A
Pressure relief valve NU - A
ANWENDUNG TECHNISCHE DATEN
Das Druckbegrenzungsventil NU-A wird vorzugswei- Öffnungsdruck : ____________ einstellbar 15 bis 300 bar
se als Sicherheitsventil in Mehrleitungs- und Progressiv- Betriebstemperatur : ____________ - 20 oC bis + 120 oC
Anlagen eingesetzt. Die Zentralschmieranlagen werden Durchflußmedium:
durch das Druckbegrenzungsventil NU-A vor Überdruck Schmierfette __ auf Mineralölbasis NLGI-Klasse 000
gesichert. _____________________________ bis 3 DIN 51818
Mineralöle ______ mit einer Viskosität über 68 mm²/s
APPLICATION _________________________ bei Betriebstemperatur
Einbaulage : _____________________________ beliebig
The NU-A type pressure relief valve is used as safety Gewicht : _________________________________ 0,03 kg
valve to protect central lubrication systems from overpres-
sure. It is suitable especially in multi-line systems and
progressive systems. TECHNICAL DATA
Response pressure : __ adjustable from 15 up to 300 bar
Operating temperature : __________ - 20 oC to + 120 oC
Flow media :
Lubricant greases ___________ based on mineral oil
MERKMALE _________________ NLGI-class 000 to 3 DIN 51818
Mineral oils _______ with a viscosity above 68 mm²/s
• Es kann für alle Arten von Zentralschmieranlagen ver- _______________________ at operating temperature
wendet werden, soweit diese im Druckbereich von 15
Installation : _____________________________ at choice
bis 300 bar arbeiten.
Weight : __________________________________ 0.03 kg
• Einfacher Aufbau, dadurch preisgünstig, wartungs-
frei, leicht einstellbar.
• Geringe Abmessungen Einstellbereich eingestellt Durchfluß- Bestell - Nr.
auf medium
Setting range set to Flow media Code no.
CHARACTERISTICS Fett oder Öl
15 - 70 bar 16 bar 38132 - 1211
grease or oil
• It can be used for all kinds of centralized lubrication
Fett oder Öl
systems as far as the latter work in the pressure range 15 - 70 bar 70 bar
grease or oil
38132 - 1221
between 15 and 300 bar.
Fett oder Öl
• Simple configuration, thus low price, maintenance- 50 - 200 bar 160 bar
grease or oil
38132 - 1231
free, and easy to set.
Fett
• Reduces space. 100 - 300 bar 200 bar grease 38132 - 1241

Fett
100 - 300 bar 300 bar grease 38132 - 1251

ABMESSUNGEN / DIMENSIONS (mm)

38132 PB 1 d + e / 02 0900HF
Ersatz für 38132 PB 1 / 01 9703Wi
 WIRKUNGSWEISE
Tritt in der Zentralschmieranlage ein Druck auf, der
über dem eingestellten Wert liegt, wird ein federbelasteter
Kolben (4) angehoben, wodurch der Schmierstoff ins
Freie oder über eine Rücklaufleitung zum Pumpenbehäl-
ter bzw. zum Saugraum der Pumpe zurückfließt.
MODE OF OPERATION
In the event of a pressure in a central lubrication system
rising the excess of the pre-set rating, the spring-loaded pi-
ston (4) is raised thus allowing the lubricant to escape into
the open air or to flow back via a return line into the
pump reservoir or into the pump suction chamber.

Darstellung enspricht
Bestell - Nr.
Picture corresponds to
code no.
38132 - 1211
38132 - 1221
38152 - 1231

Darstellung enspricht
Bestell - Nr.
Picture corresponds to
code no.
38132 - 1241
38132 - 1251

EINBAUVORSCHLÄGE SUGGESTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

EINBAU
Zum Einbau wird in die vor Überdruck zu schützen-
de Druckleitung eine T-Verschraubung für Rohr Ø 10 ein-
gesetzt und in den freien Anschluß das Druckbegren-
zungsventil so eingesetzt, daß die Einstellschraube
sichtbar bleibt.
Wird eine Rücklaufleitung vorgesehen, ist diese erst zu be-
festigen, wenn der Ansprechdruck eingestellt ist.
INSTALLATION
Into the pressure line to be protected against overpres-
sure a Tee connector for tube 10 mm dia. will be fitted; the
relief valve is to be located towards the free connection as
to ensure that the setting screw remains visible.
In lubrication systems where a return line is provided, con-
nect the line only when the response pressure rating has
been set.

2
 SICHERHEITSHINWEISE
ACHTUNG
Den Öffnungsdruck des Druckbegrenzungsventils nie
höher einstellen als den maximal zulässigen Betriebs-
druck der Zentralschmieranlage.
Der Schmierstoff kann je nach Anlagendruck - wenn
das Druckbegrenzungsventil öffnet - unter hohem Druck
austreten. Deshalb muß, wenn an Anschluß ”R” keine
Rücklaufleitung angeschlossen ist, das Druckbegren-
zungsventil so justiert werden, daß seine Öfnung nicht auf
Personen, Arbeitsplätze und Maschinen gerichtet ist.
Ist durch Justierung des Druckbegrenzungsventils
keine ausreichende Sicherheit für Personen, Arbeitsplätze
und Maschinen zu erreichen, muß am Anschluß ”R” des
Druckbegrenzungsventils ein Ableitrohr montiert werden.
Bei Nichtbeachtung der Arbeitssicherheits-Hinweise
besteht Gefahr für Leib und Leben von Personen.
EINSTELLUNG
Zur Erhöhung des Einstelldruckes ist die Innensechs-
kantschraube (6) (SW 4) im Uhrzeigersinn zu drehen, wo-
bei die Feder (5) in der Hülse (8) gespannt wird. Nach
Beenden der Einstellung muß der Spannstift (7) mit einem
Dorn soweit in die Hülse (8) geschoben werden, bis er auf
der Innensechskantschraube (6) aufliegt.
Zur Verringerung des Einstelldruckes ist die Innensechs-
kantschraube (6) (SW 4) entgegen dem Uhrzeigersinn zu
drehen, wobei die Feder (5) in der Hülse (8) entspannt
wird.
ZUBEHÖR
Verschraubungen, Anschlußstücke und Rohre müssen
gesondert bestellt werden.
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
SAFETY ADVICE
ATTENTION
Never adjust the opening pressure of the pressure relief
valve to a higher value than the max. allowed service pres-
sure of the centralized lubrication system.
Depending on the system pressure, the lubricant may -
when the pressure relief valve opens - escape under high
pressure. Therefore it is essential, if there is no return line
connected to connection ”R”, to adjust the pressure relief
valve in such a way that its opening is not directed towards
persons, working places or machines.
If it is impossible to obtain a sufficient security for per-
sons, working places and machines by adjustment of the
presure relief valve, a drain pipe has to be mounted at con-
nection ”R” of the pressure relief valve.
The nonobservance of the working safety advice
means danger to life and limb of persons.
SETTING
To increase the set pressure, turn the hexagon socket
screw (6) (wrench size across flats 4) clockwise. This ten-
sions the spring (5) in the sleeve (8). When the adjustment
is finished, push the tension pin (7) with a drift into the slee-
ve (8) until it lies on the hexagon socket screw (6).
To decrease the set pressure, turn the hexagon socket
screw (6) (wrench size across flats 4) anticlockwise. This
release the spring (5) in the sleeve (8).
ACCESSORIES
Union pieces, connection pieces and pipes have to be
specified separately on the order.
3/2 - Wegeventil SA - E mit Druckregel- und Druckbegrenzungsfunktion
3/2 - way valve SA - E with pressure control + pressure limiting functions

ANWENDUNG
Vielseitige Anwendung als pneumatisch gesteuertes
3/2-Wegeventil, 2/2-Wegeventil, Wegeventil mit Druck-
regelfunktion, Druckbegrenzungsventil, Druckverstärker-
pumpe.
Für alle Arten von Schmieranlagen verwendbar, je-
doch auch für Anwendungen in der Hydraulik geeignet.
Zentralversorgungs- und Hallenzentralschmieranlagen
können zum Anschluß aller vorkommenden Schmier-,
Sprüh- und Befüllungssysteme mit und ohne zusätzliche
Schmierpumpen benutzt werden.
Es können beliebige Schmiergruppen mit unter-
schiedlichen Drücken angeschlossen werden.

APPLICATION
Versatile application as pneumatically controlled
3/2-way valve, 2/2-way valve, directional control valve with
pressure controlling, pressure relief valve, pressure boo-
ster pump.
Useable for all types of lubricating systems but particu-
larly suited for hydraulic applications.
Central supply and hall centre lubrications systems
can be used for connection to all lubricating, spray and
filling systems with and without additional lubrication
pumps.
Any lubricating groups with different pressures may be
connected.

VORTEILE ADVANTAGES
o Preisgünstige Anschaffung o Low priced unit
o Einfacher Aufbau o Problem-free configuration
o Wartungsfrei o Maintenance-free
o Kompakte und robuste Bauweise o Compact + sturdy construction
o Lange Lebensdauer o Long life time
o Kurze Schaltzeiten o Short switching times
o Einleitungs-, Zweileitungs- und Progressiv - Zentral- o Single-line, dual-line, and progressive central lubrica-
schmieranlagen können preisgünstig und funktions- ting systems can be pneumatically controlled cheply
gerecht pneumatisch gesteuert werden. and reliably.

FUNKTION PRINCIPLE OF FUNCTION

Das 3/2-Wegeventil SA - E wird pneumatisch betätigt The 3/2-way valve SA - E is pneumatically controlled
und besitzt eine zusätzliche Druckregel- und Druckbe- and has an additional pressure control and pressure
grenzungsfunktion. limiting function.

38141 P 1 d + e / 01 02 2000Hf
Ersatz für 38141PB 1 d+e/05 0799HF
 TECHNISCHE DATEN
Zulässige Drücke :
Betriebsdruck Anschluß 1 und 3 ________ max. 400 bar
Betriebsdruck Anschluß 2 ______________ max. 100 bar
Steuerdruck Anschluß 4 und 5 ________ max. 6 bar
Geeignete Medien :
alle Schmierfette auf Mineralölbasis bis
NLGI-Klasse 3, DIN 51818
alle Schmier- und Hydrauliköle auf Mineralölbasis
Steuermedien : ___ Druckluft und nichtaggressive Gase
Steuervolumen : ____________________________ 0,15 l
Verhältnis der Kolbenfläche : ________________ 1 : 100
Fördervolumen je Hub bei Benutzung als
Druckverstärkerpumpe : ___________________ 1,5 cm3
Anschlüsse 1, 2 und 3 für den Schmierstoff _____ G 3/8
Anschlüsse 3 und 4 für das Steuermedium _____ G 1/4
Betriebstemperatur : ____________ - 20oC bis + 80oC
Einbaulage : _____________________________ beliebig
Gewicht : ___________________________________ 8 kg
Bestell-Nr.: __________________________ 38141 - 1111
ABMESSUNGEN (mm)
2
TECHNICAL DATA
Permissible pressures :
Operating pressure Port 1 and 3 ________ max. 400 bar
Operating pressure Port 2 _____________ max. 100 bar
Control pressure Port 4 and 5 ________ max. 6 bar
Suitable media :
all lubricating grease on a mineral base up to
NLGI-class 3, DIN 51818
all lubricating and hydraulic oils on a mineral base
Control media : compres. air and non-aggressive gases
Control volume : ___________________________ 0.15 ltr.
Piston area ratio : __________________________ 1 : 100
Output volume per stroke when used as
pressure booster pump : ___________________ 1.5 cm3
Ports 1, 2 and 3 for the lubricant _______________ G 3/8
Ports 3 and 4 for the control medium ___________ G 1/4
Service temperature : __________ - 20oC up to + 80oC
Installation : ______________________________ optional
Weight : ____________________________________ 8 kg
Code no.: ___________________________ 38141 - 1111
DIMENSIONS (mm)
 AUFBAU UND WIRKUNGSWEISE
Bild 1
Schaltstellung 1
Im Ventilgehäuse ist ein Differentialkolben mit einem
Kolbenflächenverhältnis von 1 : 100 angeordnet.
Der Aufbau des 3/2-Wegeventils SA - E ist für alle Anwen-
dungsarten gleich. Durch unterschiedlichen Anschluß der
Druck-, Rücklauf-, Haupt- und Steuerleitungen werden
die beiden Hauptfunktionen des Ventils einzeln oder in be-
liebiger Kombination ausgenutzt.
Wird der Anschluß 5 mit einem Steuerdruck P 5 = > als
0,01 von P 1 beaufschlagt (Schaltstellung 1) sind die An-
schlüsse 1 und 3 miteinander verbunden. Anschluß 2 ist
verschlossen.
Bild 2
Schaltstellung 2
Das Umschalten in Schaltstellung 2 setzt das Wegfallen
des Steuerdruckes P 5 voraus und geschieht entweder
durch den am Anschluß 1 anstehenden Druck des Medi-
ums oder durch einen Steuerdruck P 4 am Anschluß 4.
Hierbei sind die Anschlüsse 1 und 2 verbunden und An-
schluß 3 ist verschlossen.
Durch das Kolbenflächenverhältnis 1 : 100 verhalten sich
auch die Drücke P 5 zu P 1 wie 1 : 100. Durch Einstellen ei-
nes Steuerdruckes P 5 läßt sich die Verbindung der An-
schlüsse 1 und 3 bzw. 1 und 2 druckabhängig steuern.
DESIGN AND MODE OF OPERATION
Fig. 1
Valve position 1
A differential piston with a piston area ratio of 1 : 100 is
arranged in the valve housing.
The construction of the 3/2-way valve SA - E is the same for
all types of application. The two mainfunctions of the valve
are used individually or in any combination by different con-
nection of the pressure, return, main and control lines.
If a control pressure P 5 = > at 0,01 from P 1 is applied to
the port 5 (valve position 1), port 1 and port 3 are connected
with each other. Port 2 is blocked.
Fig. 2
Valve position 2
The change-over in valve position 2 assumes that the
control pressure P 5 is removed and is effected either by
the pressure of the medium against port 1 or a control pres-
sure P 4 at port 4.
Port 1 and port 2 are now connected and port 3 is closed.
Though the piston area ratio 1 : 100, pressure P 5 and P 1
act at a ration of 1 : 100. By setting a control pressure P 5,
the connection of port 1 and port 3 or 1 and 2 can be
controlled as a function of pressure.
3
 ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG UND ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST

Pos. Stück Benennung Bestell - Nr.

Item Piece Designation Code no.
--- --- 3/2-Wegeventil SA - E / 3/2-way valve SA - E 38141 - 1111
--- 1 Gehäuse bestehend aus: Pos. 1 und 2 64332 - 1211 N
Housing consisting of: item 1 and item 2
1 1 Gehäuse / Housing 74331 - 8911 N
2 1 Kolben / Piston 72110 - 1411 N
Zylinderschraube M 6 x 16 DIN 7984
3 6 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 7984 74102 - 1134
4 1 Winkel / Angle 74361 - 9612
5 1 Nutring NI 300 / 20 - 10 - 7 / Groove ring NI 300 / 20 - 10 - 7 72713 - 5963 E
6 1 Scheibe / Disc 74181 - 4171
7 1 Sicherungsring 22 x 1,5 DIN 472 / Circlip 22 x 1,5 DIN 472 74186 - 1774
8 1 Scheibe / Disc 74181 - 4141
9 1 Komplettkolben 100 / Piston compl. 100 72184 - 1623 E
10 1 Deckel / Cover 74354 - 5121
11 1 Scheibe B 13 DIN 125 St / Disc B 13 DIN 125 St 74185 - 1094
12 1 Spannstift 3 x 16 DIN 1481 / Pin 3 x 16 DIN 1481 74225 - 5044
13 1 Kronenmutter M 12 x 1 DIN 979 / Nut M 12 x 1 DIN 979 74175 - 2213
Runddichtring 90 x 3 NBR 70 DIN 3771
14 1 72711 - 1813 E
O-ring 90 x 3 NBR 70 DIN 3771
Die mit “E” gekennzeicheten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen.
Die mit “N” gekenzeichneten Teile werden nicht einzeln als Ersatzteile geliefert.
Parts marked with “E” are recommended for spare parts stock holding.
Parts marked with “N” are not available separately as spare parts.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Druckbegrenzungsventil, einstellbar
Pressure limiting valve, adjustable
Soupape de limitation des pression,
ANWENDUNG
Die Druckbegrenzungsventile
werden für Öl - Umlaufanlagen ein-
gesetzt. Der gewünschte Öffnungs-
druck kann stufenlos und beliebig oft
mit Hilfe des Stellknopfes eingestellt
werden. Eine Kap pe schützt den
Stellknopf vor unerwünschter Betäti-
gung.
ABMESSUNGEN (mm)
APPLICATION
Pressure limiting valves are used
for oil circulation systems. The desi-
red opening pressure can be regula-
ted steplessly and at any rate of fre-
quency by means of the adjusting
knob. A cap prevents the adjusting
knob from unwanted actuation.
DIMENSIONS (mm)
réglable
APPLICATION
Les soupapes de limitation de
pression sont utilisées dans les in-
stallations de circulation d’huile. La
pression d’ouverture désirée peut
être réglée en continu et à la fré-
quence voulue à l’aide du bouton
de commande qu’un couvercle de
sûreté préserve de manoeuvres in-
tempestives.
DIMENSIONS (mm)
38191 P 1 d, e, f / 2 0490HF
 TECHNISCHE DATEN SPECIFICATION CARACTERISTIQUES
TECHNIQUES
Max. Druck in der Max. pressure in the
Rücklaufleitung T : ___________ 50 bar return line T : _______________ 50 bar Pression maximum dans la
Gewicht : ________________ ca. 1,3 kg Weight : _____________ approx. 1.3 kos conduite de retour T : _________ 50 bar
Poids : _________________ env. 1,3 kg

Typ Einstellbereich Druckanstieg (bar) mit einem Durchflußstrom Max. Durch- Bestell - Nr.
von … l/min flußstrom

Type Range of adjustment Pressure increase (bar) at a flow max. flow Code no.
of … l/min

Type Domaine d’ajustage Augmentation de pression (bar) pour un débit max. No. de
bar débit de … l/min commande
p min p max 2,5 40 100 ( l/min )
Ük 18 - 20 1 20 0,5 2 4 100 38191 - 1113
Ük 18 - 70 5 70 0,6 6 14 100 38191 - 1123

BEDIENUNG OPERATION COMMANDE

Durch Rechtsdrehen der Kordel- By turning the knurled screw to Pour augmenter la pression P
schraube erhöht sich der Anlagen- the right the pressure P built up in the dans l’installation, tourner la vis mole-
druck P. system is increased. tée vers la droite.

ZUBEHÖR ACCESSORIES ACCESSOIRES

Befestigungswinkel wird auf Wunsch Mounting flange will be additio- La collerette de fixation sera four-
mit geliefert. nally supplied upon request. nie sur demande.
Bestell-Nr. _________ 74354 - 2153 Code no. __________ 74354 - 2153 No. de commande __ 74354 - 2153

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Schwimmerschalter (Ölstandskontrollen)
Liquid level switch (float-type indicators)

ANWENDUNG
Zur Überwachung des Ölstandes in Ölbehältern.

APPLICATION
Monitoring the liquid level in oil tanks.

MERKMALE
1. Flanschgehäuse mit Deckel, Kabeleinführung Pg9 und
ölbeständigen Gummidichtungen.
2. Begrenzungsring zum Einstellen des max. Schalt-
punktes.
3. Schaltrohr mit wahlweise 1, 2 oder 3 eingegossenen
Schutzgas-Kontakten.
4. Kunststoff-Schwimmer mit Ringmagnet.
5. Begrenzungsring zum Einstellen des min. Schaltpunktes
und zum Auswechseln des Schwimmers.

CHARACTERISTICS
1. Flange housing with cover, Pg9 cable inlet and oil-
resistant rubber gaskets.
2. Collar to limit the setting of max. switching point.
3. Switching tube with option of 1, 2 or 3 cast integral
protective-gas contacts.
4. Synthetic flat with annular magnet.
5. Collar to limit the setting of min. switching point and for
exchanging of float.

WIRKUNGSWEISE
Der ansteigende und abfallende Ölspiegel trägt den
Schwimmer mit dem Ringmagnet. Gelangt der Schwimmer in Schaltsymbole Switching symbols
die Schaltzone des Schutzgas-Kontaktes, wird ein Signal aus-
gelöst.
Die Schalthysterese beträgt ca. 3 mm, die Wiederholge-
nauigkeit max. 1 mm.

MODE OF ACTION
The rising and dropping oil level carries the float together
with its annular magnet. When the float reaches the switching
zone of the protective-gas contact, a signal will be released.
The switching hysteresis is abt. 3 mm, with a max. repea-
ting accuracy of 1 mm.

39161 P 1 d+e / 3 0291 1000HF

 TECHNISCHE DATEN
Betriebsdruck max. : _____________________________ 10 bar
Betriebstemperatur max. : ________________________ 100 oC
Schutzart : _______________________________________ IP 65
Gewicht bei Schaltrohrlänge 1000 mm : __________ ca. 0,6 kg
Elektr. Lebensdauer : _______ 10o Schaltspiele oder ein Mehr-
faches, je nach zu schaltender Last.
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure max. : ________________________ 10 bar
Operating temperature max. : _____________________ 100 oC
Type of enclosure : _______________________________ IP 65
Weight for
a switching tube length of 1000 mm : ___________ abt. 0.6 kg
Electr. service life : _______________ 10o switching cycles or a
multiple there of, depending on operating load.

Schaltvermögen bei Wechselstrom Contact rating for alternating current

Ohmsche Belastung Schütz- und Relaisspulen Non-inductive load Contactor & relay coils
Metallfadenlampen Schaltvermögen bulb with metallic filament Contact rating
Ein Aus Make Break
V W W V VA VA V W W V VA VA
24 10 4 24 6 1,5 24 10 4 24 6 1,5
42 20 6 42 10 2,5 42 20 6 42 10 2,5
60 30 10 60 15 4,0 60 30 10 60 15 4,0
125 40 12 125 30 8,0 125 40 12 125 30 8,0
250 60 15 250 60 15,0 250 60 15 250 60 15,0

ABMESSUNGEN DIMENSIONS (mm) BESTELLBEISPIEL

2 Schwimmerschalter, Schaltpunkt L1 bei 150 mm - L2 bei
100 mm __________________________ Bestell-Nr. 39161-4223

ORDERING EXAMPLE
liquid level switches, switching points L1 at 150 mm - L2 at
100 mm __________________________ Code No. 39161-4223

max. Länge
des Schalt-
rohres = 2000
max. length of
switching
tube = 2000

mit 1 Schaltpunkt mit 2 Schaltpunkten mit 3 Schaltpunkten

with 1 with 2 with 3
switching point switching points switching points

2
Elektrische Ölstandskontrolle
Bestell-Nr. _______________________ 75121-2913
für Signalgabe (Schließen der Kontakte bei
minimalem Ölstand)
Technische Daten
Schaltleistung : ________________________ 21 VA
Schaltstrom : ___________________________ 0,5 A
Spannung : _____________________________ 42 V
Druck max. : _________________ 3,5 bar bei 60 oC
Schutzart : _____________________________ IP 65
Einsatzbereich : ___________________ 5 oC - 60 oC
Einbaumöglichkeiten: AD-M, AW-E, D-Pumpen
Elektrische Ölstandskontrolle (Schwimmerschalter)
Einbaumöglichkeiten in Druckbehältern für die Ölnebel-
schmierung (Einheit WA-L, Öler ON-L, OG-L) für Mikro-
und Normalnebelöler in pneumatischen Anlagen (Öler
OP-B, OT-N, OX-D, OJ-D, OG-P, OT-P) für Flüssigkeits-
druckbehälter in Sprühschmieranlagen SP-F
Technische Daten
Betriebsdruck : ___________________ max. 10 bar
Betriebstemperatur : ______________ max. 100 oC
Schutzart : _____________________________ IP 67
Kontaktbelastung : _________________ 1 A, 60 VA
Spannung : ____________________________ 220 V
Funktionsfähig
in Öl mit einer Dichte von : ____________ 0,8 g/cm3
1 Schaltpunkt 1 switching point
Electrical oil level indicator
Code No. ________________________ 75121-2913
for signalling (making of contacts at min. oil level).
Technical Data
Contact rating : ________________________ 21 VA
Current on contact : _____________________ 0.5 A
Voltage : _______________________________ 42 V
Max. pressure : ________________ 3.5 bar at 60 oC
Type of enclosure : ______________________ IP 65
Range of application : ____________ 5 oC to 60 oC
For installation in: AD-M, AW-E, D-pumps
Liquid level switch (float switch)
for installation in pressurized containers for oil mist ge-
nerating lubrication (unit WA-L, oiler ON-L, OG-L) for
mikro fog and normal oil lubricators in pneumatic sy-
stems (oiler OP-B, OT-N, OX-D, OJ-D, OG-P, OT-P)
for pressurized containers in SP-F spray lubricating
systems
Technical Data
Operating pressure : _______________ max. 10 bar
Operating temperature : ___________ max. 100 oC
Type of enclosure : ______________________ IP 67
Contact load : _____________________ 1 A, 60 VA
Voltage : ______________________________ 220 V
suitable for oil of a density of : ________ 0,8 g/cm3
2 Schaltpunkte 2 switching points
3
 Elektrische Ölstandskontrolle (Schwimmerschalter) Liquid level switch (float switch)
Fortsetzung Continuation

Verwendung Bemerkung l Bestell - Nr. Application Remarks l Code No.

4 l Behälter o. 4 l bowl without
Heizung heating
215 39161 - 1311 215 39161 - 1311
WA-L mit WA-L with
Luftheizung air heating
17 l Behälter o. 17 l bowl without 2 switching
2 Schaltpunkte 300 39161 - 1321 300 39161 - 1321
Heizung heating points
WA-L mit WA-L with
Heizung heating
260 39161 - 1331 260 39161 - 1331
17 l Behälter mit 17 l bowl with
Heizung heating
1,6 l Behälter 120 39161 - 1341 1,6 l bowl 1 120 39161 - 1341
4 l Behälter mit 1 Schaltpunkt 4 l bowl with switching
160 39161 - 1351 160 39161 - 1351
Heizung heating point

Ausführung: Version: Ausführung: Version:

39161 - 1341 39161 - 1311, 39161 - 1321
39161 - 1331, 39161 - 1351

BESTELLBEISPIEL ORDERING EXAMPLE

1 elektr. Ölstandskontrolle __________ Bestell-Nr. 39161-1331 1 liquid oil level switch ______________ Code No. 39161-1331

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD ⋅ 08340 Beierfeld ⋅ Am Bockwald 4 ⋅ Telefon: 03774-6511-0 ⋅ Fax: 03774-651130 ⋅ E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 System SAXONIA

Signalling sensor SG 40 to 230

1. Main dimensions

Connection diagram

34184 - SG 40 - 230 BA 1 e / 1 9902HF page 1 of 4

 System SAXONIA

2. Description

The signalling sensor SG 40 is used in double-line lubrication systems to monitor the pressure build-
up and to signal achievement of the operating pressure in the main lines HL I and HL II.
The trigger signals sent by the signalling sensor are used to control the reversing valve and the
central lubricating pump.
The signalling sensor SG 40 consist of

- Sensor body
- Impulse transmitters
- Base plate micro-switch
- Housing
- Electrical plug contact

The sensor body (1) serves to mount the two impulse transmitters (2) the baseplate with micro-
switch (3), the pivot lever (4) and the pipe fittings for main lines HL I and HL II.
The machine screws (5) can be turned to adjust the sensitivity of the sensor to the required
operating pressure.
When one of the main lines reaches the operating pressure, the plunger of the impulse transmitter
pushes, via the adjusting screws, the pivot lever. This in turn, activates the micro-switch, sending a
control signal to switch the central lubricating pump off and to start the reversing valve, thereby
alternating the pressurization/depressurization of HL I or HL II.
The signalling sensor SG 40 is fixed with two screws M8. The moving parts are protected from the
elements by a housing (6), the cover (7) of which can be removed for adjustment and maintenance.
The threaded holes on both sides of the sensor body ( M16 x 1,5 ) are suitable for pipe
fittings S 16/16 for connection of piping with an outside diameter of 16 mm. By use of suitable
fittings, other pipe diameters are possible (10, 12, 20 mm). The electrical connection is by the plug
socket (8).

3. Technical Data

Rated pressure bar 400

Working pressure bar 50 to 500 adjustable
o
Temperature range of application C - 30 to + 50
Consistency index
000 ... 3
(NLGI-class DIN 51818)
Switching capacity
Voltage V 250 AC
Current A 5
Type of protection IP 55
Weight kg 2,5

34184 - SG 40 - 230 BA 1 e / 1 9902HF page 2 of 4

 System SAXONIA

4. Commissioning

The signalling sensor SG 40 can be installed into the main lines wherever required, but it is
recommended to fit it at the end of the main lines. This ensures that the pressure necessary for
operation of the metering valves or modular distributors has been reached, even under low
operating temperatures.
When fitted at the end of the main lines, the two redundant pipe connection holes are to be sealed
with closing screws.
When used in a centralized lubrication system, the main line connections on the signalling sensor
and on the reversing valve VUD marked with HL I and HL II should be connected together.
For operating pressure adjustment, the cover of the housing is to be removed, the machine screws
set, and the fixing nuts retightened to ensure consistency of adjustment.

5. Ordering conditions

The signalling sensor SG 40 is delivered without accessories, such as pipe fittings, fixing screws,
etc. These are to be ordered individually.

Accessories

Designation Code no.

Screwed connection S 16 / 16 1921162401
Closure end plug DIN 908 - M 16 x 1,5 20403
Seal ring DIN 7603 - A 16 x 20 - Cu 50076
Hexagon head screw DIN 933 – M 8 x 60 23212

Spare parts

Designation Code no.

Impulse transmitter complete 1421100001
Micro-switch CX3 . H4. 60280

Order designation

Signalling sensor SG 40 Code no. 1421193500

34184 - SG 40 - 230 BA 1 e / 1 9902HF page 3 of 4

 System SAXONIA

6. Circuit diagram

Signalling sensor SG 40 Central lubrication pump ZP

Reversing valve VUD Control voltage circuit Motor

Position "1" corresponds to pressure on HL I (control voltage applied to connection 6)

Position "2" corresponds to pressure on HL II (control voltage applied to connection 7)

34184 - SG 40 - 230 BA 1 e / 1 9902HF page 4 of 4

 System SAXONIA

Reversing valve VUD

1. Main dimensions

2. Description

The reversing valve VUD is an hydraulic 4/2 - direction valve with electromotive drive. It is used to
control the alternate pressurization/depressurization of the main lines in double-line lubrication
systems.
The reversing valve VUD consists of the main components

- reversing block with rotary piston

- electrical rotary drive
- base plate

The reversing valve can fix with the baseplate. The surfaces of the reversing block are zinc
galvanised. To special order, stain-less steel valves are available.

34132 - VUD BA 1e / 1 9902HF page 1 of 4

 System SAXONIA

The main lines HL I and HL II, connected to the reversing block, are each alternately connected by
the valve to the pressure line of the lubricating pump and to the relief line.
The electrical impulse to trigger the reversing process comes from the control circuitry or from
suitable pressure sensors (SGMA, SG 40, contact pressure gauge, etc.). In the operational diagram,
this is represented by a pressure sensor SG 40. The lubrication process is started with the switch
'Pump ON' shutting to start the central lubricating pump ZP. The pressure in either main line I or II
(depending on the position of the reversing valve VUD) starts to rise. When the pressure in this line
reaches the required level as set on the pressure sensor SG 40, this then sends a trigger signal to
the reversing valve to start the reversing process, which lasts approx 30 seconds.
During this time, the lubricating pump ZP must be switched off. This is achieved by the potential-free
contact of the relay K1 (8/10) incorporated in the pump motor protection control circuit. When the
reversing process is complete, this relay then closes again, allowing the pump ZP to start and the
pressure to rise in the other main line, until the desired pressure is achieved.
When the switch 'Pump ON' is opened, stopping the pump. This is the complete reversing process,
which can be repeated at time intervals depending on lubricant demand.
By use of the contact 8/10 of the reversing valve VUD, the alternate pressure rise in the main lines I
and II is regulated and counting of the number of reversing processes is possible (The contact must
open, a pre-determinated time after pump switching on). The reversing valve VUD has two cable
connections Pg 11 with tension relief.

3. Technical data

Rated pressure bar 400

Maximum working pressure bar 500
o
Temperature range of application C - 20 ... + 50
Consistency index
000 ... 3
(NLGI-class DIN 51818)
Reversing time s 28
Operating voltage *) V 220 + 10% AC 50 Hz
Power absorbed W 55
Type of protection IP 65
Weight kg 8

*) other operating voltages possible upon request

34132 - VUD BA 1e / 1 9902HF page 2 of 4

 System SAXONIA

4. Commissioning

The reversing valve VUD is very reliable even under extreme conditions (low temperatures, high
viscosity grease, etc.) due to it's high quality, the rotational piston principle and the high torque
motor (100 Nm). For best results, the reversing valve should be sited as close as possible to the
central lubricating pump, thus reducing the lenght of the relief line.

5. Ordering conditions

The reversing valve VUD is supplied as standard without accessories, i.e. pipe fittings or additional
fixings. These are to be ordered seperately.

Accessoires

Designation Code no.

Baseplate 1932401000
Screwed connection DIN 2353 - CS 16 B 20464
Cheese-head screw DIN 912 - M 8 x 60 23276
Cheese-head screw DIN 902 - M 8 x 30 23275
Spring ring DIN 128 - 8 - FSt 21060

Spare parts

Designation Code no.

Rotary drive 3002 – 0 – A 212 – 0 – PCI F 05 –
60328
220 / 50 – A - 301

Order designation

Reversing valve Bestell-Nr. 1313210000

34132 - VUD BA 1e / 1 9902HF page 3 of 4

 System SAXONIA

6. Function wiring diagram

Position "1" corresponds to pressure on HL I (control voltage applied to connection 6)

Position "2" corresponds to pressure on HL II (control voltage applied to connection 7)

34132 - VUD BA 1e / 1 9902HF page 4 of 4

 member of Vesper Corp.

System SAXONIA

Umsteuerventil VU 40 Reversing Valve VU 40

1. HAUPTABMESSUNGEN 1. MAIN DIMENSIONS

Seite/page 1 von/of 5 VU 40 - BA 1 d/e / 2.0701HF

 member of Vesper Corp.
2. BESCHREIBUNG
Das Umsteuerventil VU 40 ist ein hydraulisches 4/2-
Wegeventil mit elektromotorischem Antrieb, inte-
grierten Signalgebern für die Anzeige des Druck-
aufbaues sowie elektromechanischem Zählwerk. Es
wird zur wechselseitigen Druckbeaufschlagung und
Druckentlastung der Hauptleitungen in Zweileitungs-
anlagen eingesetzt.
Das Umsteuerventil besteht aus den Hauptbaugruppen:
• Umsteuerblock
• elektrische Steuerung
• Signalgeber
• Getriebemotor
Der Umsteuerblock (1) dient zur Aufnahme des Um-
steuerkolbens (8) und ist auf der Grundplatte (5) be-
festigt. In der Grundplatte befinden sich vier Gewinde-
bohrungen M 8, die zur Befestigung des Gerätes an
geeigneter Stelle genutzt werden können. Der An-
schluß der Hauptleitungen HL I und HL II erfolgt über
lötlose Rohrverschraubungen nach DIN 2353 am Um-
steuerblock. Es ist der Anschluß von Rohr 16 x 2,5
nach DIN 2391 - C - St 35.4 NBK vorgesehen.
Während des Arbeitens der Schmierpumpe verbindet
das Umsteuerventil die Druckleitung der Schmier-
pumpe mit jeweils einer Hauptleitung, während die
andere Hauptleitung mit der Entlastungsleitung
verbunden ist und entlastet wird.
Nach erfolgter Schmiermittelabgabe sämtlicher ange-
schlossener Zumeßventile wird die jeweilige Haupt-
leitung hydraulisch blockiert, und durch den weiteren
Druckanstieg erfolgt über den zugeordneten Signal-
geber (3) die Signalauslösung. Das geschieht in der
Form, daß über eine Wippe der Mikrotaster S1 (6)
betätigt wird, und das daraus hervorgehende Signal
das Ansteuern des Getriebemotors (4) und das Ab-
schalten der Schmierpumpe auslöst. Der Getriebe-
motor läuft solange, bis einer der beiden Schaltstifte,
die auf dem Umsteuerkolben angebracht sind, den
zugeordneten Mikrotaster (S2 oder S3) (7) betätigt. Zu
diesem Zeitpunkt ist die Umsteuerung abgeschlossen
und die vorhergehende Hauptleitung wurde entlastet.
Nun schaltet sich, nach einer vorher festgelegten
Pausenzeit, die Schmierpumpe wieder ein und der
Vorgang wiederholt sich.
Die Anzahl der Schmierzyklen kann am Zählwerk (9)
abgelesen werden. Die jeweils beaufschlagte Haupt-
leitung ist durch die Meldeleuchten (10) erkennbar.
3. TECHNISCHE DATEN
Nenndruck ....................................................... 400 bar
Betriebsdruck max. ......................................... 500 bar
Druckeinstellbereich der Signalgeber ... 150 ... 500 bar
Temperatureinsatzbereich .................. – 30 ... + 60 °C
Konsistenzkennzahl:
.............................. 000 ... 3 (NLGI-Klasse DIN 51818)
Umsteuerzeit ........................................................ 10 s
Betriebsspannung ................................ 230/400 V AC
........................................... 500 V (Sonderausführung)
Leistungsaufnahme .......................................... 180 W
Schutzart ............................................................ IP 53
Gewicht .............................................................. 22 kg
Seite/page 2 von/of 5
System SAXONIA
2. DESCRIPTION
The reversing valve VU 40 is an hydraulic 4/2-direction
control valve with electromotive drive, integrated
pressure sensors for the display of the pressure build-
up as well as an electro-mechanical counter.
It is used to control the alternate pressurization/
depressurization of the main lines in double-line
lubrication systems.
The reversing valve consists of the main components:
• Reversing block
• Electrical control
• Signaller
• Geared motor
The reversing block (1) takes the reversing piston (8)
and is fixed to the baseplate (5) .In the baseplate are
four threaded holes-M 8, which are used to fix the unit.
The connections of main lines HL I and HL II are by
solderless tube fittings to DIN 2353 onto the reversing
block.
The connecting points are suitable for tube 16 x 2,5 to
DIN 2391 – C – St 35.4 NBK.
During the operation of the lubricating pump, the
reversing valve connects one of the main lines to the
pressure line of the pump, for pressurizing, whilst at
the same time connecting the other main line to the
relief line of the pump, for depressurizing it.
When the required quantity of lubricant has been
dispensed to all lubrication points of the system, the
pressurized main line becomes hydraulically blocked,
causing further pressure rise in the line. This rise
causes the pressure sensor to operate the micro-
switch S1 (6), which sends a signal to the gear motor
(4), switching it on, and a signal to the lubricating
pump motor, switching it off. The gear motor runs until
one of the two switching pins on the reversing piston
operates the micro-switch S2 or S3 (7). At this point,
the reversing operation is complete and the main line
is depressurized. After a preset time, the pump motor
switches on and the process is repeated.
The number of lubrication cycles can be read from the
counter (9) .Wich main line is presently pressurized
can be seen by the indicator lights (10).
3. TECHNICAL DATA
Rated pressure ............................................... 400 bar
Operation pressure max. ................................ 500 bar
Pressure setting range of signallers ...... 150 ... 500 bar
Temperature range of application ....... – 30 ... + 60 °C
Consistency index :
................................. 000 ... 3 (NLGI class DIN 51818)
Reversing time ..................................................... 10 s
Operating voltage .................................. 230/400 V AC
................................................ 500 V (special version)
Power absorbed ................................................ 180 W
Type of protection ............................................... IP 53
Weight ................................................................ 22 kg
VU 40 - BA 1 d/e / 2.0701HF
 member of Vesper Corp.
4. INBETRIEBNAHME
• Umsteuerventil auf vorbereitete Auflage setzen.
(Maße für Befestigungslöcher siehe Punkt 1.)
• Umsteuerventil mit vier Schrauben M8 mit der
Auflage fest verbinden. ACHTUNG! Gerät nur
stehend befestigen.
• Rohranschluß über Rohrverschraubungen nach
DIN 2353 für alle Leitungen mit Rohr 16x2,5 nach
DIN 2391 vornehmen.
• Elektrischer Anschluß nach Stromlaufplan.
• Einstellen des Druckes im Druckbereich an den
Stellschrauben (3a) der Impulsgeber (3). Der ein-
zustellende Druck ist am Manometer der zur
Verfügung stehenden Schmierpumpe abzulesen.
Am Getriebemotor ist nach jeweils 3000 Betriebs-
stunden ein Ölwechsel mit Schmieröl DIN 51512 - SAE
80 W durchzuführen.
Die Montage bzw. Demontage sowie die Reparatur
sind grundsätzlich im spannungs- und drucklosen Zu-
stand vorzunehmen. Defekte Geräte sind grund-
sätzlich in gereinigtem und sauberem Zustand zur
Reparatur anzuliefern. Reparaturleistungen werden im
Herstellerbetrieb ausgeführt.
5. BESTELLANGABEN
Das Umsteuerventil VU 40 wird standardmäßig mit
montierten Rohrverschraubungen geliefert.
Die als Transportsicherung dienenden Sechskant-
schrauben DIN 933 – M 8 x 40 und Sechskantmuttern
DIN 934 – M 8 können zur Befestigung des Gerätes
genutzt werden.
Bestellbezeichnung
Umsteuerventil VU 40 ........... Bestell-Nr. 1311210000
6. ERSATZTEILE
Bezeichnung ...................................... Bestell-Nr.
Umsteuerblock kompl. ....................... 1311210000-10
Impulsgeber kompl. ........................... 1311210000-03
Getriebe SG1 mit Motor (380 V) ....................... 60316
Getriebe SG1 mit Motor (500 V) ....................... 60326
Elast. Klauenkupplung 1,6 – 16 – 16 ................ 60176
Mikrotaster A1.G1 ............................................. 60278
Mikrotaster A1.H1 mit Rollenhebel .................... 60300
Einbaumeldeleuchte Nr. 17 weiß ...................... 60031
Einbaufassung E 10 .......................................... 60213
Elektromechan. Impulszähler Z 593 .................. 60027
Rundring 18 x 3 WS 1.975 ................................ 50321
Luftschütz ID 01 - 220 V 50 Hz 22 .................. 60221
Seite/page 3 von/of 5
System SAXONIA
4. COMMISSIONING
• Place the reversing valve on the prepared mounting
(Dimensions for fixing holes - see section 1.).
• Fix the reversing valve to the mounting with four
screws M 8. IMPORTANT! The unit is only to be
mounted vertically.
• Connect all lines with pipe fittings to DIN 2353.
Pipe 16 x 2,5 to DIN 2391.
• Connect electrics as shown in the circuit diagram.
• Set the pressure sensor (3) by use of the adjusting
screws (3a) to the operating pressure range as
shown on the pressure gauge of the lubrication
pump used.
The oil of the gear motor is to be changed every 3000
operating hours. Oil to DIN 51512 - SAE 80 W.
Assembly, disassembly and repairs must only be
carried out when the unit is electrically isolated and
depressurized.
Repairs are only to be carried out by the manufacturer.
Units for repair are to be throughly cleaned before
returning to the manufacturer.
5. ORDERING CONDITIONS
The reversing valve is supplied complete with ready
mounted tube fittings.
The transport-security screws DIN 933 – M 8 x 40 and
nuts DIN 934 – M 8 can also be used to fix the unit.
Ordering designation
Reserving valve VU 40 ........... Code no. 1311210000
6. SPARE PARTS
Designation ........................................... Code no.
Reversing block complete .................. 1311210000-10
Pressure sensor complete ................. 1311210000-03
Gear box SG1 with motor (380 V) .................... 60316
Gear box SG1 with motor (500 V) .................... 60326
Elastic alligator coupler 1,6 – 16 – 16 ............... 60176
Micro-switch A1.G1 ........................................... 60278
Micro-switch A1.H1 with roller lever .................. 60300
Light indicator no. 17 white ............................... 60031
Mounting socket E 10 ....................................... 60213
Elekcromechanical impulse counter Z 593 ....... 60027
O-ring 18 x 3 WS 1.975 .................................... 50321
Air-Break-Contactor ID 01 - 220 V 50 Hz 22 .. 60221
VU 40 - BA 1 d/e / 2.0701HF
 member of Vesper Corp.

System SAXONIA

7. STROMLAUFPLÄNE 7. CIRCUIT DIAGRAMMS

Umsteuerventil VU 40 (380 V) Reversing valve VU 40 (380 V)

Umsteuerventil VU 40 (400 V) Reversing valve VU 40 (400 V)

H1 Meldeleuchte Hauptleitung I Indicator light Main line I

H2 Meldeleuchte Hauptleitung II Indicator light Main line II
K1 Schaltschütz Air-Break-Contactor
M1 Drehstrommotor mit Getriebe AC – motor with gearbox
P1 Zählwerk Counter
S1 druckbetätigter Signalgeber Pressure sensor
S2/S3 Endschalter durch Drehbewegung des Change-over complete switch
Umsteuerkolbens

Seite/page 4 von/of 5 VU 40 - BA 1 d/e / 2.0701HF

 member of Vesper Corp.

System SAXONIA

Umsteuerventil VU 40 (500 V) Reversing valve VU 40 (500 V)

(Sonderausführung) (special version)

H1 Meldeleuchte Hauptleitung I Indicator light Main line I

H2 Meldeleuchte Hauptleitung II Indicator light Main line II
K1 Schaltschütz Air-Break-Contactor
M1 Drehstrommotor mit Getriebe AC – motor with gearbox
P1 Zählwerk Counter
S1 druckbetätigter Signalgeber Pressure sensor
S2/S3 Endschalter durch Drehbewegung des Change-over complete switch
Umsteuerkolbens
T1 Transformator Transformer

Seite/page 5 von/of 5 VU 40 - BA 1 d/e / 2.0701HF


Dreiwegeventil VDD
1. HAUPTABMESSUNGEN
2. BESCHREIBUNG
Das Dreiwegeventil ist ein elektromotorisch angetriebe-
nes Sperr- und Umsteuerorgan für Zweileitungsanlagen und
wird zur automatischen Zu- bzw. Abschaltung von Teilsträn-
gen der Zentralschmieranlage mit größeren Schmierfristen
eingesetzt.
Es besteht im wesentlichen aus den Baugruppen:
• Absperrblock mit Drehkolben
• elektrischer Drehantrieb mit Rückmeldung
• Unterplatte
Am Absperrblock mit Drehschieber, der die Anschlußver-
schraubungen für die Hauptleitungen enthält, ist der Drehan-
trieb angeflanscht. Der im Absperrblock eingepasste Dreh-
schieber wird durch die Betätigung des Drehantriebes um
90° bzw. 180° verdreht.
Das große Drehmoment garantiert ein problemloses Um-
steuern bei hohen Drücken und niedrigen Umgebungstem-
peraturen.
Die jeweilige Lage der Durchgangsbohrungen des Dreh-
schiebers bezogen auf di Stellungsanzeige an der Rückseite
des Drehantriebes ist aus dem Bild unter Pkt. 1 ersichtlich.
Das Dreiwegeventil kann mit Hilfe der mitgelieferten Unter-
platte befestigt werden.
System SAXONIA
Three-way valve VDD
1. MAIN PARAMETERS
2. DESCRIPTION
The three-way valve is an electric motor driven stopping
and change-over element for dual line systems and is used for
the automatic connection and/or disconnection of partial
strands of the centralized lubrication system with greater lubri-
cation intervals.
It essentially consists of the following assembly groups:
• stop block with rotating piston
• electric rotational driv with acknowledge message
• bottom plate
The rotational drive is flange-mounted to the stop block
with the rotary slide valve, wich contains the screw joints for the
main lines. By actuation of the rotational drive, the rotary slide
valve being fitted in the stop block is turned by 90° and/or 180°.
The great torque guarantees a trouble-free change-over at
high pressures and low ambient temperatures.
The actual position of the through borings of the rotary slide
valve related to the position indicator at the back of the rotatio-
nal drive can be seen from the picture under point 1. The
three-way valve can be fixed with the help of the bottom plate
supplied.
34132 BA 1 d + e / 02 0900HF
Ersatz für 34132 BA 1 / 01 9804Wi
 System SAXONIA

3. TECHNISCHE DATEN 3. TECHNICAL DATA

Nenndruck : _________________________________ 400 bar
Betriebsdruck max. : _________________________ 500 bar
Temperatureinsatzbereich : ___________ - 20 oC ... + 50 oC
Konsistenzkennzahl : ________________________ 000 … 3
________________________ (NLGI-Klasse DIN 51818)
Umsteuerzeit : __________________________________ 14 s
Betriebsspannung : _____________ 220 +10% AC; 50 Hz
Leistungsaufnahme : ___________________________ 55 W
Schutzart : ____________________________________ IP 65
Gewicht : ______________________________________ 9 kg
Nominal pressure : ___________________________ 400 bar
Operating pressure max. : _____________________ 500 bar
Temperature range of application : _____ - 20 oC ... + 50 oC
Consistency index : __________________________ 000 … 3
__________________________ (NLGI class DIN 51818)
Change-over time : ______________________________ 14 s
Operating voltage : ______________ 220 +10% AC; 50 Hz
Power absorbed : ______________________________ 55 W
Protective system : _____________________________ IP 65
Weight : _______________________________________ 9 kg

4. BESTELLANGABEN 4. ORDERING CONDITIONS

Das Dreiwegeventil wird standardmäßig mit Rohrver- The three-way valve is supplied with screwed pipe joints
schraubungen und Unterplatte geliefert. and bottom plate as standards.

5. BESTELLBEISPIEL 5. EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Dreiwegeventil für eine Spannung von 230 V AC Three-way valve for voltage 230 V A.C.
Dreiwegeventil – 230 V AC _____ Bestell-Nr. 34132 - 2211 Three-way valve – 230V AC ______ Code no. 34132 - 2211

6. ANSCHLUSSPLAN 6. CONNECTION PLAN

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

Hähne A, B, C und D
1. HAUPTABMESSUNGEN
2. BESCHREIBUNG
Die Hähne A bis D sind handbetätigte Ansperr- bzw. Um-
steuerorgane.
Sie werden für Einleitungsanlagen in den Formen A
(Sperrhahn) und B (3-Wege-Hahn) sowie für Zweileitungs-
anlagen in den Formen C (Sperrhahn) und D (3-Wege-Hahn)
hergestellt.
Sie können neben dem Einsatz als Ansperr- und Um-
steuerorgan auch zum zeitweisen manuellen Zuschalten von
Nebenanlagen vorgesehen werden. Die Verwendung in an -
deren Bereichen ist problemlos möglich.
Die Hähne bestehen im wesentlichen aus dem Grund-
körper mit eingeläpptem Drehkolben und dem Hahnschlüs-
sel zum Betätigen. Die Oberfläche des Grundkörpers ist
galvanisch verzinkt. Die Ausführung in nichtrostendem Stahl
ist nach Vereinbarung möglich.
System SAXONIA
Cocks A, B, C and D
1. MAIN PARAMETERS
2. DESCRIPTION
The cocks A to D are hand-operated shut-off elements re-
spectively reversing elements.
The cocks A and C are stop-cocks for single-line systems
and the cocks B and D are three-way cocks for double-line
systems.
The cocks can be installed in any system, either for manu-
al opening of sections of systems (Cock A and C), or for diver-
sion of flow (and pressure) from one section into another
(Cocks B and D).
The cocks can be employed for switching of secondary
systeems from time to time. Using for other areas is possible.
The main components are a cock body and a rotary piston
with high precision finish. The cock body is zinc galvanized,
but can also be ordered in stainless steel.
73631 BA 1 d + e / 02 0900HF
Ersatz für 73631-. . . . / 01 9608Wi

3. TECHNISCHE DATEN
Nenndruck : _________________________________ 400 bar
Betriebsdruck max. : _________________________ 500 bar
Rohranschluß : ____________________________ M 10 x 1,5
Gewicht:
Hahn A / B _______________________________ 1,1 kg
Hahn C / D _______________________________ 2,0 kg
4. INBETRIEBNAHME
Zur Befestigung der Hähne sind zwei Befestigungsboh-
rungen mit einem Gewinde M 8 vorgesehen.
Der Anschluß der Rohrleitungen kann mit Hilfe geeigne-
ter Verschraubungen (z.B. Verschraubung DIN 2353 - CS 10
B, Verschraubung DIN 2353 - CL 12 B, Verschraubung S
16/17, Verschraubung S 16/20) oder den bei diesen Ver-
schraubungen als Grundlage dienenden Stutzen realisiert
werden. Damit ist der Anschluß von Rohren mit einem Außen-
durchmesser von 10, 12, 16 oder 20 mm ebenso möglich, wie
der Anschluß entsprechender Schlauchleitungen.
Die Dichtheit beim Anschluß der jeweiligen Verschrau-
bungen oder Stutzen wird über einen in die Gewindebohrung
einzulegenden Dichtring DIN 7603 - A10x13,5 - Cu erreicht.
5. BESTELLANGABEN
Der Hahnschlüssel ist Bestandteil des Lieferumfanges.
Verschraubungen, Dichtringe und Befestigungsschrauben
gehören nicht zum Lieferumfang und sind gesondert zu be-
stellen.
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD ⋅ 08340 Beierfeld ⋅ Am Bockwald 4 ⋅ Telefon: 03774-6511-0 ⋅ Fax: 03774-651130 ⋅ E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
System SAXONIA
3. TECHNICAL DATA
Nominal pressure : ___________________________ 400 bar
Operating pressure max. : _____________________ 500 bar
Pipe connection : __________________________ M 16 x 1.5
Weight :
Cocks A / B _______________________________ 1.1 kg
Cocks C / D ______________________________ 2.0 kg
4. CONNISSIONING
In the cock body are two threaded holes (M 8) for fixing.
The pipe connections are by use of suitable pipe fixings
(i.e. connector DIN 2353 - CS 10 B, DIN 2353 - CL 12 B, S
16/17, S 16/20) or nipples.
Thereby, pipe outside diameters of 10, 12, 16 or 20 mm or
hose lines can be connected.
For sealing, copper sealing rings
DIN 7603 - A - 10 x 13,5 - Cu in the threaded holes are used.
5. ORDERING CONDITIONS
The cocks are supplied fitted with operating handle.
Sealing rings and fixing screws must be ordered separately.
Level Switch 76951 – 6011
Abridged version

Field of application:
The level control device is used for the control of up to three filling level in tanks.

Installation position:
The level switch is installed vertically to the surface of the liquid in the lid of the tank.

Functional procedure:
When the operating voltage is switched on and the filling level is normal (>MIN - <MAX), the green luminous diode
“normal“ signalizes this state by permanent light.

Mode 1 “early warning: filling level max“

(DIP-switch 4 OFF see description 76951-6011-1)
If the filling level falls below “MIN“, the green luminous diode “normal“ extinguishes, and the red luminous diode
“empty“ flashes.
The green luminous diode “normal“ also extinguishes when filling level “MAX“ or “FULL“ is reached.
The reaching of level “MAX“ is signalized by the flashing light of the yellow luminous diode “max“.
The reaching of level “FULL“ is signalized by the flashing light of the red luminous diode “full“.

Mode 2 “early warning; filling level min“

(DIP-switch 4 ON see description 76951-6011-1)
When the level falls below “MIN“, the green luminous diode “normal“ extinguishes and the yellow luminou diode
“min“ flashes.
The green luminous diode “normal“ also extinguishes when filling level “FULL“ or „EMPTY“ is reached.
The reaching of level “FULL“ is signalized by the flashing light of the red luminous diode “full“.
The reaching of level “EMPTY“ is signalized by the flashing light of the red luminous diode “empty“.

76951 – 6011 – 2e / 1 0799 HF/KAM 1 von 4

Connection diagram:

Principle of operation:
Inlets:
Connection 1/2 : operating voltage (UC 20...252V) for the supply to the level switch.

Outlets:
Connection 3 : common supply to the relay contacts
Connection 4 : switching output S1 “filling level > FULL“ = 0-signal
Connection 6 : switching output S3 “filling level < EMPTY“ = 1-signal

Mode 1 “early warning: filling level max“

(DIP-switch 4 OFF)
Connection 5 : switching output S2 “filling level > MAX“ = 0-signal

Mode 2 “early warning: filling level min“

(DIP-switch 4 ON see description 76951-6011-1)
Connection 5 : switching output S2 “filling level < MIN“ = 1-signal

Note: The relay contacts follow the indication after approx. 10s!

Teaching-in of the switching points:

see description xxx
The following default values are set: S1 = 60mm; S2 = 220mm; S3 = 270mm
(measured from the sensor to the switching point)
How to adjust the switching behaviour:
see description 76951-6011-1

76951 – 6011 – 2e / 1 0799 HF/KAM 2 von 4

Specification:
General data:
Acquisition range .............................................................. 60 mm...550 mm (ex ultrasonic transducer)
Reference quantity ........................................................... 100 mm x 100 mm (even surface)
Opening angle of sound beam ........................................ approx. 5° at –6dB sound pressure
Transducer frequency ...................................................... approx. 380 kHz
Repeat accuracy .............................................................. < 0,5 %, < 0,5 mm at constant ambient conditions
Reaction time of relay contacts ........................................ approx. 10 s
Release time of relay contacts ......................................... approx. 10 s
Reaction time of LEDs ...................................................... < 1 s (indication of measured value)
Release time of LEDs ....................................................... < 1 s (indication of measured value)
Temperature drift .............................................................. < 4 % over the whole temperature range

Electrical data:
Operating voltage UB ........................................................ 20 V...252 V DC/AC, 47 Hz...63 Hz
Current consumption ........................................................ ca. 70 mA at 30 V DC (all relays in working position)
Switching output 1, 2 and 3 .............................................. relays
• Contact material ....................................................... gilded silver alloy
• Switching voltage max. . ........................................... 150 V DC, 252 V AC
• Switching current max. ............................................. 3 A, ohmic
• Switching current min. .............................................. 0,1 mA, 100 mV DC
• Switching capacity ................................................... 90 W at 30 V DC, 750 W at 250 V AC
• Life time (electrical) .................................................. 106 switching cycles at a resistive load of 3 A / 30 V DC
................................................................................... and/or 3 A / 252 V AC

Mechanical data:
Operating temperature ..................................................... -20 °C...+60 °C
Storage temperature ........................................................ -40 °C...+85 °C
Protective system acc. DIN 40 050 .................................. IP 65
Type of connection ........................................................... 7-polar 90°- cable box (PG 13,5) with screw and
........................................................................................... soldering contacts
........................................................................................... Cross section: max. 1,5 mm² wire sleeves without
........................................................................................... insulation collar.

State upon delivery

DIP switch ......................................................................... switch 1-5 in OFF position.
Indication mode ................................................................ indication with early warning “filling level max.“

76951 – 6011 – 2e / 1 0799 HF/KAM 3 von 4

Dimensioned drawing:

76951 – 6011 – 2e / 1 0799 HF/KAM 4 von 4

13
Progressive Distributor ZP - A

USE
The major element of a progressive system is the
lubricant distributor.
ZP-A distributors are used to divide and meter the
lubricant in total loss central lubrication systems (oil,
semi-fluids and greases) and in oil recirculation
systems suitable for small, medium and large
machine plants.

ADVANTAGES
• easy system layout
• problem-free installation
• unsophisticated control and monitoring features
• precisely-measured lubricant discharge per outlet
• variable flow rates per element suit individual
requirements

APPLICATIONS
Machine-tools and processing machinery, mechanical engineering in general, presses of every type, plastic- and
paper processing machines, textile machines, printing- and packaging machinery, etc.

DESIGN
The distributors consist of several individual elements (minimum 3 in a standard array) which are screwed
together and sealed to each other.
Depending upon the arrangement within the distributor the following segment types are available.
Initial- or A-element
Medium or M-element
End- or E-element

CONFIGURATION and FUNCTION

The major element of a progressive system is the lubricant distributor, whose function is to divide a lubricant
volume delivered under pressure (oil and grease) successively into smaller part volumes towards the 24 or more
(upon request) of possible outlets. This is achieved thanks to the pistons incorporated in progressive distributors
which are positively displaced and controlled against each other.
Pressurized lubricant entering forces the feed pistons to be moved in a certain sequence to the end of the
strokes into their initial positions, thus delivering a full measures charge of lubricant to the outlets, one after
another. The distributor remains operating as long as lubricant is being delivered.
Upon request, ZP-A distributors are supplied with integrated non-return valves located in the outlet bore; this
embodies the advantage to ensure a reliable operation however small a lubricant is being discharged, and at
higher counterpressure situations to overcome with flexible pipework installed downflow.
In addition, we supply distributor types with motion indicators where an electric limit switch and/or electronic
monitor may be fitted enabling external warning and monitoring function.

Page 1 of 4 35541 P1 e / 09 98HF

TECHNICAL DATA
Max. operating pressure................................................................................................................................ 160 bar
Temperature range............................................-20°C up to +80°C (if high temperatures are prevailing consult us)
Admissible differential pressure between 2 outlets ................................................................................ max. 50 bar
with non-return valves max. up to admissible system pressure
Output volume each piston stroke.........................................................................................0.07; 0.1; 0.2; or 0.3 cc
Flow volume for oil and grease: .......... min. 0.5 cc/min................................................................. max. 1000 cc/min
Non-return valve opening pressure ................................................................................................................... 2 bar
Response pressure ...................................................................................................................................... ≤ 10 bar
Compatible lubricants on mineral oil basis:
Grease lubricants up to ............................................................................................ NLGI class 3 DIN 51818
Oil................................................................. ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) at 20°C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants ........................................................................................................................ at request
Pipe connection:
Inlet port ..........................................................................................................................................Ø 6 or Ø 8
Outlet port ..................................................................................................................................................Ø 6

max. bar No. of Dimensions Weight Standard c/w c/w c/w non-return
outlets elements approx. non-return valve 2 motion valve with
indicattors 2 motion
indicators
a b kg Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no.
6 3 48 - 1.03 35541-1031 35541-2031 35541-3031 35541-4031
8 4 64 - 1.37 35541-1041 35541-2041 35541-3041 35541-4041
10 5 80 - 1.72 35541-1051 35541-2051 35541-3051 35541-4051
12 6 96 137 2.06 35541-1061 35541-2061 35541-3061 35541-4061
14 7 112 153 2.40 35541-1071 35541-2071 35541-3071 35541-4071
16 8 128 169 2.75 35541-1081 35541-2081 35541-3081 35541-4081
18 9 144 185 3.09 35541-1091 35541-2091 35541-3091 35541-4091
20 10 160 201 3.43 35541-1101 35541-2101 35541-3101 35541-4101
22 11 176 217 3.77 35541-1111 35541-2111 35541-3111 35541-4111
24 12 192 233 4.11 35541-1121 35541-2121 35541-3121 35541-4121

Attention:
It must be remembered that the lubricant metered by a given piston does not exit out of same element but in the
adjacent element next to the inlet port. The quantity metered by the piston provided in the initial element is
discharged out of the end element outlet port.

Page 2 of 4 35541 P1 e / 09 98HF

ACCESSORIES (to be ordered separately)
Part Denomination Code no.
1 straight male stud connector for pipe O.D. Ø6• 73442 - 1214
Ø 8 •• 73442 - 1314
2 copper washer A 10 x 13.5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094
3 connector for pipe O.D. Ø6 brass 63422 - 2241
steel 63422 - 2261
max. voltage 500V AC 24V DC 220V DC
4 limit switch max. current 10A - - 66922 - 2211
power 10W 4W
enclosure IP 65 max. frequency 1 Hz
5 Bridge 63421 - 2211
proximity switchvoltage range 10-30V DC
(electronic PNP) max. current 200mA
8 max. frequency 1000 Hz 66925 - 1311
enclosure IP 65
plug with cable see data sheet 66925 - 1311 M1
9 protection hood ( makrolon IPC ) 63642 - 1311
- over-pressure indicator * see data sheet 65112 - 1300 M1
* only available with plug 73490 - 3021
* only in conjunction with bridge part 5 hollow screw 74111 - 3811
• thread: cylindrical •• thread: conical

DIMENSIONS (mm) Distributor with non-return valves and motion indicators

* Part 4 = limit switch and part 8 proximity switch are located on

the right hand side normally. Both switch types, however, can also
be attached, at choice, on the left hand side.

Page 3 of 4 35541 P1 e / 09 98HF

EXPLANATION
1. The basic configuration of distributor ZP-A is illustrated by
a pictural symbol; the channel bores marked are to
indicate that the metering volume in one element
principally is discharged out of the adjacent element
located next to the 'inlet' port, with one exception; the
metering volume in the initial element exits only out of the
end element.

007 is equal to 0.07 cc/per piston stroke

01 is equal to 0.1 cc/per piston stroke
02 is equal to 0.2 cc/per piston stroke
03 is equal to 0.3 cc/per piston stroke

2. There are various means to combine several metering

volumes to be delivered to a single outlet port, the
following 3 letter symbols are used to mark it accordingly.

Symbol 'a' to denote the position of the outlet port.

Symbol 'b' to denote longitudinal cross-porting of both

volumes within one element, be fitting a bridge on
the respective element.

Symbol 'c' to denote transverse cross-porting by

combining the metering volumes in neighbouring elements
which neccessiates that the seals between elements in
direction to the inlet port are removed and the unused
outlet blanked by plug ( this combination is not feasible in
the initial element).

3. Metering volume at outlet port (cc)

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Page 4 of 4 35541 P1 e / 09 98HF

Progressive Distributor ZP - B

USE
The major element of a progressive system is the
lubricant distributor.
ZP-B distributors are used to divide and meter the
lubricant in total loss central lubrication systems (oil,
semi-fluids and greases) and in oil recirculation
systems suitable for small, medium and large
machine plants.

ADVANTAGES
• easy system layout
• problem-free installation
• unsophisticated control and monitoring features
• precisely-measured lubricant discharge per
outlet
• variable flow rates per element suit individual
requirements

APPLICATIONS
Machine-tools and processing machinery, mechanical engineering in general, presses of every type, plastic- and
paper processing machines, textile machines, printing- and packaging machinery, etc.

DESIGN
The distributors consist of several individual elements (minimum 3 in a standard array) which are screwed
together and sealed to each other.
Depending upon the arrangement within the distributor the following segment types are available.
Initial- or A-element
Medium or M-element
End- or E-element

CONFIGURATION and FUNCTION

The major element of a progressive system is the lubricant distributor, whose function is to divide a lubricant
volume delivered under pressure (oil and grease) successively into smaller part volumes towards the 24 or more
(upon request) of possible outlets. This is achieved thanks to the pistons incorporated in progressive distributors
which are positively displaced and controlled against each other.
Pressurized lubricant entering forces the feed pistons to be moved in a certain sequence to the end of the
strokes into their initial positions, thus delivering a full measures charge of lubricant to the outlets, one after
another. The distributor remains operating as long as lubricant is being delivered.
Upon request, ZP-B distributors are supplied with integrated non-return valves located in the outlet bore; this
embodies the advantage to ensure a reliable operation however small a lubricant is being discharged, and at
higher counterpressure situations to overcome with flexible pipework installed downflow.
In addition, we supply distributor types with motion indicators where an electric limit switch and/or electronic
monitor may be fitted enabling external warning and monitoring function.

Page 1 of 4 35542 P1 e / 09 98HF

TECHNICAL DATA
Max. operating pressure ............................................................................................................................... 300 bar
Temperature range ........................................... -20°C up to +80°C (if high temperatures are prevailing consult us)
Admissible differential pressure between 2 outlets ................................................................................ max. 50 bar
with non-return valves max. up to admissible system pressure
Output volume each piston stroke....................................................................................................0.5; 1.2; 2.0 cc
Flow volume for oil and grease: .......... min. 0.5 cc/min .......................................... max. 1500, 3000, 5000 cc/min •
Non-return valve opening pressure................................................................................................................... 2 bar
Response pressure ...................................................................................................................................... ≤ 10 bar
Compatible lubricants on mineral oil basis:
Grease lubricants up to.............................................................................................NLGI class 3 DIN 51818
Oil................................................................. ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) at 20°C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants ........................................................................................................................ at request
Pipe connection:
Inlet port ...................................................................................................................................................Ø 10
Outlet port .............................................................................................................................Ø 6, Ø 8 or Ø 10
• choose always smallest flow rate as basis in case of distributors having different flow volumens.

max. bar No. of Dimensions Weight Standard c/w c/w c/w non-return
outlets elements approx. non-return valve 2 motion valve with
indicattors 2 motion
indicators
a kg Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no.
6 3 75 3.07 35542 – 1031 35542 – 2031 35542 – 3031 35542 – 4031
8 4 100 4.85 35542 – 1041 35542 – 2041 35542 – 3041 35542 – 4041
10 5 125 6.07 35542 – 1051 35542 – 2051 35542 – 3051 35542 – 4051
12 6 150 7.28 35542 – 1061 35542 – 2061 35542 – 3061 35542 – 4061
14 7 175 8.48 35542 – 1071 35542 – 2071 35542 – 3071 35542 – 4071
16 8 200 9.70 35542 – 1081 35542 – 2081 35542 – 3081 35542 – 4081
18 9 225 10.92 35542 – 1091 35542 – 2091 35542 – 3091 35542 – 4091
20 10 250 12.13 35542 – 1101 35542 – 2101 35542 – 3101 35542 – 4101
22 11 275 13.34 35542 – 1111 35542 – 2111 35542 – 3111 35542 – 4111
24 12 300 14.56 35542 – 1121 35542 – 2121 35542 – 3121 35542 – 4121

Attention:
It must be remembered that the lubricant metered by a given piston does not exit out of same element but in the
adjacent element next to the inlet port. The quantity metered by the piston provided in the initial element is
discharged out of the end element outlet port.

Page 2 of 4 35542 P1 e / 09 98HF

ACCESSORIES (to be ordered separately)

Part Denomination Code no.

1 straight male stud connector for pipe O.D. Ø 10 • 73442 - 1424
2 copper washer A 17 x 21 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1324
3 connector for pipe O.D. Ø 8 63422 - 2251
max. voltage 500V AC 24V DC 220V DC
4 limit switch max. current 10A - - 66922 - 2231
power 10W 4W
enclosure IP 65 max. frequency 1 Hz
Ø 6• 73442 - 1233
5 straight male stud connector for pipe O.D. Ø 8• 73442 - 1324
Ø 10 • 73442 - 1414
6 copper washer A 14 x 18 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1214
voltage range 10-30V DC
7 proximity switch max. current 200mA
(electronic PNP) max. frequency 1000 Hz 66925 - 1311
enclosure IP 65
plug with cable see data sheet 66925 - 1311 M1
8 protection hood ( makrolon IPC ) 63642 - 1311
- over-pressure indicator * see data sheet 65112 - 1300 M1
* only available with plug 73490 - 3011
• thread: cylindrical

DIMENSIONS (mm) Distributor with non-return valves and motion indicators

* Part 4 = limit switch and part 7 proximity switch are located on the
right hand side normally. Both switch types, however, can also be
attached, at choice, on the left hand side.
With distributor with limit switch, connection of the outlet port located
on the side where the limit switch is attached, can only be made via
connector assy part 3.

Page 3 of 4 35542 P1 e / 09 98HF

EXPLANATION
1. The basic configuration of distributor ZP-B is illustrated by
a pictural symbol; the channel bores marked are to
indicate that the metering volume in one element
principally is discharged out of the adjacent element
located next to the 'inlet' port, with one exception; the
metering volume in the initial element exits only out of the
end element.

05 is equal to 0.5 cc/per piston stroke

12 is equal to 1.2 cc/per piston stroke
20 is equal to 2.0 cc/per piston stroke

2. There are various means to combine several metering

volumes to be delivered to a single outlet port, the
following 3 letter symbols are used to mark it accordingly.

Symbol 'a' to denote the position of the outlet port.

Symbol 'b' to denote longitudinal cross-porting of both

volumes within one element, remove thereto the set screw
in the respective element (this combination is not feasible
in the initial element).

Symbol 'c' to denote transverse cross-porting by

combining the metering volumes in neighbouring elements
which neccessiates that the seals between elements in
direction to the inlet port are removed and the unused
outlet blanked by plug ( this combination is not feasible in
the initial element).

3. Metering volume at outlet port (cc)

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Page 4 of 4 35542 P1 e / 09 98HF

Progressive Distributor ZP - C

USE
The major element of a progressive system is the
lubricant distributor.
ZP-C distributors are used to divide and meter the
lubricant in total loss central lubrication systems (oil,
semi-fluids and greases) and in oil recirculation
systems suitable for small, medium and large machine
plants.

ADVANTAGES
• easy system layout
• problem-free installation
• unsophisticated control and monitoring features
• precisely-measured lubricant discharge per outlet
• variable flow rates per element suit individual
requirements

APPLICATIONS
Machine-tools and processing machinery, mechanical engineering in general, presses of every type, plastic- and
paper processing machines, textile machines, printing- and packaging machinery, etc.

DESIGN
The distributors consist of several individual elements (minimum 3 in a standard array) which are screwed together
and sealed to each other.
Depending upon the arrangement within the distributor the following segment types are available.
Initial- or A-element
Medium or M-element
End- or VE-element

CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION

The major element of a progressive system is the lubricant distributor, whose function is to divide a lubricant
volume delivered under pressure (oil and grease) successively into smaller part volumes towards the 24 or more
(upon request) of possible outlets. This is achieved thanks to the pistons incorporated in progressive distributors
which are positively displaced and controlled against each other.
Pressurized lubricant entering forces the feed pistons to be moved in a certain sequence to the end of the strokes
into their initial positions, thus delivering a full measures charge of lubricant to the outlets, one after another. The
distributor remains operating as long as lubricant is being delivered.
Upon request, ZP-C distributors are supplied with integrated non-return valves located in the outlet bore; this
embodies the advantage to ensure a reliable operation however small a lubricant is being discharged, and at
higher counterpressure situations to overcome with flexible pipework installed downflow.
In addition, we supply distributor types with motion indicators where an electric limit switch and/or electronic
monitor may be fitted enabling external warning and monitoring function.

page 1 of 4 35543 P 1e / 02 1199HF

TECHNICAL DATA
Max. operating pressure : ............................................................................................................................ 160 bar
Temperature range : .................................... - 20°C up to + 80°C (if high temperatures are prevailing consult us)
Admissible differential pressure between 2 outlets : ............................................................................ max. 50 bar
with non-return valves max. up to admissible system pressure
Output volume each piston stroke : ................................................................................. 0.07; 0.1; 0.2; or 0.3 ccm
Flow volume for oil and grease: .............. min. 0.5 ccm/min ................................................... max. 1000 ccm/min
Non-return valve opening pressure : ............................................................................................................... 2 bar
Response pressure : .................................................................................................................................. ≤ 10 bar
Compatible lubricants on mineral oil basis:
Grease lubricants up to .......................................................................................... NLGI class 3 DIN 51818
Oil ............................................................... ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) at 20°C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants ....................................................................................................................... at request
Pipe connection:
Inlet port ....................................................................................................................................... Ø 6 or Ø 8
Outlet port ................................................................................................................................................ Ø 6

max. bar No. of Dimensions Weight Standard c/w c/w c/w non-return
outlets elements approx. non-return valve 2 motion valve with
indicattors 2 motion
indicators
a b kg Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no.
6 3 48 - 1,03 35543-1031 35543-2031 35543-3031 35543-4031
8 4 64 - 1,37 35543-1041 35543-2041 35543-3041 35543-4041
10 5 80 - 1,72 35543-1051 35543-2051 35543-3051 35543-4051
12 6 96 137 2,06 35543-1061 35543-2061 35543-3061 35543-4061
14 7 112 153 2,40 35543-1071 35543-2071 35543-3071 35543-4071
16 8 128 169 2,75 35543-1081 35543-2081 35543-3081 35543-4081
18 9 144 185 3,09 35543-1091 35543-2091 35543-3091 35543-4091
20 10 160 201 3,43 35543-1101 35543-2101 35543-3101 35543-4101
22 11 176 217 3,77 35543-1111 35543-2111 35543-3111 35543-4111
24 12 192 233 4,11 35543-1121 35543-2121 35543-3121 35543-4121

Attention:
It must be remembered that the lubricant metered by a given piston does not exit out of same element but in the
adjacent element next to the inlet port. The quantity metered by the piston provided in the initial element is
discharged out of the end element outlet port.

page 2 of 4 35543 P 1e / 02 1199HF

ACCESSORIES (to be ordered separately)
Part Denomination Code no.
1 straight male stud connector for pipe O.D. Ø6• 73442 - 1214
Ø 8 •• 73442 - 1314
2 copper washer A 10 x 13.5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094
3 connector for pipe O.D. Ø6 brass 63422 - 2241
Ø6 steel 63422 - 2261
max. voltage 500V AC 24V DC 220V DC right
4 limit switch max. current 10A - - 66922 - 2311
power 10W 4W left
enclosure IP 65 max. frequency 1 Hz 66922 - 2321
5 Bridge 63421 - 2211
voltage range 10-30V DC
8 proximity switch max. current 200mA
(electronic PNP) max. frequency 1000 Hz 66925 - 1311
enclosure IP 65
plug with cable see data sheet 66925 - 1311 M1
9 protection hood ( makrolon IPC ) 63642 - 1311
- over-pressure indicator * see data sheet 65112 - 1300 M1
* only available with plug 73490 - 3021
* only in conjunction with bridge part 5 hollow screw 74111 - 3811
• thread: cylindrical •• thread: conical

DIMENSIONS (mm) Distributor with non-return valves and motion indicators

• Part 4 = limit switch and part 8 proximity switch are located

on the right hand side normally. Both switch types,
however, can also be attached, at choice, on the left hand
side.

page 3 of 4 35543 P 1e / 02 1199HF

EXPLANATION

1. The basic configuration of distributor ZP-C is illustrated by

a pictural symbol; the channel bores marked are to
indicate that the metering volume in one element
principally is discharged out of the adjacent element
located next to the 'inlet' port, with one exception; the
metering volume in the initial element exits only out of the
end element.

007 is equal to 0.07 ccm/per piston stroke

01 is equal to 0.1 ccm/per piston stroke
02 is equal to 0.2 ccm/per piston stroke
03 is equal to 0.3 ccm/per piston stroke

2. There are various means to combine several metering

volumes to be delivered to a single outlet port, the
following 3 letter symbols are used to mark it accordingly.

Symbol 'a' to denote the position of the outlet port.

Symbol 'b' to denote longitudinal cross-porting of both

volumes within one element, be fitting a bridge on
the respective element.

Symbol 'c' to denote transverse cross-porting by

combining the metering volumes in neighbouring elements
which neccessiates that the seals between elements in
direction to the inlet port are removed and the unused
outlet blanked by plug ( this combination is not feasible in
the initial element).

3. Metering volume at outlet port (ccm)

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

page 4 of 4 35543 P 1e / 02 1199HF

Progressive Distributor ZP - D

USE
The major element of a progressive system is the
lubricant distributor.
ZP-D distributors are used to divide and meter the
lubricant in total loss central lubrication systems (oil,
semi-fluids and greases) and in oil recirculation
systems suitable for small, medium and large
machine plants.

ADVANTAGES
• easy system layout
• problem-free installation
• unsophisticated control and monitoring features
• precisely-measured lubricant discharge per
outlet
• variable flow rates per element suit individual
requirements

APPLICATIONS
Machine-tools and processing machinery, mechanical engineering in general, presses of every type, plastic- and
paper processing machines, textile machines, printing- and packaging machinery, etc.

DESIGN
The distributors consist of several individual elements (minimum 3 in a standard array) which are screwed
together and sealed to each other.
Depending upon the arrangement within the distributor the following segment types are available.
Initial- or A-element
Medium or M-element
End- or VE-element in and an additional V-element

CONFIGURATION and FUNCTION

The major element of a progressive system is the lubricant distributor, whose function is to divide a lubricant
volume delivered under pressure (oil and grease) successively into smaller part volumes towards the 24 or more
(upon request) of possible outlets. This is achieved thanks to the pistons incorporated in progressive distributors
which are positively displaced and controlled against each other.
Pressurized lubricant entering forces the feed pistons to be moved in a certain sequence to the end of the
strokes into their initial positions, thus delivering a full measures charge of lubricant to the outlets, one after
another. The distributor remains operating as long as lubricant is being delivered.
Upon request, ZP-D distributors are supplied with integrated non-return valves located in the outlet bore; this
embodies the advantage to ensure a reliable operation however small a lubricant is being discharged, and at
higher counterpressure situations to overcome with flexible pipework installed downflow.
In addition, we supply distributor types with motion indicators where an electric limit switch and/or electronic
monitor may be fitted enabling external warning and monitoring function.

Page 1 of 4 35544 P1 e / 02 1199HF

TECHNICAL DATA
Max. operating pressure : ........................................................................................................................... 300 bar
Temperature range : ................................... - 20°C up to + 80°C (if high temperatures are prevailing consult us)
Admissible differential pressure between 2 outlets : ............................................................................ max. 50 bar
with non-return valves max. up to admissible system pressure
Output volume each piston stroke : ................................................................................................ 0.5; 1.2; 2.0 cc
Flow volume for oil and grease : ............. min. 0.5 cc/min .................................. max. 1500, 3000, 5000 cc/min •
Non-return valve opening pressure : ............................................................................................................... 2 bar
Response pressure : .................................................................................................................................. ≤ 10 bar
Compatible lubricants on mineral oil basis :
Grease lubricants up to ........................................................................................... NLGI class 3 DIN 51818
Oil ............................................................... ISO VG 68 to 1500 (DIN 51519) at 20°C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants ....................................................................................................................... at request
Pipe connection :
Inlet port ................................................................................................................................................. Ø 10
Outlet port ........................................................................................................................... Ø 6, Ø 8 or Ø 10
• choose always smallest flow rate as basis in case of distributors having different flow volumens.

max. bar No. of Dimensions Weight Standard c/w c/w c/w non-return
outlets elements approx. non-return valve 2 motion valve with
indicattors 2 motion
indicators
a kg Code no. Code no. Code no. Code no.
6 3+1 100 4.84 35544 – 1031 35544 – 2031 35544 – 3031 35544 – 4031
8 4+1 125 6.07 35544 – 1041 35544 – 2041 35544 – 3041 35544 – 4041
10 5+1 150 7.28 35544 – 1051 35544 – 2051 35544 – 3051 35544 – 4051
12 6+1 175 8.48 35544 – 1061 35544 – 2061 35544 – 3061 35544 – 4061
14 7+1 200 9.70 35544 – 1071 35544 – 2071 35544 – 3071 35544 – 4071
16 8+1 225 10.92 35544 – 1081 35544 – 2081 35544 – 3081 35544 – 4081
18 9+1 250 12.13 35544 – 1091 35544 – 2091 35544 – 3091 35544 – 4091
20 10 + 1 275 13.34 35544 – 1101 35544 – 2101 35544 – 3101 35544 – 4101
22 11 + 1 300 14.56 35544 – 1111 35544 – 2111 35544 – 3111 35544 – 4111

Attention:
It must be remembered that the lubricant metered by a given piston does not exit out of same element but in the
adjacent element next to the inlet port. The quantity metered by the piston provided in the initial element is
discharged out of the end element outlet port.

Page 2 of 4 35544 P1 e / 02 1199HF

ACCESSORIES (to be ordered separately)

Part Denomination Code no.

1 straight male stud connector for pipe O.D. Ø 10 • 73442 - 1424
2 copper washer A 17 x 21 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1324
3 connector for pipe O.D. Ø 8 63422 - 2251
max. voltage 500V AC 24V DC 220V DC
4 limit switch max. current 10A - - 66922 - 2271
power 10W 4W
enclosure IP 65 max. frequency 1 Hz
Ø 6• 73442 - 1233
5 straight male stud connector for pipe O.D. Ø 8• 73442 - 1324
Ø 10 • 73442 - 1414
6 copper washer A 14 x 18 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1214
voltage range 10-30V DC
7 proximity switch max. current 200mA
(electronic PNP) max. frequency 1000 Hz 66925 - 1311
enclosure IP 65
plug with cable see data sheet 66925 - 1311 M1
8 protection hood ( makrolon IPC ) 63642 - 1311
- over-pressure indicator * see data sheet 65112 - 1300 M1
* only available with plug 73490 - 3011
• thread: cylindrical

DIMENSIONS (mm) Distributor with non-return valves and motion indicators

* Part 4 = limit switch and part 7 proximity switch are located on the
right hand side normally. Both switch types, however, can also be
attached, at choice, on the left hand side.
With distributor with limit switch, connection of the outlet port located
on the side where the limit switch is attached, can only be made via
connector assy part 3.

Page 3 of 4 35544 P1 e / 02 1199HF

EXPLANATION

1. The basic configuration of distributor ZP-D is illustrated by

a pictural symbol; the channel bores marked are to
indicate that the metering volume in one element
principally is discharged out of the adjacent element
located next to the 'inlet' port, with one exception; the
metering volume in the initial element exits only out of the
end element.

05 is equal to 0.5 cc/per piston stroke

12 is equal to 1.2 cc/per piston stroke
20 is equal to 2.0 cc/per piston stroke

2. There are various means to combine several metering

volumes to be delivered to a single outlet port, the
following 3 letter symbols are used to mark it accordingly.

Symbol 'a' to denote the position of the outlet port.

Symbol 'b' to denote longitudinal cross-porting of both

volumes within one element, remove thereto the set
screw
in the respective element (this combination is not feasible
in the initial element).

Symbol 'c' to denote transverse cross-porting by

combining the metering volumes in neighbouring
elements
which neccessiates that the seals between elements in
direction to the inlet port are removed and the unused
outlet blanked by plug ( this combination is not feasible in
the initial element).

3. Metering volume at outlet port (cc)

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Page 4 of 4 35544 P1 e / 02 1199HF

Progressiv - Verteiler E 4
Positive dividers type E 4
ANWENDUNG
Die Schmierstoff-Verteiler E 4 werden für Progressiv-
Zentralschmieranlagen verwendet und haben die Aufga-
be, den unter Druck zugeführten Schmierstoff (Fett oder
Öl) zu dosieren und auf zwei, drei oder nachgeschaltete
Reibstellen oder Verteiler aufzuteilen.
Bedarfsweise können die Verteiler auch für Mehrleitungs-,
Einleitungs-, Zweileitungs oder Öl-Umlaufanlagen eingesetzt
werden, um die Auslaßmenge eines Pumpen- oder Verteiler-
anschlusses auf mehrere Reibstellen aufzuteilen.

Bild 1. Progressiv-Verteiler E4 ohne Anschlußgarnitur

APPLICATIONS Fig. 1 E4 positive divider without connector fittings

Positive dividers type E 4 are amployed for progressive

centralized lubrication systems. The grease or oil fed into
them under pressure is distributed to various lubrication
points or slave dividers.
If so required, the dividers can also be installed in oil cir-
culating, single, dual or multi-line systems to divide the lubri-
cant in a supply line and feed it to several lubrication points.

WIRKUNGSWEISE (s. Bild 3)

Der Verteiler enthält zwei Kolben, die vom Schmier-

stoffdruck abwechselnd in die beiden Endstellungen ge-
drückt werden. Ein Sperrstift zwischen den beiden Kolben
bewirkt, daß sich jeweils nur ein Kolben bewegen kann,
während der zweite gesperrt ist. Der gesperrte Kolben lei-
tet gleichzeitig den in Verteilermitte zugeführten Schmier-
stoff, abhängig von seiner eigenen Endstellung, entweder
der einen oder der anderen Stirnseite des bewegten Kol- Bild 2. Progressiv-Verteiler E4 mit verschiedenen Anschluß-
bens zu, so daß dieser sich in die entgegengesetzte End- garnituren (Zubehör)
stellung bewegt und den vor der Kolbenstirnfläche befind- Fig. 2 E4 positive divider with various connector fittings
lichen Schmierstoff über eine Ringnut im gesperrten (accessories)
Kolben zum Schmierstoffaustritt fördert. Sobald diese Be-
wegung abgeschlossen ist, geht der bewegte Kolben
selbst in Sperrstellung, um die Steuerung des bisher ge-
sperrten Kolbens durchzuführen.

MODE OF OPERATION (see Fig. 3)

Each divider incorporates two pistons that under the
feed pressure of the lubricant are forced into their two
end positions in alternation. A locking pin between the two
pistons ensures that only one piston can move at a time.
Depending on the end position of the locked piston, lubri-
cant fed into the centre channel flows into the end space
ahead of the other piston, which then moves to the opposi-
te end position and in so doing forces the entrapped lubri-
cant through an annular space around the locked piston
and out of the discharge port. Immediately this movement
is completed the piston is locked, thereby releasing the ot- Bild 3. Schnitt durch den Verteiler
her piston, which continues the cycle. Fig. 3 Cross-setion of a divider

35512 PB 1 d+e / 02 0600HF

Ersatz für / Replacement for 35512 PB 1 / 1.1194Hf
 TECHNISCHE DATEN INSTALLATION
Verwendbare Schmierstoffe: Alle konsistenten Fette bis Die Verteiler E4 können in beliebiger Lage an einer
Penetration 3 sowie alle Öle mit einer Viskosität über ebenen Fläche installiert werden. Zur Befestigung sind
190 mm2s-1 bei Betriebstemperatur (ca. 20o C). zwei Zylinderschrauben M 6 vorzusehen.
Max. zul. Betriebsdruck : ___________________ 160 bar
Max. zul. Differenzdruck : ___________________ 100 bar
zwischen 2 Auslässen INSTALLATION
Min. Betätigungsdruck : _____________________ 10 bar Positive dividers E4 can be installed horizontally in any
Dosiermenge : ________________ 0,4 cm3 je Kolbenhub position. For fixing there are 2 cheese-head screws M 6
Temperaturbereich : ____________ - 20o C bis + 80o C provided.
Auslässe können zur Vergrößerung der Dosiermenge
oder zu Kontrollzwecken zusammengefaßt werden.
Gewicht: ____________ Verteiler ohne Endtaster 1,3 kg
___________________ Verteiler mit Endtaster 1,6 kg
ZUSAMMENFASSUNG VON AUSLÄSSEN
TECHNICAL DATA Je zwei Auslässe können durch Verwenden der An-
schlußgarnitur 63421-4411 zusammengefaßt werden.
Compatible lubricants: all grease having a consistency of
up to penetration class 3 and all oils having a viscosity of
190o mm2s-1 than 25o E a openating temperature of approx. COMBINING OUTLETS
20o Centigrade.
Each 2 outlets can be interconnected by using coup-
Max. admissible working pressure : __________ 160 bar
ling assy. 63421-4411.
Max. admissible differential pressure : ________ 100 bar
between 2 outlets
Min. service pressure : ______________________ 10 bar
Output volume delivered per piston stroke : ___ 0.4 ccm
Ambient temperature : _________ - 20o C up to + 80o C
Two outlets can be interconnected to increase the quantity
delivered or for control purposes.
Weight : ____________ divider without limit switch 1.3 kg
___________________ divider with limit switch 1.6 kg

ABMESSUNGEN (mm) und BESTELL-NR. DIMENSIONS (mm) and ORDER NO.

4-fach ohne Endtaster : Bestell-Nr. 35512 - 5111 4-fach mit Endtaster : Bestell-Nr. 35512 - 5121
Without limit switch : Order No. 35512 - 5111 4-fach mit Bewegungsanzeiger : Bestell-Nr. 35512 - 5131
With limit switch : Order No. 35512 - 5121

2
 INBETRIEBNAHME
Die zu den Schmierstellen führenden, bereits mit
Schmierstoff gefüllten Leitungen sollten erst angeschlos-
sen werden, wenn die Pumpe einwandfrei arbeitet, die
Hauptleitung mit Schmierstoff gefüllt ist und beim Betäti-
gen der Pumpe aus den Verteilerauslässen Schmierstoff
luftfrei austritt.
COMMISSIONING
Prime dividers and make sure that lubricants pro-
trudes out of outlets free of air bubbles, then interconnect
pipework properly prefilled with lubricant, then pump is
started.

WARTUNG
Beseitigung von Störungen
Sollte ein Verteiler keinen Schmierstoff abgeben, ob-
gleich die Hauptleitung unter Druck steht, ist der Verteiler
auszubauen und in Einzelteile zu zerlegen. Alle Teile sind
in Benzin oder Petroleum auszuwaschen, zu kontollieren,
einzuölen und in richtiger Reihenfolge zusammenzusetzen,
wobei darauf zu achten ist, daß jeder Kolben wieder in die
gleiche Bohrung einzubauen ist, aus der er ausgebaut
wurde.
Beschädigte Teile sind auszuwechseln und Dichtun-
gen zu erneuern. Falls ein Kolben oder eine Kolbenboh-
rung beschädigt ist, muß der komplette Verteiler ausge-
wechselt werden.
MAINTENANCE
Failures and their remedies
In the event of failing to deliver lubricant, despite ha-
ving pressurized the main line, dismantle divider, clean all
parts with petrol, check for damages, oil and refit parts in
the correct sequence, by making sure that pistons ara fitted
into the same bore as before.
Replace any damaged parts and seals, and in case pi-
ston or piston bores show deterioration, replace divider
completely.

ZUBEHÖR (muß gesondert bestellt werden) ACCESSORIES (to special order)

Benennung / Designation Bestell - Nr. / Order No.
1. Anschlußgarnitur G 1/4 - G 1/4
zum Zusammenfassen der Fördermenge
von zwei Auslässen
1. Connector R 1/4" BSP - R 1/4" BSP 63421 - 4411
for combining the outputs
of two outlets
2. Gerade Einschraubverschraubung Ø 6 mm 73442 - 1233
2. Straight screw-in conector for Ø 8 mm 73442 - 1324
Ø 10 mm 73442 - 1414
3. Dichtring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu
3. Seal washer A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu 72712 - 1214

4. Anschlußgarnitur G 1/4 - Ø 10
4. Single banjo for R 1/4" BSP - dia. 10 mm 63421 - 4111

5. Anschlußgarnitur G 1/4 - G 1/4 DIN 2440

5. Single banjo for R 1/4" BSP - R 1/4" BSP DIN 2440 63421 - 4211

BESTELLBEISPIEL EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

_________________________________ Bestell - Nr.
1 Schmierstoff-Progressiv-Verteiler E4 _ 35512 - 5111
Anschlußgarnitur __________________ 63421 - 4411
Gerade Einschraubverschraubungen 73442 - 1414
Anschlußgarnituren ________________ 63421 - 4111
__________________________________ Order No.
1 Positive divider type E4 _____________ 35512 - 5111
Connector _______________________ 63421 - 4411
Straight screw-in connectors ________ 73442 - 1414
Single banjos _____________________ 63421 - 4111

3
 ERSATZTEILLISTE UND ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARES PART LIST AND SPARES PART DRAWING
Pos. Benennung / Designation Bestell - Nr. / Order No.
Part Schmierstoffverteiler E 4 Schmierstoffverteiler E 4
mit Endschalter
Positiv divider E 4 Positiv divider E 4
with limit switch
35512 - 5111 35512 - 5121
1 Bewegungszeiger / Indicator pin -- 64161 - 6111
2 Nutring / V-ring -- 72713 - 9093 E
3 Schraube / Screw -- 74161 - 6631
4 Teller / Cup -- 71451 - 3511
5 Überwurfschraube / Cap screw -- 73400 - 3121
6 Dichtring / Sealing ring 72723 - 1211 E
7 Kanalbüchse / Channel bush 71441 - 1619
8 Gehäuse * / Housing * 74331 - 7800
9 Kolben * / Piston * 72108 - 4111
10 Stift * / Pin * 74221 - 3751
11 Verschraubung / Connector 74162 - 2311
12 Blech / Sheet -- 74362 - 2321
13 Endschalter GC - SU 1 St-1 / Limit switch GC - SU 1 St-1 -- 76925 - 5123
14 Sechkantmutter M 4 DIN 934-6 / Hex. nut M 4 DIN 934-6 -- 74175 - 1234
15 Scheibe A 4,3 DIN 125-St / Washer A 4,3 DIN 125-St -- 74185 - 1034
Zylinderschraube M 6 x 16 DIN 7984
16 -- 74102 - 1134
Cheese-head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 7984
17 Federring 6 DIN 7980 / Lock washer 6 DIN 7980 -- 74185 - 3034
18 Scheibe A 6,4 DIN 125-St / Washer A 6,4 DIN 125-St -- 74185 - 1064
* Teile werden nur gemeinsam mit Pos. 6 bis 11 geliefert. Die mit “E” gekennzeichneten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen.
* available as complete assy. as enumerated under 6 up 11. Parts marked “E” are recommended to be held on stock.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 System SAXONIA

Progressive distributor PVB in building-block design

USE DIMENSIONS (mm)
Progressive distributors in building-block design are
applied in small-size progressivve lubrication systems re-
presenting a cost-saving and efficient solution for central
supply of lubricating points with relatively small pressure
and small metered quantities.

ADVANTAGES
q easy system layout
q problem-free installation
q unsophisticated control and monitoring features
q precisely-measured lubricant discharge per outlet

APPLICATIONS
Machine-tools and processing machinery, mechani-
cal engineering in general, presses of every type, plastic-
and pa per pro ces sing ma chi nes, tex ti le ma chi nes,
printing- and packaging machinery, utility vehicle industry, etc.

CONFIGURATION AND FUNCTION

Progressiv distributors in building-block design con-
sist of the housings fitted with 6, 8, 10 or 12 lubrica-
ting-point connections according to the respective appli- Number of L Weight Code no.
cations, the pistons and stops or closure end plugs as well lubricating-point standard with opt.
as shutoff elements for shutting-off or junction of lubri- connections mm kg design control range
cating-point connections. PVB 6 PVB 6-K
6 60 0,78
35536 - 0601 35536 - 0641
The holes of piston guide are linked by channels so that PVB 8 PVB 8-K
hydraulic forced control of entire progressive distributor is 8 75 0,95
35536 - 0801 35536 - 0841
ensured. The progressive distributos deliver the fed lubri- PVB 10 PVB 10-K
10 90 1,12
cant continuously in metered quantities from the lubrica- 35536 - 1001 35536 - 1041
ting-point connections until interruption of lubricant flow. PVB 12 PVB 12-K
12 105 1,29
35536 - 1201 35536 - 1241
Due to the hydraulic forced control, easy monitoring of the
entire lubrication system is possible by monitoring one lu-
bricating-point connection of progressive distributor re-
spectively.
TECHNICAL DATA
When feeding lubricant to the progressive distributor,
the pistons deliver lubricant to the lubrication points as Operating pressure max. : __________ 160 bar (300 bar)
long as the lubricant feed is maintained with a sufficient max. differential pressure between 2 outlets : ___ 70 bar
pressure. Metered quantity per
By removing a headless pin and closing the appertaining piston stroke and outlet : __________________ 0,17 cm3
lubricating-point connection, the metered quantity can be Response pressure : _______________________≤ 10 bar
doubled at the opposite lubricating-point connection. In Temperature range : _______________- 20 oC to + 80 oC
standard version, all lubricating-point connections are Compatible lubricants on mineral oil basis :
supplied in unstoped condition. Outlets can also be fused Grease lubricants up to NLGI class 000 to 3
on both sides of a progressive distributor. Here, care has DIN 51818
to be taken that basically those two outlets having the Oil ISO VG 68 to 1500 DIN 51519 at operating
greatest distance to the lubricant inlet, must not be stop- temperature
ped. Synthetic lubricants at request!

35536 P 1e / 4 01 00HF
Replacement for 35536 P 1e / 2 0499HF
 System SAXONIA

ACCESSORIES

Item. Denomination Code no.

1 straight male stud fitting GE 6 - LR, G 1/8 - steel - galvanized 73442 - 1214
straight male stud fitting GE 8 - LR, G 1/8 - steel - galvanized 73442 - 0853
straight male stud fitting GE 10 - LR, G 1/8 - steel - galvanized 73442 - 1633

2 connecting screw joint with nonreturn valve, completely with clamping ring
cap nut and cutting ring for pipe dia. 6 73449 - 1253
valve body with nonreturn valve for pipe dia. 6 73641 - 5413
cap nut DIN 3870 - ALL 6 73511 - 7153
cutting ring DIN 3861 - LL 6 73511 - 1154
connecting screw joint with nonreturn valve and clamping ring, plug-in type
for hose mandrel dia. 6 73641 - 5423
connecting screw joint with nonreturn valve and clamping ring, plug-in type
for plastic pipe dia. 6 73449 - 1243
pertaining component parts for the packaging of hose material:
hose mandrel, straight dia. 6 for high-pressure hose 8.4 x 2.1 73391 - 2811
screw sleeve for high-pressure hose 8.4 x 2.1 73391 - 2821

3 screw plug for taking up a clamping ring 74161 - 1851

4 clamping ring 73511 - 3223

5 plug screw M 10 x 1 / 6 74161 - 5741

6 sealing joint DIN 7603 - A 10 x 13,5 - Cu 72712 - 1094

7 monitoring switch with clamping body 66925 - 1311

operating voltage 10 up to 30 V DC
output current max. 200 mA
switching frequency max. 1000 Hz
protective system IP 65

8 right angle plug, cable length 10 m 76928 - 2833

straight plug, cable length 10 m 76928 - 2863

2
 System SAXONIA

CODE FOR ORDERING

Ordering key ↓ a Symbol “a” shows the position of the outlet.

The basic design of the progressive distributor PVB is
illustrated by a symbol. The channel holes outlined in the
symbol show that the metered volume of one segment
is basically supplied to the segment being located in front
of it in direction to the inlet bore. An exception exists for the
metering segment at the inlet bore. The metered lubricant
of this segment is pushed out at the outlets of the segment
having the greatest distance to the inlet bore.
There are different possibilities of fusing several metered
volumes of lubricant inside the distributor and to lead them
to one outlet. To mark these possibilities and the arrange-
ment of the outlets, there exist three symbols with letter in-
dication:
 b Symbol “b” indicates the fusion of the two
metered volumes of one metering assembly
group. For this, the headless pin is removed
from the assembly group concerned. (Closure of
the unused outlet by means of item no. 3).
 c Symbol “c” indicates the fusion of the metered
volumes of neighbouring metering assembly
groups. (Closure of the unused outlet by means
of item no. 5).

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Designation for ordering:

Progressive distributor PVB 10 - K 3 5 5 3 6 - 1 0 4 1 / bc - ca - ac - ba - aa

Breakdown of designation for ordering:

Type PVB 10

Visual control facility

Way of the upper metered volume
Way of the lower metered volume

Monitoring switch with clamping part 66925-1311

3
Progressiv - Luftschmiereinheit A
Progressive Air - Oil Mix A

TECHNISCHE DATEN SPECIFICATION

Dosiervolumen wahlweise : ______ 0,07; 0,1; 0,2 oder 0,3 cm
3 Metered volume at choice : __________ 0.07, 0.1, 0.2 or 0.3 cc
Ansprechdruck : _______________________________ ≤ 10 bar Response pressure : ___________________________ ≤ 10 bar
Verwendbare Schmierstoffe : __ Mineralöl ISO VG 68 bis 1500 Compatible lubricants : ____ mineral oils ISO VG 68 up to 1500
(DIN 51519) bei 20 oC Betriebstemperatur (DIN 51519) at 20 oC temperature
Temperaturbereich : _____________________ 0 oC bis + 80 oC Temperature range : __________________ 0 oC up to + 80 oC

DURCHFLUSS - CHARAKTERISTIK FLOW CHARACTERISTIC

35546 P 1 d + e / 1 0492HF
 BESTELLNUMMERN CODE NOS.
Pos. Benennung Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.
Item Denomination Dimensions (mm) Code No.
max. Auslaßzahl Anzahl der Segmente
max. No. of outlets No. of segments a b
6 3 48 — 35546 - 1031
8 4 64 — 35546 - 1041
10 5 80 — 35546 - 1051
Progressiv - Luftschmiereinheit A 12 6 96 137 35546 - 1061
— 14 7 112 153 35546 - 1071
Progressive air - oil mix unit A 16 8 128 169 35546 - 1081
18 9 144 185 35546 - 1091
20 10 160 201 35546 - 1101
22 11 176 217 35546 - 1111
24 12 192 233 35546 - 1121
— bestehend aus folgenden Baugruppen Consisting of the following sub-assies —
1 Überwachungsschalter Proximity switch 66925 - 1311
Pos. Benennung Bestell - Nr.
Item Denomination Code No.
max. Auslaßzahl Anzahl der Segmente
max. No. of outlets No. of segments
6 3 35541 - 4031 *
Schmierstoffverteiler ZP - A 8 4 35541 - 4041 *
mit Rückschlagventile und 10 5 35541 - 4051 *
Bewegungszeiger 12 6 35541 - 4061 *
14 7 35541 - 4071 *
2
16 8 35541 - 4081 *
Progressive divider ZP - A 18 9 35541 - 4091 *
c/w non-return valve and 20 10 35541 - 4101 *
motion indicators 22 11 35541 - 4111 *
24 12 35541 - 4121 *
6 3 62512 - 4031
8 4 62512 - 4041
10 5 62512 - 4051
Luftdosierblock 12 6 62512 - 4061
14 7 62512 - 4071
3
16 8 62512 - 4081
Air dosing block 18 9 62512 - 4091
20 10 62512 - 4101
22 11 62512 - 4111
24 12 62512 - 4121
* Hinweis :
Vollständige Bestellangaben zum Verteiler siehe Maßblatt 35541 - 4000 M 1
* Remarks :
Complete denomination of divider vide data sheet 35541 - 4000 M 1

BESTELLBEISPIEL EXAMPLE FOR ORDER

_____________________________________ Bestell - Nr.
Progressiv-Luftschmiereinheit A ______________ 35546 - 1031
bestehend aus :
1.01 Überwachungsschalter ________________ 66925 - 1311
1.02 Schmierstoffverteiler ZP - A
mit Bewegungszeiger _ 35541 - 4031/ 02aa 02aa 02aa
1.03 Luftdosierblock _______________________ 62512 - 4031
_____________________________________ Code No.
Progressive air-oil mix unit A _________________ 35546 - 1031
consisting of :
1.01 Proximity switch ______________________ 66925 - 1311
1.02 Divider block ZP - A
c/w indicator pin _____ 35541 - 4031/ 02aa 02aa 02aa
1.03 Air dosing block ______________________ 62512 - 4031

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP-A/G
for progressive group-lubrication systems

APPLICATION
Progressive group-lubrication distributors ZP-A/G are
used in group lubrication systems where a lot of machines
or plants, which are either of the same kind or similar to
each other and erected in a hall, have to be supplied with
lubricant individually and program-controlled.
The progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP-A/G
has the task to control, filter, restrict and monitor the lubri-
cant flow as main distributor in plants with a feed line being
permanently under pressure. The lubricant is supplied to
the lubrication points either directly or via further downstre-
am connected progressive distributors (ZP-A or ZP-C).

SYSTEM SCHEME

1. progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP-A/G

2. DELIMON control unit or central control SPS
3. progressive distributor ZP-A
4. progressive distributor ZP-C
5. stop cock
6. pneumatic drum pump
7. compressed-air maintenance unit

Fig.: progressive group-lubrication system

35581 - 1100 P 1 e / 02 0401HF

 SPECIAL FEATURES FIELDS OF APPLICATION
The advantages of the progressive group-lubrication The fields of application of the progressive
system compared with other conventional lubrication group-lubrication system are the following:
systems are the following: ã The lime and cement industry where for instance
q Only one central grease lubrication station with one screw conveyors, filtering installations, wrapping
commun feed line for the complete system is to be fed machines etc. are centrally supplied with lubricant.
instead of expensive single pumps. ã Basically, the progressive group-lubrication system
q Cost intensive check patrols for the checking and fil- can be used in all cases where a great number of
ling of conventional individual grease pumps are no lubrication groups have to be supplied with lubricant
longer necessary. from a central grease station.
q The withdrawal of the lubricant is made directly from ã When the pump station is placed centrally, it is
commercial drums without decantation of the lubri- possible to feed lubrication groups up to a range of
cant into other tanks. 200 x 200 m.
q The contamination of the lubricant is excluded as it is
carried from the grease drum to the lubrication point in
the pipework.
q In case of heavy dirt accumulation, possibility of a
protective installation of the progressive group distri- DESIGN
butor ZP-A/G incl. the electric control system with
monitoring in a switch case. The progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP-A/G
q The lubrication groups can be switched off individually. is a compact unit consisting of:
q Each lubrication group is controlled separately (time- ã Housing with mounted 2/2-way solenoid valve
or cycle-dependent) and monitored via the proximity (NC), integrated filter and throttle insert.
switch at the progressive group-lubrication distributor. ã Progressive distributors consist of several (in
Monitoring of each lubrication group up to the lubri- standard version of at least 3) individual seg-
cation point with regard to distributor blocking and ments, which are screwed with each other and
clogging of the pipework and/or the friction points; sealed against each other, with integrated non-
monitoring of distributor after-running. return valves and two motion indicators as well as
q The solenoid valves of the progressive group-lubrica- a mounted monitoring switch.
tion distributor ZP-A/G of the individual lubrication Dependent on the arrangement in the distributor,
groups can be driven differently depending on the the individual segments are manufactured in the
type of lubricant used. following design:
initial segment or segment A
q Possibility of monitoring all subsidiary distributors with central segment or segment M
regard to blocking by visual indication of the blocking final segment or segment E
distributor with overflow indicator.
q Optimal adaptation of the progressive distributors and
variation possibilities:
ã of the number of outlets by addition or removal of
segments (up to max. 24 outlets).
ã of the metered quantities per distributor outlet due
to different piston types from 0.07 – 0.1 – 0.2 - 0.3
cm³/piston stroke (can be combined optionally).
ã of the metered quantities by fusion of segment
outlets being located next to each other and op-
posite each other. The connections are made by
the removal of disks between the segments
and/or by an exterior bridge.
q The group-lubrication system can be extended or
reduced in size without problems as each lubrication
group is controlled independently of the others.

2
 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP-A/G
is connected to a feed line being permanently under
pressure.
Triggered by a signal of the electric control system, the
2/2-way solenoid valve opens, and lubricant is supplied
under pressure via the filter and the throttle to the pro-
gressive distributor. Then the lubricant is divided into
partial quantities, which are carried one after the other to
the up to 24 possible outlets. This proportioning is effected
by pistons, which are moved by the lubricant being under
pressure and which forcibly control each other. The
pistons move into their final positions and, as a result, the
portions of lubricant before the pistons are supplied one
after the other to lubrication points. The distributor works
as long as it is fed with lubricant via the open 2/2-way
solenoid valve.
The metered volume per piston stroke depends on the
segment size and can optionally be 0.07; 0.1; 0.2; or 0.3
cm³.
There are different possibilities of merging several
metered volumes and to lead them to one outlet.
Each single outlet is furnished with an integrated non-
return valve. This has the advantage that the distributors
work reliably even at higher counterpressures and with
flexible line material.
2 motion indicators are screwed into the piston of
segment E. They jut out of the distributor body and thus
indicate the piston stroke. When one motion indicator has
moved into both stroke directions once, this is a sign for
the fact that all outlets of the distributors have supplied
lubricant.
The motion indicators make a visual and - with
mounted monitoring switch - an electrical operational
monitoring of the progressive group-lubrication distributor
ZP-A/G possible.
SPCIFICATION
General:
Type: _ segment distributor controlled by 2/2-way solenoid valve
Installation position: _____________________________ optional
Ambient temperature:__________________ – 20o C … + 70o C
Number of segments: ____________________________ 3 … 12
Number of outlets: ______________________________ 1 … 24
Weight: ___________________ see table “dimensions”, page 5
Hydraulic:
Operating pressure: __ min. system-dependent; max. 160 bar
Usable lubricants based on mineral oils:
lubricating grease: _______ up to NLGI class 2 DIN 51818
oil: __________ service viscositiy > 220 mm2/s; ISO VG 68
______________ DIN 51519 at 20o C ambient temperature
Synthetic lubricants: __________________________ on request
Progressive distributor:
Allowable differential pressure between 2 outlets:
____________________ up to the max. operating pressure
Metered volume per piston stroke:
____________________ optionally 0.07; 0.1; 0.2 or 0.3 cm3
Opening pressure of the nonreturn valves: ____________ 2 bar
Response pressure of the distributor: _____________ ≤ 10 bar
Flow rate:
for oil: ___________________________ min. 1 cm3/min
for grease: _______________________ min. 0.5 cm3/min
2/2-way solenoid valve:
Type: __________________________________ bevel seat valve
Connection: _______________ flange plate with O-ring sealing
Manual emergency operation:
________ push buttom under rubber cap with spring reser
Function: __________________________ NC - normally closed
Filter sieve:
Filter: _____________________ wire fabric 0.4 x 0.18 DIN 4189
Filtering area: ___________________________________ 19 cm2
Throttle insert:
Type: _____ piston with spiral groove, firm throttle cross sectio
Flow: ______________________ pressure - medium-dependent
Choice:
Code no. 73641 - 7931 for grease _ (low restricting effect)
Code no. 73641 - 7921 for oil ____ (high restricting effect)
Electric:
2/2-way solenoid valve
Rated voltage, optionally: ___ 24 V DC, code no. 38152 - 8933
_____________ 110 V AC 50/60 Hz, code no. 38152 - 8963
_____________ 230 V AC 50/60 Hz, code no. 38152 - 8943
(Further types on request!)
Plug: __________ according to DIN 43650 with screw join PG 9
Protection system: _ IP 54 (in case of a professional installation of the plug)
For further electrical data, please refer to the particular data sheets.
Monitoring switch:
Operating voltage: ________________________ 10 … 30 V DC
Output current max.: ____________________________ 200 mA
Switching frequency max.: _______________________ 1000 Hz
Protection system: _ IP 65 (in case of a professional installation of the plug)
Plug with cable: ________ please refer to brochure 66925 P 1e
3
 ORDER SPECIFICATIONS
for positioning, please refer to page 5 “dimensions”
Item no. Designation Code no.
Progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP - A/G
1.01 35581 – 1100
consisting of:
1.02 Housing with sieve and straight screwed union piece for pipe Ø 10 64331 – 4521
for grease 73641 – 7921
1.03 Throttle insert
for oil 73641 – 7931
24 V DC 38152 – 8933
1.04 2/2-way solenoid valve with appliance plug 110 V 50 / 60 Hz 38152 – 8963
230 V 50 / 60 Hz 38152 – 8943
3 segments, 6 outlets 35541 – 4031
4 segments, 8 outlets 35541 – 4041
5 segments, 10 outlets 35541 – 4051
6 segments, 12 outlets 35541 – 4061
Progressive distributor ZP - A with nonreturn
valves and 2 motion indicators (for complete 7 segments, 14 outlets 35541 – 4071
1.05
order designation with indication of metered 8 segments, 16 outlets 35541 – 4081
volumes, please refer to page 6)
9 segments, 18 outlets 35541 – 4091
10 segments, 20 outlets 35541 – 4101
11 segments, 22 outlets 35541 – 4111
12 segments, 24 outlets 35541 – 4121
1.06 Bridge (in case of b connection) 63421 – 2211
1.07 Connection fittings (for outside pipe Ø 6, steel) 63422 – 2261
1.08 Protecting cap (for indicator pin, silicone) 73649 – 1811
1.09 Monitoring switch (electronic PNP) 66925 – 1311
1.10 Right angle plug with cable, 10 m 76928 – 2833

BESTELLBEISPIEL

1.01 1 piece Progressive group-lubrication distributor ZP - A/G 35581 – 1100

consisting of:
1.02 1 piece Housing 64331 – 4521
1.03 1 piece Throttle insert for grease 73641 – 7921
1.04 1 piece 2/2-way solenoid valve 24 V DC 38152 – 8933
Progressive distributor ZP - A (see page 6)
1.05 1 piece 35541 – 4061
02ba 01ac 02cb 02aa 03ac 02bc
1.06 3 pieces Bridge 63421 – 2211
1.07 5 pieces Connection fittings 63422 – 2261
1.08 1 piece Protecting cap 73649 – 1811
1.09 1 piece Monitoring switch 66925 – 1311
1.10 1 piece Right angle plug 76928 – 2833

4
 DIMENSIONS (mm)

Dimensions Number of segments

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192
B 172,5 188,5 204,5 220,5 236,5 252,5 268,5 284,5 300,5 316,5
approx.
weight
kg
item nos.
4 4,31 4,63 4,94 5,25 5,56 5,87 6,19 6,5 6,81
1.01 - 1.10
all outlets with
connection
fittings

5
 EXPLANATION (Progressive distributor ZP - A)
1. The basic design of the Progressive group-lubrication distri-
butor ZP - A/G is illustrated by a symbol. The channel holes
drawn into the symbol show that the metered volume of a
segment from the progressive distributor ZP-A is fundamen-
tally led into the segment being placed in front of it in direc-
tion of the ”inlet”. There is one exception for the initial seg-
ment the metered volume of which is led back into the final
segment. Each segment of the distributor is provided with a
marking regarding the metered volume.
007 means 0,07 cm³ per piston stroke
01 means 0,1 cm³ per piston stroke
02 means 0,2 cm³ per piston stroke
03 means 0,3 cm³ per piston stroke
2. There are 8 possibilities of merging several metered volumes of the distributor and to lead them to one outlet. Three symbols with
letters are available to mark these possibilities and the arrangement of the outlets.

Symbol “a” shows the position of the outlet.

Symbol “b” shows the merging of the two metered volumes of a segment. For this purpose, a bridge is mounted to the segment
concerned.
Symbol “c” designates the merging of the metered volumes of adjacent segments. For this purpose, the disks between the
segments in direction of ”inlet” are removed. This connection is not possible in the initial segment.
3. Metered volume at the outlet (cm³)
Attention:
Please take special care that the quantity of lubricant meter-
ed by a piston does not escape in the same but in the
adjacent element in direction of the inlet. The metered volu-
me of the piston in the initial segment escapes at the final
segment.

EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

to order specifications item no. 1.05

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Lubricant Metering Element ZE - E for Oil
APPLICATION
The ZE - E lubricant metering elements are designed
for single - line centralized lubrication systems. The
quantity of lubricant to be metered is delivered after each
pressure stroke.
• Precise metering
• Installation at any position
• No dripping
• Free of wear

SPECIFICATION
Fig. 1. and 2. Metering element
Suitable oils
(at operating temperature) _________ 30 to 2000 mm2s-1
Working pressure _____________________ 10 to 30 bar
Max. relief pressure ________________________ 0.8 bar
Installation ___________________________ any position
Ambient temperature ______________ - 20oC to + 80oC
Material ____________________ steel, surface protected

ASSEMBLY
The lubricant divider consist of one manifold as well as Fig. 3. Divider with 4 outlets
one or several metering elements.
The manifolds are made of steel bars 20 x 16 mm and
are provided with port sizes M 10 x 1 to DIN 3862 at both
ends to accommodate a cone ring and a cap screw for
pipe 6 x 1. If installed at the end of a line, use a plug screw
M 10 x 1 to DIN 908-5.8 instead.
The metering elements are fixed on the manifold. Each
element is suitable for 4 mm dia. pipe connection.

MODE OF OPERATION Fig. 1

During the pressure stroke the ball (9) is lifted from its
seat in the housing (3) and pushed up to the top against
the spring force (7), and at the same time the non-return Fig. 4. Divider with 2 x 4 outlets
valve (5 and 6) is lifted against the spring pressure (4) thus
discharging the lubricant to the greasing points.
When de-pressurizing the non-return valve (5 and 6)
closes first. The relief valve of the pump maintains a re-
sidual pressure of 0.8 bar in the main line. Against this
pressure the ball (9) is returned to its end position by
spring (7). The lubricant which remains in front of the ball
(9) is being returned to the chamber (D), ready for the next
cycle. The time for re-charging the lubricant is mainly
determined by the operational viscosity, discharge volu-
me and other factors. The necessary interval between two
cycles ranges from 0.13 to 30 sec. Fig. 5. Symbol of divider with 4 outlets

35691 P 1 e / 02 1294 prov. Hf

Replacement for 35691 P1e / 1st. Ed. 9/79
 CODE NO. AND DIMENSIONS

Metering element for pipe 4 mm dia.

Output volume mm3/cycle Code no.

10 35691 - 1111

25 35691 - 1121

50 35691 - 1131

100 35691 - 1141

200 35691 - 1141 Metering element

Caution: When using plastic tubes it is recommended

to have sleeves for reinforcement
Reinforcement sleeves
for pipe o. dia. 4 ___ Code no. 73511 - 4113
for pipe o. dia. 6 ___ Code no. 73511 - 4123

T - joint _____________________ Code no. 73462 - 3442

Manifolds with outlets arranged unilaterally

No. of Dimensions (mm) Code no.
outlets l a b
2x1 57 1 x 18 -- 63662 - 3121
3x1 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 3131
4x1 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 3141
5x1 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 3151
6x1 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 3161
7x1 165 7 x 18 108 63662 - 3171
8x1 165 7 x 18 108 63662 - 3181
9x1 201 9 x 18 144 63662 - 3191
10 x 1 201 9 x 18 144 63662 - 3211
11 x 1 237 11 x 18 180 63662 - 3221
12 x 1 237 11 x 18 180 63662 - 3231 Manifold with 2 to 12 outlets

Manifolds with outlets arranged on both sides

No. of Dimensions (mm) Code no.
outlets l a b
2x2 57 1 x 18 63662 - 2121
3x2 75 2 x 18 18 63662 - 2131
4x2 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 2141
5x2 111 4 x 18 54 63662 - 2151
6x2 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 2161 Manifold with 2 x 2 to 6 x 2 outlets

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Operating Instructions

for

Lubricant distributor ZE - G

Index
Page
1. General ............................................................................................... 2
2. Application .......................................................................................... 2
3. Safety ................................................................................................. 2
4. Configuration ...................................................................................... 3
5. Drawing with dimensions .................................................................... 3
6. Technical Data .................................................................................... 3
7. Installation and Commissioning .......................................................... 4
8. Spare parts drawing ............................................................................ 5
10. Mode of operation ............................................................................... 6
11. Disassembly and Assembly ............................................................... 7
12. Accessories ........................................................................................ 8
13. Drawing - Manifold - ........................................................................... 8

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 1 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they necessary for the improvement of the lubricant
distributor ZE-G.
The copyright on this operating instruction is kept reserved to Mssrs. DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH.
These operating instruction are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain
technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely nor partically or distributed. It is also
prohibited to use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.
Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

2. Application
The lubricant distributors ZE-G are used in single-line systems. They have the task to meter the lubricant
and to supply it to the friction points, independently of the counterpressure of the same.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.
3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the compotent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user are to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
or life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case for warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

It is deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
• arrow for rotation directions
• mark for fluid connections
must be all means be observed and maintenance in a completely legible condition.
Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
Any modification or changer to the lubricant distributor ZE-G are at all events subject to prior consent by the
manufacturer. Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The
use of any other parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 2 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
4. Configuration
(item no. see spare parts drawings, page 5)
The lubricant distributors ZE-G are manufactured as compact and screw-in unit. They are screwed into
injector manifolds which are arranged in the main line.
The metered volume of the lubricant distributors ZE-G is determined by metering screws (item no. 1) and
delivered with the pressure cycle.
Advantages of lubricant distributors ZE-G
• Low price
• Little space
• Precise metering
• The metered volume is delivered to the driction point independently of the counterpressure of the same.
• Installation at any position
• Extension and modification of existing plants without great expenditure.

5. Drawing (measurement)

ATTENTION
Tightening torque of the
metering screw – max. 5 Nm

Connection M 8 x 1 for pipe outside dia. 4 mm

with male fitting and cone ring

6. Technical Data
Service pressure : ..................................................................................................... between 10 and 30 bar
Relief pressure : ......................................................................................................................... min. 2,5 bar
Metering volume : ................................................................................ 10; 25; 50; 100; 150 and 200 mm³
Operating temperature : ...................................................................................... between -20°C and +80°C
Compatible lubricants :
Mineral oiles with a viscosity between 30 and 3000 mm²/s at operating temperature
Synthetic oils and semi-fluid greases on request
Installation position : .......................................................................................................................... optional
Materials : .................................................................................................................... Brass, NBR and viton

Code No. metering volume

35636 - 1211 10 mm³
35636 - 1221 25 mm³
35636 - 1231 50 mm³
35636 - 1241 100 mm³
35636 - 1251 150 mm³
35636 - 1261 200 mm³

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 3 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
7. Installation and Commissioning
(item no. see spare parts drawings, page 5 and accessories, page 8)
The lubricant distributors ZE-G are screwed into injector manifolds. A Cu-seal ring is used to ensure the
sealing between distributor and injector manifold. The connection to the lubrication point is made by means
of a cone ring, a male fitting for pipes (item no. 1.1) and a pipe having an outside diameter of 4 mm.
ATTENTION
When tightening the male fitting, hold up at the metering screw (item no. 1) with the help of an open-jawed
spanner (wrench size across flats 12) in order to inhibit an overwinding of the metering screw in the housing
(item no. 4). Tightening torque of the metering screw - max. 5 Nm.
The main line connection to the injector manifold is made by means of the cone ring, the male fitting for
pipes and the pipe having an outside diameter of 6 mm. Cone rings and male fittings for pipes are supplied
together with the injector manifolds.
ATTENTION

• When plastic pipes are used, it is necessary to use reinforcing sleeves.

• Install main line from the pump in a rising position and avoid syphons – so-called sacks -, for instance
when it deals with bypasses of obstacles. In such syphons, air inclusions are collected, which cannot be
removed by deaeration of the main line.
• Take care that the lines are clean and free from chips or other contaminations.
• The last distributor in the system has to be installed in such a way that the outlet and/or the outlets are at
the top to ensure an easy deaeration.
• Prefill main line with lubricant prior to commissioning.
• Do not connect the lines leading to the friction points before the pump works perfectly and lubricant
comes without air bubbles out of the distributor outlets when the pump is actuated.
• The friction point lines should also be prefilled with lubricant before they are connected to the distributor
to ensure that lubricant is available at the friction points on commissioning.

• The lubricant distributors ZE-G must not be pressurized with an actuating pressure exceeding 30 bar.

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 4 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
8. Spare parts drawing

* ATTENTION

Tightening torque of the metring screw – max. 5 Nm

9. Spare parts list

item Denomination Code No. Pieces

no.
10 mm³ 53636 - 1211 •
25 mm³ 35636 - 1221 •
50 mm³ 35636 - 1231 •
— Lubricant distributor metering volume 100 mm³ 35636 - 1241 •
ZE-G 150 mm³ 35636 - 1251 •
200 mm³ 35636 - 1261 •
10 74162 - 2761 1 N
25 74162 - 2751 1 N
50 74162 - 2741 1 N
1 metering screw condition mark 100 74162 - 2731 1 N
150 74162 - 2721 1 N
200 74162 - 2711 1 N
2 O-ring 7,65 x 1,78 DIN 3770 - Viton 72711 - 2053 1 1 1 1 1 1
3 compression spring 71613 - 3171 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 housing 71461 - 3631 1 1 1 1 1 1 N
5 piston 72108 - 2341 1 1 1 1 1 1 N
6 O-ring 4,48 x 1,78 DIN 3770 - Viton 72711 - 2913 1 1 1 1 1 1
7 ball 3,175 - NBR 71961 - 1183 1 1 1 1 1 1 N
8 piston 72104 - 1121 1 1 1 1 1 1 N
9 groove ring 4,4 x 1,5 x 1,7 / 1,25 - Viton 72713 - 5573 1 1 1 1 1 1
10 washer 74185 - 1691 1 1 1 1 1 N

All parts marked with “N“ are not supplied loose as single items.

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 5 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
10. Principle of operation
Idle position

Pressure in the main line has been relieved. The compression spring (item no. 3) pushes the dewlivery
pistons (item no. 5 and 6) against the control piston (item nos. 7, 8 and 9). Thus pushing the ball (item
no. 7) onto the delivery piston seat (item no. 5 and 6).

Compression stroke

Due to the pressure build-up in the main line, the control piston (item nos. 7, 8 and 9) and the delivery piston
(item no. 5 and 6) are moved to the left against the force of the compression spring (item no. 3), and the ball
(item no. 7) in the control piston (item nos. 7, 8 and 9) always remains pressed onto the seat of the delivery
piston (item no. 5 and 6). With the displacement of the pistons, the sealing effect of the groove ring (item no.
9) against the housing (item no. 4) is cancelled. This fact causes lubricant to get on the right side in front of
the delivery piston (item no. 5 and 6). The lubricant, which as a result of the preceding lubricating cycle is on
the left side in front for the delivery piston (item no. 5 and 6), is pressed – duo to the displacement of the
pistons to the left – into the line towards the lubricantion point by the metering screw (item no. 1).

Relief stroke

When the main line is released, the groove ring (item no. 9) reseals the space in the distributor against the
main line. At the same time, the compression spring (item no. 3) displaces the delivery piston (item no. 5
and 6) to be right, and the ball (item no. 7) of the control piston (item nos. 7, 8 and 9) is lefted off the seat of
the delivery piston (item no. 5 und 6).

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 6 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
11. Disassembly and Assembly
(item no. see spare parts drawing, page 5)
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Loosen line leading to the lubrication point from the lubricant distributor and unscrew the latter from the
injector manifold.
• Remove metering screw (item no. 1) from the lubricant distributor.
• Remove compression spring (item no. 3).
• Press control piston (item no. 7, 8 and 9) and delivery piston (item no. 5 and 6) out of the housing
(item no. 4).
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether,
• Check parts for damages.
• Replace damaged parts.
• Assemble lubricant distributor in reverse order.
ATTENTION
Tighten metering screw (item no. 1) with a max. torque of 5 Nm.
• Screw lubricant distributor into the injector manifold and reconnect line leading to the lubrication point.
ATTENTION
When tightening the male fitting for pipes, hold up with an open-jawed spanner (wrench size across flats
12) at the metering screw (item no. 1) in order to avoid an overwinding of the metering screw in the
housing (item no. 4).

• Dispose of oil and cleanser according to rule.

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 7 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
12. Accessories

item Denomination Code No.

no.
1.1 for pipe male fitting 73511 - 5771
outside dia. 4 cone ring 73511 - 2711
1.2 copper washer 10 x 13,5 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1094
1.3 tapped plug M 10 x 1 DIN 908 74106 - 1164
2 63662 - 3121
3 63662 - 3131
manifold with number of 4 63662 - 3141
one-sided arranged outlets 5 63662 - 3151
outlets 6 63662 - 3161
7 63662 - 3171
1.4 8 63662 - 3181
9 63662 - 3191
10 63662 - 3211
12 63662 - 3231
2x2 63662 - 2121
manifold with number of 3x2 63662 - 2131
double-sided outlets 4x2 63662 - 2151
(opposite) outlets 5x2 63662 - 2161
* When using item nos. 1.2 and 1.3 or distributor and item no. 1.2 remove cap nut and cone ring beforehand.

13. Drawing with dimensions - Manifold - (item no. 1.4 Accessories)

Manifold with single-arranged outlets Number of Dimension
outlets I a b
2x1 57 1 x 18 -
3x1 75 2 x 18 18
4x1 93 3 x 18 36
5x1 111 4 x 18 54
6x1 129 5 x 18 72
7x1 165 7 x 18 108
8x1 165 7 x 18 108
9x1 201 9 x 18 144
10 x 1 201 9 x 18 144
12 x 1 237 11 x 18 180

Manifold double-sided (opposite) outlets Number of Dimension

outlets I a b
2x2 57 1 x 18 -
3x2 75 2 x 18 18
4x2 93 3 x 18 36
5x2 111 4 x 18 54
6x2 129 5 x 18 72

35636 PB 1 e / 3 0600HF Page 8 of 8

Replacement for 35636 PB 1 / 2 9804Wi
 Operating Instructions

for

Lubricant distributor ZE - C

Index
Page
1. General ................................................................................................ 2
2. Application ........................................................................................... 2
3. Safety .................................................................................................. 2
4. Configuration ....................................................................................... 3
5. Drawing with dimensions ..................................................................... 3
6. Technical Data .................................................................................... 3
7. Installation ........................................................................................... 4
8. Commissioning .................................................................................... 4
9. Spare parts drawing ............................................................................ 5
10. Spare parts list .................................................................................... 5
11. Mode of operation ................................................................................ 6
12. Disassembly and Assembly ................................................................ 7
13. Operating troubles and their reasons .................................................. 7
14. Accessories ......................................................................................... 8

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 1 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
1. General
We recommend to read the operating instructions carefully prior to commissioning as we cannot take on any
liability for damages or failures resulting from the non-observance of these operating instructions.
With regard to the illustrations and indications of these operating instructions, we reserve the right to make
technical changes without prior notice as far as they necessary for the improvement of the lubricant
distributor ZE-C.
The copyright on this operating instruction is kept reserved to Mssrs. DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH.
These operating instruction are intended for the erecting, operating and supervising personnel. They contain
technical regulations and drawings which must neither completely nor partically or distributed. It is also
prohibited to use or convey them without autority to any persons for competition purposes.
Firm address, address for spare parts and after-sales service
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH
Arminstraße 15 Vertriebsbüro Beierfeld
Postfach 10 20 52 Am Bockwald 4
D-40011 Düsseldorf D-08340 Beierfeld
Phone no. : + 49 211 77 74-0 Phone no. : + 49 3774 6511-0
Fax no. : + 49 211 77 74-210 Fax no. : + 49 3774 651130
E-mail : info@delimon.de E-mail : saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de

2. Application
The lubricant distributors ZE-C are used in single-line systems. They have the task to meter the lubricant
and to supply it to the friction points, independently of the counterpressure of the same.
Every use beyond this field of application is considered to be not in accordance with the product's intended
purposes, and the manufacturer is not to be held responsible for any damages resulting from it. The
corresponding risk is taken by the user only.

3. Safety
These operating instructions cover fundamental instructions, which are to be observed for erection,
operation and maintenance. Therefore, it is absolutely essential that these operating instructions are studied
by the erecting engineer and the compotent qualified staff / user prior to erection and commissioning. It must
always be available at the place of use of the machine plant.
The safety instructions mentioned in these operating instructions, the existing national regulations as to the
prevention of accidents as well as possible working, operating and safety regulations of the user are to be
observed.
Informative signs within the operating instructions
The safety instructions within the operating instructions the nonobservance of which are abt to cause danger
or life or limb, are marked with the general danger sign.

In case for warning against electric voltage, the following danger sign is used:

It is deals with safety instructions the nonobservance of which may cause danger to the machine and its
function, the following word is inserted:
ATTENTION
Sign that are attached on the right hand side of the machine, as for example
• arrow for rotation directions
• mark for fluid connections
must be all means be observed and maintenance in a completely legible condition.
Arbitrary modification and production of spare parts
Any modification or changer to the lubricant distributor ZE-C are at all events subject to prior consent by the
manufacturer. Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the manufacturer serve the safety. The
use of any other parts may set aside the liability for the consequences resulting from it.

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 2 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
4. Configuration
The lubricant distributors ZE-C are manufactured as compact unit with 1, 2 or 3 outlets The metered volume
is released with the pressure cycle and can be chosen separately for each outlet due to appropriate
metering screws (item no. 12).
Advantages of lubricant distributors ZE-C
• Low price
• Little space
• Precise metering
• The metered volume is delivered to the driction point independently of the counterpressure of the same.
• Installation at any position
• Extension and modification of existing plants without great expenditure.

5. Drawing (measurement)

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 3 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
6. Technical Data
Operating pressure .................................................................................................................. max. 160 bar
Service pressure : ................................................................................................... between 15 and 160 bar
Relief pressure ............................................................................................................................ min. 25 bar
Metering volume ...................................................................................... 0,1; 0,2; 0,4; 0,6; 0,8 and 1 cm³
Operating volume .............................................................................................................................. 0,1 cm³
Number of outlets ............................................................................................................................ 1, 2 or 3
Operating temperature ................................................................................... between - 20°C and + 80°C
Compatible lubricants on basic of mineral oiles : ............. Grease NLGI-class 000 to 2 DIN 51818 (51825)
Oiles off viscosity 460 mm²/s at operating temperature, Synthetic lubricants on request
Installation position : .......................................................................................................................... optional
Materials ..................................................................................................................... Al, St, Brass and NBR
Code nos.
Outlets Metering volume Code no.
0,1 cm³ 35640 - 0011
0,2 cm³ 35640 - 0021
0,4 cm³ 35640 - 0041
Lubricant distributor ZE-C 1 0,6 cm³ 35640 - 0061
0,8 cm³ 35640 - 0071
1,0 cm³ 35640 - 0101
2 35642 - 0000; 0,2; 0,4 *
3 35643 - 0000; 0,6; 0,1; 0,8 *
* For lubricant distributors with 2 or 3 outlets, one has to state the metered volume of each outlet on the
order. The outlet nos. 1 to 3 (please see dimensioned drawing) determine the order of the metered
quantities.

7. Installation
The lubricant distributors ZE-C can be installed in any position (optional). It is possible to link several
lubricant distributors by nipples. The arrangement of the main line is also possible.
The easiest, most maintenance-friendly installation with good deaeration possibilities is achieved when
individual lubricant distributors are arranged in secondary delivery lines with the outlets pointing to the top.

The last distributor in the system has always to be installed with the outlet(s) pointing to the top in order to
make an easy deaeration possible.

8. Commissioning
The lines leading to the friction points should not be connected before the pump works perfectly, the main
line is filled with lubricant and - when the pump is actuated - lubricant comes out of the distributor outlets
without air bubbles.
Before connecting friction point lines to the lubricant distributor, fill them with lubricant to ensure that
lubricant is available at the friction points just after commissioning.

The lubricant distributors ZE-C must not be pressurized with an actuating pressure > 160 bar.

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 4 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
9. Spare parts drawing

10. Spare parts list

Item Designation Code no. Pieces
0,1 35640 - 0011 •
0,2 35640 - 0021 •
Lubricant distributor ZE-C with 1 outlet 0,4 35640 - 0041 •
— Metering volume / cm³ 0,6 35640 - 0061 •
0,8 35640 - 0081 •
1,0 35640 - 0101 •
— Lubricant distributor ZE-C with 2 outlets 35642 - 0000 •
— Lubricant distributor ZE-C with 3 outlets 35643 - 0000 •
Distributor housing 1 outlet 63662 - 1211 1 1 1 1 1 1
consisting of item no. 1 to 10 2 outlets 63662 - 1221 1 N
3 outlets 63662 - 1231 1
1 outlet 74332 - 8811 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 Housing 2 outlets 74332 - 8821 1
3 outlets 74332 - 8831 1
2 Pressure spring 71615 - 5132 2 2 2 24 2 2 6 R
-- Control inlet consisting of item no. 3 to 6 62212 - 1611 1 1 1 12 1 1 3 N R
3 Housing 74332 - 8911 1 1 1 12 1 1 3
4 O-ring 13,3 x 2,4 DIN 3771 -NBR 70 72711 - 1413 1 1 1 12 1 1 3 E R
5 Piston 72104 - 1211 1 1 1 12 1 1 3
6 Safety disk 3,2 DIN 6799 74185 - 2634 1 1 1 12 1 1 3 R
7 Spring plate 71641 - 3521 1 1 1 12 1 1 3
8 O-ring 10,77 x 2,62 DIN 3771-NBR 70 72711 - 1343 1 1 1 12 1 1 3 E R
9 Piston 72116 - 1211 1 1 1 12 1 1 3
10 Washer 74181 - 3512 1 1 1 12 1 1 3
11 O-ring 19 x 1,5 DIN 3771-NBR 70 72711 - 2013 1 1 1 12 1 1 3 E R
01 (0,1 cm³) 74162 - 6511 1 0 0
02 (0,2 cm³) 74162 - 6521 1 0 0
12 Metering screw 04 (0,4 cm³) 74162 - 6531 1 0 0
condition mark 06 (0,6 cm³) 74162 - 6541 1 0 0
08 (0,8 cm³) 74162 - 6561 1 0 0
10 (1,0 cm³) 74162 - 6551 1 0 0
Parts marked with "0" are available at the lubricant distributor according to the model.
Parts marked with “N“ are not supplied loose as single items.
Parts marked with "E" are recommended to be kept on stock.
Parts marked with "R" are delivered commonly as repair kit, code no. 69111-6721.

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 5 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
11. Mode of operation
Idle position

The main line is relieved. The compression spring (item no. 2.2) presses the control piston (item no. 5) into
its right final position. The delivery piston (item nos. 8 and 9) is also pressed into its right final position by the
compression spring (item no. 2.1).

Compression stroke

Due to the pressure build-up in the main line, the control piston (item no. 5) is moved against the force of the
compression spring (item no. 2.2) to the left. This causes lubricant - via the channel system of the housing
(item no. 3) - to get underneath the delivery piston (item nos. 8 and 9) and displaces the same also against
the force of the compression spring (item no. 2.1) to the left. Due to the displacement of the delivery piston
(item no. 8 and 9), the lubricant being stored in front of the delivery piston (item nos. 8 and 9) on the left, is
pressed into the line towards the friction point by the metering screw (item no. 12).

Relief stroke

When the main line is being relieved, the control piston (item no. 5) is pressed to the right by the force of the
compression spring (item no. 2.2). The space in the distributor towards the main line is sealed. By this, the
channel system of the housing (item no. 3) is released from the right to the left side of the delivery piston
(item nos. 8 and 9). The force of the compression spring (item no. 2.1) causes the delivery piston (item nos.
8 and 9) to be displaced to the right and, as a result, the lubricant is rearranged from the right side to the left
side of the delivery piston (item nos. 8 and 9).

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 6 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
12. Disassembly and Assembly
(item no. see spare parts drawing, page 5)
The user has to take care that all kinds of maintenance inspectional and assembly works are carried out by
authorized and qualified specialists who have informed themselves sufficiently by studying the operating
instructions thoroughly.

For all kind of works to be carried out at the machine or system, the machine or system must imperatively
be out of operation. The procedure for stopping the machine or system described in the operating
instructions must by all means be observed.

• Shut down machine or system according to the relevant instructions.

• Loosen line and/or lines leading from the lubricant distributor to the friction point and remove lubricant
distributor from the main line and/or secondary delivery line.
• Remove metering screw (item no. 12) from the lubricant distributor.
• Remove compression spring (item no. 3) and washer (item no. 10).
• Remove piston (item no. 9) with o-ring (item no. 8).
• Control insert (item 3 to 6) pull out from housing (item 1).
• Dismantle control insert.
• Clean parts in naphtha or petroleum ether,
• Check parts for damages.
• Replace damaged parts.
• Assemble lubricant distributor in reverse order.
• Install lubricant distributor into the main line and/or secondary delivery line and reconnect line and/or
lines towards the friction point.
ACHTUNG
Deaerate centralized lubrication system prior to commissioning of the machine or plant.

• Dispose of oil and cleanser according to rule.

13. Operating troubles and their reasons

Premature wear of the movable parts and the seals of the lubricant distributor is mainly caused by
contaminated lubricant.
Failures in the system are above all a result from the fact that the lubricant lines have not been vented
perfectly.

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 7 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
14. Accessories

Item no. Designation Code no.

4 73442 - 1114
1.1 Straight male stud fitting G 1/8 for pipe dia. 6 73442 - 1214
8 73442 - 1314
brass 63422 - 2241
1.2 Connection fitting G 1/8 for pipe dia. 6
steel 63422 - 2261
6 73442 - 1233
1.3 Straight male stud fitting G 1/4 for pipe dia. 8 73442 - 1324
10 73442 - 1414
1.4 Plug screw G ¼ 74161 - 7811
1.5 Sealing ring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603-Cu 72712 - 1214
1.6 Nipple 73490 - 6511

35640 PB 1 e / 2 0600HF Page 8 of 8

Replacement for 35640 PB 1 / 1 0396HF
Lubricant Distributors ZV - B and ZV - C
Fig. 1
Distributor ZV-B with 4 outlets and 2 metering screws
APPLICATION
The lubricant distributors type ZV-B and ZV-C are used
for dual-line central lubrication systems for grease and for
oil. Their function is to meter the lubricant and to press it
through the lines to the lubrication points independently of
back pressure.
DISTRIBUTOR DESIGN AND
METERING VOLUMES
The lubricant distributors type ZV-B and ZV-C are
block type designed, and contructed in different metering
volumes. Each lubricant distributor has two threaded
holes G 3/8 on each of ist two faces for the optional
connection of the two main lines. For the connection of the
friction point lines, the lubricant distributors have two to
eight threaded holes G 1/4. The lubricant distributors do
not have springs and work hydraulically, operated by the
lubricant.
The distributors are available with graguated or infinite me-
tered quantities, by choice.
Four different sizes of distributors with 0.5 cm3, 1.5 cm3,
3.0 cm3 and 15 cm3 max. metering volume are available.
Fig. 2
Distributor ZV-B with 8 outlets and 4 adjusting devices with
motion indicator
TECHNICAL DATA
Service pressure max. _____________________ 400 bar
Operating pressure min. _____________________ 10 bar
Metering volumes :
Distributor type ZV - B ____________ 0,5; 1,5 or 3,0 cm3
Distributor type ZV - C __ 0 up to 15 cm3 infinite metered
Operating volume _________________________ 0,3 cm3
Number of outlets :
Distributor type ZV - B ________________________1 to 8
Distributor type ZV - C _______________________ 1 to 4
Operating temperature __________ - 20 oC to + 80 oC
Suitable lubricants :
Grease lubricants on mineral oil basis up to NLGI class 3,
DIN 51818
Oil lubricants: ISO VG 68 up to 1500 (DIN 51519) as
service viscosity 190 mm2/s
Synthetic lubricants ______________________ at request
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The lubricant distributors type ZV-B and ZV-C has one
metering piston and one control piston for every pair of lu-
brication points connected. Depending on, either no. I
main line or No. II main line is pressurized, where the se-
cond main line must be relieved of pressure, only that lu-
brication point will be served, which is associated with the
main line concered. As a result, an operating cycle always
includes two lubricating strokes.
35712 P 2 e / 03 1199HF
replacement for 35712 P2e/02 0697HF
 Fig. 3
During the lubrication pause both pistons are located at their
bottom terminal positions. As soon as main line No. I is pressuri-
zed while main line No. II is relieved the control piston will move
upwards first, and then the metering piston, do that the lubricant
displaced by the metering piston is pressed via the annular
groove in the control piston to the top outlet. The lubricant dis-
placed by the control piston is passed into the relieved main line
No. II.
Fig. 4
For lubrication stroke No. 2 the main line No. II is pressurized
and the main line No. I relieved so that first the control piston
and then the metering piston is moved, forcing the lubricant,
displaced by the metering piston, out through the bottom out-
let. The pressure in the line to the lubrication point is equivalent
to the pump’s delivery pressure less the pressure drop caused
by main line and distributor. The pressure difference between
the two main lines should be 50 bar at least, to obtain a suffi-
cient control force for the control piston.

DISTRIBUTOR WITH ODD CHECKING OF DISTRIBUTOR

NUMBER OF OUTLETS
Where 1, 3, 5 and 7 lubrication points are connected to
a distributor the set screw located between two facing out-
lets is removed by the manufacturer, and the unused out-
let is sealed off by a screw plug. As result, the connected
lubrication points is fed lubricant from both strokes of the
metering piston (i.e. double the quantity).
OPERATION
The operation of distributor can be checked visually by
adjusting devices, fitted with motion indicators. The mo-
tion indicator is connected to the metering piston, that ef-
fects, that piston strokes are visible from outside (fig. 2).

METERING QUANTITY
only for distributor type ZV-B
( Metered volume per cycle and outlet)

Where no later variation of the metering quantity is

requested the length of stroke is limited by a metering
screw. That effects, that the piston dispaces the same
quantity with every stroke (fig. 1). Add the reference num-
ber for the desired metering quantity, per outlet pair to the
order number of distributor according to the sequence 1,
2, 3, 4 (see drawing of distributor with 7 and 8 outlets on
page 5). Where an adjusting device is requedted, instead
of the metering screw, the length of stroke and conse-
quently the metering quantity can be changed. The mini-
mum quantity amounts app. 1/6 of the max. Quantity.

2
 ELECTRICAL REMOTE MONITORING SUBSEQUENT CONNECTING OF
only for distributor type ZV-B TWO FACING OUTLETS
(Operating indicator)
Subsequently fall out of one lubrication point needs to
Where remote monitoring is requested, the distribu- remove the set screw between two facing outlets and to
tors can be fitted with limit switches for each two connec- plug one outlet with a plug screw.
ted lubrication points.
The adjusting devices with limit switch permits to
change the metering rate of the two connected lubrication
points and to produce an electrical signal in both end posi-
tions, independent from the stroke length.
Plug screw
The main lines can be
connected right or left hand
by choice. Each distributor
will be supplied inclusive
2 plug screws.

Distributors with adjusting device and electrical monitoring

(limit switches) can be installed only as shown above.

Fig. 5
Fixing of distributors with adjusting device and limit
switches faces.

ACCESSORIES must be ordered separately.

Item Designation Code - no.

1 Male stud fitting for tube ext. diameter 10 73442 - 1424
2 Seal washer A 18 x 22 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1334
3 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 50 DIN 7984 72102 - 1194
4 Seal washer A 14 x 20 DIN 7603 - Cu 72712 - 1244
6 73442 - 1233
5 Male stud fitting for tube ext. diameter 8 73442 - 1324
10 73442 - 1414
6 Set screw M 6 x 8 DIN 913 74107 - 2264
7 Plug socket G 1/4 74161 - 7811
8 Cylinder head screw M 6 x 90 DIN 912 74102 - 1464
9 Spacer 71461 - 2311

Note :
The adjustment of the metering volume will be done allways for two facing outlets together.
Where distributors with odd numbers are used two outlets are crossported into one. This outlet delivers the double quantity.

3
 ORDERING INSTRUCTIONS
In case of ordering should be stated :
number required, description, type-designation, number of outlets and code no.
Additional parts shall be itemized separately.
Metering screw Adjusting device with Adjusting device with
Metered volume adjustable set motion indicator electrical monitoring (limit
Metering volume switches) Metering volume
The metering screw is marked adjustable infiinitely adjustable infinitely
with the reference number of
the metering volume
metering volume 1/1 Ref. 1
metering volume 1/2 Ref. 2
metering volume 1/3 Ref. 3 *
metering volume 1/4 Ref. 4
metering volume adjustable
gratually

Metering screw Number of outlets Code no. ** Code no. Code no. ***
1 35712 - 3211 35712 - 3511
2 35712 - 3221 35712 - 3521
3 35712 - 3231 35712 - 3531
ZV - B 4 35712 - 3241 35712 - 3541
0,5 cm3 5 35712 - 3251 35712 - 3551
6 35712 - 3261 35712 - 3561
7 35712 - 3271 35712 - 3571
8 35712 - 3281 35712 - 3581
1 35712 - 3111 35712 - 3311 35712 - 3411
2 35712 - 3121 35712 - 3321 35712 - 3421
3 35712 - 3131 35712 - 3331 35712 - 3431
ZV - B 4 35712 - 3141 35712 - 3341 35712 - 3441
1,5 cm3 5 35712 - 3151 35712 - 3351 35712 - 3451
6 35712 - 3161 35712 - 3361 35712 - 3461
7 35712 - 3171 35712 - 3371 35712 - 3471
8 35712 - 3181 35712 - 3381 35712 - 3481
1 35712 - 3811 35712 - 3911
2 35712 - 3821 35712 - 3921
3 35712 - 3831 35712 - 3931
ZV - B 4 35712 - 3841 35712 - 3941
3,0 cm3 5 35712 - 3851 35712 - 3951
6 35712 - 3861 35712 - 3961
7 35712 - 3871 35712 - 3971
8 35712 - 3881 35712 - 3981
1 35713 - 1211
ZV - C 2 35713 - 1221
0 up to 15 cm3 3 35713 - 1231
4 35713 - 1241

* Output volume 1/3 reference number 3 only at distributors 3,0 cm3

** When metering screw with valuesdeviating from the nominal metering volume 0,5; 1,5 resp. 3,0 cm3 are requested, it must
be stated in the order, according to the sequence of outlets pairs (see order example).
*** Every distributor includes an adjusting device with limit switch for each pair of outlets.
When desired, there is an adjusting screw with limit switch avai- ORDER OF EXAMPLE
lable for an individual pair of outlets instead of the metering 4 lubricant distributors ZV - B with 6 outlets,
screw resp. the adjusting device. adjusting device with motion indicator code no. 35712 - 3361
For this use the following code no. : In special version, one adjusting device with limit switch
Adjusting device with limit switch, code no. 65122-1381 code no. 65122 - 1381

4
 DIMENSIONS (mm)

ORDER OF EXEMPLE ORDER OF ACCEPTANCE

1 Lubricant distrributor type ZV - B, 1,5 cm3 1 Lubricant distributor type ZV - B
Code no. ________________________ 35712 - 3161 Code no. ________________________ 35712 - 3161
Metering screw, 6 outlets Outlets 6
Metering screw reference number 4, 1, 4 Metering screw * 1,5 cm3
* Metering screw 4, 1, 4

5

Zumeßventile VZ 2 … VZ 10
Metering valve VZ 2 … VZ 10
1. BESCHREIBUNG
Die Zumeßventile VZ 2 … VZ 10 werden als Schmierstoff-
verteiler in Zweileitungsanlagen eingesetzt.
Ihr robuster Aufbau sowie die hochgenau eingeläppten
Dosier- und Steuerkolben sichern bei Systemdrücken bis 500
bar auch unter extremsten Bedingungen eine zuverlässige
Schmierstoffdosierung. Auf Grund der Blockbauweise ist ge-
genüber Modularverteilern eine einfache In-Line-Montage
ohne zusätzliche Befestigungselemente möglich.
Die Oberflächen der Zumeßventile sind galvanisch ver-
zinkt. Die Ausführung aus nichtrostendem Stahl ist nach Ver-
einbarung möglich. Mit der Zumeßventilbaureihe VZ 2 bis VZ
10 stehen Zumeßventile für den Anschluß von 2, 4, 6, 8 und 10
Schmierstellen zur Verfügung. Durch das Zusammenlegen
von Schmierstellenanschlüssen ist auch die Möglichkeit ge-
geben eine ungerade Anzahl Zumeßstellen mit Schmierstoff
zu versorgen.
Die Zumeßventile sind in Blockbauweise ausgeführt. Je-
dem Schmierstellenpaar ( max. 5 ) ist je ein Steuer- und
Dosierkolben zugeordnet. Der Gehäuseblock nimmt die
Hauptleitungs- und Schmierstellenanschlüsse auf und hat
zwei Befestigungsbohrungen.
Die Betätigung erfolgt durch die wechselseitige Druck-
beaufschlagung der Hauptleitungen I und II. Die vollständige
Dosierung aller Zumeßstellen eines Zumeßventiles ist nach
Druckbeaufschlagung der Hauptleitung I und II beendet. Die
Zumeßventile sind mit einer optischen Kontrolleinrichtung
ausgerüstet, die durch eine elektrische Kontrolleinrichtung
ersetzt werden kann.
2. TECHNISCHE DATEN
Nenndruck : _________________________________ 400 bar
Betriebsdruck max. : _________________________ 500 bar
Ansprechdruck : ______________________________ 40 bar
Dosiervolumen /
Schmierstellenanschluß : _________ 0,4 … 2 cm³ stufenlos
Temperatureinsatzbereich : _____________ - 30 … + 80°C
Konsistenzkennzahl : ________________________ 000 … 3
________________________ (NLGI-Klasse DIN 51818)
Gewicht:
VZ 2 ____________________________________ 1,2 kg
VZ 4 ____________________________________ 2,1 kg
VZ 6 ____________________________________ 3,0 kg
VZ 8 ____________________________________ 3,9 kg
VZ 10 ____________________________________ 4,8 kg
System SAXONIA
1. DESCRIPTION
The metering valves VZ 2 … VZ 10 are used to distribute
lubricant in double-line lubrication systems.
The solid body as well as the high precision finish of the
metering and control pistons, ensures top performance of the
system, with pressure up to 500 bar, even under extreme
conditions.
The surface of the metering valves are zinc galvanised. To
special order, stainless steel valves are also available.
The numbers of the metering valves serie VZ 2 to VZ 10 apply
to the number of lubricant points available. By coupling two
outlets together, an uneven number of lubrications points can
be served.
The metering valves are arranged in blocks of pairs of lu-
brication points (max. 5 pairs), each pair having it’s own con-
trol piston and metering piston. The housing block has con-
nections for the two main-lines and for lubrication points and
has two fixing holes.
The operation of the valves is controlled by the alternate
pressurization of main-line I and II, after which, the dispending
of lubricant to all points served by the metering valves is com-
plete. The metering valves are equiped with a visual control
device, wich can be replaced by an electrical control device.
2. TECHNICAL DATA
Nominal pressure : ___________________________ 400 bar
Operating pressure max. : _____________________ 500 bar
Ansprechdruck : ______________________________ 40 bar
Metered quantity / Lubricating-point
connection : ______________ 0,4 … 2 cm³ infinitely variable
Temperature range of application : _______ - 30 … + 80°C
Consistency index : __________________________ 000 … 3
__________________________ (NLGI class DIN 51818)
Weight:
VZ 2 ____________________________________ 1.2 kg
VZ 4 ____________________________________ 2.1 kg
VZ 6 ____________________________________ 3.0 kg
VZ 8 ____________________________________ 3.9 kg
VZ 10 ____________________________________ 4.8 kg
35716 BA 1 d + e / 02 0900HF
Ersatz für 35716 BA 1 / 01 9708Wi
 System SAXONIA

3. ABMESSUNGEN (mm) 3. DIMENSIONS (mm)

A 1 … E 2 = Schmierstellenanschlüsse A 1 … E 2 = Lubricating-point connections

Bezeichnung / Designation VZ 2 VZ 4 VZ 6 VZ 8 VZ 10
Schmierstellenanschlüsse / Lubrication-point connections 2 4 6 8 10
l = Länge / length 48 80 112 144 176

4. DRUCKIMPULS IN DER 4. PRESSURE IMPULSE IN

HAUPTLEITUNG (HL) I
Steht die HL I unter Druck, so bewegt der Schmierstoff
den Steuerkolben (1) zur Verschlußschraube (2). Über den
dadurch freiwerdenden Kanal (a) gelangt der Schmierstoff in
den Raum (c) und bewegt den Dosierkolben (3) bis zur Ver-
schlußschraube (4). Der vor dem Dosierkolben im Raum (d)
befindliche Schmierstoff wird über den Kanal (b) und die
Ringnut im Steuerkolben zum Schmierstellenanschluß (e) ge-
fördert.
MAIN-LINE (HL) I
When HL I is pressurized, the lubricant pushes the control
piston (1) to the closing screw (2). Through now open duct (a),
the lubricant enters the space (c) and pushes the metering pi-
ston (3) to the closing screw (4). The lubricant in the space (d)
in front of the metering piston, is forced through duct (b) and
through the annular groove in the control piston to the lubrica-
tion point connection (e).

2

5. DRUCKIMPULS IN DER
HAUPTLEITUNG (HL) II
Steht die HL II unter Druck, so bewegt der Schmierstoff
den Steuerkolben zur Verschlußschraube (5). Über den da -
durch freigegebenen Kanal (b) gelangt der Schmierstoff in
den Raum (d) und bewegt den Dosierkolben bis zum An-
schlag der Kontrolleinrichtung (6). Der Schmierstoff gelangt
damit über den Kanal (a) und die Ringnut im Steuerkolben
zum Schmierstellenanschluß (f). Der gesamte Vorgang kann
sich je nach Schmierstoffbedarf der Schmierstellen in be-
stimmten Zeitabständen oder in Abhängigkeit von der Ma-
schinenbelastung wiederholen.
Zur optischen Kontrolle der Funktion ist am Dosierkolben
eine Kolbenstange befestigt, die dessen Bewegungen beim
Dosiervorgang anzeigt. Die zur Standardausrüstung gehö-
rende optische Kontrolleinrichtung dient gleichzeitig der stu-
fenlosen Dosiermengenregelung über die Gewindestifte (8).
Bei Auslieferung der Zumeßventile ist die Dosiermenge
auf den Maximalwert eingestellt.
6. INBETRIEBNAHMEN
6.1 Zusammenlegung von zwei Anschlüssen
Die Zumeßventile werden mit der für den jeweiligen Typ
maximal möglichen Anzahl von Schmierstellenanschlüssen
geliefert.
Durch Zusammenlegung von zwei Anschlüssen kann
eine Verdoppelung des Dosiervolumens erreicht werden.
Es sind folgende Arbeitsgänge durchzuführen:
• Entfernen des Sperrstückes (7) mittels Sechskant-Stift-
schlüssel 6 DIN 911
• Verschließen des nicht benötigten Schmierstellenan-
schlusses mit einer Verschlußschraube M 14 x 1,5
DIN 908 - St
Durch diese Maßnahme kann die maximal mögliche An-
zahl der Schmierstellenanschlüsse eines Zumeßventiles um
bis zu 50 % verringert werden. Das beim Zusammenlegen
von Schmierstellenanschlüssen vergrößerte Dosiervolumen
kann mit Hilfe der in der optischen Kontrolleinrichtung inte-
grierten stufenlosen Dosiermengenregelung auf den ge-
wünschten Wert reduziert werden.
6.2 Stufenlose Dosiervolumeneinstellung
Die Reduzierung der Dosiermenge sollte günstigerweise
schon vor der Montage der Zumeßventile erfolgen. Es sind
dabei folgende Arbeitsgänge durchzuführen:
• Entfernen eines Gewindestiftes (8) aus der optischen
Kontrolleinrichtung
• Einstellen des Hubes der Kolbenstange durch den zwei-
ten Gewindering auf den gewünschten Wert (Der Hub
der Kolbenstange bis zur eingedrehten Nut entspricht ei-
nem Dosiervolumen von 1 cm³)
• Sicherung dieser Einstellung mit dem vorher entfernten
Gewindestift
Ist eine Veränderung des Dosiervolumens am Zumeß-
ventil im eingebauten Zustand erforderlich, so sind die oben
beschriebenen Arbeitsgänge nach dem Abschalten der Zen-
tralschmierpumpe auszuführen, wobei die Kolbenstange voll
eingefahren sein muß.
Bei der Ausführung mit elektrischer Kontrolleinrich-
tung ist keine Dosiermengenregelung möglich!
System SAXONIA
5. PRESSURE IMPULSE IN
MAIN-LINE (HL) II
When HL II is pressurized, the lubricant pushes the control
piston to the closing screw (5). Through the now open duct
(b), the lubricant enters the space (d) and pushes the mete-
ring piston to the stop of the control device (6). The lubricant is
then forced through duct (a) and through the annular groove in
the control piston to the lubrication point connection (f). The
complete process can be repeated at set time intervals as re-
quired, or co-ordinated to suit machine operational load.
Fixed to the metering piston, is a connecting rod, wich
makes the operation visible. The standard optical control devi-
ce also adjusts the metering quantity steplessly, by use of the
threaded pin (8).
On delivery, the output quantity is preset to maximum.
6. COMMISSIONING
6.1 Coupling of two connections
The metering valves are delivered with the maximum
number of lubrication point connections ( depending on
distributor type ). Up to twice the normal maximum output
volume of one lubricant point connection can be achieved by
coupling two connections together.
To perform this:
• Remove the shutt-off screw (7) with an allen-key 6 to DIN
911
• Seal the connection not required, using a screw plug
M 14 x 1,5 DIN 908 - St
By doing this, the number of lubrication point connections
can be reduced up to 50 %. The required output can then be
set on the optical control device.
6.2 Stepless output volume adjustment
The reduction of output volume (from preset max.), is best
performed before installation of the metering valve:
• Remove a threaded pin (8) from the optical device
• Adjust the stroke of the piston as required using the
second threaded pin (the stroke of the piston rod to the
turned groove = 1 cm³)
• Replace and retighten the previously removed pin to
secure the setting.
Should adjustment be neccesary after assembly and
operation of the system, the above sequence should be
performed after switching the central lubrication pump off,
whilst the piston should be in the fully ‘in’ position.
On models with electrical control device, the output
volume is not adjustable!
3
 System SAXONIA

7. MONTAGEHINWEISE 7. ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Zumeßventile sind so zu montieren, daß zwischen
Schmierstelle und Zumeßventil möglichst kurze Abstände er-
reicht werden.
Beim Anschluß der Schmierstellenleitungen am Zumeß-
ventil ist darauf zu achten, daß nur Schmierstellen mit glei-
chem Schmierstoffbedarf mit Anschlüssen verbunden wer-
den, die von einem Dosierkolben versorgt werden (A1 und A2
oder B1 und B2 usw.)
The metering valves should be mounted as close as
possible to the attached lubrication points.
Pairs of connections (i.e. A1 and A2 or B1 and B2 etc.)
should be connected to lubrication points with the same
lubricant consumption.

8. BESTELLBEISPIEL 8. ORDERING EXAMBLES

Bezeichnung eines Zumeßventiles VZ mit 8 Schmierstellen- To order a metering valve VZ with 8 lubrication point
anschlüssen und optischen Kontrolleinrichtungen connections and optical control devices
Zumeßventil VZ 8 _____________ Bestell-Nr. 1213081110 Metering valve VZ 8 ___________ Order no. 1213081110

Bezeichnung eines Zumeßventiles VZ ohne Kontrolleinrich- To order a metering valve VZ with 10 lubrication point
tung mit 10 Schmierstellenanschlüssen connections without control devices
Zumeßventil VZ 10 / O ________ Bestell-Nr. 1213100010 Metering valve VZ 10 / O _______ Order no. 1213100010

Bezeichnung eines Zumeßventiles VZ mit 6 Schmierstellen- To order a metering valve VZ with 6 lubrication point
anschlüssen und elektrischer Kontrolleinrichtung an den connections and electrical control devices on connections
Schmierstellenanschlüssen A1 und C1 A1 and C1
Zumeßventil VZ 6 / A1, C1 ____ Bestell-Nr. 1213062010 Metering valve VZ 6 / A1, C1 ___ Order no. 1213062010

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD ⋅ 08340 Beierfeld ⋅ Am Bockwald 4 ⋅ Telefon: 03774-6511-0 ⋅ Fax: 03774-651130 ⋅ E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 System SAXONIA

Metering valves VE - E
Metering valve groups VE - G
APPLICATION
Metering valve or metering valve groups are applied as
dosing elements in single-line total-loss lubrication systems.
Only one lubricating point shall be allocated to each respecti-
ve metering valve. The main line to metering valves or mete-
ring valve groups shall be laid in ascending arrangement to
ensure automatic evacuation of air probably provided in the
lubrication system through metering valves, secondary lines
and lubricating points.

CHARACTERISTIC FEATURES
Metering valves and metering valve groups are dosing
elements for exact feeding of previously defined lubricant
quantities to the lubricating point. The mode function is as
follows:
Upon pressurization of main line, the seal cone (6) with pipe
fitting (2) is moved up to the connecting piecer (1) inversely to
the effort of pressure spring (3). HINTS REGARDING pump selection in
The lubricant flows over the lips of seal cone (6) up to the an- connection with the use of metering
nular piston (5) pressing the piston against the stop of con- valves and metering groups
necting piece. The lubricant provided before the annular pi-
ston is then delivered to the lubricating point. The stroke of n Lubricant volume = lubricant demend of all lubricating
annular piston will define the metered quantity. If the pressure points.
generator is turned-off, the main line will be relieved. Pipe fit- n Lubricant volume + 25% = corrected lubricant volume
ting (2), seal cone (6) and annular piston (5) are returned to in- the metering accuracy of metering valves is considered
itial position by means of pressure spring (3) thus rearranging in the value of 25%.
the lubricant in metering valve. This procedure is repeated at
n Corrected lubricant volume + 1 cm3 breathing loss (hose
every lubricating pulse. In contrast to the individual metering
line) = total lubricant volume.
valves, 2, 3, or 5 metering elements are combined in one
die-cast body as regards metering valve groups. Individual n The total lubricant volume also defines the nominal rate
metering valves may be applied in connection with injector of delivery of pump.
manifolds (see catalogue “fittings and accessories). As com- n As to piston pumps, the rate of delivery shall at least ex-
pared to injector manifolds, the metering valve groups ceed the cetermined total lubricant volume by 1/3 to en-
have connections for main line on either side. sure safe metering operation of metering valves.
The amount of metered volume is indicated on the connec-
ting piece and encoded by key numbers for placing orders.
The combination of key numbers in the sequence of arrange-
ment is the basis for the order designation of metering valve
groups. The metering valves can be supplied with ferrule fit-
ting or for plastic line with plug-in connection.

HINTS REGARDING metering valves

n Metering valves and/or injector manifolds with metering
valve groups can be linked with each other via threaded
fittings.
n Long feed lines shall be filled with lubricant upon assem-
bly.
n Feed lines should not be branched.

35691 P 2 e / 2 0500HF
Replacement for 35691 P 2e / 1 0599HF
 System SAXONIA

DIMENSIONS - Metering valves TECHNICAL DATA

Working pressure : ____________________________ 16 bar
Max. overpressure permitted : __________________ 30 bar
Relief pressure range : __________________ 0,1 … 1,0 bar
Service viscosity of lubricant : _________ 10 ... 1000 mm2/s
Temperature range of application : __________ 10 ... 60 oC
Filter fineness required : _____________________ < 63 µm
Pipe connection/outer pipe diameter
Main line : ________________________ 6 and/or 8 mm
Feed line : ________________________________ 4 mm
Max. pressure cycle interval : __________________ 0,05 s-1
Assembly location : ______________________________ any
Metered Key Design of apper- S1 S2 Weight Number of Possible metered Weight
volume number taining injector metering points volume cm3/stroke kg
cm3/stroke manifold (paraV) g 2 0,12
0,02 1 3 0,02 ... 0,16 0,16
0,04 2 5 0,24
0,06 3 A, B 13 12 26
0,10 4
0,16 5

DIMENSIONS - Metering valve groups

ORDERING EXAMPLE
Designation of a metering valve for a singlline-system (VE)
design version as individual metering valve (E) with a metered
volume of 0,06 cm3/stroke (key number 3) and plug connec-
tor (S).
Metering valve VE - E 3/S
Designation of a metering valve group for a single - line-
system (VE) design version as group (G) with a metered volu-
me of 0,06 cm3/stroke (key number 3) at metering points 1, 2
and 3 as well as with a metered volume of 0,16 cm3/stroke
(key number 5) at metering points 4 and 5.
Metering valve group VE - G 33355
Please note:
The appertaining connection elements for the version without
plug connector for the lubrication point line are the following:
Code no.
Male fitting DIN 3871 - ALL4 M 8 x 1 _______ 73511 - 5133
Olive 4 DIN 3862 ________________________ 73511 - 2624
The appertaining connection elements for the version without
plug connector for the main line are for example:
GE-union piece DIN 2353 - CLL 6 _________ 73442 - 2284
GE-union piece DIN 2353 - CLL 8 _________ 73442 - 0774

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH ⋅ 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 ⋅ 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 ⋅ Telefon: 0211 - 7774 - 0 ⋅ Fax: 0211 - 7774 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD ⋅ 08340 Beierfeld ⋅ Am Bockwald 4 ⋅ Telefon: 03774-6511-0 ⋅ Fax: 03774-651130 ⋅ E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
14
Flow Meter for Oil Recirculation Systems
APPLICATION
For oil flow control and correct setting of oil flow in oil
recirculation systems.

OUTSTANDING FEATURES
• compact and sturdy design
• reduced size
• absolutely reliable in functioning even with excessive
flow volumes
• positive-controlled float-type piston
• easy to assemble
• simple electric connection - socket-outlet
• setting of switch position steplessly
• low hysterisis
• switch transmittance insensitive to environmental in-
terferences

LAYOUT AND PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Each flow meter has a floating piston with an integral
magnetic device. The oil flows from the bottom to the top
whereby raising the piston in a glass tube to a point de-
pendent upon the flow rate - not dependent upon the
pressure rate - until the up- and downward movements
are counter balanced. The amount of oil flow is adjustable
by setting pin, located outside of the housing.
Flow meters are dependable upon viscosity and con-
sequently upon temperatures. Accurate adjustments the- SPECIFICATION
refore can only be effected at constant temperatures (an
important point to bear in mind when commissioning)! Flow media : ........................... mineral and synthetic oils
Flow meters with electric controls are designed to trig- Metering method : ................................. float-type piston
ger off a potential-free signal in the event of the flow rate Max. service pressure allowed : ........................... 16 bar
dropping below a certain limit. At the outside of the hou- Viscosity range : .......... 30 - 500 mm2/s service viscosity
sing an electric element with protective gas (Reed con- (for different viscosities please consult us)
tact) is incorporated. According to the position of the floa-
Max. operating temperature : ............................... 100 oC
ting piston, which has permanent magnets, the Reed
contact is actuated by magnetic coupling contact-free Piping connections (dimensions) : ............ see schedule
and instantaneously, i.e. the oil stream is hermetically se- Inlet oil port : ................................. at choise - left or right
parated from the contact transmitter. In addition, the con- Installation position : ............................................ vertical
tact has been cast into a switch casing thus protecting it Indication range : .................................... 10 up to 100 %
against damages - even if resulting from aggressive envi- O-rings : ........................................................ FPM (Viton)
ronmental air influences. By positioning the switch ele- Max. service voltage : ...................................... 250 V AC
ment vertically, the switch point can be set to any desired
Contact rating : .................................. 250 VA and/or 5 A
flow rate.
Flow meters can be assembled at choise in a group Type of contact transmitter : ..................... make contact
with up to 8 individual segments to suit the individual re- Kind of protection : .................................................. IP 65
quired amount of lubricant, bearing in mind that the total Electric connection with : ... socket connector A, 2 poles
flow rate per group must not exceed 24 l/min. Socket : ........... acc. to DIN 43650 with stuffing box Pg 9

48715 PB 1 e / 2 890Hf
 INSTALLATION
Fasten the flow meter on a bracket and take care for
an easy access (electric control is adjusted at the back-
side) and for a sufficient distance to the wall. Lock the
union piece (SW 32/41 mm) at the side of the outlet when
mounting the straight screw joint and lay the pipes without
tension. When combined in a group, locate those seg-
ments with the highest flow volumes preferably near the
pressure line port.
The oil must not carry any solid bodies as otherwise
operation will be affected.
It is recommendable to install filters (≤ 25 micron) with
incorporated magnet separators in front of the flow meters.
COMMISSIONING
Take care during layout and also during commissio-
ning that the total feed volume of all flow meters connec-
ted is by 20 - 30 % lesser than the pump volume.
It must be ensured that the excessive oil flow is retur-
ning back into the tank via the pressure relief valve provi-
ded. Set pressure at 5 bar preferably.
Having de-aerated the system, adjust the desired oil
quantity with the setting pin and lock by screw.
COMMISSIONING (Continuation)
The position of the floating piston is dependable upon
the viscosity of the lubricant. As a result, the flow rate can-
not be adjusted before a constant service temperature
has been achieved.
ELECTRIC CONTROL
How to set the switch point of the electric control:
• Loosen the contact transmitter and move it down-
wards up to the limit stop.
• Adjust the setting pin until the position of the floating
piston corresponds to the minimum flow value1)
(Reed contact closed). Move contact transmitter
slowly upwards until the Reed contact opens. Then
lock contact transmitter in this position.
• Adjust setting pin until the position of the floating pi-
ston corresponds to the flow volume desired (Reed
contact closed). Then lock setting pin.
To1) The minimum flow value should be by at least 10 %
of the scale value lower (= one graduation mark)
than the flow value desired.
Example: Desired flow volume ≤ 60 %, choose 50 %
for min. flow value - release point for signal.

DIMENSIONS ( mm )

Dimensions and weights Code no.

d1 d 2 sw L1 L 2 kg
— 1,2 65122-2811
43 G 1/2 32 204,5
67 1,5 65122-2911
— 1,2 65122-2821
43 G 1/2 32 204,5
67 1,5 65122-2921
— 1,4 65122-2831
48 G 3/4 41 203,0
70 1,6 65122-2931

2
SPARE DRAWING AND SPARE LIST

for type 65122 - 2811 / - 2911 / - 2821 / - 2921

Part Qty. Description Repair kit

no.
1 4 18,72 x 2,62
2 2 O-ring 22,00 x 1,50 79111 - 0133 E
3 1 FPM (Viton) 21,00 x 1,50
4 1 O-ring 15,28 x 1,78
69111 - 0011 E
5 1 FPM (Viton) 20,00 x 3,00
glass tube (Duran 50)
6 1 (only for type 75241 - 1423
65122 - 2811 / - 2911)
glass tube (Duran 50)
6 1 (only for type 75241 - 1343
65122 - 2821 / - 2921)
electric control
7 1 (only for type 76925 - 5973
65122 - 2911 / - 2921)
The parts marked with an ‘’E’’ are only supplied commonly as
repair kit.
• Wet O-rings with oil or lubricant before installation.

for type 65122 - 2831 / - 2931

Part Qty. Description Repair kit

no.
1 2 25,00 x 3,00
2 1 O-ring 25,00 x 2,50
79111 - 0363 E
3 1 FPM (Viton) 27,00 x 1,50
4 1 18,72 x 2,62
5 1 O-ring 15,28 x 1,78
69111 - 0011 E
6 1 FPM (Viton) 20,00 x 3,00
7 1 glass tube (Duran 50) 75241 - 1353
electric control
8 1 (only for type 76925 - 5973
65122 - 2931)
The parts marked with an ‘’E’’ are only supplied commonly as
repair kit.
• Wet O-rings with oil or lubricant before installation.

3
 MAINTENANCE FLOW METER 8 - WAY
To dismantle glass tube, loosen the 3 pins located on
top of the square housing. Do not dismantle housing
group.

Do not tilt the glass tube when removing or installing it.

Wash all parts in benzine or petroleum. Then replace
O-rings and wet those seals marked with • in the spare list
with oil or lubricant before installation.
If a complete unit within one group is to be exchan-
ged, dismantle all units located in front individually, begin-
ning from the left. (See detail X).

Part no. Description Size Code no.

1 - way 48715 - 2100
2 - way 48715 - 2200
3 - way 48715 - 2300
4 - way 48715 - 2400
1.01 flow meter
5 - way 48715 - 2500
6 - way 48715 - 2600
7 - way 48715 - 2700
8 - way 48715 - 2800
consisting of the following groups:
00,4 65122 - 2811
1.02
without feed volume l/min 03,0 65122 - 2821
electric control 12,0 65122 - 2831
to flow meter at 100 mm2/s
00,4 65122 - 2911
with service viscosity 03,0 65122 - 2921
1.09
electric control 12,0 65122 - 2931
1.10 loose components group 69112 - 2411
1.11 loose components group 69112 - 2491

4
 CHARACTERISTIC CURVE OF EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING
VOLUME FLOW
Part no. Qty. Description Code no.
1.01 1 flow meter consisting of 48715-2800
1.02 1 65122-2811
1.03 1 65122-2821
1.04 1 65122-2821
1.05 1 65122-2911
flow meter
1.06 1 65122-2921
1.07 1 65122-2811
1.08 1 65122-2821
1.09 1 65122-2931
1.10 • 1 loose components group 69112-2411
1.11•• 7 loose components group 69112-2491
•• The group 69112 - 2411 for all sizes (1 up to 8-way) is
only required once.
•• Regarding components group 69112 - 2491 one
group less than necessary to assemble unit is to be
provided (e.g. flow meter 8-way = 7 loose components
groups).

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Durchflußmesser VISCO
ANWENDUNG
Zur optischen und elektrischen Überwachung sowie
Einstellung des Volumenstromes in ÖlUmlaufschmieran-
lagen und Kühlwasserkreisläufen.
VORTEILE
• Viskositätskompensiertes Meßgerät mit viskositäts-
abhängigem Blockventil zur stufenlosen Einstellung
des Volumenstromes.
• Anzeige in l/min, gleiche Skala bei niedrig und hoch-
viskosen Ölen.
• Hohe Meßgenauigkeit: ± 5% vom Skalenendwert bei
einer Viskositätsänderung von 1 auf 750 mm2/s (cSt).
• Schwebekolbenstellung gut ablesbar auch bei dunk-
len Ölen.
• Leichte Montage durch Blockbauweise.
• Kompakte Bauart und geringes Gewicht.
• Funktionssicher bei wartungs- und verschleißfreiem
Betrieb.
• Elektrische Überwachung des Volumenstromes -
stufenlos einstellbar.
• Hohe elektrische Schaltleistung ohne Verstärker-
relais.
• Einfacher elektrischer Anschluß - steckbar.
Flow Meter VISCO
APPLICATION
For optical and electrical oil flow control and correct
setting of oil volume in oil and cool water recirculation
systems.
MAIN FEATURES
• Viscosity-compensated flow meter, setting of flow
volumes steplessly.
• Indication in litre/min, irrespectively of oil switch low or
high viscosity, scale remains unchanged.
• High accuracy: ± 5% of value indicated with viscosity
changing from 1 up to 750 mm2/sec (cSt).
• Position of float piston easily to be recognised, even in
dark oils.
• Easy to assemble, thanks to block configuration.
• Compact design and low weight.
• Absolutely reliable in functioning, maintenance-free
and wear-proof.
• Electrical monitoring, setting of flow volumes
steplessly.
• High switching capacity without relays.
• Simple plug-in electrical connection.
48716 P 1 d+e / 2 01 2000Hf
Ersatz für 48716 P 1/1 1088HF; Replacement for 48716 P 1e/1 691HF
 TECHNISCHE DATEN
Max. zulässiger Betriebsdruck : ............................ 12 bar
Max. zulässige Betriebstemperatur : .................... 100 oC
Medium : ......... z.B. synthetische Öle, Mineralöl, Wasser
Meßprinzip : ................... Schwebekörper - federbelastet
Viskositätsbereich : ..... 1 - 750 mm2/s Betriebsviskosität
(ohne Änderung der Skala)
Meßgenauigkeit : ................... ± 5% vom Skalenendwert
Zulässige Dichte : .................................... 0,7 - 1,2 g/cm3
Anzeige : ........ optisch, Skala für Volumenstrom in l/min
Blockventil : ............................Volumenstrom einstellbar,
................................................... viskositätsabhängig
Einbaulage : ............... beliebig, vorzugsweise senkrecht
Öleinlaß : ................................. beliebig links oder rechts
Meßbereich : ........... Durchflußmesser von 0,1 - 20 l/min
........................................................... (siehe Tabelle)
Dichtungen : ................................................. FPM (Viton)
E - Kontrolle
Betriebsspannung : ............................................. 250 V ≅
Schaltleistung : ....................... max. 250 VA, 5 A induktiv
Kontaktgeber : .................................................. Schließer
................... (auf Anfrage: in EX sG 5 oder Wechsler)
Schalthysterese : .............. 2,5 - 3,5 mm Schwebekörper
Schutzart : ............................................................... IP 65
Elektrischer Anschluß : ........... AMP Steckfahnen, 2 Pole
Stecker : ........ nach DIN 43650 mit Stopfenbuchse PG 9
TECHNICAL DATA
Max. admissible operating pressure : ................... 12 bar
Max. admissible operating temperature : ............. 100 oC
Flow media : .......... e.g. synthetic oils, mineral oils, water
Measuring principle : .............. spring-loaded float piston
Viscosity range : ....... 1 to 750 mm2/s operating viscosity
(no chance of scale)
Measuring accuracy : ................ ± 5% of value indicated
Admissible consistency : ....................... 0.7 to 1.2 g/cm3
Indication : ................. optical, scale volume flow in l/min
Block valve : ...................... volume adjustable according
.................................................................. to viscosity
Installation : ..................... any position, preferably upright
Oil inlet port : ................. left or right hand side, at choice
Measuring range : ................................ 0.1 up to 20 l/min
.................................................................. (see table)
Seals : ........................................................... Viton (FPM)
Electronic monitor switch
Operating voltage : ..................................... max. 250 V ≅
Switch capacity : .................... max. 250 VA, 5A inductive
Mode of contact : ...................................................... n.o.
(flame-proof EX sg5 or reversal switch upon request)
Switch hysterisis : ........... 2.5 - 3.5 mm float piston stroke
Enclosure : ............................................................... IP 65
Electrical connection : .................... AMP socket, 2 poles
Plug : ..... according to DIN 43650 with stuffing box PG 9
2
ABMESSUNGEN ( mm ) DIMENSION ( mm )

3
 Pos. Benennung Baugröße Bestell - Nr.
Part no. Designation Configuration Code no.
1 - fach 48716 - 2100
1 - way
2 - fach Die einzelnen Durchflußmessersegmente kön-
2 - way 48716 - 2200 nen entsprechend dem Schmierstoffbedarf in
einer Gruppe bis max. 8 Einzelsegmente be-
3 - fach 48716 - 2300 liebig zu einem mehrfachen Durchflußmesser
3 - way zusammengebaut werden, mit der Einschrän-
4 - fach 48716 - 2400 kung, daß die gesamte Durchflußmenge je
Durchflußmesser VISCO 4 - way Gruppe bei einseitiger Zuführung auf 24 l/min.
1.01
Flow meter VISCO 5 - fach begrenzt ist.
5 - way 48716 - 2500
6 - fach Flow meters can be assembled, at choice, in
6 - way 48716 - 2600 groups to a complete unit with up to 8 single
elements, to suit specific flow requirements,
7 - fach 48716 - 2700 the total flow rate per group, however, is
7 - way limited to 24 l/min.
8 - fach 48716 - 2800
8 - way
bestehend aus folgenden Baugruppen: / comprising of followed configurations:
Pos. stufenloser Meß- und Schaltbereich Gewinde Bestell - Nr., Durchflußmesser
Part no. measuring- and contact range stepless Pipe size Code no., flow meter
ohne mit
E-Kontrolle E-Kontrolle
without with
l / min d2 E-monitor E-monitor
0,1 - 0,45 65122 - 2221 65122 - 2321
0,2 - 1,2 65122 - 2231 65122 - 2331
1.02 0,4 - 2 G 1/4 65122 - 2241 65122 - 2341
bis 0,6 - 3,4 65122 - 2251 65122 - 2351
to
1.09 2 - 8 65122 - 2261 65122 - 2361
3 - 15 65122 - 2271 65122 - 2371
G 1/2
4 - 20 65122 - 2281 65122 - 2381
1.10 * Losteilgruppe / loose components group 69112 - 2411
1.11 ** Losteilgruppe / loose components group 69112 - 2491
* Die Losteilgruppe 69112 - 2411 wird bei allen Durchflußmessern (1 - bis 8 - fach) einmal benötigt.
** Bei der Losteilgruppe 69112 - 2491 benötigt man eine Losteilgruppe weniger als Durchflußmesser zu einer
Einheit montiert werden sollen (z.B. Durchflußmesser 8 - fach = 7 Losteilgruppen).
* The loose components group 69112-2411 is required for all configutations (1- to 8-way) only once
** The loose components group 69112-2491 is used as one group less than necessary to assemble a complete unit
(i.e. flower meter 8-way = 7 loose components groups).

BESTELLBEISPIEL EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING

Pos. Stück Benennung Bestell - Nr.
Part no. Piece Designation Code no.
1.01 Durchflußmesser VISCO, 8-fach bestehend aus:
1 48716 - 2800
Flow meter VISCO, 8-way comprising of:
1.02 1 65122 - 2251
1.03 1 Durchflußmesser ohne E - Kontrolle 65122 - 2251
Flow meter without E - monitor
1.04 1 65122 - 2241
1.05 1 65122 - 2341
1.06 1 65122 - 2321
1.07 Durchflußmesser mit E - Kontrolle
1 65122 - 2321
Flow meter with E - monitor
1.08 1 65122 - 2321
1.09 1 65122 - 2321
1.10 * 1 Losteilgruppe / loose components group 69112 - 2411
1.11 ** 7 Losteilgruppe / loose components group 69112 - 2491

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Durchflußanzeiger DA - D für Ölumlaufanlagen
Flow Indicator DA - D for oil circulating lubrication system
ANWENDUNG
Die Durchflußanzeiger DA - D werden zur Öldosierung
für die verschiedenen Schmierstellen in Ölumlaufanlagen
verwendet.
Vor jeder Durchflußanzeigergruppe (Anschluß wahlweise
rechts oder links) ist ein Kleinfilter und ein Absperrhahn zu
montieren.
APPLICATION
The DA - D flow indicators are used in oil lubrication
systems for metering the oil fed to different lubrication
points.
In front of each indicator set (connection on the right or on
the left) is mounted a fine filter with stop cock.

TECHNISCHE DATEN TECHNICAL DATA

Ausführung Anzahl der L Gewicht Model No. of L Weight
Anzeiger kg Indicators kg
A 1 40 1,85 A 1 40 1,85
B 2 80 3,70 B 2 80 3,70
C 3 120 5,55 C 3 120 5,55
D 4 160 7,40 D 4 160 7,40
E 5 200 9,25 E 5 200 9,25
F 6 240 11,10 F 6 240 11,10
G 7 280 12,95 G 7 280 12,95
H 8 320 14,80 H 8 320 14,80
I 9 360 16,95 I 9 360 16,95
K 10 400 18,50 K 10 400 18,50
L 11 440 20,35 L 11 440 20,35

48717 P 1 d + e / 1 0699Hf
 TECHNISCHE DATEN (Fortsetzung)
Durchflußmenge bei 76 cSt (10oE) Betriebsviskosität :
DA-D 1 : 0,04 - 0,16 l/min (gelb)
DA-D 2 : 0,08 - 0,30 l/min (braun)
DA-D 3 : 0,16 - 0,60 l/min (orange)
DA-D 4 : 0,25 - 0,90 l/min (rot)
DA-D 5 : 0,45 - 1,50 l/min (grün)
DA-D 6 : 0,80 - 2,60 l/min (weiß)
DA-D 7 : 1,50 - 5,00 l/min (hellblau)
DA-D 8 : 2,00 - 8,00 l/min (schwarz)
Betriebsviskosität : ___________ 30 - 200 cSt (4 - 26oE)
Betriebsdruck / Zulauf : _________________ max. 10 bar
Gegendruck / Auslauf : _________________ max. 6 bar
Druckdifferenz / Zulauf-Auslaß : __________ min. 2 bar
Durchflußmenge pro Gruppe : __________ min. 20 l/min
Werkstoff : ______________________________ Messing
2
TECHNICAL DATA (continued)
Flow rate at an viscosity of approx. 76 cSt (10oE)
DA-D 1 : 0,04 - 0,16 l/min (yellow)
DA-D 2 : 0,08 - 0,30 l/min (brown)
DA-D 3 : 0,16 - 0,60 l/min (orange)
DA-D 4 : 0,25 - 0,90 l/min (red)
DA-D 5 : 0,45 - 1,50 l/min (green)
DA-D 6 : 0,80 - 2,60 l/min (white)
DA-D 7 : 1,50 - 5,00 l/min (blue)
DA-D 8 : 2,00 - 8,00 l/min (black)
Operating viscosity : __________ 30 - 200 cSt (4 - 26oE)
Operating pressure / inlet : ______________ max. 10 bar
Counterpressure / outlet : _______________ max. 6 bar
Pressure difference / inlet-outlet : ________ min. 2 bar
Flow rate per set : ____________________ min. 20 l/min
Material : __________________________________ brass
 FUNKTION
Das durch den Kleinfilter zufließende Öl wird über die
Regulierschraube (1) gedrosselt als Teilmenge zur
Schmierstelle geleitet. Dabei muß das Öl die Blende (2) im
Kolben (3) passieren, wodurch der dabei entsprechende
Druckabfall (max. 0,3 bar) den Kolben (3) entgegen die
Kraft der Feder (4) nach oben verschiebt. Die Lage der
Kolbenmeßkante (5) an den Markierungen (6) des Sicht-
fensters ermöglicht eine optische Mengenkontrolle (siehe
Diagramm).
Die acht Größen von Durchflußanzeigern unterscheiden
sich durch zwei verschiedene Ausführungen (DA-D 1 - 6
und 7 + 8) DA-D 7 und DA-D 8 sind außen erkennbar
durch einen Konus am Sechkant der Regulierung sowie
einer höheren Auslaßverschraubung mit R 3/8” innen. In-
nerhalb der beiden Ausführungen underscheiden sie
sich lediglich durch den Durchmesser der Blende (2) und
dem zugehörigen Markierungsschild (7) mit Mengenbe-
reichsangabe. Die Blende (2) ist entsprechend der Größe
des Durchflußanzeigers signiert (zum Beispiel: die Blende
des Durchflußanzeigers DA-D 1 ist mit der Nr. 1 gekenn-
zeichnet usw.).
BESTELLBEISPIEL
1 Durchflußanzeiger DA-D, 4-fach
(1 x DA-D 1, 2 x DA-D 4, 1 x DA-D 3) nach Prospekt
48717 P 1 (die Reihenfolge der Anzeiger ist immer
von links nach rechts anzugeben - große Mengen in
Nähe des Zulaufes I).
ZUBEHÖR
Bitte gesondert bestellen!
____________________________ Bestell-Nr.
Befestigungsgarnitur mit Kleinfilter _____ 48-3571.51.00
bestehend aus:
2 Stck. Befestigungswinkel
4 Stck. Sechskantschraube M 6 x 16 DIN 933
4 Stck. Federring B 6 DIN 127
1 Stck. Verschlußschraube R 1/2” DIN 906
1 Stck. Doppelnippel R 1/2”
1 Stck. Kleinfilter
1 Stck. Absperrhahn R 1/2”
Nummerntafel ______________________ 48-3571.30.00
bestehend aus:
2 Stck. Gewindeformschraube M 3 x 5 DIN 7500
Elektr. Ölwächter nach Prospekt 48741 P 1
FUNCTION
The oil quantity supplied through the fine filter is re-
duced by the adjusting screw (1) and led to the lubrication
point. For this purpose the oil must pass the pistons (3),
orifice (2), and due to the resulting pressure drop (max. 0,3
bar) the piston (3) subsequently moves upwards against
spring tension (4). The position of the piston’s top edge (5)
as compared to the markings (6) on the sight glass per -
mits an optical quantity control (see diagram).
The 8 sizes of the flow indicators are of two different
designs (DA-D 1 - 6 and 7 + 8). DA-D 7 and DA-D 8 are
distinguishable from the outside due to a cone at the
hexagon of the regulation and a higher outlet screwing
with R 3/8” inside thread. The two designs only differ in
the orifice’s diameter (2) and the corresponding marking
tape (7) indicating the quantity range. The orifice (2) is
marked according to the flow indicator’s size (DA-D 1 is
provided with orifice no. 1, etc.).
EXAMPLE OF ORDER
1 Flow indicator DA-D, fourfold
(1 x DA-D 1, 2 x DA-D 4, 1 x DA-D 3) according to
brochure 48717 P 1 (the indicators’ types must
always be indicated from the left to the right - there
must be indicators for big flow rates near the inlet).
ACCESSORIES
Please order separately!
_____________________________ Code no.
Fixing armatur with fine filter ___________ 48-3571.51.00
consisting of:
2 pcs. Mounting angle
4 pcs. Hexagon head screw M 6 x 16 DIN 933
4 pcs. Spring washer B 6 DIN 127
1 pcs. Plug screw R 1/2” DIN 906
1 pcs. Double nipple R 1/2”
1 pcs. Fine filter
1 pcs. Stop cock R 1/2”
Number plate _______________________ 48-3571.30.00
consisting of:
2 pcs. Thread rolling screw M 3 x 5 DIN 7500
Electric oil controller according to brochure 48741 P 1
3
 GRUPPEN GROUPS
Ausführung für Anschluß rechts Design for inlet right
(Ausführung für Anschluß links spiegelbildlich) (design for inlet left be mirrored)

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Elektrischer Ölwächter
Electric Oil Controller
FUNKTION
Der elektrische Ölwächter wird vorzugsweise in Ver-
bindung mit Durchflußanzeigern DA - F und DA - D einge-
setzt.
Wenn der Kolben des Durchflußanzeigers aus dem Be-
dämpfungsbereich des elektrischen Ölwächters absinkt
bzw. Aufsteigt, wird der Kontakt des Ölwächters geöffnet /
Störmeldung.
TECHNISCHE DATEN
Schaltart : ______________________________ Schließer
Spannung : ________ 24 - 240 V GS oder WS 40 - 60 Hz
Schaltleistung bei : _________ 60 V 110 V 220 V
Anzugsleistung max. : _____ 180 VA 330 VA 660 VA
Dauerleistung max. : ________ 18 VA 33 VA 66 VA
Schaltfrequenz max. : ________ GS 25 Hz; WS 5000 Hz
Mindestbelastung : __________________________ 5 mA
Spannungsabfall ca. : _________________________ 5 V
Schutzart : _________________________________ IP 67
Zul. Umgebungstemperatur : ___ - 25o C bis + 85o C
Gewicht : ________________________________ 0,22 kg
Achtung:
Nicht kurzschlußfest - Mindestbelastung 5 mA
(Sicherung 0,25 A flink vorsehen)
Abstand Schalter - Glasrohr 0,5 - 1,0 mm
für Durchflußanzeiger DA - F und DA - D
for flow indicators DA - F and DA - D
FUNCTION
The electric oil controller is preferable used in connec-
tion with DA - F and DA - D flow indicators.
If the flow indicator’s piston sinks into the electromagnetic
field of the electric oil controller or rises up to it, the contact
of the oil controller is opened / fault report.
TECHNICAL DATA
Output form : ______________________ Normally closed
Voltage : _________ 24 - 240 V DC or 40 - 60 Hz at AC
Breaking capacity at : ________ 60 V 110 V 220 V
Max. Starting capacity : _____ 180 VA 330 VA 660 VA
Max. continous power output : 18 VA 33 VA 66 VA
Max. Switching frequency : ____ DC 25 Hz; AC 5000 Hz
Minimum load : _____________________________ 5 mA
Voltage drop approx. : _________________________ 5 V
Protective system : __________________________ IP 67
Ambient temperature : __________ - 25o C to + 85o C
Weight : ________________________________ 0,22 kg
Attention:
Not short - circuit proof - minimum load 5 mA
(Use fuse 0,25 A, fast blowing type)
Distance switch - sight glass 0,5 - 1,0 mm
48741 P 1 d + e / 1 0699Hf
 Durchflußmenge bei 76 cSt (10oE) Flow rate at 76 cSt (10oE)

Schaltpunkte des elektr. Ölwächters Hysterese ± 1 mm

Switchpoint of electric oil controller hysteresis ± 1 mm

2
Durchflußmenge bei 76 cSt (10oE) Flow rate at 76 cSt (10oE)

Schaltpunkte des elektr. Ölwächters Hysterese ± 1 mm

Switchpoint of electric oil controller hysteresis ± 1 mm

3
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Durchflußkontrolgerät KE - B für alle Fett- und Öl - Zentralschmieranlagen
Flow Control Unit KE - B for grease and oil central lubrication
WIRKUNGSWEISE
Der durch das Kontrollgerät zur Schmierstelle fließen-
de Schmierstoffstrom bewegt zwangsläufig die beiden
gegeneinander verriegelten Messkolben. Der Bewegungs-
ablauf der beiden Kolben entspricht dem Schema eines
Progressivverteilers mit 4 Auslässen, die innerhalb des
Gehäuses zusammengefaßt sind. Einer der beiden
Kolben schaltet über einen Stift den angebauten End-
schalter.
Die Signale des Endschalters können elektronisch in ent-
sprechenden Geräten ausgewertet werden.
Ein voller Umlauf des Gerätes entspricht einem Durchfluß
von 1,6 cm3.

MODE OF OPERATION
The lubricant flow through the unit invariably is causing
to force moving the two measuring oistons. A looking pin
between the two pistons ensures that only one piston can
move at a time. The movement of the two pistons is com-
parable to that of a progressive divider arrangement with 4
outlets which are internally combined. One of either piston
actuates the integral micro-switch via pin.
Any signals deriving from the micro-switch may be electro-
nically recorded by relays and ancillary equipment.
A unit’s full cycle is equal to a 1.6 ccm flow rate.

TECHNISCHE DATEN TECHNICAL DATA

Durchflußmedien : ... Fett bis NLGI-Klasse 3 DIN 51818
................... Öl ab 190 mm2/s bei Betriebstemperatur
Betriebsdruck max. : ........................................... 120 bar
Betätigungsdruck min. : ........................................ 10 bar
Durchflußmenge für einen Umlauf : .................... 1,6 cm3
Anzahl der Schaltbetätigungen pro Umlauf : ................ 2
Durchflußmenge : ....... bei Fett von 0,1 bis 200 cm3/min
...............................bei Öl von 1,0 bis 200 cm3/min
Spannung : 500 V ~ 24 V – 220 V –
Strom : 10 A — —
Schaltvermögen : — 10 W 4W
Schutzart : ............................................................... IP 65
Raumtemperatur : ............................ – 20 oC bis + 80 oC
Einbaulage : ....................................................... beliebig
Gewicht : .............................................................. 1600 g
Flow media : ...... grease up to NLGI class 3 DIN 51818
.............. oil from 190 mm2/s at operation temperature
Operating pressure max. : ................................... 120 bar
Actuating pressure min. : ...................................... 10 bar
Flow rate per cycle : ............................................ 1.6 cm3
Contact frequency per cycle : ....................................... 2
Flow quantity : .............. Fett from 0.1 up to 200 cm3/min
.................................Öl from 1.0 up to 200 cm3/min
Voltage : 500 V ~ 24 V – 220 V –
Contact ratings : 10 A — —
Switch power : — 10 W 4W
Enclosure : ............................................................... IP 65
Ambient temperature : .................. – 20 oC up to + 80 oC
Installation : ..................................... any position desired
Weight : ............................................................... 1.600 g

48762 PB 1 d+e / 2 01 2000HF

Ersatz für 48762 PB 1/1 1182HF; Replacement for 48762 PB 1e/1 1182HF
 ABMESSUNGEN
EINBAU
Die Durchflußkontrollgeräte KE - B können in beliebi-
ger Lage an einer ebenen Fläche, möglichst in unmittelba-
rer Nähe der Schmierstellen, montiert werden.
Zur Befestigung sind zwei Zylinderschrauben M 6 vor-
zusehen.
INBETRIEBNAHME
Nach Anschluß der bereits mit Schmierstoff gefüllten
Rohrleitungen am Ein- und Ausgang des Durchfluß-
kontrollgerätes und Verdrahtung des elektr. Endschalters
mit dem Überwachungsgerät, wird die Anlage in Betrieb
gesetzt.
WARTUNG,
STÖRUNGSBESEITIGUNG
Sollte ein Durchflußkontrollgerät blockieren, obwohl
die Schmierstellenleitung unter Druck steht, ist das Durch-
flußkontrollgerät auszubauen und in Einzelteile zu zerle-
gen. Alle Teile sind in Benzin oder Petroleum auszuwa-
schen, zu kontrollieren, einzuölen und in richtiger Reihen-
folge zusammenzusetzen. Hierbei ist darauf zu achten,
daß jeder Kolben wieder in die gleiche Bohrung einzubau-
en ist, aus der er ausgebaut wurde.
Beschädigte Teile sind auszuwechseln und Dichtungen
zu erneuern. Falls ein Kolben oder eine Kolbenbohrung
beschädigt ist, muß das komplette Durchflußkontrollgerät
ausgetauscht werden.
DIMENSIONS (mm)
INSTALLATION
Flow control units KE - B can be installed in any posi-
tion flush with a plain surface, preferable within the vicinity
of the lube points.
Two M 6 cheese-head screws are necessary for fixing
only.
INITIAL START - UP
Interconnect pipework at inlet and outlet ports pro-
perly filled lubricant and wire the micro switch to moni-
toring device, then put system in operation.
MAINTENANCE,
FAILURES AND THEIR REMEDIES
In the event of obstruction, despite the main feed line
having been pressurized, such malfunction is indicated;
dismantle the unit and clean all parts with petrol, check
for damages, oil and refit parts in the correct sequence
by making sure that pistons are fitted into the same bore as
before.
In case of piston or piston bore showing deterioration,
replace unit entirely.
2
 FUNKTIONSSCHEMA
ZUBEHÖR (muß gesondert bestellt werden)
1. Gerade Einschraubverschraubung G ¼
Ø 6 Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73442 - 1233
Ø 8 Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73442 - 1324
Ø 10 Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73442 - 1414
2. Dichtring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu
Bestell - Nr. ............................... 72712 - 1214
3. Winkel - Schwenkverschraubung G ¼
Ø 6 Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73442 - 7123
Ø 8 Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73445 - 8523
Ø 10 Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73445 - 8543
4. Elektronisches Überwachungsgerät auf Anfrage.
BESTELLBEISPIEL
1 Durchflußkontrollgerät KE - B
Bestell - Nr. ............................... 48762 - 1111
1 Gerade Einschraubverschraubung G ¼ - Ø 10
Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73442 - 1414
2 Dichtring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu
Bestell - Nr. ............................... 72712 - 1214
3 Winkel - Schwenkverschraubung G ¼ - Ø 10
Bestell - Nr. ............................... 73445 - 8543
FUNCTIONAL LAYOUT
ACCESSORIES (to be ordered optionally)
1. Straight male stude connector G ¼
dia. 6 Code no. ................................. 73442 - 1233
dia. 8 Code no. ................................. 73442 - 1324
dia. 10 Code no. ................................. 73442 - 1414
2. Seal ring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu
Code no. ................................. 72712 - 1214
3. Banjo coupling G ¼
dia. 6 Code no. ................................. 73442 - 7123
dia. 8 Code no. ................................. 73445 - 8523
dia. 10 Code no. ................................. 73445 - 8543
4. Electronic monitoring device, upon request.
EXAMPLE FOR ORDERING
1 Flow control unit KE - B
Code no. .................................. 48762 - 1111
1 Straight male stude connector G ¼ - dia. 10
Code no. .................................. 73442 - 1414
2 Seal ring A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu
Code no. .................................. 72712 - 1214
3 Banjo coupling G ¼ - dia. 10
Code no. .................................. 73445 - 8543
3
 ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG UND ERSATZTEILLISTE
DRAWING AND SPARE PARTS LIST

Pos. Stück Bestell - Nr.

Part no. Piece Benennung / Designation Code no.
11 2 Kanalbüchse / Channel bush 71441 - 1619
12 3 Verschlußschraube / Plug screw 74161 - 7811
13 3 Dichtring / Seal ring - A 14 x 18 DIN 7603 Cu 72712 - 1214
14 3 Verschraubung / Connector 74162 - 2311
15 4 Dichtring / Seal ring 72723 - 1211 E
16 2 Kolben / Piston 72108 - 4111 N
17 1 Gehäuse / Housing 74331 - 7981 N
18 1 Stift / Pin 74221 - 3751 N
19 2 Scheibe verzinkt / Washer galv. - A 6,4 DIN 125 St 74185 - 1064
10 2 Zylinderschraube verzinkt / Cheese-head screw galv. - M 6 x 16 DIN 7984 74102 - 1134
11 2 Federring 6 / Lock washer 6 - DIN 7980 74185 - 3034
12 2 Sechskantmutter 8 verzinkt / Hexagon nut 8 galv. - M 4 DIN 934 74175 - 1234
13 2 Scheibe verzinkt / Washer galv. - A 4,3 DIN 125 St 74185 - 1034
14 2 Zylinderschr. 8.8 verzinkt / Cheese-head screw 8.8 galv. - M 4 x 45 DIN 912 74102 - 1664
15 1 Endschalter / Limit switch 76925 - 5123
16 1 Blech / Shield 74362 - 2322
17 1 Bewegungszeiger / Movement indicator 64161 - 6111
18 1 Nutring / Grooved ring 72713 - 5333 E
19 1 Schraube / Screw 74161 - 6631
20 1 Teller / Cup 71451 - 3511
21 1 Überwurfschraube / Cup screw 73400 - 3121
Die mit ‘’E’’ gekennzeichneten Teile werden zur Ersatzteilhaltung empfohlen. Die mit ‘’N’’ gekennz. Teile werden nicht als Ersatzteile geliefert.
Parts marked “E” are to be kept on stock as suggested replacement parts. Parts marked “N” are precision-mated and not supplied as spares.

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Manometerkonsole
Pressure gauge set

ANWENDUNG
Die Manometerkonsole ist für Zweileitungs - Zentral-
schmieranlagen geeignet. Sie ermöglicht die optische Kon-
trolle des Schmierstoffdruckes bzw. der Druckdifferenz zwi-
schen den beiden Hauptleitungen.

APPLICATIONS
The pressure gauge set is suitable for two-line central lu-
brication systems. It enables a visual check to be made of the
lubricant pressure, or the pressure difference between the
two main lines.

EINBAU
. . . erfolgt vorzugsweise am Ende der Hauptleitungen
beim Schaltgerät SG - A, vor dem letzten Verteiler. Außerdem
ist der Einbau in die Hauptleitungen direkt hinter dem
4/2-Wegeventil möglich.
INSTALLATION
. . . is recommended at the end of the main lines, or, in
conjuction with a change-over unit type SG - A, upstream of
the last distributor. It is also possible to install it in main lines
directly downstream of the 4/2-way valve.
INBETRIEBNAHME
Um eine einwandfreie Funktion der Manometer zu errei-
chen, müssen die Rohrleitungen zwischen den Manome-
terverschraubungen und den letzten Abzweigungen mit Öl
gefüllt werden.
COMMISSIONING
To ensure proper service ot the pressure gauges, the li-
nes between the pressure gauge screw couplings and the
last branches should be filled with oil.

ABMESSUNGEN DIMENSIONS (mm)

TECHNISCHE DATEN
Verwendung für Anzeigebereich Gewicht Bestell - Nr.
max. Pumpendruck der Manometer
bar bar kg
200 0 - 250 65119 - 1221
2,3
500 0 - 600 65119 - 1231

SPECIFICATIONS
For use with Pressure gauge Weight Code No.
max. pump pressure indicating range
bar bar kg
200 0 - 250 65119 - 1221
2,3
500 0 - 600 65119 - 1231

65119 PB1 d+e / 2 0391 1000HF

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Einleitungsanlagen für Öl
Zubehör
Zentralschmierung für Öl- (und Fließfett)

Single - Line Systems for Oil

Accessories
Centralized Lubrication for Oil (and semi fluid grease)

X 20 P 6 d + e / 5 0592HF
Legende Legend
1 Schmierpumpe 17 Nippel 1 lubricating pump 17 nipple
2 Schmierstoffverteiler 18 Drehbarer Schmierzapfen 2 lubricant metering device 18 rotatable lubricating pivot
3 Doppelkegelring 19 Manometer 3 double conical ring 19 pressure gauge
4 Überwurfschraube 20 Manometerverschraubung 4 male fitting for pipes 20 screw joint for pressure
5 Anschlußstück 21 Übergangsstutzen 5 connection piece gauge
6 Ringanschlußstück 22 Saugfilter (nicht abgebildet) 6 ring connection piece 21 transition piece
7 Doppel-Ringanschlußstück 23 Stahl- oder Kupferrohr 7 double-ended ring 22 suction filter (not shown)
8 Hohlschraube 24 Nylonrohr connection piece 23 steel or copper pipe
9 Hohlschraube mit Anschluß 25 Verstärkungshülse für 8 hollow bolt 24 nylon pipe
10 Dichtring Nylonrohr 9 hollow bolt with connection 25 reinforcing bushing for
11 Anschlußgarnitur 26 Rohrschelle 10 seal ring nylon pipe
(Baugruppen) 27 Zylinderschraube 11 connection fittings 26 pipe clip
12 Verschlußschraube 28 Sechskantmutter (packaged units) 27 cheese-head screw
13 T-Stück 29 Federring 12 screw plug 28 hexagon nut
14 Rohrverbinder 30 Druckschalter 13 T - piece 29 lock washer
15 Durchgangsstück 31 Ölstandskontrolle 14 pipe joining element 30 press switch
16 Rohrverbinder für 32 Durchflußanzeiger 15 through piece 31 oil-level control
Schottverschraubung 33 Verteilerleiste 16 pipe joining element for 32 flow indicator
bulkhead stuffing box 33 injector manifold

2
Pos. Einzelheiten
in Druckschrift
Item no. Details in
printlet no.
1. PUMPEN UND AGGREGATE
PUMPS AND AGGREGATES
1.1
Ölschmierpumpe AB-K Förderdruck bis 40 bar
mit Behälter 0,75 l Fördervolumen 10 cm3/Hub
Hand- und pneumatischer
Antrieb
23332 BA 3
Oil pump AB-K Discharge pressure up to 40 bars
with 0.75 l tank Output volume 10 cm3/stroke
Manual and pneumatic
drive

1.2
Microjet mit Behälter 2,5 l Förderdruck bis 30 bar
für Öl Fördervolumen 0,25 cm3/Hub
Magnetpumpe

23318 BA 1
Microjet with 2.5 l tank Discharge pressure up to 30 bars
for Oil Output volume 25 cm3/stroke
Magnetic pump

1.3
Zahnradpumpen-Aggregat AD-M Förderdruck bis 40 bar
mit 4 l Behälter für Öl Fördervolumen 0,25 l … 1 l/min

23321 BA 3
Gear pumping unit AD-M Discharge pressure up to 40 bars
with 4 l tank for Oil Output volume 25 l … 1 l/min

1.4
Ölschmierpumpe AD-L mit Förderdruck bis 25 bar
Behälter 2,5 l Fördervolumen 100 cm3/min
Elektropumpe Pausenzeiteinstellung digital
1 bis 9999 Minuten
23315 BA 1
Oil pump AD-L with Discharge pressure up to 25 bars
2.5 l tank Output volume 100 cm3/min.
Electric pump Digital pause time adjustment
1 up to 9999 minutes

3
Pos. Einzelheiten
in Druckschrift
Item no. Details in
printlet no.
2. SCHMIERSTOFF - VERTEILER
LUBRICANT METERING DEVICE
2.1
Schmierstoff - Verteiler ZE-C Zuteilschraube für Dosiervolumen
mit 1, 2, und 3 Auslässen 0,1 cm3, 0,2 cm3, 0,4 cm3,
0,6 cm3, 0,8 cm3, 1,0 cm3/Hub
Betriebsdruck bis 160 bar

Lubricant metering device ZE-C Metering screw for metered 35640 PB 1

with 1, 2, and 3 outlets volume 0.1 cm3, 0.2 cm3,
0.4 cm3, 0.6 cm3, 0.8 cm3,
1.0 cm3/stroke
Service pressure up to 160 bars

2.2
Schmierstoff - Verteiler ZE-E
Lubricant metering device ZE-E
Verteilerelement für
10 mm3, 25 mm3, 50 mm3,
100 mm3 und 200 mm3/Hub
Betriebsdruck bis 40 bar
35691 P 1
Injectors for
10 mm3, 25 mm3, 50 mm3,
100 mm3 and 200 mm3/stroke
Service pressure up to 40 bars

2.3
Schmierstoff - Verteiler ZE-G
Lubricant metering device ZE-G
Verteilerelement für
10 mm3, 25 mm3, 50 mm3,
100 mm3, 150 mm3 und
200 mm3/Hub
Betriebsdruck bis 30 bar
35636 PB 1
Injectors for
10 mm3, 25 mm3, 50 mm3,
100 mm3, 150 mm3 and
200 mm3/stroke
Service pressure up to 30 bars

4
Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 sw
3. DOPPELKEGELRING DIN 3862 / DOUBLE CONICAL RING DIN 3862

3. 1 4 4,1 5,5 73511 - 2624

3. 2 6 6,1 6,5 73511 - 2644
3. 3 8 8,1 6,5 73511 - 2654
4. ÜBERWURFSCHRAUBE DIN 3871 / MALE FITTING FOR PIPES DIN 3871

4. 1 4 M 8x1 4,1 12 4 8 73511 - 5133

4. 2 6 M 10 x 1 6,1 13 4 10 73511 - 5153
4. 3 8 M 12 x 1 8,1 14 4,5 12 73511 - 5163
4. 4 8 M 14 x 1,5 8,1 16 4,5 14 73511 - 5223
5. ANSCHLUSS-STÜCK / CONNECTION PIECE

5. 1 4 M 8x1 M 8x1 11 18 7,5 11 73490 - 5213

5. 2 4 M 10 x 1 M 8x1 14 18 7,5 14 73490 - 5223
5. 3 4 G 1/4 M 8x1 17 26 12 17 73490 - 5311
5. 4 6 M 8x1 M 10 x 1 14 23 7,5 14 73490 - 5233
5. 5 6 M 10 x 1 M 10 x 1 14 18 7,5 14 73490 - 5243
5. 6 6 M 12 x 1 M 10 x 1 17 20 9 17 73490 - 5253
5. 7 6 M 14 x 1,5 M 10 x 1 17 18 9 17 73490 - 5283
5. 8 6 M 16 x 1,5 M 10 x 1 21,5 31 13 22 73490 - 5421
5. 9 6 G 1/8 M 10 x 1 17 32 10 17 73490 - 3031
5.10 6 G 1/4 M 10 x 1 17 20 10 17 73490 - 5321
5.11 8 M 10 x 1 M 14 x 1,5 14 28 7,5 17 73490 - 5263
5.12 8 M 12 x 1 M 14 x 1,5 17 29 9 17 73490 - 5273
5.13 8 G 1/4 M 14 x 1,5 17 30 12 17 73490 - 5331
5.14 4 M 8 x 1 keg. M 8x1 17 7 11 73490 - 5113
5.15 4 M 10 x 1 keg. M 8x1 16 7,5 11 73490 - 5133
5.16 4 G 1/8 keg. M 8x1 16 6 11 73490 - 5123
5.17 6 M 8 x 1 keg. M 10 x 1 30 10 14 73490 - 2891
5.18 6 M 10 x 1 keg. M 10 x 1 23 7,5 14 73490 - 9243
6. RINGANSCHLUSS-STÜCK / RING CONNECTION PIECE

6. 1 4 M 8x1 6,3 13 24 17 8,5 74111 - 4561

6. 2 4 M 8x1 10,2 14 28,5 21 12 74111 - 4211
6. 3 6 M 10 x 1 14,25 18 33 23 16 74111 - 4221
6. 4 6 M 10 x 1 10,2 14 28,5 21 12 74111 - 4241
6. 5 8 M 12 x 1 10,2 14 28,5 21 12 74111 - 4251
6. 6 8 M 12 x 1 14,25 18 33 23 16 74111 - 4261
6. 7 8 M 14 x 1,5 14,25 37 27 16 74111 - 4283
7. DOPPEL - RINGANSCHLUSS-STÜCK / DOUBLE - ENDED RING CONNECTION PIECE

7. 1 6 M 10 x 1 14,25 48 74111 - 4313

7. 2 8 M 14 x 1,5 14,25 54 74111 - 4323

5
Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 sw
8. HOHLSCHRAUBE / HOLLOW BOLT

8. 1 M 6 9 20 16 9 74111 - 4061
8. 2 M 8x1 10 25 20 14 74111 - 4113
8. 3 M 10 x 1 10 25 20 14 74111 - 4123
8. 4 M 12 x 1 14 33 27 17 74111 - 4173
8. 5 M 14 x 1,5 14 32 24,5 17 74111 - 4183
8. 6 G 1/4 14 35 27,5 17 74111 - 4193
9. HOHLSCHRAUBE MIT ANSCHLUSS / HOLLOW BOLT WITH CONNECTION

9. 1 6 M 10 x 1 M 10 x 1 33 20,5 14 74111 - 4081

9. 2 8 M 12 x 1 M 12 x 1 44 27 17 74111 - 4413
9. 3 8 M 14 x 1,5 M 14 x 1,5 38 24,5 17 74111 - 4423
10. DICHTRING DIN 7603-Cu / SEAL RING DIN 7603-Cu

10. 1 8,2 13,9 1 72712 - 1084

10. 2 10,2 13,4 1 72712 - 1094
10. 3 12,2 15,4 1,5 72712 - 1174
10. 4 14,2 17,9 1,5 72712 - 1214
10. 5 12,2 17,9 0,5 72712 - 1734
11. ANSCHLUSS-GARNITUREN / CONNECTION FITTINGS
Kreuzform bestehend aus Pos. 3, 4, 7, 9 und 10 / Cross shape consisting of item nos. 3, 4, 7, 9 and 10

11. 1 8/6 M 12 x 1 8 6 44 8,5 48 17 63422 - 1411

11. 2 8/6 M 14 x 1,5 8 6 38 6 48 17 63422 - 1421
11. 3 8/8 M 12 x 1 8 8 44 8,5 54 17 63422 - 1431
11. 4 8/8 M 14 x 1,5 8 8 38 6 54 17 63422 - 1441

L - Form bestehend aus Pos. 3, 4, 6, 9 und 10 / L - shape consisting of item nos. 3, 4, 6, 9 and 10

11. 5 6/4 M 10 x 1 6 4 33 7,5 21 28,5 14 63422 - 1551

11. 6 6/6 M 10 x 1 6 6 33 7,5 21 28,5 14 63422 - 1561
11. 7 6/8 M 10 x 1 6 8 33 7,5 21 28,5 14 63422 - 1571
11. 8 8/6 M 12 x 1 8 6 44 9,5 23 33 17 63422 - 1511
11. 9 8/6 M 14 x 1,5 8 6 38 7 23 33 17 63422 - 1521
11.10 8/8 M 12 x 1 8 8 44 9,5 23 33 17 63422 - 1531
11.11 8/8 M 14 x 1,5 8 8 38 7 23 33 17 63422 - 1541

T - Form bestehend aus Pos. 3, 4, 7, 8 und 10 / T - shape consisting of item nos. 3, 4, 7, 8 and 10
11.12 6 M 12 x 1 6 33 8,5 48 17 63422 - 1611
11.13 6 M 14 x 1,5 6 32 6 48 17 63422 - 1621
11.14 6 G 1/4 6 35 9 48 17 63422 - 1631
11.15 8 M 12 x 1 8 33 8,5 54 17 63422 - 1641
11.16 8 M 14 x 1,5 8 32 6 54 17 63422 - 1651
11.17 8 G 1/4 8 35 9 54 17 63422 - 1661

6
Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 sw
11. ANSCHLUSS-GARNITUREN / CONNECTION FITTINGS
Knieform bestehend aus Pos. 3, 4, 6, 8 und 10 / Knee - shape consisting of item nos. 3, 4, 6, 8 and 10
11.18 4 M 6 4 20 5 17 24 9 63422 - 3141
11.19 4 M 8x1 4 25 7 21 28,5 14 63422 - 3011
11.20 4 M 10 x 1 4 25 7 21 28,5 14 63422 - 3021
11.21 6 M 8x1 6 25 7 21 28,5 14 63422 - 3061
11.22 6 M 10 x 1 6 25 7 21 28,5 14 63422 - 3071
11.23 6 M 12 x 1 6 33 9,5 23 33 17 63422 - 3031
11.24 6 M 14 x 1,5 6 32 7 23 33 17 63422 - 3041
11.25 6 G 1/4 6 35 10 23 33 17 63422 - 3051
11.26 8 M 8x1 8 25 7 21 28,5 14 63422 - 3081
11.27 8 M 10 x 1 8 25 7 21 28,5 14 63422 - 3091
11.28 8 M 12 x 1 8 33 9,5 23 33 17 63422 - 3111
11.29 8 M 14 x 1,5 8 32 7 23 33 17 63422 - 3121
11.30 8 G 1/4 8 35 10 23 33 17 63422 - 3131

Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 d3 d4 l1 l2 sw
12. VERSCHLUSS-SCHRAUBE / SCREW PLUG

12. 1 M 8x1 10 6 11 74111 - 3113

12. 2 M 10 x 1 14 11 8 5 74106 - 1164

12. 3 M 12 x 1 15 8 17 74161 - 7421

12. 4 M 14 x 1,5 19 15 12 6 74106 - 1174

13. T - STÜCK / T - PIECE

13. 1 6 M 10 x 1 73462 - 3443

73462 - 3483
13. 2 8 M 12 x 1
je 3 x
14. ROHRVERBINDER / PIPE JOINING ELEMENT

14. 1 4 M 8x1 27 11 73490 - 5513

14. 2 6 M 10 x 1 34 14 73490 - 5543
14. 3 8 M 14 x 1,5 40 17 73490 - 5573

7
Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 l1 l2 sw
15. DURCHGANGSSTÜCK / THROUGH PIECE

15. 1 4 M 8x1 30 73462 - 4113

16. ROHRVERBINDER FÜR SCHOTTVERSCHRAUBUNG / PIPE JOINING ELEMENT FOR BULKHEAD STUFFING BOX

16. 1 4 M 8x1 M 14 x 1,5 27 19 17 73490 - 5613

16. 2 6 M 10 x 1 M 14 x 1,5 30 20 17 73490 - 5643
16. 3 8 M 14 x 1,5 M 20 x 1,5 40 28 24 73490 - 5673

17. NIPPEL ZUR VERTEILERVERBINDUNG / NIPPLE FOR DISTRIBUTOR CONNECTION

17. 1 M 12 x 1 30 73462 - 4113

18. DREHBARE SCHMIERZAPFEN / ROTATABLE LUBRICATING PIVOTS

18. 1 6 G 1/8 26 32 38 22 63682 - 1611

18. 2 6 G 1/4 26 32 38 22 63682 - 1621

19. DRUCKMEßGERÄT / PRESSURE GAUGE

19. 1 G 1/4 63 53 17 75111 - 5124

20. VERSCHRAUBUNG FÜR DRUCKMEßGERÄT / SCREW JOINT FOR PRESSURE GAUGE

20. 1 6 73442 - 4213

20. 2 8 73442 - 4313

Dichtkantring / Edged seal ring

20. 3 11,2 6,9 3,8 72724 - 3113

8
Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 l1 l2 sw
21. ÜBERGANGSSTUTZEN / TRANSITION PIECE

21. 1 M 10 x 1 G 1/4 28 8 19 73490 - 2651

21. 2 M 12 x 1 G 1/4 28 10 19 73490 - 2691
21. 3 M 14 x 1,5 G 1/4 26 12 19 73490 - 1533

22. SAUGFILTER / SUCTION FILTER

22. 1 G 1/2 45 82 60 27 39111 - 1313

23. STAHL- UND KUPFERROHR / STEEL AND COPPER PIPE

Geschweißtes Präzisions-Stahlrohr / Welded precision steel pipe
23. 1 Ø4 x 0,7 73100 - 1114
23. 2 Ø6 x 0,7 73100 - 1134
23. 3 Ø8 x1 73100 - 1144
Geschweißtes Präzisions-Stahlrohr, verzinkt / Welded precision steel pipe, galvanized
23. 4 Ø4 x 0,7 73100 - 1214
23. 5 Ø6 x 0,7 73100 - 1234
23. 6 Ø8 x1 73100 - 1244
Nahtloses Kupferrohr / Weldless copper pipe
23. 7 Ø 2,4 x 0,6 73100 - 3043
23. 8 Ø4 x 0,5 73100 - 3124
23. 9 Ø6 x1 73100 - 3134
23.10 Ø8 x1 73100 - 3144
24. NYLONROHR / NYLON PIPE

24. 1 Ø 2,4 x 0,6 zulässiger Betriebsdruck 35 bar bei 20 oC 73100 - 2043

24. 2 Ø4 x 0,5 allowed service pressure 35 bars at 20 oC 73100 - 2114
24. 3 Ø6 x1 o o
zulässige Betriebstemperatur - 40 C bis 100 C 73100 - 2134
24. 4 Ø8 x 1,5 allowed service temperature - 40 oC to 100 oC 73100 - 2144
25. VERSTÄRKUNGSHÜLSE FÜR NYLONROHR / REINFORCING BUSHING FOR NYLON PIPE

für Rohr innen Ø

for pipe inside dia.
25. 1 Ø3 73511 - 4113
25. 2 Ø4 73511 - 4123
25. 3 Ø5 73511 - 4133

9
Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 l1 l2 l3 sw
26. ROHRSCHELLE / PIPE CLIP
einlaschig / single-ended

26. 1 5,5 - 7 7 6,6 26 14 73572 - 3234

26. 2 7-9 9 6,6 28 16 73572 - 3244

Form A / Shape A

26. 3 4 4 5,5 15 9 A 73573 - 4114

Form B / Shape B

26. 4 4 4 5,5 19 11 B 73573 - 4214

Form C / Shape C

26. 5 4 4 5,5 23 13 C 73573 - 4314

zweilaschig / double-ended
26. 6 Form A Form B 5,5 - 7 7 6,6 44 28 A 73573 - 3124
Shape A Shape B
26. 7 7-9 9 6,6 48 32 A 73573 - 3134
26. 8 6 46 32 6 B 73573 - 3221
26. 9 8 52 38 8 B 73573 - 3231
Form C / Shape C

26.10 6 52 38 12 C 73573 - 3321

26.11 8 60 46 16 C 73573 - 3331

Form D / Shape D

26.12 6 58 44 18 D 73573 - 3421

26.13 8 68 54 24 D 73573 - 3431

27. ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE DIN 7984 / CHEESE - HEAD SCREW DIN 7984

27. 1 M 5 x 10 74102 - 1024

27. 2 M 5 x 16 74102 - 1044
27. 3 M 5 x 20 74102 - 1054
27. 4 M 6 x 12 74102 - 1124
27. 5 M 6 x 16 74102 - 1134
27. 6 M 6 x 25 74102 - 1154
27. 7 M 6 x 30 74102 - 1164
27. 8 M 6 x 50 74102 - 1913

10
 Pos. Rohr Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.

Item Pipe Dimensions (mm) Code no.

no.
Ø d1 d2 l1 l2 l3 sw
Zylinder - Schneidschraube für Rohrschellen und Verteiler
Cheese - head tapping screw for pipe clips and distributors

27. 9 B M 6 x 25 74105 - 1224

DIN 7513

28. SECHSKANTMUTTER DIN 934/936 / HEXAGON NUT DIN 934/936

28. 1 M5 74175 - 1244

28. 2 M6 74175 - 1254
28. 3 M 14 x 1,5 74175 - 1334
29. FEDERRING DIN 7980 / LOOK WASHER DIN 7980

29. 1 5 74185 - 3024

29. 2 6 74185 - 3034
29. 3 14 74185 - 3074
30. DRUCKSCHALTER / PRESSURE SWITCH

10 bis 20 bar *, 42 V ~ = 10 A, Schließer

30. 1 34241 - 1533
10 to 20 bars *, 42 V ~ = 10 A, make contact
20 bis 50 bar **, 42 V ~ = 10 A, Schließer
30. 2 34241 - 1123
20 to 50 bars **, 42 V ~ = 10 A, make contact
2 bis 20 bar, 220 V ~, 2 A, Wechsler, Schutzart IP 44
30. 3 2 to 20 bars, 220 V ~, 2 A, change-over contact, 34241 - 1213
protective system IP 44
5 bis 50 bar, 220 V ~, 2 A, Wechsler, Schutzart IP 44
30. 4 5 to 50 bars, 220 V ~, 2 A, change-over contact, 34241 - 1223
protective system IP 44
Doppelnippel für Druckschalter 220 V / Double nipple for push switch 220 V

30. 5 73491 - 1121

31. ÖLSTANDKONTROLLE MIN. / MIN. OIL - LEVEL CONTROL

24 V = 21 VA, Kontakt schließt untere Lage

31. 1 75121 - 2913
24 V = 21 VA, contact closes in lower position

32. DURCHFLUSS - ANZEIGER / FLOW INDICATOR

32. 1 4 70 10 48721 - 1213

32. 2 6 80 14 48721 - 1223

* = werksseitig auf 15 bar eingestellt / Set to 15 bars in our works.

** = werksseitig auf 20 bar eingestellt / Set to 20 bars in our works

11
 Pos. Zahl der Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.
Auslässe
Item Number Dimensions (mm) Code no.
no. of outlets
l a b
33. VERTEILERLEISTE / INJECTOR MANIFOLD
Verteilerleisten mit einseitig angeordneten Auslässen
Injector manifolds with outlets placed on one side

33. 1 2x1 57 1 x 18 -- 63662 - 3121

33. 2 3x1 75 2 x 18 18 63662 - 3131
33. 3 4x1 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 3141
33. 4 5x1 111 4 x 18 54 63662 - 3151
33. 5 6x1 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 3161
33. 6 7x1 165 7 x 18 108 63662 - 3171
33. 7 8x1 165 7 x 18 108 63662 - 3181
33. 8 9x1 201 9 x 18 144 63662 - 3191
33. 9 10 x 1 201 9 x 18 144 63662 - 3211
33.10 11 x 1 237 11 x 18 180 63662 - 3221
33.11 12 x 1 237 11 x 18 180 63662 - 3231
Verteilerleisten mit gegenüberliegenden Auslässen
Injector manifolds with opposing outlets

33.12 2x2 57 1 x 18 -- 63662 - 2121

33.13 3x2 75 2 x 18 18 63662 - 2131

33.14 4x2 93 3 x 18 36 63662 - 2141

33.15 5x2 111 4 x 18 54 63662 - 2151

33.16 6x2 129 5 x 18 72 63662 - 2161

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
 Übergangsstutzen / Transition stud
d1 d2 d3 d4 l1 l2 l3 SW Bestell - Nr. / Code no.
M 10 x 1 R 1/4 19 4,0 8 14 28 19 73490 - 2651
R 1/8 R 1/4 14 4,0 8 17 31 19 73490 - 2113
R 1/4 R 1/8 18 5,0 12 12 28 19 73490 - 2123
R 1/4 R 3/8 18 5,0 12 17 36 24 73490 - 2143
R 1/4 R 1/2 18 5,0 12 20 40 27 73490 - 2173
R 1/4 R 3/4 18 5,0 12 22 43 36 73490 - 2213
R 1/4 M 18 x 1,5 20 6,0 12 15 35 22 73490 - 2131
R 3/8 R 1/4 22 8,0 12 17 36 22 73490 - 2393
R 3/8 R 1/2 22 8,0 12 20 41 27 73490 - 2353
R 1/2 R 1/4 26 11,4 14 12 24 27 73490 - 2453
R 1/2 R 3/8 26 12,0 14 17 36 27 73490 - 2413
R 1/2 R 3/4 26 12,0 14 22 46 36 73490 - 2313
R 3/4 R 1/4 32 11,4 16 12 26 32 73490 - 2543

Werkstoff : Stahl, oberflächengeschützt / Material : surface protective

Doppelnippel / Double nipple

Rohranschluß Maße (mm) Bestell - Nr.
Pipe connection Dimensions (mm) Code no.
d a l SW
R 1/8 8,0 23 12 73491 - 1111
R 1/4 15,0 39 14 73491 - 1121
R 3/8 15,0 39 17 73491 - 1131
R 1/2 17,5 41 24 73491 - 1141
R 3/4 17,5 49 28 73491 - 1151
R1 20,0 56 38 73491 - 1161

Werkstoff : Stahl, oberflächengeschützt / Material : surface protective

BESTELLBEISPIEL EXAMBLE FOR ORDERING

1 Übergangsstutzen R ½ - R ¾ Bestell-Nr. 73490 - 1313 1 Transition stud R ½ - R ¾ _____ Code no. 73490 - 1313

73490/91 P 1 d + e / 02 0900HF
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Lötlose Rohrverschraubungen mit Schneidring
Solderless pipe joints with olive

Rohraußen Ø Bestell - Nr.

Baureihe
Pipe external dia Code no.
series
LL L S d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 l5 l6 sw sw sw
sehr leicht schwer
leicht
very light heavy
light ~ ~ ~ 1 2 3
Gerade Verschraubung mit 4 G 1/8 * 10,5 20 11 10 73442 - 1114
kegeligem und zylindrischem 18
16 G 1/8 14 18,5 23 14 14 73442 - 1214
Einschraubstutzen
Straight screw joint with 16 G 1/4 18 12 13 28 19 17 73442 - 1233
conical and cylindrical neck 16 M 10 x 1 14 18,5 23 14 73442 - 1244
18 14
8 G 1/8 * 11 23,5 12 73442 - 1314
18 15 30 73442 - 1324
G 1/4 18 19 19
10 12 11 26 73442 - 1414
G 3/8 22 15 31 22 73442 - 1424
10 22
17,5 34 73442 - 1433
14 19 37 73442 - 1614
G 1/2 26 14 27 27
15 14 29 73442 - 1714
18 14,5 31 32 73442 - 1814
20 20,5 42 73442 - 1914
G 3/4 32 16 32 36
22 16,5 33 73442 - 1924
30 23,5 50 73442 - 1934
G 1 1/4 49 20 50 50
35 17,5 39 73442 - 1974
42 G 1 1/2 55 22 19 42 55 60 73442 - 1944
20 G 1/2 26 14 20,5 42 32 36 73442 - 1983
Gerade Verschaubung 4 12 31 19 10 73442 - 2114
Straight screw joint 16 16 45 14 17 73442 - 2214
8 12 35 12 14 73442 - 2314
18 18 47 73442 - 2324
17 19
10 13 42 73442 - 2414
10 17 49 19 22 73442 - 2424
15 46 24 27 73442 - 2714
16
18 48 27 32 73442 - 2814
20 23 66 73442 - 2914
32 36
22 20 52 73442 - 2924
27 80 46 50 73442 - 2934
30
42 21 66 55 60 73442 - 2944

* = kegelig — conical

Hinweise auf Seite 5 beachten — Refer to notes on page 5

73442/43 P 1 d + e / 3 1092 HF
 Rohraußen Ø Bestell - Nr.
Baureihe
Pipe external dia Code no.
series
LL L S d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 l5 l6 sw sw sw
sehr leicht schwer
leicht
very light heavy
light ~ ~ ~ 1 2 3
Winkelverschraubung mit G 1/8 * 73443 - 1114
mit keg. u. zylindr. 4 12 11 21 19 10
M 18 x 1 * 73443 - 1124
Einschraubstutzen 18
90o screw joint with conical 16 G 1/8 * 15 12 27 12 14 73443 - 1214
and cylindrical neck
6 M 10 x 1 * 12 19,5 21 19 12 73443 - 1224
16 G 1/4 * 18 12 16 31 12 17 73443 - 1234
8 G 1/8 * 15 18 11,5 23 12 14 73443 - 1324
10 G 1/4 * 19 15 30 14 19 73443 - 1414
12
10 G 3/8 * 20 17,5 34 17 22 73443 - 1424
20 G 3/4 26 16 26,5 48 27 36 73443 - 1944
15 24 21 36 19 27 73443 - 1714
G 1/2 * 14
18 26,5 23,5 40 24 32 73443 - 1814
22 G 3/4 26 16 27,5 44 27 36 73443 - 1924

Winkelverschraubung 10 15 30 14 19 73443 - 3414

90o screw joint
10 17,5 34 17 22 73443 - 3424
15 21 36 19 27 73443 - 3724
18 23,5 40 24 32 73443 - 3814
20 26,5 48 27 36 73443 - 3914
30 35,5 62 41 50 73443 - 3934
42 40 63 50 60 73443 - 3944

T - Verschraubung 16 12 27 14 73443 - 4214

12
Tee joint 18 14 29 17 73443 - 4314
10 15 30 14 19 73443 - 4414
10 17,5 34 17 22 73443 - 4424
15 21 36 19 27 73443 - 4714
18 23,5 40 24 32 73443 - 4814
20 26,5 48 27 36 73443 - 4914
25 30 54 36 46 73443 - 4974
30 35,5 62 73443 - 4934
41 50
35 34,5 56 73443 - 4994

* = keglig — conical

Hinweise auf Seite 5 beachten — Refer to notes on page 5

2
 Rohraußen Ø Bestell - Nr.
Baureihe
Pipe external dia Code no.
series
s
LL L S d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 l5 l6 sw sw
w
sehr leicht schwer
leicht
very light heavy
light ~ ~ ~ 1 2 3
T - Reduzierverschraubung
Tee joint with reduced
branch

20 / 10 / 20 26,5 48 68 84,5 27 36 22 73443 - 5943

30 / 10 / 30 35,5 62 74 90 41 50 73443 - 5953

Verschraubung
Reduzieranschluß 10 / 6 25 17 73442 - 5113
Screw joint 26
10 / 8 26 19 73442 - 5123
reducing connection
15 / 8 23 23,5 17 73442 - 5153
15 / 10 24 24,5 19 73442 - 5163
20 / 10 28 33,5 22 73442 - 5213
30 / 10 28 38,5 22 73442 - 5313
30 / 20 35 39,5 36 73442 - 5333
Manometerverschraubung
Pressure gauge joint
16 14 73442 - 4213
12 37
18 G 1/4 17 19 73442 - 4313
10 13 38 19 73442 - 4423
10 G½ 15,5 47 22 27 73442 - 4413

Gerade
Schottverschraubung
Straight screw joint,
bulkhead type
16 14 17 27 22 42 17 17 14 73442 - 6614
10 20 14,5 29,5 31 46 24 24 22 73442 - 6114
15 24 12 31 27 46 16 19 30 27 73442 - 6314
20 32 17,5 33,5 39 55 41 41 36 73442 - 6414
30 44 21,5 37,5 48 64 50 50 50 73442 - 6514

Hinweise auf Seite 5 beachten — Refer to notes on page 5

3
 Rohraußen Ø Bestell - Nr.
Baureihe
Pipe external dia Code no.
series
LL L S d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 l5 l6 sw sw sw
sehr leicht schwer
leicht
very light heavy
light ~ ~ ~ 1 2 3
Winkel -
Schottverschraubung
Knee screw joint,
bulkhead type

10 20 29,5 46 20 34 17,5 17 24 22 73443 - 7114

15 24 31 46 23 36 21 19 30 27 73443 - 7314
16
20 32 33,5 55 30 48 26,5 27 41 36 73443 - 7414
30 44 37,5 64 39 62 35,5 41 50 50 73443 - 7514

Winkel – Verschraubung
einstellbar
Knee screw joint
adjustable 16 12 27 26 14 73443 - 8123
12
18 14 29 27,5 17 73443 - 8133
10 17,5 34 30 17 22 73443 - 8113
20 26,5 48 44,5 27 36 73443 - 8313
30 35,5 62 55 41 50 73443 - 8413
42 40 63 56 50 60 73443 - 8513

L-Verschraubung
einstellbar
L - screw joint,
adjustable

10 17,5 34 73443 - 9113

17 22
15 21 36 73443 - 9313
20 26,5 48 27 36 73443 - 9413
30 35,5 62 41 50 73443 - 9513

Hinweise auf Seite 5 beachten — Refer to notes on page 5

4
 Rohraußen Ø Bestell - Nr.
Baureihe
Pipe external dia Code no.
series
LL L S d1 d2 d3 l1 l2 l3 l4 l5 l6 sw sw sw
sehr leicht schwer
leicht
very light heavy
light ~ ~ ~ 1 2 3
Schwenkverschraubung
Swivel screw joint

14 G 1/8 14,5 21 10 11,5 21 16 10 14 14 73442 - 7113

16 G 1/4 18,5 30 13 15 27 17 19 19 73442 - 7123
19
10 G 3/8 22,5 32 15 16 32 22 22 22 73442 - 7153

HINWEISE
Baumaße : sind ca. - Maße bei angezogener Überwurfmutter
Werkstoff : St mit Oberflächenschutz
Bei Bestellung ist anzugeben : Stückzahl, Benennung = Verschraubung, Rohraußen Ø und Bestell-Nr.
Bestellbeispiel : für eine gerade Einschraubverschraubung für Rohraußen Ø 8 mit Bestell-Nr. 73442-1324
Bestellung : 1 Verschraubung 8, Bestell-Nr. 73442-1324
Montagehinweise : siehe Seite 6

REFERENCE
Fitted dimensions : are approximate, with tightened union nut
Material : steel with surface protection
Ordering requirements : quantity, designation = threading, outside diameter of pipe and Code no.
Example of order : for a straight screw joint with pipe outside diameter 8 and Code no. 73442-1324
Text of order : 1 screw joint 8, Code no. 73442-1324
Installation hints : see page 6

5
 Rohr rechtwinklig abschneiden.
Cut off the end of the pipe square.
Gewinde gut einölen.
Thoroughly oil the thread.
Gewinde der Überwurfmutter gut einölen, nicht ein-
fetten.
Thoroughly oil the thread of the union nut; do not
use grease.
Rohr gegen Anschlag im Innenkonus drücken.
Markierung an Rohr und Überwurfmutter anbrin-
gen.
Press the pipe into the taper against the stop. Mark
the pipe and nut.
Überwurfmutter lösen und kontrollieren, ob der auf-
geworfene sichtbare Bund den Raum vor der
Schneide ausfüllt.
Unscrew the nut and check whether the visible col-
lar takes up the space in front of the cutting edge.
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Rohr innen entgraten.
Deburr the inside of the pipe.
Konus einölen.
Oil the taper.
Schneidring richtig aufschieben - sonst Fehl-
montage.
Slide the olive on correctly - otherside the fitting will
be wrong.
Überwurfmutter ca. 3/4 Umdrehung anziehen.
Hierbei umfaßt der Schneidring das Rohr. Rohr
darf nicht mitdrehen.
Tighten the nut by about 3/4 of a turn. This causes
the olive to grip the pipe. The pipe must not turn.
Nach Fertigstellung der Verbindung und jedem
Lösen ist die Überwurfmutter leicht anzuziehen.
Tighten the nut slightly after the connection has
been completed and every time after the nut has
been slackened.
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Rohr außen entgraten.
Deburr the outside of the pipe.
Schneidring allseitig einölen.
Thorougly oil the olive all over.
Überwurfmutter bis zur spürbaren Anlage von
Hand anziehen.
Tighten the union nut by hand until it is felt to come
to a stop.
Endanzug um ca. 3/4 Umdrehung.
Dabei schneidet der Ring in das Rohr ein und wirft
vor seiner Schneide einen sichtbaren Bund auf.
Tighten finally by about 3/4 of a turn. This causes
the olive to cut into the pipe and results in a visible
collar over its cutting edge.
Funktion der Rohrverschraubungen nach dem
Anzug der Überwurfmutter.
How the union functions after the nut has been
tightened.
15
 DELIMON Agents and Subsidiaries
AUSTRIA UNITED KINGDOM POLAND
DELIMON Zentralschmiertechnik GmbH Engineering & General Equipment Ltd. PROMASZ
Luftbadgasse 5/5 Unit 8, Eley Road ul. Ludomira Rozyckiego I “C”
A - 1060 Wien GB - Edmonton London N18 3BB PL - 51608 Wroclaw
Phone: (+ 43) 1 585 66 17 Phone: (+ 44) 208 807 4567 Phone: (+ 48) 71 34 86 074
Fax: (+ 43) 1 585 66 17 50 Telex: 051 266211 Fax: (+ 48) 71 34 81 569
E-mail: delimon_at@compuserve.com Fax: (+ 44) 208 884 2229 and
Drahtwort: Cenlub, London HYDROHUT S. c.
mgr inz. Jaroslaw Pilzak
ul. Laczaca 1
BELGIUM P.O. Box 11
F. Henning S.A.N.V. ITALY NIP: 643 15 89 070
Zoning de la Troque Rail lubrication / Machine tool PL - 41103 Siemianowice SI.
Rue Ferrer, 252 FISME S.A.S. Phone: (+ 48) 32 765 35 10
B - 4100 Seraing A. Cella - P. Lambicchi & C. Fax: (+ 48) 32 765 35 13
Phone: (+ 32) 43 38 0602 Via A. Volta 21 Tel. Kom.: 0601 54 99 95
Fax: (+ 32) 43 38 2700 I - 20082 Binasco (Milano) E-mail: hydrohut@inetia.pl
Phone: (+ 39) 02 9 055 358 and
Telex: 043 350465 Kran-Service Hartmann GmbH
Fax: (+ 39) 02 9 052 267 Gewerbegebiet Ebersbach
BULGARIA / HUNGARY / E-mail: fisme@tin.it Gewerbering 12
ROMANIA D - 02828 Görlitz
Industrial lubrication / Lubrication for Phone: (+ 49) 3581 38 63 0
DELIMON Zentralschmiertechnik GmbH commercial vehicles / Excavator and tracked
Luftbadgasse 5/5 Fax: (+ 49) 3581 38 63 21
vehicle and
A - 1060 Wien CEM del Dott
Phone: (+ 43) 1 585 66 17 Przedsiebiorstwo Produkcyjno
Ing. G. Sorbara & C. sas Handlowo - Uslugowe
Fax: (+ 43) 1 585 66 17 50 Via Morandi 74/80
E-mail: delimon_at@compuserve.com << EWA >>
I - 40060 Toscanella di Dozza (BO) Eksport - Import
Phone: (+ 39) 542 - 674142 Pelnomocnik Jan Malinowski
Fax: (+ 39) 542 - 674171 Studniska Dolne 10
DENMARK PL - 59975 Sulików
Monberg & Thorsen A/S Phone: (+ 48) 75 771 77 60
MT S & L Teknik Fax: (+ 48) 75 771 99 16
LUXEMBOURG
Fabriksparken 58 De Limon Fluhme GmbH
P.O. Box 1438 Arminstraße 15
DK - 2600 Glostrup D - 40227 Düsseldorf
Phone: (+ 45) 43 260 800 Phone: (+ 49) 211 7774294
PORTUGAL
Fax: (+ 45) 43 260 999 TEDCEL - Representações Import -
Fax: (+ 49) 211 7774260 Export, LDA.
E-mail: mtelpro.div@monthor.dk.
R. António Joaquim Araújo, 82
P - 2300-555 Tomar and/or
P - 1700-067 Lisbon
NETHERLANDS Phone Tomar: (+ 351) 249 315 905
FRANCE Apparatenbouw Hogedruksmering
Bijur Products Inc. Fax Tomar: (+ 351) 249 322 942
J. v. d. Gaag B. V. Phone Lisbon: (+ 351) 21 849
P. O. Box 50 Hoefweg 65 - 67
Z. I. de Courtaboeuf Orsay 1190/1/2/3
P. O. Box 22 Fax Lisbon: (+ 351) 21 849 7452
F - 91942 Les Ulis Cédex NL - 2665 ZG Bleiswijk
Phone: (+ 33) 1 69298585 Handy (Mobile): (+ 351) 964 005 226
Phone: (+ 31) 10 5214 722 / 5214 207 E-mail: tedlisboa@netc.pt and/or
Telex: 042 600393 Fax: (+ 31) 10 5213 696
Fax: (+ 33 ) 1 69077627 E-mail: albertsaunus@netc.pt

NORWAY
GREECE N. F. Tharaldsen A / S
A. BOUNAS - S. KALALTZAKIS Stalfjaera 28
84 AG. PANTON str N - 0975 Oslo
GR - 17676 KALLITHEA ATHENS Phone: (+ 47) 22 82 00 83
Phone: (+ 30) 956 4988 - 952 4391 Fax: (+ 47) 22 82 00 80
Fax: (+ 30) 957 4153
X 90 S 2e / 45 25.06.2001HF
DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · D - 40011 Düsseldorf, P.O. Box 10 20 52 · D - 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Phone: (+ 49) 2 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: (+ 49) 2 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · D - 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Phone: (+ 49) 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: (+ 49) 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
SLOVENIA / CROATIA SWEDEN TSCHECHISCHE REPUBLIK
DELIMON Zentralschmiertechnik GmbH GERM AB SLOVAKISCHE REPUBLIK
Luftbadgasse 5/5 Östra Järnvägsgatan 50 ŠPONDR CMS spol. s r.o.
A - 1060 Wien S - 91131 Vännäs centrální mazací systémy
Phone: (+ 43) 1 585 66 17 Phone: (+ 46) 935 12440 Terezy Novákové 79
Fax: (+ 43) 1 585 66 17 50 Fax: (+ 46) 935 51352 CS - 621 00 Brno
E-mail: delimon_at@compuserve.com Bostad: (+ 46) 935 12314 Phone: (+ 42) 05 49 27 45 02
and Fax: (+ 42) 05 41 22 62 35
TEHNOKOM E-mail spondr.cms@mbox.vol.cz
Vocarska 15
41000 Zagreb - Croatia SWITZERLAND
Phone: (+ 38) 41 422087 Bijur Products Inc.
Fax: (+ 38) 41 423597 Erlenstraße 2a
CH - 2555 Brügg
Phone: (+ 41) 32 373 4644
Telex: 045 934899
SPAIN Fax: (+ 41) 32 373 2352
Lubrimonsa
Lubricacion Centralizada De Limon S.A.
Txori - Erri Etorbidea, 38
E - 48150 Sondica - (Vizcaya) TURKEY
Phone: (+ 34) 94 4532000 / 04 / 08 Mehmet Buldanli
Fax: (+ 34) 94 4532500 1395 Sokak 36 D.4
E-mail: lubrimon@infonegocio.com Mimar Sinan
TR - 35220 IZMIR
Phone: (+ 90) 232 3425609
Fax: (+ 90) 232 3425608

DELIMON Overseas’ Representatives

ARGENTINA CANADA CHINA
Miguel Schmitt & CIA. S. R. L. CLIMAX LTEE SHANGHAI NG. Fong Electro - Hydraulic
Bacacay 5459 / 69 171, Joseph-Carrier Street Complete Engineering Co. Ltd.
RA - Buenos Aires Vaudreuil (Montréal), No. 710 Yi Shan Road
Phone: (+ 54) 1 67 - 7319 / 5210 Québec J7V 5V5 / Canada VRC - Shanghai China
Telex: Schmittco Baires Phone: (+ 450) 424 - 3885 Phone: (+ 8621) 64362711 / 2308
Fax: (+ 450) 424 - 0529 64703363
E-mail: climax@qc.aibn.com Fax: (+ 8621) 64707363
AUSTRALIA and 64701975
Trilube Services PTY. Ltd. CPL SYSTEMS
P.O.Box 5057 7053 Twiss Road
17 Pembury Road CDN - Campbellville, Ontario LOP IBO EGYPT
AUS - 2566 Minto M.C. NSW Phone: (+ 1905) 257 - 9640 MELAR ENGINEERING CO
Phone: (+ 61) 02 98205400 Fax: (+ 1905) 875 - 2125 19 B, Oboor Buildings
Fax: (+ 61) 02 98205411 Salah Salem - Flat 2, 10th Floor P.O. Box: 143
ET - 12311 CAIRO / Egypt
CHILE Phone: (+ 202) 2611244
BRAZIL ENSI Empresa Nacional de Suministros Fax: (+ 202) 4016817
ATRI - NYLOX DO BRASIL Ltda. Industriales Ltda.
Rua Prefeito de Sa Lessa No 601 Victor Lamas 1199
Cep. 215230-210 Casilla 2217 GUATEMALA
BR - Acari - Rio de Janeiro / Brazil RCH - La Concepcion - Chile Representaciones ‘’ L. C. M. ‘’
Phone: (+ 55) 21 373-7373 Phone: (+ 5641) 240831 P. O. Box 384 - A
Fax: (+ 55) 21 372-1498/372-1894 Fax: (+ 5641) 231019 GCA - Guatemala City, Guatemala C.A.
Phone: (+ 502) 473 3483
(+ 502) 473 3488 / 473 3496
Fax: (+ 502) 473 2891 / 473 3480

2
INDIA MALAYSIA TAIWAN R. O. C.
DELIMON PROTOS ENGINEERING CO. CONDENSATE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS WIN SONIC TRADING CORP.
PRIVATE LTD. SDN BHD 3F - 4. NO. 4, LANE 609
173 Jamshedji Tata Road Churchgate (A Subsidiary of Toshio (S) Pte Ltd) SEC. 5, CHUNG SHIN ROAD.,
P.O. Box 1149 29-2, (2nd Floor), Jalan Cempaka SD 12/2, SAN CHUNG, TAPEI,
IND - Mumbai 400 020 Bandar Sri Damansara, Kepong, RC - TAIWAN, R.O.C.
Phone: (+ 91) 22 240134 MAL - 52200 Kuala Lumpur, Phone: (+07) 886-22-999-7658 (5 lines)
Telex: 08111 2506 PROT IN Phone: (+ 03) 632 4671 Fax: (+07) 886-22-999-6487
Fax: (+ 91) 22 2021716 Fax: (+ 03) 632 4771
Telegr. : ‘PROTODYN’ Bombay and
Internet: protos.protoeng@gems.vsnl.net.in 629, Aljunied Road 08 - 13 VENEZUELA
E-mail: g=protos/s=protoeng/p=gems/ Cititech Industrial Building INSA DE VENEZUELA, C.A.
a=vsnl/c=in SGP - 389838 Singapore Proveedores Industriales
and Phone: (+ 65) 743 1383 (4 lines) C / 8, Transversal “H” Edificio Luedi,
4, Patullos Rd., Mount Road Fax: (+ 65) 743 3682 Piso 01 Ofic. 03
P.O. Box 375 Zona Industrial UD-321
Chennai 600 002 YV - Puerto Ordaz, Edo. Bolivar - Venezuela
Phone : (+ 44) 8 460 711 PARAGUAY Phone: (+ 58) 86 943 704
(+ 44) 8 460 722 VS BROTHER S.A. (+ 58) 86 941 418
Fax: (+ 44) 8 460 110 O´ Leary 515 (+ 58) 86 945 306
P.O. Box 1736 Fax: (+ 58) 86 944 314
PY - Asunción / Paraguay Mobile: (+ 58) 14 986 3359
IRAN Phone: (+ 595) 21 443 832 E-mail: insaven@telcel.net.ve
Delpak CO. Ltd. Fax: (+ 595) 21 443 689
Ave. Nejatollahi (Villa)
Ave. Shirin 4 USA
IR - Teheran 15996, Iran PERU Bijur Lubrication Corporation
Phone: (+ 98) 21 823732 RUBROS eirl. 50 Kocher Drive
Telex: 088 215654 delp ir Calle Monte Real 207 Dpto. 6, USA - Bennington, VT 05201 - 1994
Telegr.: Delimpco Chacarilla del Estanque, Phone: (+ 001) 802 4472174
and PE - Santiago de Surco - Lima 33, Perú Telex: 023 6817445
German office: Phone: (+ 51) 1372-5564 / 985-5244 Fax: (+ 001) 802 4471365
Ernst-Reuter-Str. 33 Fax: (+ 51) 1372-5457
D - 63263 Neu - Isenburg E-mail: rubros@amauta.rcp.net.pe
Phone : (+ 49) 6102 35392
Fax : (+ 49) 6102 38169
PHILIPPINES
COMPRESSTECH RESOURCES, INC.
ISRAEL PM. 3001 KIM SIU CHING FOUNDATION
Frank Agencies BLDG.
10, Pinkas Street 62661, P.O.Box: 22307 RP - STO. CRISTO ST., BINONDO, MANILA
IL - 63415 Tel - Aviv Phone: (+ 63) 241-97-40 to 42;
Phone: (+ 972) 3 5441941 - 46 242-25-94;
Telex: 341678 242-26-90
Fax: (+ 972) 3 5441438 Fax: (+ 63) 242-27-53
Cable: Franag Tel - Aviv

SOUTH AFRICA
JORDAN Operational Marketing Pty. Ltd.
Hilti of Jordan Newport Trading Rabie Gate, cor. Rabie & Aimee Streets,
P.O. Box 6166 ZA - Fountainbleau - Randburg 2194
JOR - Amman P. O. Box. 1298 - Randburg 2125
Telex : (0493) 23556 Phone: (+ 27) 11 792 - 4926 / 7 / 8
Fax : (+ 9626) 655439 / 605346 Fax: (+ 27) 11 793 - 2127
Additional fax: (0027) 11 792 - 6613

KOREA
INTERMAX CORPORATION WEST AFRICA
10F Officetel World Sure Treasures Sarl
KRS - 65 - 1 Woonni - Dong Commerce General
Chongro - Ku, Seoul / Korea DY - B.P. 2276 Cotonou, Rep. of Benin
Phone: (+ 82) 2 747 - 2081 / 4 Telex: 0972 1121 Cabin
Fax: (+ 82) 2 747 - 2080 Fax: (+ 229) - 31- 38 - 09

3
Apparatenbouw Hogedruksmering
J. van der Gaag B. V.
Hoefweg 65 - 67, P. O. Box 22
NL - 2665 ZG Bleiswijk / Netherlands
Phone: (0031) 10 5214 722 / 5214 207
Telefax: (0031) 10 5213 696

General agent for :

INDONESIA NETH. ANTILLES

branch office : branch office:
Pt. Cipta Hydropower Abadi Technica Pan America
Jl. Tb. Angke Kompleks THi Block FF 1B/3 p/a Trans Caribbean
P. O. Box 923 GROGOL P.O. Box 4803
RI - Jakarta 11460 NA - Curacao
Phone: (+ 62) 21 5666735 / 5667968 Phone: (+ 599) 9 652557
(+ 62) 21 5667988 Fax: (+ 599) 9 652558
Fax: (+ 62) 21 5667981
sub-branch offices :
SINGAPORE
Kantor Cabang Ujung - Pandang
UD. Gading Tehnik branch office:
Jl. Pattimura No. 5
RI - Ujung - Pandang TOSHIO (S) PTE. LTD.,
Phone: (+ 62) 411 23307 / 310476 Cititech Industrial Building
Fax: (+ 62) 411 311132 629, Aljunied Road 08 - 13
SGP - 389839 Singapore 1438
and Phone: (+ 65) 7431383 / 7447378
Fax: (+ 65) 7433682
Kantor Cabang Padang
CV. Mutan Perak
JI. Pemuda No. 9 C
RI - Padang 25117
Phone: (+ 62) 751 23017 / 21981
and
Kantor Cabang Palembang
C:V. Arsikon
JI. Krakatau No. 491
RI - Palembang
Phone: (+ 62) 711 313303 / 313503
Fax: (+ 62) 711 313303
and
Kantor Cabang Tanjung - Pandan
JI. Brig. Jend Katamso No. 7
(Pasar Sayur)
RI - Tanjung Pandan - Belitung
Phone: 227

4
Questionnaire - Central Lubrication

Company : _____________________________________ Enquiry No. : ____________________________ Date : ____________

_______________________________________________ Quotation to be submitted by (date) : __________________________

_______________________________________________ Delivery time : _____________________________________________

_______________________________________________ Visited by : ________________________________________________

Contact person : ________________________________ Visit Report No. : ___________________________ of : ____________

Department : ___________________________________ Quotation No. : _____________________________________________

Telephone : ____________________________________ Processed by : ___________________________Date : ____________

Plant to be lubricated :
q New q Converted q Outside q Inside

Installed at : _______________________________________ Used at : _________________________________________________

No. of lubrication points : _________________________

See attached / enclosure / list / drawing : ______________________
of which movable : ______________________________
__________________________________________________________

q Oil Viscosity ________________ at _______oC q Grease Walk penetration __________ NLGI-class _______

Further type designation : ____________________________ Synthetic : ________________________________________________

Operating conditions :

min. ambient temperature _____________________ oC max. ambient temperature ________________________________ oC

max. temperature in the area of the lubricating system : ________________

q compressed air available
Operating voltage : _______________________ V _________ cycles

Compressed air supply pressure : _____________ bar Control voltage : _________________________ V _________ cycles

Special weather influences : ______________________ Solenoid valve voltage : ___________________ V _________ cycles

Desired or proposed lubricating system (if known) :

__________________________________________________________ possible alternatives : ____________________________

__________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________

Installation of the pumps in the system : __________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

max. distance between the pump and the furthest lubrication point : __________________________________________________

X 90 S 6 e / 1 391 500Hf
Pump (if known) : q Reserve pump
Type : _________________________________________ No. of outlets : __________________________________
Tank capacity : _______________________________ ltr. Direction of rotation : ____________________________
Gear ratio : _____________________________________

Tank filling : q ccw q cw q oscillating

q by hand q semi-automatic q fully automatic q lever for barrel pump barrel size : __________

Pump drive :

q by hand q by the machine to be lubricated q pneumatic q hydraulic q electric motor

q free shaft end rotating q chain q ratchet lever q V-belt

Shaft diameter _______________________ drive speed Operating pressure : _________________________ bar

Protection type : ________________________________ Special instructions : ____________________________

Control of the lubrication plant :

E.-control offered q yes q no

q fixed-cycle dependent q DELIMON - standard

q time-dependent q according to customer’s instructions
q freely programmable q see other enclosures

Monitoring the lubricating plant :

Tank capacity q min q max Electric warning :

q Ultimate pressure q potential-free (collective signal)

q Over-pressure q by lamps
q Distributor function q for signalling : ______________________________
q Individual lubrication points _______________________________________________

Explanation : __________________________________________________________________________________________________

Material specifications :

Pipes : ____________________________ Screw connection : ___________________________ Hoses : ______________________

Painting : ______________________________ Pipe clamps : _______________ Customer standard : ______________________

2
Designation Bearing or other Number Remark
lubrication point
Roller Slide Dimensions Speed fixed rotating connecting lubricant (eg. stroke for
bearing bearing min thread cm3/h mov. bearings)

3
 Sketch of system scale :

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de
Questionnaire - Oil Recirculation Systems

Messrs. : ______________________________________ Enquiry No. : ____________________________ dtd. : ____________

_______________________________________________ Quotation deadline : ________________________________________

_______________________________________________ Time of delivery for equipment : ______________________________

_______________________________________________ Erection date : _____________________________________________

Official : _______________________________________ Date of commissioning : _____________________________________

Department : ___________________________________ Official in charge : __________________________________________

Phone : ________________________________________ Date : ____________________________________________________

1. Equipment/Plant to be lubricated : _________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________
q new q existing q under construction
q Are design changes still possible ? q yes q no

Erection site : ______________________________________ Location : _________________________________________________

Delivery period : _____________________________________________

2. Lubrication points
Oil grade ___________________________________ viscosity ________________________ mm2/s at ____________________ oC

Operation temperature (oil entry temperature in feed line) _______________ oC Ambient temperature _______________________ oC

Number of lubrication points ___________________________ Start-up temperature ________________________ oC

Required oil consumption per point ______________________________________________________________________________

3. Brief description of equipment/plant : (add drawing/sketch, if possible)

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

X 90 S 7e / 1 391 500Hf
4. Selecting measuring devices :
q Flow meter q Flow meter c/w electric monitor q Progressive divider

5. Type of pump station :

q gear pump q screw spindle pump q stand-by pump q yes q no

Flow rate : __________________________________________ l/min Which pressure is desired/required : _______________ bar

Miscellaneous : _______________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6. Oil tank :
Contents capacity : _____l Oil recirculation : q automatic q manual

Electric heater : q yes q no

Heat-up period oC/Std. : _______________________________

q Electric level control q high q low level

Explanations ref. switch functions : _______________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

7. Oil cooler
Medium : q water q air

Oil cooling from : ___________ oC down to ______ oC

and/or heat dissipation rate (loss in capacity) in : ___________________ kcal/h, kw

Cooling water temperature : ________ oC Air temperature : __________ oC

q automatic temperature regulation required : ___________________________________________________________________

Additional remarks : ___________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

2
8. Monitoring devices for oil recirculation system :

q Flow controllers quantity ______________________

q Pressure monitors quantity ___________________
q max. pressure ______________________________
q min. pressure _______________________________

q contact-pressure gauge ______________________ q max. q min.

q Thermostatic control quantity _________________ q max. q min.

(bi-metal actuation temperature gauges)

Additional remarks : ___________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

9. Electrical control :

Specific custom-built requirements : ______________________________________________________________________________

mains supply voltage : __________________________ V

Control voltage : ____________ V Frequency : ______________ Hz. with/without neutral wire

Solenoid valve control voltage : __________________ V

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

10. Filter :

q duplex change-over filter

q simplex filter
q clog-up indicator/optical
q clog-up indicator/optical and electrical
q filtering mesh : (standard 0.025 mm) ___________
Additional remarks : ___________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11. Special specifications :

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________

3
 sketch of system scale :

DELIMON Vertriebsgesellschaft mbH · 40011 Düsseldorf, Postfach 10 20 52 · 40227 Düsseldorf, Arminstraße 15 · Telefon: 02 11 - 77 74 - 0 · Fax: 02 11 - 77 74 - 210
E-mail: info@delimon.de
Vertriebsbüro BEIERFELD · 08340 Beierfeld · Am Bockwald 4 · Telefon: 0 37 74 - 65 11 - 0 · Fax: 0 37 74 - 65 11 30 · E-mail: saxonia@abo.freiepresse.de